INDICATORS OF SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT:
GUIDELINES
AND METHODOLOGIES
PREFACE
The present publication represents the outcome of a work programme on indicators of sustainable development approved by the Commission on Sustainable Development at its Third Session in 1995. The successful completion of the work programme is the result of an intensive effort of collaboration between governments, international organizations, academic institutions, non-governmental organizations and individual experts aimed at developing a set of indicators for sustainable development for use at the national level. The thematic framework, guidelines, methodology sheets and indicators set out in this publication have thus benefited from this extensive network of cooperation and consensus building.
This has been an iterative process built on the work of many other organizations and entities that have been concerned with developing a set of indicators that could help us better understand the various dimensions of sustainable development and the complex interactions that takes place between these dimensions. This publication should be a seen as a starting point and flexible tool to assist those countries that may wish to develop their own national programmes for using indicators to measure progress towards nationally defined goals and objectives for sustainable development.
The purpose of this publication is to stimulate and support further work, testing and development of indicators, particularly by national governments. No set of indicators can be final and definitive, but must be developed and adjusted over time to fit country-specific conditions, priorities and capabilities. It is our hope that countries will take advantage of the useful information and practical experience represented by this publication to further advance the work on indicators of sustainable development by adding their own unique perspectives to what already has been learned. We look forward to including your experience in our database of information on the development and use of indicators of sustainable development.
On behalf of the United Nations, I would like to thank all of those organizations, agencies and individuals who have contributed their time and effort to make this publication possible.
JoAnne DiSano
Director
Division for Sustainable Development
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER
1: Introduction............................................................................................................ 1
CHAPTER
2: Assessing Progress Towards
Sustainable Development..................................... 3
A.
The CSD Work Programme
on Indicators of Sustainable Development ....................................... 4
B. Main
Phases and Approaches to Implementation ......................................................................... 4
CHAPTER 3: Guidelines for Developing a National Programme of Indicators of
Sustainable Development ....................................................................................................... 12
3.1
Organization............................................................................................................................. 13
3.2
Implementation......................................................................................................................... 14
3.3
Assessment and Evaluation....................................................................................................... 15
3.4
Reporting................................................................................................................................. 16
CHAPTER
4: CSD Core Indicator Framework......................................................................... 18
4.1
Adoption of a
Theme/Sub-theme Framework............................................................................ 21
4.2
Core Indicators ....................................................................................................................... 22
4.3
Theme Descriptions ................................................................................................................. 29
4.3.1 Equity......................................................................................................................... 29
4.3.2 Health........................................................................................................................ 31
4.3.3 Education................................................................................................................... 33
4.3.4 Housing...................................................................................................................... 35
4.3.5 Security...................................................................................................................... 36
4.3.6 Population.................................................................................................................. 37
4.3.7 Atmosphere................................................................................................................ 39
4.3.8 Land.......................................................................................................................... 41
4.3.9 Oceans, Seas and Coasts........................................................................................... 44
4.3.10 Freshwater................................................................................................................. 46
4.3.11 Biodiversity................................................................................................................ 47
4.3.12 Economic Structure.................................................................................................... 49
4.3.13 Consumption and Production Patterns......................................................................... 51
4.3.14 Institutional Framework.............................................................................................. 53
4.3.15 Institutional Capacity................................................................................................... 54
CHAPTER
5: Methodology Sheets............................................................................................ 56
Social
Percent of Population Living
Below Poverty Line.............................................................................. 57
Gini Index of Income
Inequality........................................................................................................ 62
Unemployment Rate........................................................................................................................ 66
Ratio of Average Female Wage
to Male Wage................................................................................. 71
Nutritional Status of Children
.......................................................................................................... 74
Mortality Rate Under 5 Years
Old................................................................................................... 77
Life Expectancy at Birth................................................................................................................... 82
Percent of Population with
Adequate Sewage Disposal Facilities....................................................... 86
Population with Access to
Safe Drinking Water................................................................................ 89
Percent of Population with
Access to Primary Health Care Facilities................................................. 92
Immunization Against
Infectious Childhood Diseases ........................................................................ 95
Contraceptive Prevalence
Rate........................................................................................................ 98
Children Reaching Grade 5 of
Primary Education........................................................................... 102
Adult Secondary Education
Achievement Level.............................................................................. 106
Adult Literacy Rate........................................................................................................................ 109
Floor Area Per Person................................................................................................................... 112
Number of Recorded Crimes
per 100,000 Population.................................................................... 115
Population Growth Rate................................................................................................................. 118
Population of Urban Formal
and Informal Settlements..................................................................... 121
Environmental
Emission of Greenhouse Gases....................................................................................................... 124
Consumption of Ozone
Depleting Substances................................................................................. 128
Ambient Concentration of Air
Pollutants in Urban Areas................................................................. 132
Arable and Permanent Crop
Land Areas........................................................................................ 136
Use of Fertilizers............................................................................................................................ 139
Use of
Agricultural Pesticides ........................................................................................................ 142
Forest Area as a
Percent of Land Area.......................................................................................... 145
Wood Harvesting
Intensity............................................................................................................. 149
Land Affected by
Desertification.................................................................................................... 153
Area of Urban Formal and Informal
Settlements............................................................................. 159
Algae Concentration in
Coastal Waters.......................................................................................... 162
Percent of Total Population
Living in Coastal Waters...................................................................... 167
Annual Catch by Major
Species..................................................................................................... 172
Annual Withdrawals of Ground
and Surface Water as a Percent of Total Renewable Water............ 175
Biochemical Oxygen Demand in Water Bodies............................................................................... 179
Concentration of
Faecal Coliform in Freshwater............................................................................. 183
Area of Selected
Key Ecosystems................................................................................................. 187
Protected Area as
a Percent of Total Area..................................................................................... 193
Abundance of
Selected Key Species.............................................................................................. 197
Economic
Gross Domestic
Product Per Capita............................................................................................... 204
Investment Share
in Gross Domestic Product................................................................................. 207
Balance of Trade
in Goods and Services ....................................................................................... 210
Debt to Gross
National Product Ratio............................................................................................ 213
Total Official
Development Assistance Given or Received as a Percentage of
Gross National Product............................................................................................................. 217
Intensity of Material
Use................................................................................................................ 220
Annual Energy
Consumption Per Capita......................................................................................... 223
Share of
Consumption of Renewable Energy Resources................................................................. 226
Energy Use Per
Unit of GDP (Energy Intensity).............................................................................. 229
Intensity of
Energy Use: Commercial/Service Sector....................................................................... 233
Intensity of
Energy Use: Manufacturing........................................................................................... 238
Intensity of
Energy Use: Residential Sector..................................................................................... 243
Intensity of
Energy Use: Transportation.......................................................................................... 248
Generation of
Industrial and Municipal Solid Waste........................................................................ 253
Generation of
Hazardous Wastes................................................................................................... 256
Generation of
Radioactive Wastes.................................................................................................. 261
Waste Recycling
and Reuse........................................................................................................... 264
Distance
Travelled per Capita by Mode of Transport..................................................................... 268
Institutional
National
Sustainable Development Strategy.................................................................................... 271
Implementation of Ratified Global Agreements................................................................................ 275
Number of
Internet Subscribers per 1000 Inhabitants..................................................................... 278
Main Telephone
Lines per 1000 Inhabitants................................................................................... 281
Expenditures on
Research and Development as a Percent of Gross Domestic Product..................... 284
Human and
Economic Loss due to Natural Disasters...................................................................... 287
REFERENCES........................................................................................................................... 292
Annex 1: International Goals, Targets, and Standards Related to Themes and
Sub-Themes
Of Indicators of Sustainable Development................................................................................... 300
Annex 2: Core Indicators
and the Driving Force-State-Response Framework............................. 302
Annex 3: National Testing Implementation Approaches................................................................ 304
|
Table 1: Testing Countries ……………………………………………………………………. 7 Table 2: DSR Framework for Sustainable Development Indicators
……..…………………..20 Table 3: Key Themes Suggested by CSD Testing Countries Priorities
………………..…….22 Table 4: CSD Theme Indicator Framework ……………………………………………….....24 Table 5: Selection of CSD Indicators by Testing Countries
..………………………………..26 |
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
______________________________________________________________________________
Indicators
can provide crucial guidance for decision-making in a variety of ways. They can translate physical and social
science knowledge into manageable units of information that can facilitate the
decision-making process. They can help
to measure and calibrate progress towards sustainable development goals. They can provide an early warning, sounding
the alarm in time to prevent economic, social and environmental damage. They
are also important tools to communicate ideas, thoughts and values because as
one authority said, “We measure what we value, and value what we measure.”
The 1992 Earth Summit recognized the important role that indicators can play in helping countries to make informed decisions concerning sustainable development. This recognition is articulated in Chapter 40 of Agenda 21 which calls on countries at the national level, as well as international, governmental and non-governmental organizations to develop and identify indicators of sustainable development that can provide a solid basis for decision-making at all levels. Moreover, Agenda 21 specifically calls for the harmonization of efforts to develop sustainable development indicators at the national, regional and global levels, including the incorporation of a suitable set of these indicators in common, regularly updated and widely accessible reports and databases.
In
response to this call, the Commission on Sustainable
Development approved in 1995, the Programme of Work on Indicators of
Sustainable Development and called upon the organizations of the UN system,
intergovernmental and non-governmental organizations with the coordination of
its Secretariat to implement the key elements of the work programme.
The main objective of the CSD Work Programme was to make indicators of sustainable development accessible to decision-makers at the national level, by defining them, elucidating their methodologies and providing training and other capacity building activities. At the same time, it was foreseen that indicators as used in national policies could be used in the national reports to the Commission and other intergovernmental bodies.
The
Nineteenth Special Session of the General Assembly held in 1997 for the five
year review of UNCED affirmed the importance of the work programme on
indicators of sustainable development (as contained in para. 111 and 133.b of
the Programme for the Further Implementation of Agenda 21) in coming up with a
practical and agreed set of indicators that are suited to country-specific
conditions and can be used in monitoring progress towards sustainable
development at the national level.
This
report has been prepared as the culmination of the CSD Work Programme on
Indicators of Sustainable Development (1995-2000). It provides a detailed
description of key sustainable development themes and sub-themes and the CSD
approach to the development of indicators of sustainable development for use in
decision-making processes at the national level. This report also finalizes the presentation of the proposed
framework and the core set of
indicators that will be made available to member countries to assist them in
their efforts to measure progress toward sustainable development.
ASSESSING PROGRESS TOWARDS
SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT
CHAPTER 2: ASSESSING PROGRESS
TOWARDS SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT
The
CSD work programme comprised the following key elements:
(a)
Enhancement of information exchange among all interested actors on
research, methodological and practical
activities associated with indicators of sustainable development, including the
establishment of a freely accessible database (1995-continuing);
(b)
Development of methodology sheets, which would describe for each of the
indicators its policy relevance, underlying methodology, data availability
assessment and sources, to be made available to Governments (1995-1996);
(c) Training and capacity building at the regional and national levels in the use of the indicators for monitoring progress towards sustainable development (1995-1999);
(d)
Testing of an appropriate combination of indicators and monitoring of
experiences in a few countries to gain experience, assess applicability and
further develop the indicators for sustainable development (1996-1999);
(e) Evaluation of the indicators and adjustment as
necessary (2000);
(f)
Identification and assessment of linkages among the economic, social,
institutional and environmental elements of sustainable development to further
facilitate decision-making at all levels (2000);
(g)
Development of highly aggregated indicators, involving experts from the areas
of economics, the social sciences and
the physical sciences and policy makers as well as incorporating
non-governmental organization and indigenous views (2000).
B. Main Phases And Approaches To Implementation
Phase 1 (May 1995-August 1996)
(a) Development of the Indicator
Methodology Sheets
One of the significant tasks of the first phase was the preparation of the methodology sheets for each indicator. Building on existing work, a cooperative, consultative, and collaborative approach was used to produce the methodology sheets. More than thirty organizations of the United Nations system, other intergovernmental, non-governmental and major group organizations supported this work, assuming lead roles in the drafting of methodology sheets appropriate to their mandate and experience.
An
Expert Group, consisting of forty-five (45) members from non-governmental
organizations and United Nations agencies, guided the overall process of
developing the methodology sheets. In addition, approximately 100 individuals
with indicator experience from international and national agencies, and
non-governmental organizations participated in the process by providing advice
and comments and contributing their ideas, information and expertise.
In
February 1996, an international Expert Workshop on Methodologies for Indicators
of Sustainable Development was held in Glen Cove, New York to review the
preliminary methodology sheets. Several workshops sponsored by national
governments were also held to further discuss and refine the draft methodology
sheets.
The collection of methodology sheets was published by the United Nations in August 1996 under the title of “Indicators of Sustainable Development: Framework and Methodologies”. This document, commonly referred to as the ‘blue book’, was distributed to all governments with the invitation to use and test the indicators, and to provide feedback on the results. The goal was to have a more accepted and definitive set of sustainable development indicators by the year 2001.
(b) Content of the Methodology Sheets
The
methodology sheets contain, inter alia, the following information:
·
Basic information on
the indicator, including its definition and unit of measurement. In addition, the relevant Agenda 21 chapter
and the type of indicator are listed to locate the indicator in the DSR
framework;
· Purpose and usefulness of the indicator for sustainable development decision-making (i.e., policy relevance); international targets where these are available; and the relevant international conventions, if the indicator is primarily of global significance;
·
Conceptual
underpinnings and methodologies associated with the indicator, including the
underlying definitions, measurement methods, and a summary of its limitations
and alternative definitions;
·
Data availability to
illustrate the importance of regular data collection and updating to support
systematic reporting;
·
Listing of the
agency(ies) (lead and cooperating) involved in the preparation of the
methodology sheets; and
·
Other information
(e.g., contact points, other references and readings).
A conscious effort has been made to use a consistent format to frame the contents of the methodology sheets. The methodology sheets were designed to assist countries with the task of developing the priority indicators that are considered most relevant in the context of their sustainable development policies and programs. The methodology sheets were to form a base and starting point for the process of indicator development and were understood to be open for enhancement, refinement, amendment, and change.
Phase 2 (May 1996-January 1998)
(b) Training and Capacity-Building
To address the need for building the necessary
capacity and knowledge on the use of indicators, a series of briefing and
training workshops at the regional level was initiated from November 1996
through June 1997. These were organized by the CSD Secretariat with the support
and cooperation of the Economic and Social Commission for Asia and the Pacific
(ESCAP) and the Government of the Netherlands for Asia and the Pacific; the Government of Costa Rica for Latin
America and the Caribbean; and by the Government of Ghana for the Africa
region. The Africa regional workshop was co-sponsored by UNDP’s Capacity 21
Programme.
The main objective of all the workshops was to
provide an introduction and training in the use of indicators as tools
for national decision-making and to explore related methodologies for indicator
development. Special attention was given to identifying national priorities and
relating them to the process of indicator identification and selection.
Several countries followed up on the regional workshops with national training workshops. In the Asian
and Pacific region, ESCAP provided seed money for implementation of national
training workshops, which were convened in China, the Maldives, Pakistan and
the Philippines.
(b) National Testing
At
the Fourth Session of the CSD in 1996, the Commission encouraged Governments to
pilot test, utilize and experiment with the proposed initial set of indicators
and related methodologies over a 2-3 year period. The purpose of the national
testing was to gain experience with the use of indicators, to assess their
applicability according to national goals and priorities of sustainable
development, and to propose changes to the set and its organizational
framework.
The
national testing programme was launched in November 1996, on the occasion of
the International Workshop on Indicators of Sustainable Development held in
Ghent, Belgium and hosted by the Governments of Belgium and Costa Rica. The countries attending the meeting reviewed
and endorsed the guidelines for national testing. The guidelines essentially provided suggested testing procedures,
including modalities for its organization, implementation options, assessment
and evaluation methods, institutional support and capacity building, and
reporting requirements.
Twenty-two
(22) countries covering all regions of the world participated, on a voluntary
basis, in the testing process. By
regions, the testing countries were:
Table 1: Testing Countries
|
Regions |
Countries |
|
Africa: |
Ghana, Kenya, Morocco, South Africa, Tunisia |
|
Asia and the Pacific: |
China, Maldives, Pakistan, Philippines |
|
Europe: |
Austria, Belgium, Czech Republic, Finland, France,
Germany, United Kingdom
|
|
Americas and the Caribbean: |
Barbados, Bolivia, Brazil, Costa Rica, Mexico,
Venezuela |
In
addition to the official testing countries, a number of countries (Canada,
Nigeria, Switzerland, and the United States, among others) were affiliated with
the process through voluntary sharing of information, participation in meetings
and other forms of exchange of expertise.
The Statistical Office of the European Communities (Eurostat) prepared a
test compilation of 54 CSD indicators drawing on statistical data existing within
the European Community. This pilot study was produced as an official
publication of the European Communities in 1997. Eurostat provided invaluable technical and substantive support
throughout the CSD Work Programme and latest produced a publication containing
the CSD indicators for the European level[1].
Countries
were requested to provide periodic reports on the testing phase to the DSD for
analysis and for circulation to members of the Expert Group and testing
countries. A format for reporting on
the progress of national testing was issued in 1997 to facilitate the
submission of consistent and detailed information that would allow for a final
revision of the indicators and related methodologies. The reports of all the testing countries can be found on the
Secretariat web site at: http://www.un.org/esa/sustdev/isd.htm.
Most
of the testing countries adopted different approaches to the testing exercise,
ranging from plain evaluation of data availability for all or a few selected
indicators to embarking on the whole
process of developing their own independent set of national indicators while
using the CSD indicators as a point of reference. Nevertheless, the majority of the countries aligned their
processes with the CSD Testing Guidelines while others integrated the
guidelines into their own unique design.
All
the testing countries employed participatory implementation strategies. This is evident in the respective
institutional arrangements chosen by countries as the coordinating mechanism
for the testing process. The majority of the countries adopted highly
integrated multi-stakeholder strategies involving government ministries, NGOs,
academia and relevant business organizations (as in the case of the
Philippines, Ghana, Kenya, South Africa,
Maldives, United Kingdom) while others confined the process within government
ministries (as in the case of China, Austria, Belgium, Brazil).
Within these national coordinating bodies, most of the countries also created working groups, expert teams and committees that focused on the indicator work. The formation of an Indicator network (for instance, in South Africa and Finland) was also found useful in fostering the integration of ministries and research institutions.
Several
countries also experimented with “twinning” where two or more countries agreed
to either engage in mutual exchange of information and experience in indicator
development (e.g., South Africa and Finland) or where one country provided
significant technical and financial support to another participating country
(France and Tunisia). These
arrangements provided an excellent platform for information exchange and
sharing of expertise creating win-win situations with the involved countries
achieving a wider knowledge base.
Midway through the implementation of the testing programme, a global meeting of testing countries was hosted by the government of the Czech Republic in Prague in January 1998. The meeting took stock of the progress of implementation and discussed ways to improve the process and ultimately the results of the programme.
Phase 3 (January 1999 - December
2000) – Lessons Learned
The
testing phase was officially concluded in December 1999 with the International
Workshop on CSD Indicators of Sustainable Development, hosted by the Government
of Barbados, and supported by the Government of Germany and DSD. This meeting provided the forum for the
assessment of the CSD indicators of sustainable development, their
applicability and usefulness in supporting national decision-making; and served
as a venue for exchange of information at the national, regional and global
level on sustainability indicators and their practical use.
All
relevant information on the testing programme including country reports was
compiled and organized into a database (CSD ISD Database). This database served as an analytical tool
for reviewing testing results, the indicator framework and the working list of
indicators.
Many
countries pointed out that the testing process was, in general, a successful
exercise. The highly participatory approach adopted by countries in the testing
exercise not only heightened awareness of the value and importance of
indicators but also increased levels of understanding on sustainable
development issues. Moreover, the
testing has reportedly inspired the launching of other indicator initiatives
and has tied many players together.
In many cases, making use of existing structures,
such as national committees or councils for sustainable development was seen as
useful in organizing the national coordinating mechanism. On the other hand, in some countries, the
testing of indicators acted as a positive catalyst in the establishment of new
mechanisms for coordinating both the indicators programmes and the formulation
of sustainable development strategies and has demonstrated the potential of
collaboration and cooperation in advancing the goals of sustainable
development.
The
involvement of major groups and stakeholders had been found effective in
achieving the full integration of user perspectives in the identification of
national sustainable development priorities and corresponding indicators. Many developing countries, NGOs, the private
sector and other major groups have already been involved in the national
coordinating committees for environment and sustainable development, and their
participation gave impetus to the national testing process.
It was also noted that when high-level policymakers
have been involved and are
genuinely committed to sustainable development, the work on indicators
progressed more rapidly.
Notwithstanding the aforementioned successes, several
institutional constraints affected the implementation of the testing, such as,
limitations on the availability of financial and human resources; difficulty in
mobilizing the relevant experts and stakeholders, lack of coordination between
statistical agencies and the indicator focal point, low level of awareness
among stakeholders, low level of commitment on the part of participating
institutions, competing work demands and government leadership transitions that
resulted in discontinuities in the implementation of the indicator
process. This called for beefing up
capacity-building programs in the form of human resource and organizational
development. A strong human resource
base is central to the multi-stakeholder process as are properly coordinated
and highly committed institutional mechanisms.
Time as well as financial constraints also affected the
testing undertaken in some countries.
In view of the need to go by the rather strict timetables of the testing
process, adjustments had to be made on the degree and level of consultations.
To be more successful, it was also felt that the indicator programme should be viewed and treated as a
more permanent programme that is closely linked with national reporting to the
CSD and integrated with the development of national policy.
(b) The Working List of Indicators
Testing
results showed that sustainable development indicators clearly have potential
for assisting in national decision-making.
Countries reported to have used or planned to use the indicators to:
·
bring important issues
to the political agenda;
·
help to identify main
trends in priority sectors;
·
facilitate reporting
on the state of sustainable development to decision-makers and the general
public, both domestic and international;
·
promote national
dialogue on sustainable development;
·
help to assess the
fulfillment of governmental goals and targets, and in the revision of these
goals and targets;
·
facilitate the
preparation and monitoring of plans;
·
help to assess the
performance of both policies and actions when implementing the plans;
·
state the concept of
sustainable development in practical terms; and
· focus the national and sectoral programmes and state budgets towards sustainability.
As can be expected, not all of the indicators in the working list were found relevant in the context of a
testing country. In selecting the
applicable indicators, most countries, engaged in a process of prioritising the
indicators in relation to national goals using relevant criteria such as: availability and accessibility of data,
usefulness and policy relevance. In
general, however, the testing countries found the working list to be a good
starting point for identifying options from which they could choose national
indicators.
While testing had been carried out at the national level, it was nonetheless perceived to have an international context taking into account the mandate of CSD and the structure and content of the methodology sheets which describe commonly accepted methodologies, internationally harmonized terminology and internationally compatible classification systems. The primary goal of the indicator programme, however, is to develop a means to assist national decision-making. On the other hand, it is considered that a good indicator system should be able to reflect the specific issues and conditions of a country or a region but should nevertheless be harmonized internationally to the extent possible.
Some
countries reflected in their reports the problem of establishing the link
between national strategies and the indicators. This was particularly true for countries that had commenced their
indicator programmes in the absence of an integrated sustainable development
strategy. It is hoped that this will
change as more countries develop national sustainability plans and the use of
indicators of sustainable development gains momentum as a national planning
tool.
Testing countries, however, also felt that improvements
could be made both regarding the indicators and the methodology sheets. While the methodology sheets for the
indicators were found particularly useful in drawing attention to improving the
availability of data for monitoring the implementation of Agenda 21, a call was
made for establishing more concrete and clearly defined concepts for the
indicators.
Testing
countries proposed to develop indicators to cover areas that had not been
addressed in the testing such as: reef conservation and the health of reef
ecosystems and specific coastal issues; energy; biotechnology; trade and
environment; safeguarding of cultural
heritage; social and ethical values; human resource development;
under-employment; expatriate labour force; natural resource accounting; and
capacity-building.
Most countries, nonetheless, shared the view that the final
list of indicators should be short, focused, pragmatic and flexible so that it
could be adapted to country-specific conditions.
(c) Revising the Framework and Indicator List
Guided by the reports from the testing countries and continuing
expert discussions on the indicators and the framework, the DSD began, in early
1999, the process of defining the appropriate measures to take in the light of
the various concerns raised during the implementation of the work
programme.
At its fifth meeting in April 1999, the Expert Group on Indicators of Sustainable Development
discussed midstream actions to prepare for the conclusion of the work
programme. The Group addressed the
following issues: inclusion of new
areas identified as priorities by the testing countries; deletion of issues
less reported on by countries; possible revision of the DSR framework;
selection of criteria for the core set of indicators and furthering the testing
in selected countries.
While the DSR approach proved useful in organizing the indicators and the testing
process as well, the Expert group felt that there was need to refocus the
indicator framework to emphasize policy issues or main themes as recommended by
a number of countries. It was felt that
re-designing the indicator framework in this manner would make the value of
indicator use more obvious and thereby help stimulate increased Government and
civil society involvement in the use and testing of indicators. Following this resolution, a study was
undertaken to design a theme-based indicator approach.
The resulting organization presents the indicators
under four major dimensions, further broken down into themes and
sub-themes. The determination of the
major areas, themes and sub-themes was based on a broad range of information,
the major ones of which were the reports of the testing countries and
international initiatives that have measured or conceptualised
sustainability. The testing reports
were analysed to generate the following information: priorities that each country stated in order to achieve
sustainable development, CSD indicators tested, considering why they tested
them and what problems they had in the process, new indicators proposed and the
criteria used by each country in the indicator selection. This is described in
greater detail in Section III below.
Regarding other major international initiatives on indicator
development, every effort was made to work towards convergence between the CSD
effort and those of other organizations and agencies. Information was therefore
analysed taking into account the
goals identified by each international initiative and the indicators selected
to measure progress towards those goals.
(d)
Linkages and Aggregation
The
Secretariat has initiated work on the linkages and aggregation of sustainable
development indicators. An overview of the major intitiatives in this area was
produced as a Background Paper for the Ninth Session of the CSD in April 2001[2].
GUIDELINES
FOR DEVELOPING A NATIONAL PROGRAMME OF INDICATORS OF SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT
CHAPTER 3: GUIDELINES FOR DEVELOPING A NATIONAL PROGRAMME OF INDICATORS OF SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT
____________________________________________________________________________
The
following guidance is intended to help countries in setting up their own
national indicator programmes as a basis for monitoring the achievement of key
national goals and objectives for sustainable development, using the framework
and methodologies provided herein. These guidelines were used and enhanced by
the 22 countries that volunteered to participate in the indicator pilot testing
phase over a three-year period. To learn more of how countries have interpreted
the guidelines as a starting point for national programmes please refer to
Annex 3.
Procedures for the Development,
Testing and Use of Indicators
The
procedures and processes to be followed in developing, testing and using
indicators of sustainable development will vary from country to country,
depending on country specific conditions, national priorities and objectives,
available infrastructure, expertise and the availability of data and other
information for decision-making.
Because the process requires the allocation of human and financial
resources, a pragmatic, cost-effective approach is essential.
The following
procedural issues are addressed: Organization; Implementation; Assessment and
Evaluation; Institutional Support and
Capacity Building; and Reporting.
3.1 Organization
The
underlying theme of sustainable development is the integration of economic,
social environmental issues in decision and policy making at all levels. This integration implies the involvement of
virtually all traditional sectors of economic and government activity, such as
economic planning, agriculture, health, energy, water, natural resources,
industry, education and the environment, and so forth, according to the
principal ministries of government.
The assumption of integration is reflected in the indicators of
sustainable development, which contain social, economic, environmental and
institutional indicators, and should be taken up in mechanisms for
institutional integration, such as national sustainable development councils,
committees, and task forces as well as national strategies for sustainable
development. This fundamental approach
to sustainable development should be kept in mind in developing, testing and
using indicators.
In
many countries, responsibility for monitoring the achievement of national goals
and objectives, including data collection, compilation and analysis of
information resides in a number of institutions, including national statistical
offices, sectoral ministries and national commissions for sustainable
development. Responsibility may also be
shared by governmental and non-governmental actors, and it may be supported by
national, bilateral and international programmes and activities.
A
coordination mechanism for the development of a national programme on
indicators may be needed to facilitate networking amongst interested
partners. The national coordinating
mechanism could take a variety of forms depending on each countries’ needs
and requirements. It could be set up as a Task Force, Working Group or a
Committee, among other possibilities.
It should, however, build upon and utilize already existing institutional
arrangements and experience and should be flexible and transparent making use
of the widest possible consultation and participation among all stakeholders
involved. It should therefore involve
among others, those ministries with programmes relevant to Agenda 21 (for
example, Ministries of Planning, Health, Agriculture, Industry, Social
Development and the Environment, among others) as well as those agencies
charged with data collection, compilation and analysis in the country.
The
national coordinating mechanism might usefully include officials from
the national delegation to the UN Commission on Sustainable Development, when
possible, or representatives of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs. Members of the scientific community could be
included to provide technical support and expertise and linkage with other
international or national programmes related to indicators of sustainable
development.
Representation
from national-level information activities sponsored by UN system
organizations, such as the United Nations Development Programme, the Food and
Agriculture Organization of the United Nations, the World Health Organization,
the United Nations Environment Programme, and the UN Centre for Human
Settlements (HABITAT), could also be included.
For
countries that cooperate or “twin” with another country in developing
indicators, it might also be useful to establish a bilateral committee, either
as a subsidiary of the national coordinating mechanism or as a related
entity. Twinning arrangements could include
a broad exchange of views, learning from each other and supporting each other
in setting up, starting and implementing the monitoring process.
Each
national coordinating mechanism may wish to appoint a National Focal
Point who would serve as the point of contact and liaison between members
of the national coordinating mechanism. The Focal Point will be part of
the national coordinating mechanism and serve to facilitate cooperation and
communication among all participants.
The focal point should be someone who can marshall the respect and
commitment of the various cooperating ministries.
UN
System organizations with indicator-related expertise at the country level
could also be enlisted to assist the work of the national coordinating body.
3.2. Implementation
Before
beginning implementation of the development phase, the national coordinating
mechanism may, as a first step, wish to determine the current status of
indicator use in the country. This
includes, for example:
§
determining which indicators are
already being used within the country, by whom they are used, for what purposes
and the degree of parallels with the CSD approach; and
§
reviewing data already being
collected for indicators or other uses, by whom, where and its availability.
An
important step in the development process is to make clear the relationship
between national priorities and strategies and the indicators to be selected
for testing. The initial stages of
implementation might then include the following:
§
specifying a number of selected
priority issues identified in the national strategy and selecting indicators
from the CSD list that correspond to those priorities, and selecting
country-specific indicators not identified in the CSD list, as needed;
§
matching the Apriority@ indicators selected with the list of
indicators already in use in the country;
§
assessing data availability for
those Apriority@ indicators for which data are
not already being collected;
§
establishing necessary
arrangements to collect the missing data, where possible, which may
include modifying current data compilation arrangements where necessary;
§
making an initial evaluation of
any training and other capacity-building that may be needed to collect that
data and to perform other functions required by the testing process;
§
collecting and/or compiling data
needed for the indicators selected; and
§
developing a strategy for
dissemination of indicator information to stakeholders (e.g., via annual
reporting, headline indicators, news letters or bulletins).
3.3. Assessment and Evaluation
Assessment
is a continuous process and should take place throughout the development phase
and include members from ministries, experts, the scientific community and
other sectors of civil society, as appropriate. It should focus, inter alia, on the technical,
decision-making and institutional/capacity building issues outlined below:
Technical Issues: - the usefulness of the methodology
sheets for developing the indicators;
-
the availability of data for the indicators and the source,
continuity, delivery and reliability of that data;
-
the data product; that is, the medium (e.g., print or electronic;
short summaries, reports, or comprehensive publications) through
which the analytical information is
conveyed to the decision-makers; and
-
planning for the short, medium – and long term data development.
Decision-Making
Issues: - the usefulness of the indicators for national
decision-makers;
- the analysis of the data
into concise, policy-relevant information; and
-
the use to which the decision-maker puts the information.
Institutional Support and
Capacity-Building Issues: - the need for training;
-
the need for institutional support for data collection and analysis;
-
other capacity-building needs for the development of a national indicator
programme; and
-
an evaluation of the twinning process, where relevant, and of other
international and bilateral cooperation of relevance to indicators of
sustainable development.
3.4. Reporting
The
national coordinating mechanism and the Focal Point may wish to establish a
government web site or mechanism for regular reporting on progress during
various phases of the indicator development work. This would provide a ready
means of communicating results and obtaining feedback from the various
participants. Regular meetings should also be held by the coordinating body
during the course of its work. Results,
difficulties and problems may also be reported to the CSD Secretariat in terms
of any advice or support that the Secretariat may be able to provide.
At
the end of the development phase, a final, comprehensive evaluation of the
process may be needed in order to make further adjustments to the national
indicators and methodology sheets. The CSD Secretariat would welcome such
reports as a means of further assessing changes and modifications that may be
required in the programme. The
evaluation report could contain such items as:
A. Introduction
1. Background and objectives
2. Identification of the users and
relevance to national decision-making
3. Institutional, organizational and
resource arrangements for indicator development
4. Experience with twinning, as applicable
B. Identification and selection of the
indicators
Description
of the process through which the indicators were chosen, and the criteria for
selection, including reference to:
1. National strategies, targets and
priorities
2. Existing indicators and indicator
programmes
3. Data availability
4. Other parameters
C.
Usefulness of the indicators
1. Usefulness of the methodology sheets
2. Relevance of the data product
3. Development of linkages among the
indicators, of national indicator frameworks and of aggregated indicators
4. Comments and suggestions on changes and
improvements
D. Challenges
1. Problems encountered in data
availability, reliability and delivery
2. Strengthening and training of human
resources
3. Other capacity-building needs
4. Other
E. Recommendations
CSD CORE INDICATOR FRAMEWORK
CHAPTER 4: CSD CORE INDICATOR FRAMEWORK
A
framework for organizing the selection and development of indicators is
essential. Nevertheless, it must be recognized that any framework, by itself,
is an imperfect tool for organizing and expressing the complexities and
interrelationships encompassed by sustainable development. Ultimately, the choice of a framework and a
core set of indicators must meet the needs and priorities of users, in this
case national experts, civil society groups and decision-makers responsible for
the development and use of indicators to monitor progress towards sustainable
development. It should be stressed that any country wishing to use indicators,
in any systematic way, must develop its own programme drawing on the resources
currently available. The CSD framework and core set of indicators outlined in
this report provide a good starting point for such a national programme.
The
framework employed in the CSD work programme to guide the selection of
sustainable development indicators has evolved from a driving
force-state-response approach to one focusing on themes and sub-themes of
sustainable development. This change in organizational framework has been
prompted by the experience of countries that assisted CSD in testing and
developing indicators of sustainable development. An expert group advising CSD,
as well as the testing countries themselves, recommended the adoption of a
theme approach. What follows is a brief history of this evolution and the
rationale for the change to achieve a small core set of sustainable development
indicators useful for decision-makers.
The
early indicator work under CSD organized the chapters of Agenda 21 under the
four primary dimensions of sustainable development—social, economic,
environmental, and institutional.[3]
Within these categories, indicators were classified according to their driving
force, state, and response characteristics; adopting a conceptual approach
widely used for environmental indicator development. Table 2 illustrates the
essence of this framework. The term driving force represents human activities,
processes, and patterns that impact on sustainable development either
positively or negatively. State indicators provide a reading on the condition
of sustainable development, while response indicators represent societal
actions aimed at moving towards sustainable development. This organizational
framework was an important starting point for the identification and selection
of indicators, and was used to present a preliminary list of sustainable
development indicators in the United Nations publication Indicators of
Sustainable Development: Framework and Methodologies.[4]
SD Dimension |
Chapter
of Agenda 21 |
Driving
Force Indicators |
State
Indicators |
Response Indicators |
|
Social |
|
|
|
|
Economic
|
|
|
|
|
Environmental
|
|
|
|
|
Institutional
|
|
|
|
|
Using this framework, methodology sheets for 134 indicators were developed by UN lead agencies and others as a preliminary working list for testing at the national level. Between 1996 and 1999, 22 countries from all regions of the world[5] were engaged in the testing process on a voluntary basis to gain experience with the selection and development of sustainable development indicators and to assess their application and suitability to assist decision-making at the national level. The testing enabled countries to evaluate the appropriateness of the driving force-state-response framework; use alternative and supplementary indicators appropriate for national circumstances; and suggest additional indicators related to national priorities. In 1999, the testing results were reported to CSD at its Seventh Session and assessed at an International Workshop held in Barbados.[6]
Overall,
testing countries reacted favourably to the testing experience especially from
a capacity building perspective. However, countries made various comments and
suggestions related to the framework, the selection of indicators, and the
indicator methodology sheets. Some countries concluded that the driving
force-state-response framework, although suitable in an environmental context,
was not as appropriate for the social, economic, and institutional dimensions
of sustainable development. Furthermore, gaps in the framework where
appropriate indicators were unavailable hindered the selection of national
indicator sets. This is particularly apparent with respect to response
indicators. A further general reaction was that the working list of indicators
was too long, which made it difficult to test and develop all indicators in a
national context.
4.1. Adoption of a Theme/Sub-theme Framework
With the background of the national testing experience and the overall orientation to
decision-making needs, the Expert Group on Indicators of Sustainable
Development recommended that the indicator framework be re-focused to emphasize
policy issues or main themes related to sustainable development.[7] To meet this recommendation, the framework
has been revised and re-structured in an iterative and inclusive way through a
consultant’s study,[8] the Barbados
Workshop[9],
and a consultative group of experts.[10]
In essence, the rationale
for the theme framework is to better
assist national policy decision-making and performance measurement. More
specifically, the following factors guided the development of the revised
framework:
·
country recommendations;
·
the inclusion of common priority issues relevant to
assessing sustainable development progress;
·
the desire for comprehensiveness and balance across the
sustainable development spectrum, as reflected in Agenda 21; and
·
limiting the number of indicators to achieve a core set.
The theme framework has been
developed to address the following
considerations: future risks; correlation between themes; sustainability goals;
and basic societal needs.[11] In addressing future risks, the framework
becomes a proactive tool to assist decision-making especially where
quantitative thresholds are known. Such
sustainable development challenges, are reflected in many global, regional, and
national assessments, such as UNEP’s GEO-2000 report.[12] A successful framework should reflect the
connections between dimensions, themes, and sub-themes. It should implicitly reflect the goals of
sustainable development to advance social and institutional development, to
maintain ecological integrity, and to ensure economic prosperity. Such goals echo basic human needs related to
food, water, shelter, security, health, education, and good governance. The international community has established
more specific benchmarks or targets for many of the themes and sub-themes. These reference levels are summarized in
Annex 1.
Each stage in the evolution
of the theme framework carefully
considered testing country priorities and experiences. A summary of these priorities, grouped
according to the primary dimensions of sustainable development, is provided in
Table 3. It should be noted that not all of these priorities are clearly
reflected in the chapter structure of Agenda 21. Such priorities include, for
example, significant sustainability elements such as crime, transportation, and
energy. Furthermore, it is clear that
the framework cannot totally capture all the themes or complexities of
sustainable development. Users should be aware that elements such as mining,
tourism, groundwater quality, and biotechnology, for example, are not
specifically represented in the framework.[13] For some of these areas, the primary
difficulty lies in the absence of suitable and meaningful indicators, supported
by well-tested and accepted methodologies for application at the national
level. In other cases, there was a
practical desire to limit the total number of indicators in the core set in
order to be able to provide a synoptic overview of sustainable development
progress at the national level.
|
Social |
Environmental |
|
Education |
Freshwater/groundwater |
|
Employment |
Agriculture/secure
food supply |
|
Health/water
supply/sanitation |
Urban |
|
Housing |
Coastal
Zone |
|
Welfare
and quality of life |
Marine
environment/coral reef protection |
|
Cultural
heritage |
Fisheries |
|
Poverty/Income
distribution |
Biodiversity/biotechnology |
|
Crime |
Sustainable
forest management |
|
Population
|
Air
pollution and ozone depletion |
|
Social
and ethical values |
Global
climate change/sea level rise |
|
Role
of women |
Sustainable
use of natural resources |
|
Access
to land and resources |
Sustainable
tourism |
|
Community
structure |
Restricted
carrying capacity |
|
Equity/social
exclusion |
Land
use change |
|
Economic |
Institutional |
|
Economic
dependency/Indebtedness/ODA |
Integrated
decision-making |
|
Energy |
Capacity
building |
|
Consumption
and production patterns |
Science
and technology |
|
Waste
management |
Public
awareness and information |
|
Transportation |
International
conventions and cooperation |
|
Mining |
Governance/role
of civic society |
|
Economic
structure and development |
Institutional
and legislative frameworks |
|
Trade |
Disaster
preparedness |
|
Productivity |
Public
participation |
As a result of this
iterative process, a final
framework of 15 themes and 38 sub-themes has been developed to guide national
indicator development beyond the year 2001.
It covers issues generally common to all regions and countries of the
world. It should be noted that the
organization of themes and sub-themes within the four dimensions of sustainable
development represents a ‘best-fit’ to guide the selection of indicators. This does not mean that issues should be
considered exclusively within only one dimension. The social sub-theme of poverty, for example, has obvious and
significant economic, environmental, and institutional linkages. The framework, together with the core set of
sustainable development indicators, is summarized in Table 4 below. It is used to structure the methodology
sheets for the core set of indicators contained in chapter 5.
For the full implementation
of the CSD Indicator Programme and
to assist countries to adopt and use the revised framework based on themes, it
is important to note similarities and differences with respect to the driving
force-state-response framework used during the testing phase. In the theme approach:
Table 4: CSD Theme Indicator
Framework
SOCIAL
|
||||
Theme
|
Sub-theme
|
Indicator
|
||
|
Equity
|
Poverty
(3) |
Percent
of Population Living below Poverty Line |
||
|
Gini
Index of Income Inequality |
||||
|
Unemployment
Rate |
||||
|
Gender
Equality (24) |
Ratio
of Average Female Wage to Male Wage |
|||
|
Health
(6) |
Nutritional
Status |
Nutritional
Status of Children |
||
|
Mortality |
Mortality
Rate Under 5 Years Old |
|||
|
Life
Expectancy at Birth |
||||
|
Sanitation |
Percent of Population with Adequate Sewage
Disposal Facilities |
|||
|
Drinking
Water |
Population
with Access to Safe Drinking Water |
|||
|
Healthcare
Delivery |
Percent of Population with Access to Primary
Health Care Facilities |
|||
|
Immunization
Against Infectious Childhood Diseases |
||||
|
Contraceptive
Prevalence Rate |
||||
|
Education (36) |
Education
Level |
Children
Reaching Grade 5 of Primary Education |
||
|
Adult
Secondary Education Achievement Level |
||||
|
Literacy |
Adult
Literacy Rate |
|||
|
Housing
(7) |
Living
Conditions |
Floor
Area per Person |
||
|
Security |
Crime
(36, 24) |
Number
of Recorded Crimes per 100,000 Population |
||
|
Population
(5) |
Population
Change |
Population
Growth Rate |
||
|
Population
of Urban Formal and Informal Settlements |
||||
ENVIRONMENTAL
|
||||
Theme
|
Sub-theme
|
Indicator
|
||
|
Atmosphere
(9) |
Climate
Change |
Emissions
of Greenhouse Gases |
||
|
Ozone Layer Depletion |
Consumption
of Ozone Depleting Substances |
|||
|
Air
Quality |
Ambient
Concentration of Air Pollutants in Urban Areas |
|||
|
Land
(10) |
Agriculture
(14) |
Arable
and Permanent Crop Land Area |
||
|
Use
of Fertilizers |
||||
|
Use
of Agricultural Pesticides |
||||
|
Forests
(11) |
Forest
Area as a Percent of Land Area |
|||
|
Wood
Harvesting Intensity |
||||
|
Desertification
(12) |
Land
Affected by Desertification |
|||
|
Urbanization
(7) |
Area
of Urban Formal and Informal Settlements |
|||
|
Coastal
Zone |
Algae
Concentration in Coastal Waters |
|||
|
Percent
of Total Population Living in Coastal Areas |
||||
|
Fisheries |
Annual
Catch by Major Species |
|||
|
Fresh Water (18) |
Water
Quantity |
Annual Withdrawal of Ground and Surface Water
as a Percent of Total Available Water |
||
|
Water
Quality |
BOD
in Water Bodies |
|||
|
Concentration
of Faecal Coliform in Freshwater |
||||
|
Biodiversity
(15) |
Ecosystem |
Area
of Selected Key Ecosystems |
||
|
Protected
Area as a % of Total Area |
||||
|
Species |
Abundance
of Selected Key Species |
|||
ECONOMIC |
||
Theme
|
Sub-theme
|
Indicator
|
|
Economic
Structure (2) |
Economic
Performance |
GDP
per Capita |
|
Investment
Share in GDP |
||
|
Trade |
Balance
of Trade in Goods and Services |
|
|
Financial
Status (33) |
Debt
to GNP Ratio |
|
|
Total
ODA Given or Received as a Percent of GNP |
||
|
Consumption and Production Patterns (4) |
Material
Consumption |
Intensity
of Material Use |
|
Energy
Use |
Annual
Energy Consumption per Capita |
|
|
Share
of Consumption of Renewable Energy Resources |
||
|
Intensity
of Energy Use |
||
|
Waste Generation and Management (19-22) |
Generation
of Industrial and Municipal Solid Waste |
|
|
Generation
of Hazardous Waste |
||
|
Generation
of Radioactive Waste |
||
|
Waste
Recycling and Reuse |
||
|
Transportation |
Distance
Traveled per Capita by Mode of Transport |
|
INSTITUTIONAL |
||
Theme
|
Sub-theme
|
Indicator
|
|
Institutional
Framework (38, 39) |
Strategic Implementation of SD (8) |
National
Sustainable Development Strategy |
|
International
Cooperation |
Implementation
of Ratified Global Agreements |
|
|
Institutional
Capacity (37) |
Information Access (40) |
Number
of Internet Subscribers per 1000 Inhabitants |
|
Communication
Infrastructure (40) |
Main
Telephone Lines per 1000 Inhabitants |
|
|
Science and Technology (35) |
Expenditure
on Research and Development as a Percent of GDP |
|
|
Disaster Preparedness and Response |
Economic
and Human Loss Due to Natural Disasters |
|
Numbers
in brackets indicate relevant Agenda 21 chapters.
4.2. Core Indicators
Within
the context of the theme framework, the objective of selecting a minimum number
of indicators as a core set could be realized. Countries are encouraged to
adopt and use this set as a starting point for their national indicator
programmes. The core set is based on consultation with countries, particularly
those represented in the testing programme, lead agencies within and beyond the
UN system who have responsibilities for sustainable development including
Agenda 21 implementation, and indicator experts. In addition, valuable guidance is provided by the results of the
indicator testing experience itself.
Table 5 provides a summary of the selection of indicators used by countries
during the testing programme.
|
Indicators
Frequently Used |
Indicators Used
by Only One Country |
New Indicators
Suggested by Countries |
|
Population
growth rate |
Population
growth in coastal areas |
%
Population with access to health services |
|
Decentralized
natural resource management |
Crime
rate |
|
|
Domestic
per capita consumption of water |
Oil
discharges into coastal waters |
Incidence
of street children |
|
Land
use change |
Satellite
derived vegetation index |
Urban
green space |
|
Use
of fertilizers |
Welfare
of mountain populations |
Ground
water pollution |
|
Ratio
of threatened species to total native species |
Population
living below the poverty line in dryland areas |
Ratio
of mining area rehabilitated to total mining area |
|
Ambient
concentration of urban air pollutants |
Human
and economic loss due to natural disasters |
Area
of specific ecosystems |
|
Emissions
of greenhouse gases |
|
Ownership
of agricultural land |
|
Emissions
of sulphur dioxides |
Genuine
savings ratio |
|
|
Emissions
of nitrogen dioxides |
Traffic
density |
|
|
Annual
energy consumption |
Release
of GMOs |
With this background, the Consultative Group conducted an in-depth analysis of potential indicators appropriate for the core set.[17] The Group vetted each indicator against selection criteria established under the CSD Indicator Work Programme.[18] These criteria are that the indicators should be:
In
applying the criteria, the Group relied particularly on the following factors
during the selection process: feasibility to measure; relevance to national
sustainable development priorities; and sub-theme representation. Subsequently, the Group examined the number
of indicators in each sustainable development dimension, theme, and sub-theme
to improve the balance of the core set.
Throughout this analysis, emphasis was given to the use of absolute
units for indicators wherever possible.
Absolute values give a clear sense of what is being measured, and
facilitate further analysis including the development of time series.
In
summary, the theme framework and the core set have overcome many of the
difficulties experienced with the 1996 Indicators of Sustainable Development
Framework and Methodologies resource document used in the testing phase. The indicators clearly reflect common
priorities among national and international issues. The number of indicators in the core set has been considerably
reduced from the suggested preliminary list of indicators used in the testing
phase. In total, 58 indicators are
included in the core set compared to the original 134 presented by the 1996
publication. Problems associated with duplication, lack of relevance and
meaningfulness, and absence of tested and widely accepted methodologies have
largely been eliminated. Those
indicators retained in the core set represent a better balance of the
sustainable development themes common to national policy development,
implementation, and assessment needs.
Nevertheless, any suggested set of indicators must be adapted to
country-specific conditions and needs and be subject to revision and updating
over time as new experience is gained and new approaches and methodologies
become available.
The
theme framework and its set of sustainable development indicators meets the CSD
indicator programme objective of having an agreed core set available for all
countries to use by the year 2001.
Wherever possible, the core indicators are common to other international
initiatives. In this way, the core set represents a sound launching pad for
national governments to develop their own indicator programmes and to monitor
their own progress; especially against the goals and objectives of national
sustainable development strategies and plans.
It also represents a common tool to assist governments in meeting
international requirements for reporting, including national reporting to
CSD. Wide adoption and use of the core
set would help improve information consistency at the international level.
As noted, countries will need to exercise flexibility and judgment in their efforts to develop national indicator sets for sustainable development. In this context, it is important to emphasize that the core set is considered sound and appropriate at this point in time. As the testing process clearly demonstrated, the institutional area needs further development and refinement in comparison to the other three dimensions.[19] In addition, considerable care will need to be taken in the interpretation of certain indicator trends in the context of sustainability and linkages among themes. For example, the use of agricultural pesticides as an indicator recognizes the potential for enhanced productivity. Increased pesticide use, however, also has implications for water quality. With the indicator floor area per person, a decrease may imply overcrowding and deteriorating living conditions, while an increase suggests a higher level of material and energy consumption and land use. In other cases, methodological deficiencies or data access may make it difficult to develop a few of the indicators within certain countries, for example mortality rate under five years old or intensity of material use. In recognition of these difficulties, improvements will need to be defined and tested, and the framework and indicators should be periodically revisited and updated to reflect these advances.
Countries
are encouraged to use the framework and core indicators in the way that best
meets their specific needs related to sustainable development priority setting,
policy making, monitoring, and evaluation.
The framework and core set will play different roles depending on the
state of indicator development in a specific country. Countries may wish to use the core set as a starting point to
develop national sets, others may take the opportunity of using the core set to
broaden the focus for specific dimensions to achieve a more comprehensive
perspective on sustainable development.
It may be appropriate for others to use the core set as a benchmark to
verify or consolidate existing indicator programmes. It is unrealistic to expect that all the indicators of the core
set will be of equal relevance to all countries, recognizing their
diversity.
In
using the CSD framework, countries may wish to focus on the specific themes of
particular relevance to their needs, or expand the set of indicators to better
satisfy their requirements and circumstances.
Wherever possible, gender disaggregated data is recommended for the
compilation of core indicators, for example, percent of the population living
below the poverty line, Gini index of income inequality, unemployment rate,
life expectancy, school completion ratio, adult literacy and nutritional status
of children, among others. Countries
may also wish to disaggregate some of the indicators to better cover such
factors as age group or sub-national areas.
Small Island States, for example, will obviously want to focus on the
ocean-land interface, for example the issues of sea level rise, a limited
economic sphere, and fragile ecosystems; while mountainous countries would most
likely have different needs, requiring a somewhat modified set of indicators.
Many countries have experience in using indicators relevant to sustainable development. The use of these familiar measures should be encouraged to supplement and expand the core set for priority national issues. In other cases, countries may wish to supplement the core set with specific indicators from other international initiatives or to include more detailed sectoral indicators in some cases. Examples of pertinent Internet Web sites that focus on indicator development include: Compendium of Sustainable Development Indicator Initiatives and Publications (http://iisd1.iisd.ca/measure/compendium.htm); Development Indicators (http://www.oecd.org/dac/Indicators/index.htm); Environmental Economics and Indicators (http://www-esd.worldbank.org/eei); and Recommendations for a Core Set of Indicators of Biological Diversity (hhtp://www.biodiv.org/doc/sbstta-5.html).
4.3. Theme Descriptions
4.3.1. Equity
|
Sub-themes |
Indicators |
|
|
Percent of Population
Living Below the Poverty Line |
|
Gini Index of Income
Inequality |
|
|
Unemployment Rate |
|
|
Ratio of Average Female
Wage to Male Wage |
Social
equity is one of the principal values underlying sustainable development, with
people and their quality of life being recognized as a central issue. Equity
involves the
degree of fairness and inclusiveness with which resources are distributed,
opportunities afforded, and decisions made.
It includes the provision of
comparable opportunities of employment and social services, including
education, health and justice. The notion can be relevant both within and between communities
and nations. Significant issues related
to the achievement of social equity include poverty alleviation; employment and
income distribution; gender, ethnic and age inclusiveness, access to financial
and natural resources; and intergenerational opportunity. Impoverished people
may feel powerless and isolated, and face pervasive and systematic problems
related to insecure livelihoods, malnutrition and poor health, illiteracy,
civil insecurity linked to violence and strife, and corruption. The concentration of the rural poor on
marginal land leads to resource over-exploitation and land degradation.
Agenda
21 addresses equity in chapters on poverty, changing consumption patterns,
women, children and youth, and indigenous people.[20] It is also a significant cross-cutting
consideration in many of the resource chapters including land, deforestation,
desertification, sustainable agriculture, and biological diversity. International cooperation, fiscal
mechanisms, education, capacity-building, access to information, and technology
transfer are approaches aimed at achieving greater equity.
Many
international conventions and summits, in addition to the Earth Summit, have
addressed the importance of equitable treatment for individuals or groups. These include the Vienna Declaration of
Human Rights, the World Summit for Children, the International Conference on
Population and Development, the Fourth World Conference on Women, and the World Summit for Social
Development, the Second Conference on Human Settlements, and the International
Convention to Combat Desertification.[21] The following commitments, for example, are
derived from the World Summit for Social Development:
·
poverty eradication in
the world;
·
full employment;
·
social integration
including equality of opportunity;
·
equality between women
and men;
·
universal and
equitable access to quality education and primary health care; and
· accelerated development in the least developed countries.[22]
Despite
these commitments, it appears that the world community and the majority of its
member states are in many respects failing to achieve equitable societies, with
the gap between the well-off and the poor widening substantially even in some
of the more advanced countries. The spread of democracy and the development of
trade, technology, and communication represent potentially positive forces to
foster greater equity. Nevertheless,
according to the 1999 Human Development Report, increasing concentrations of
income, resources and wealth among people, corporations, and nations have
occurred over the past decade.[23] Moreover, the income gap between the
wealthiest 20% of the world’s population and the poorest 20% has more than
doubled over the last three decades.
Currently, more than 1 billion people in the world live in abject
poverty. According to the World Bank,
the number of people living on less than $2 a day in developing and
transitional economies increased about 10% between 1987 and 1998.[24] Global capital flows are not helping to
effectively address equity disparities. Foreign direct investments, for example, are highly concentrated,
favouring selected countries and regions.[25] Indeed, if these trends persist, it is
highly unlikely that international targets with respect to poverty will be met.[26]
The indicators in the core set cover the issues of poverty, income inequality, unemployment, and gender equality. They represent priority issues for countries and the international community. The indicators are widely used, well-tested measures, associated with established goals and targets. The target of reducing the proportion of the population living in extreme poverty in developing countries by half by 2015 was accepted at the World Summit for Social Development. The Fourth World Conference on Women called for the elimination of discriminatory practices in employment. The general goal of full employment to enable men and women to attain secure and sustainable livelihoods was upheld at the World Summit for Social Development, while many countries have more specific national targets for unemployment.
|
Sub-themes |
Indicators |
|
Nutritional Status of
Children |
|
|
Mortality Rate Under 5
Years Old |
|
|
Life Expectancy at
Birth |
|
|
Percent of the Population with Adequate Sewage
Disposal Facilities |
|
|
Population with Access
to Safe Drinking Water |
|
|
|
Percent of the Population with Access to Primary
Health Care Facilities |
|
Immunization Against
Infectious Childhood Diseases |
|
|
Contraceptive
Prevalence Rate |
Health
and sustainable development are closely connected. Safe water supply and
sanitation, proper nutrition and a safe food supply, unpolluted living
conditions, the control of disease, and access to health services all
contribute to healthy populations.
Conversely, poverty, lack of information and education, natural and
human-induced disasters, and rapid urbanization can all exacerbate health
problems. Pollution control and health
protection services have often not kept pace with economic development. As a consequence, poor health is associated
with decreased productivity, particularly in the labour-intensive agricultural
sector.
Development
cannot be achieved or sustained when a high proportion of the population is
affected by poor health and inadequate access to health care facilities. While economic growth and development can
contribute to improved health and better health care facilities in the poorest
countries, there are also high and middle-income countries where further
improvements are warranted. A clean
environment is important to citizens’ health and well-being. Unsustainable economic growth can also cause
environmental degradation which, together with inappropriate consumption, can
adversely influence human health.
Protecting and promoting human health in Agenda 21 focuses on the following interrelated issue areas:
·
meeting primary health
care needs, especially in rural areas;
·
controlling
communicable diseases;
·
protecting vulnerable
groups;
·
meeting urban health
needs; and
· reducing health risks from environmental pollution and hazards.[27]
Within
this context, the Commission on Sustainable Development has also identified
priority areas for consideration including: the cumulative health effects of
chemicals in consumer products, plant and animal-based food, water, soil and
air; the identification and control of newly emerging infectious diseases and
their possible environmental linkages; and the health implications of ozone
layer depletion.[28]
Societal interventions are aimed at strengthening primary health care systems related to the provision of clean water, adequate sanitation, and safe food through community-based, scientifically sound, and socially acceptable approaches. Safe water and sanitation, vaccine use, and education are recognized as the principal tools to tackle communicable diseases such as malaria, cholera, and HIV/AIDS. In meeting basic health care needs, particular attention must be given to vulnerable groups, including children, women, indigenous people, the poor, and the elderly and disabled.
Rapid
urban growth can outstrip society’s capacity to protect the environment and
provide health care services. Air and
water pollution in urban areas are associated with excess morbidity and
mortality, while overcrowding and inadequate housing contribute to respiratory
and other diseases. Environmental
pollution as a result of energy production, transportation, industry, or
lifestyle choices adversely affects health.
This would include such factors as ambient and indoor air pollution,
water pollution, inadequate waste management, noise, pesticides, and
radiation. In addition, displaced
persons due to civil strife or natural disasters usually face a degraded
environment including severely limited potable water and food supplies, and
inadequate sanitation.
Since
the Earth Summit, some progress has been made in improving human health. Most countries have experienced declining
infant mortality rates and an increase in life expectancy.[29]
Nevertheless, progress has been slow and inadequate to meet many of the goals
established by the international community.
Currently, for example, at least 1.1 billion people still do not have
access to clean water, while about 2.5 billion are without adequate sanitation.[30] In Africa, Asia, and Latin America and the
Caribbean, the water supply and sanitation coverage in proportional terms
increased between 1990 and 2000.
However, due to population growth, the
absolute number of people in Africa without suitable water access and
sanitation has increased. This is also the case in Latin America and the
Caribbean with respect to water supply.
With this slow pace of progress, it is not reasonable to anticipate
universal access to drinking water before 2025 in Asia, 2040 in Latin America
and the Caribbean, and 2050 in Africa.[31]
In terms of communicable diseases, malaria is endemic in 101 countries, affecting some 2.4 million people worldwide. Mortality due to malaria is estimated to be over 1 million deaths per year, mostly young children in Africa. Dengue fever has spread rapidly in recent years, now being endemic in over 100 countries in Africa, the Americas, the Eastern Mediterranean, South-East Asia, and the Western Pacific. It is estimated that some 2.5 billion people are currently at risk of infection.[32] HIV infection levels reached 34.3 million people in 1999, including 1.3 million children under the age of 15.[33]
The
core indicators for health cover the key issues with measures that are widely
accepted and have been available and in use for some time. In addition, goals established by the
international community are available for the majority of these indicators.[34] With respect to nutrition, countries are
encouraged to reduce severe and moderate malnutrition among under five year old
children by 50% from 1990 to 2000.
Again for under five year-olds, the goal is to reduce the 1990 mortality
rate by two-thirds by 2015. The goals
for drinking water, sanitation, and primary health care are to provide
universal access. Several specific
goals related to communicable childhood diseases were included in Agenda 21
including: the eradication of polio by 2000; universal immunization against
measles, reduction of deaths due to diarrhoea by 50% by 2000, and a one-third
reduction of deaths due to acute respiratory infections by 2000. In term of family planning, the
international goal is to provide access to reproductive health services for all
individuals of appropriate ages by 2015.
The core indicators can be used to measure national progress towards these health goals. It should also be noted that indicators under other themes of the framework cover issues that are closely related to human health. These would include, for example, ambient concentration of air pollutants in urban areas, floor area per person, and use of agricultural pesticides. Nevertheless, countries may wish to supplement this nucleus of indicators with others to give a broader and more detailed national health picture. For this, the health sector indicators developed by the World Health Organization are recommended.
|
Sub-themes |
Indicators |
|
Children Reaching Grade
5 of Primary Education |
|
|
Adult Secondary
Education Achievement Level |
|
|
Adult Literacy Rate |
Education,
as a lifelong process, is widely accepted as a fundamental prerequisite for the
achievement of sustainable development.
It cuts across all areas of Agenda 21, being a particularly critical
element in meeting basic human needs, and in achieving equity, capacity building,
access to information, and strengthening science.[35] Education is also recognized as a means of
changing consumption and production patterns to a more sustainable path.
Education,
both formal and informal, is regarded as a process by which human beings and
societies can reach their full potential.
There is a close association between the general level of education
attained and the persistence of poverty irrespective of the level of a
country’s development. It is vital to
changing people’s attitudes to achieve ethical awareness, values, attitudes,
skills, and behaviour consistent with the goal of building a more sustainable
society. In this way, people are better equipped to participate in
decision-making that adequately and successfully addresses environment and
development issues.
Education in Agenda 21 is organized around the three issues of:
·
reorienting education
towards sustainable development;
·
increasing public
awareness; and
·
promoting training.
The
primary objectives in addressing these issues include: striving for universal
access to basic education, reducing adult illiteracy, integrating sustainable
development concepts in all education programmes to achieve interdisciplinary
learning, promoting broad public awareness, and strengthening vocational and
scientific training. In this context, the CSD, through its UNESCO partner, has
established an educational work programme to re-orient education towards
sustainable development.[36]
Progress has been made in most countries in improving access to education and in reducing illiteracy. However, adequate levels have yet to be attained in many countries. In 1998, for example, the adult literacy rates for the world and the least developed countries for those over 15 were 78.8% and 50.7% respectively.[37] Over 100 million children between the ages of 6 and 11 never attend school; while many more drop out within a few months or years of starting school.[38] As a result, approximately a billion people remain illiterate.[39]
Within
the CSD framework, the education theme provides core indicators that measure
education level achieved and adult literacy.
These are two of the key policy-relevant issues for countries related to
basic education. The global community
has established goals relevant to these indicators through the Convention on
the Rights of the Child, the World Summit for Children, the World Conference on
Education for All, the World Summit on Social Development, and the Fourth World
Conference on Women.[40]
These goals are to provide universal access to basic education with the
completion of primary education by at least 80% of primary school-age children;
and to reduce the adult illiteracy rate to at least half of its 1990 level.[41] The core indicators, which are generally
consistent with the educational indicators of other international initiatives,
can be used to measure national progress towards these goals.[42]
Countries may wish to supplement the core indicators with national measures to
also address the topics of awareness raising and training. In addition, it would be appropriate for
countries to disaggregate the core education indicators by gender to capture an
important aspect of gender equality.
|
Sub-theme |
Indicator |
|
Floor Area per Person |
Adequate
shelter is one of the essential components of sustainable development. The
availability of adequate shelter substantially contributes to safer, more
equitable, productive, and healthier settlements. Living conditions, especially in urban areas, are influenced by
excessive population concentration, inadequate planning and financial
resources, and unemployment. Rural-urban migration exacerbates this situation
contributing to the development of slums and informal settlements. Poor living
conditions are associated with poverty, homelessness, poor health, social
exclusion, family instability and insecurity, violence, environmental
degradation, and increased vulnerability to disasters.
The right to adequate housing is part of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, the International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights, the International Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Racial Discrimination, the Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination Against Women, and the Convention on the Rights of the Child. It is a major focus of the Global Strategy for Shelter to the Year 2000, the human settlements chapter of Agenda 21, and the Habitat II commitments.[43]
Nevertheless, it appears that the gap between progress, and current and future needs continues to widen. By the year 2005, the majority of the world's population will live in urban areas. It has been estimated that up to a third of urban people live in sub-standard housing.[44] Many countries have made improvements in the formulation of housing policies and strategies aimed at accelerating construction, providing housing for low income groups, improving land and market conditions, and facilitating access to credit.[45] Yet, the conditions of shelter and human settlements have continued to deteriorate in most developing countries during the 1990s reflecting the need for additional financing; improved partnerships between the private sector, governments, and communities; technology transfer, and increased capacity building.[46]
To assess housing and living conditions, the CSD core set of indicators uses floor area per person--a key measure for the assessment of progress with respect to housing quality. Data to support the indicator are generally available at the country level, at least for specific urban areas. This indicator is part of the Housing Indicators Programme of the United Nations Centre for Human Settlements and the Common Country Assessment Framework.[47] No specific targets or thresholds have been established for this measure, although it does reflect the goal established at Habitat II of providing sufficient living space while avoiding overcrowding.
While
the indicator provides a measure of overcrowding, it does not take into account
cultural differences. In addition, high
values for the indicator may suggest undue use of material, energy, and land
detrimental to sustainable development.
The interpretation of the indicator, therefore, requires care and
judgement. Consideration of other core indicators such as area and population
of urban formal and informal settlements, and population growth rate
would support the commentary on this living condition measure.
|
Sub-theme |
Indicator |
|
Number of Recorded
Crimes per 100,000 Population |
Crime prevention and criminal justice are an integral part of the development process. Civil society, good governance, and democracy rest on the promotion of justice as an essential condition for social stability, security, peace, human rights, and long-term sustainable development.[48] Such a stable and secure climate is necessary to support the goals of poverty eradication, economic investment, environmental stewardship, gender equality, participation, and sustainable livelihoods.
Security
represents a new dimension in the revised framework for CSD indicators. This recognition reflects the growing
priority given to security, including crime prevention, within the context of
sustainable development in recent years.
In Agenda 21, for example, while social security is a persistent theme,
the aspect of crime is only briefly mentioned with respect to urban disorder
and related health issues, violence against women, and the need for public
awareness. Subsequently, the World Summit for Social Development and Habitat II
advocated stable, safe, and just societies for promoting social integration and
development. Member states were encouraged to address the problems of crime,
violence and illicit drugs as factors of social disintegration.[49] As a follow-up to the Summit, the UN
Economic and Social Council made violence, crime, and illicit drugs and substance
abuse, all factors of social disintegration, a priority theme in 1998.[50] This momentum will culminate in 2000 with
the expected completion and signing of the UN Convention against Transnational
Crime.
Overall,
crime appears to be on the increase and represents a challenge for sustainable
development. Globalization is creating an environment conducive to new and
expanded forms of criminality including the smuggling of migrants, drug
trafficking, corruption, computer crime, and the illegal firearms trade.[51] On a global scale, an increase in total
recorded crime of about 13% has been estimated for the time period 1990-1997.[52] While the number of reported crimes dropped
or stayed the same for member states of the European Union, increases were
experienced in countries of Eastern Europe, members of the Commonwealth of
Independent States, and countries of Asia and the Pacific.
The
core set of indicators recognizes crime as a significant sub-theme of security.
From the experience of testing countries, the sub-theme reflects an important
priority for policy decision makers at the national level. The general goal to
significantly reduce violence and crime was accepted at the Ninth Congress on
the Prevention of Crime and Treatment of Offenders.[53]
The number of recorded crimes per 100,000 population represents the most
commonly used indicator and is included as a measure in the Common Country
Assessment Guidelines. Countries may wish to disaggregate the indicator by type
of crime, for example, violent versus non-violent crime or violence against
women.
4.3.6. Population
|
Sub-theme |
Indicators |
|
Population Growth Rate |
|
|
Population of Urban
Formal and Informal Settlements |
Population
provides an important contextual reference on sustainable development for
decision makers looking at the interrelationships between people, resources,
the environment and development. Population change
is a significant signal as countries try to reduce poverty, achieve economic
progress, improve environmental protection, and move to more sustainable
consumption and production. More stable
levels of fertility can have a considerable positive impact on quality of
life. In many countries, slower
population growth has bought more time to adjust to future population increases.
Urbanization has become a dominant trend in the
growth and distribution of the population.
Rapid population growth and migration can lead to unsustainable living
conditions and increased pressure on the environment, especially in
ecologically-sensitive areas. The
search for better living conditions in urban areas reflects rural unemployment
and underemployment; poor rural social services; unavailability of arable land;
natural disasters, particularly drought; and civil unrest. It implies the need for more effective
programmes to support rural development.
The informal urban settlements that often develop are precarious and
marginal. They tend to lack basic services and tenure security; are located in
areas predisposed to natural disasters; and are characterized by poverty,
inadequate health and education facilities, and high crime rates.
Agenda 21
provided a framework for the emerging consensus on
the need for increased international cooperation on population issues. The global programme stressed the importance
of taking population trends and factors into account when building national
policies and programmes integrating environment and development.[54] The 1994 Conference on Population and
Development, in contrast to previous international population fora, continued
this integrative perspective focusing on the relationships between population,
poverty, gender equity, production and consumption, and the environment.[55]
Fertility rates
and population growth rates are declining in most
countries. Nevertheless, absolute population numbers are still increasing in
all regions. The world fertility rate
has dropped from 4.5 to 2.7 births per woman from 1970-1975 to 1995-2000.[56] Furthermore, the global population growth
rate has declined from 1.7% per annum during the 1985 to 1990 period to its
current level of 1.3% per annum. In
1998, this rate added 78 million people to give a world population of 5.9
billion.[57]
By 2030, the
world population is expected to be 8.1 billion,
with virtually all the growth concentrated in urban areas, particularly the
cities of developing countries.[58] The proportion of people living in urban
areas is expected to increase from 46.6% in 1998, to 54.5% in 2015, and to
60.5% in 2030. Such trends will
continue the rural to urban migration patterns and rapid transformation of
rural settlements into cities. This
will place enormous strain on existing social services and infrastructure in
cities, much of which will not be able to expand at the same rate as the
population increases.
Both predominant
factors of population change, total population
growth and urban growth, are reflected in the core set of indicators. The population growth rate is a
standard indicator supported by data for all countries. The population of formal and informal
settlements is likely to be more infrequently available for specific urban
areas, but is a significant measure from a policy perspective. While the Cairo Conference implicitly
recognized the stability of the global population as an ultimate objective, no
specific international goals have been established for these indicators. Nevertheless, several countries have adopted
targets for population growth in the context of national planning and
development.
Countries may
wish to augment reporting on population change with
information on fertility rate, migration, age structure, and rate of growth of
urban areas. In addition, it may be
appropriate to ascertain sub-national population trends for national planning
purposes.
|
Sub-themes |
Indicators |
|
Emissions of Greenhouse
Gases |
|
|
Consumption of Ozone
Depleting Substances |
|
|
Ambient Concentration
of Air Pollutants in Urban Areas |
Priority atmospheric issues include climate change,
stratospheric ozone depletion, acidification, eutrophication, urban air
quality, and tropospheric ozone levels.
The impacts of these issues relate to human health, biodiversity and the
health of ecosystems, and economic damage.
Many of the effects are long-term, global in nature, and irreversible
with consequences for future generations.
Agenda 21 suggests an integrated approach to protection of the atmosphere,[59] coordinated with social and economic development, which focuses on:
The principal human activities contributing to
atmospheric change relate to fossil fuel consumption for energy production and
transportation. In addition, land use
change, including deforestation, industrial processes, intensive agriculture,
and waste disposal contribute to atmospheric pollution. Conversely, forest
ecosystems are also significant carbon sinks for greenhouse gases. While some gains have been achieved through
greater efficiency, fuel substitution, and the use of renewable energy,
emission levels have continued to climb due to overall increases in energy use
and transportation.
Climate change is widely recognized as a serious
threat to the world’s environment and is largely a consequence of unsustainable
consumption and production patterns.
Expected impacts include sea level rise with the possible flooding of
low lying areas, higher temperatures, melting of glaciers and ice caps, and
more extreme weather patterns with implications for floods and droughts. The socio-economic effects are expected to
be widespread, but have particular significance to agriculture, forests, marine
ecosystems, and small island states.
The problems associated with climate change are being addressed under the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change. So far insufficient progress has been made to stabilize greenhouse gas emission levels.[60] However, under its Kyoto Protocol, developed countries have agreed to reduce their collective emissions of six greenhouse gases by 5% of 1990 levels by 2008-2012.[61] In addition, the Protocol encourages joint implementation and emissions trading among developed countries; and cooperation between developed and developing countries under a Clean Development Mechanism.
The thickness of the ozone layer, which protects the
earth from damaging ultraviolet radiation, has decreased significantly over the
last 20 years. The anthropogenic
emissions of ozone-depleting substances are derived from their use as solvents,
refrigerants, foam-blowing agents, spray propellants, fire extinguishers, and
agricultural pesticides. Increases in
ultraviolet radiation at the earth’s surface can damage human health resulting
in skin cancer, eye cataracts, and suppression of the immune system. In
addition, marine and terrestrial ecosystems can be affected through reduced
photosynthesis and production of phytoplankton.
International cooperation under the Vienna Convention, the Montreal Protocol, and subsequent amendments has resulted in a significant decrease in global production and consumption of the major ozone-depleting substances.[62] Nevertheless, due to the long life times of these substances in the atmosphere, complete recovery of the ozone layer is not expected until 2050.[63] Human health and environmental impacts are projected to continue even longer.
The rapid increase in urbanization and the transportation sector have resulted in many environmental impacts. High mobility levels and congestion have led to substantial increases in emission levels of air pollutants such as suspended particulate matter, sulphur dioxide, nitrogen oxides, volatile organic compounds, and ozone, in both developed and developing countries. These substances magnify human health risks, adversely affect flora and fauna, and damage buildings in both urban and rural areas.
Three indicators related to the atmosphere are
included in the CSD core set: emissions of greenhouse gases; consumption
of ozone depleting substances; and ambient concentration of air
pollutants in urban areas. These
indicators were selected as either relevant or measurable by a majority of the
testing countries.[64] They represent driving force measures; the
point of entry for sustainable development policy interventions. The first indicator measures the net
emissions of the six greenhouse gases which are driving climate change and
which are subject to the Kyoto Protocol.
The second indicator assesses the phase-out of ozone depleting
substances subject to the Montreal Protocol and its subsequent amendments. The third indicator measures the exposure of
people to various air pollutants. In
this last case, it is important to consider the indicator against national air
quality standards.
These three indicators are closely associated with other themes of the indicator framework; for example land (forests and urbanization) and consumption and production patterns (energy use and transportation). Countries may wish to supplement these three core measures with impact and response indicators for the atmosphere theme. Consideration of sea level rise, for example, would be particularly important to small island and coastal states.
|
Sub-themes |
Indicators |
|
|
Arable and Permanent
Crop Land Area |
|
Use of Fertilizers |
|
|
Use of Agricultural
Pesticides |
|
|
Forest Area as a
Percent of Land Area |
|
|
Wood Harvesting
Intensity |
|
|
Land Affected by
Desertification |
|
|
Area of Urban Formal
and Informal Settlements |
Land consists not only of the physical space and the
surface topography, but includes the associated natural resources of soil,
mineral deposits, water, and plant and animal
communities. Use of the land in an unsustainable way affects these resources,
as well as the atmosphere and marine ecosystems. Land is becoming an increasingly scarce resource, particularly
quality land for primary production of biomass and for conservation, due to
expanding human requirements. The magnitude of land use and land cover changes
threatens the stability and resilience of ecosystems through, for example,
global warming and disruption of the global nitrogen cycle.[65]
Agenda 21 advocates a holistic approach using an
integrated, ecosystem-based management to achieve sustainable development of
the land resource.[66]
The implementation of such an approach is intended to resolve conflicts between
competing land uses, while addressing access and rights to land; and to
increase productivity, while protecting the environment and natural
resources. This approach is supported
by the United Nations Convention to Combat Desertification, the United Nations
Convention on Biodiversity, the Habitat Agenda of the Second International
Conference on Human Settlements, and the Plan of Action of the World Food
Summit.
The priority land-based issues faced by many
countries include land degradation, desertification, deforestation, urban
growth, and agricultural and rural development. Other significant challenges
associated with land use, such as the maintenance of particularly valued
ecosystems are covered by other themes of the CSD indicator framework, for
example coastal zone and biodiversity.
At its Eighth Session, the Commission on Sustainable Development suggested the following areas for future work related to integrated land management:[67]
Many of these priorities were supported by the
decisions related to agriculture and rural development. In addition, the Commission emphasized the
need to focus on poverty eradication, appropriate use of biotechnology,
conservation and protection of genetic resources, integrated pest management,
integrated plant nutrition, emergency preparedness, and protection of water
resources. Governments were encouraged
to integrate agricultural production, food security and food safety,
environmental protection, and rural development into national sustainable
development strategies.
Agriculture plays a pivotal role in the context of
sustainable land use. The sector is
being called on to both increase production to achieve food security and
improve its stewardship of the land resource.
In addition, agriculture supports social and economic development, and
the maintenance of rural lifestyles. If practiced in a sustainable manner, it
contributes to the conservation of the countryside and related natural
resources.
Global food production has increased in the 1990s, particularly in the developing countries. The average annual growth in agricultural production was 2.2% between 1994 and 1998: 0.4% in developed countries and 3.4% in developing countries.[68] Despite the overall production increases, 64 countries faced serious food shortages in 1998 and 1999. Nevertheless, the number of undernourished people in the world has decreased from 860 million in 1990-92 to 825 million in 1995-97, although increases have been experienced in some regions including sub-Saharan Africa and countries with economies in transition. However, this improvement will have to be magnified two and a half times to meet the World Food Summit target of reducing the number of undernourished people by half by 2015.[69] This has significant implications for the land resource.
Agriculture and the state of rural development are
associated with most land resource issues.
Increasing land degradation, desertification, and deforestation are
caused by poverty, population pressure, unsuitable land allocation,
inappropriate farming and grazing practices, and lack or misuse of appropriate
technologies. Desertification affects
1.6 billion people in over 100 countries.[70] Land degradation, including compaction,
erosion, fertility decline, loss of biomass and soil biodiversity, occurs on
about 2 billion hectares. It is
estimated that about 30% of the world’s irrigated lands, 40% of the rainfed
agricultural lands, and 70% of rangelands are affected by land degradation.[71] Between 1980 and 1990, it is estimated that
the global forest area declined by 180 million ha; with a further decline of 56
million ha from 1990 to 1995.[72]
Although successes are apparent in specific countries, efforts at implementing
integrated land management have yet to significantly ameliorate these trends.
The rapid
urbanization trend discussed previously brings land use adjustment pressures to
both urban and rural areas. Migration
forces may be too strong and society’s resources insufficient to prevent the
spread of informal settlements. In
addition, urbanization tends to shift consumption patterns towards
horticultural crops, meat, and dairy products.
Increased livestock numbers,
while creating income opportunities, could amplify overgrazing, encourage
deforestation, and increase health risks.[73] Meanwhile, in rural areas, labour shortages can encourage the adoption of labour-saving
technologies based on agro-chemicals and machinery, with implications for land
and water resources.[74]
The indicators under the land theme in the CSD framework focus on the key sub-themes of agriculture, forests, desertification, and urbanization. The selected indicators are relevant for assessing sustainable development at the national level, and are generally supported by appropriate data sets. As illustrated above, indicators from other environmental sub-themes complement these measures of land sustainability, for example ecosystems, water quality, climate change, and coastal zones. In addition, pressures on land and land use impacts are reflected in social, economic, and institutional themes, such as poverty, drinking water, population change, energy use, and natural disaster preparedness and response. Specific international goals have generally not been established for the land resource, although national targets may apply (for example, forest area as a percent of land area and wood harvesting intensity). Existing international goals do apply to food security and the trade of tropical timber.[75]
The importance of interpretation in the context of
sustainable development is illustrated by some of the land indicators. The use
of fertilizers, for example, while enhancing productivity also reflects
soil fertility decline and potential impacts on the environment including
eutrophication, acidification, and contamination of water supplies. Specific
countries may wish to expand the range of land indicators for national
purposes. In this case, indicators to portray progress with mining
rehabilitation, agricultural productivity, or the impacts of increasing
livestock numbers may be pertinent.
4.3.9. Oceans, Seas and Coasts
|
Sub-themes |
Indicators |
|
Algae Concentration in Coastal Waters |
|
Percent
of Total Population Living in Coastal Areas
|
|
|
Annual Catch by Major Species |
Occupying about 70% of the earth’s surface, oceans and seas represent highly productive ecosystems that continuously recycle chemicals, nutrients, and water. This recycling regulates weather and climate, including global temperature. In addition, marine, estuary and coastal ecosystems (such as coral reefs, wetlands, and mangrove forests) are significant to biodiversity and support valuable natural resources.[76] It is estimated, for example that 90% of the world’s fish production is dependent on coastal areas at some point in its life cycle.
Coastal zones, at the interface of land and water,
occupy less than 15% of the earth’s surface; yet accommodate over 2 billion
people, more than one-third of the world’s population. This population
primarily lives in large cities frequently sited in association with key
ecosystems such as river estuaries. The proportion of people living in the
coastal zone (within 100 kilometers of the shore) is estimated to be
approximately 37% of the global population and is expected to grow
substantially by the year 2020.[77]
Agenda 21, based on the United Nations Convention on
the Law of the Sea, advocates an integrated, ecosystem approach to protect
oceans and coastal areas.[78]
Such an approach is heavily dependent on the application of precautionary and
anticipatory principles to maintain biodiversity and ecosystem productivity
while improving the quality of life of coastal communities. Various
international instruments have adopted the concept of integrated marine and
coastal area management. These include the United Nations Framework Convention
on Climate Change, the United Nations Convention on Biological Diversity, the
International Coral Reef Initiative, and the Code of Conduct for Responsible
Fisheries.
The marine and coastal issues significant to
sustainable development include:
·
degradation from
land-based activities;
·
unsustainable
exploitation of fish and other living resources;
·
marine pollution from
shipping and offshore oil and gas projects;
·
the protection of
biodiversity and fragile ecosystems; and
While a measure of success is evident in the control of marine pollution, the unsustainable development of coastal and marine resources largely continues. The Commission on Sustainable Development concluded in 1996 that the most important traditional ocean resources, including coastal environments and conventional fishery resources, are over-used and require improved management.[80] While international conventions[81] have proved effective at controlling marine pollution from shipping (except for ships flying flags of convenience) and marine dumping of industrial waste; and progress is being made with respect to the dumping of hazardous waste and ship’s ballast, marine pollution continues to increase. Furthermore, effective measures are still required to address degradation of the marine environment from offshore oil and gas activities.
Land-based activities contribute about 80% of marine
pollution. Over half of the world’s coastal ecosystems face moderate to high
potential risk of degradation as a result of inappropriate development. The
influence of climate change on sea level rise, and the frequency and intensity
of floods and storms is particularly pertinent to small island states and
densely populated delta areas.
Coral reefs, which occupy only 1% of the marine environment,
are particularly susceptible to damage. It is estimated that 58% of the world’s
reefs are potentially threatened by human activities.[82]
Marine fishery production began to stagnate in the second half of the 1990s
after two decades of expansion. Many fisheries have surpassed their optimum
long-term sustainability, with recent increased production stemming from
aquaculture. It is estimated that about 60% of world fisheries are either fully
exploited or over-fished. In addition, discard and waste levels remain high,
with an estimated 27 million tons of fish discarded each year. With better
management, processing, and conservation practices, it is possible that
sustainable management and conservation, including stock rehabilitation and
reduction of wastage, could increase marine fisheries production.
In general, suitable candidate indicators for oceans
and the coastal zone are not readily available or supported by commonly
accepted goals. However, the CSD core
set includes three indicators under the sub-themes of coastal zone and
fisheries that are national in scope and within the capabilities of most
countries to develop. The total
population in coastal areas and the algae concentration in coastal
waters provide measures of the overall pressure on the coastal resource
particularly from land-based activities.
Bathing water quality represents an impact indicator that some countries
may wish to consider, although a standard methodology is not well advanced or widely
accepted. The annual catch by major
species provides a core indicator where data is generally available to
measure the intensity of fishery activity. In terms of key marine ecosystems
such as coral, mangrove, and sea grass, countries may wish to consider trends
in the extent of these areas under the biodiversity ecosystem sub-theme.
4.3.10. Freshwater
|
Sub-themes |
Indicators |
Annual
Withdrawal of Ground and Surface Water as a Percent of Total Available Water
|
|
|
BOD in Water Bodies |
|
|
Concentration of Faecal Coliform in
Freshwater |
Freshwater is essential to support human life, ecosystems, and economic development. It supports domestic water supplies, food production, fisheries, industry, hydropower generation, navigation, and recreation. The ecosystem services of freshwater systems include food production, reduction of flood risk, and the filtering of pollutants. The global issues of health, poverty, climate change, deforestation, desertification, and land use change are all directly associated with the water resource and its management.
The long-term sustainability of water is in doubt in
many regions of the world. Currently,
humans use about half the water that is readily available. Water use has been growing at more than
twice the population rate, and a number of regions are already chronically
short of water. About one third of the
world's population lives in countries with moderate to high water stress. With population increases, economic growth
and rising living standards, as much as two thirds of the world's population
could be living in water-stressed countries by 2025.[83] This has serious implication for
socio-economic development, in particular future food production.
Both water quantity and water quality are becoming
dominant issues in many countries. Problems relate to poor water allocation and
pricing, inefficient use, and lack of adequate integrated management. The major withdrawals of water are for
agriculture, industry, and domestic consumption. Most of the water used by industries and municipalities is often
returned to watercourses degraded in quality.
Irrigation agriculture, responsible for nearly 40% of world food
production, uses about 70% of total water withdrawals (90% in the dry tropics).[84]
Groundwater, which supplies one third of the world's population, is
increasingly being used for irrigation.
Water tables are being lowered in many areas making it more expensive to
access.
Major water quality problems stem from sewage
pollution, the intensive agricultural use of fertilizers and pesticides,
industrial wastes, saltwater intrusion, and soil erosion. In many developing countries, rivers
downstream of large cities are little cleaner than open sewers. Only 2% of sewage in Latin America receives
any kind of treatment, while the faecal coliform count in many Asian rivers is
50 times recommended water quality guidelines.[85] Nitrate pollution from high fertilizer use
is a serious concern in both developed and developing countries. High nitrate levels in drinking water are
dangerous to human health, and cause algae growth and eutrophication in
waterways. Industrial wastes are a source of heavy metal and persistent organic
pollutants in the environment. About
20% of the world's irrigated land is salt-affected to such an extent as to
significantly reduce crop production.
Salt water intrusion is of particular concern to arid and semi-arid
regions, and small island states. Poor
land use practices aggravate soil erosion resulting, for example, in degraded
fish habitat and loss of reservoir capacity.
In calling for integrated water resource management,
Agenda 21 emphasized the need to protect water, its quality, and ecosystem
functions through improved assessment and greater understanding of the impacts
of climate change.[86] Water for drinking supply, food production,
and sustainable urban and rural development were recognized as key priorities.
There is evidence of progress in improving some
aspects of freshwater resources management since 1992. In specific watersheds, water quality has
improved, the application of demand management is raising efficiency levels,
and conservation efforts are improving fish habitat. However, overall progress has been neither sufficient nor
comprehensive enough to reduce the overall trends of increasing water shortages,
deteriorating water quality, and growing ecosystem stress. To address this gap,
the Commission on Sustainable Development has identified the following priority
areas:[87]
·
access to urban and
rural water supply and sanitation;
·
water for sustainable food
production and rural development;
·
the use of clean and
efficient wastewater technologies for industry;
·
a greater appreciation
of the water resource requirements of ecosystems;
·
the efficient use of
water based on its economic value; and
· strengthening water management institutions.
The freshwater indicators in the core set capture the two essential dimensions of quantity and quality. The withdrawal of available water measures a country’s demand for water and reveals its vulnerability to water shortages. The measurement of biological oxygen demand and faecal coliform concentration reflect respectively the two significant aspects of ecosystem health and human health. These three indicators are policy-relevant and generally measurable at the national level.
|
Sub-themes |
Indicators |
|
Area of Selected Key Ecosystems |
|
|
Protected Area as a Percent of Total Area |
|
|
Abundance of Selected Key Species |
Biological diversity consists not only of variety
among species, but also genetic variation within species, and variation between
communities of species, habitats and ecosystems. This biodiversity of genes, species, and ecosystems contributes
essential products and services to human welfare. Maintaining biodiversity helps ensure that the Earth will
continue to perform natural ecological processes upon which all life
depends. Major changes, loss, or
degradation of biodiversity can result in serious economic, social, and
cultural impacts; and have profound ecological and ethical implications. More than 40% of the world's economy and
about 80% of the needs of the world's poor are dependent upon biological
diversity.[88] Food security, climatic stability,
freshwater security and human health needs are all directly associated with the
maintenance and use of biodiversity.
The total number of species on Earth is very large
with estimates ranging form 5 to 100 million.
The most species-rich environments are the moist tropical forests that
probably contain over 90% of the world’s species.[89] Africa, Asia and the Pacific, and Latin
America are the richest biodiversity regions.
The conservation status of most species is not known in detail. However,
in a 1996 assessment, 25% of the world’s mammals and 11% of birds were
threatened with a significant risk of extinction.[90] Many other species now exist in reduced
numbers, as fragmented populations, or are threatened on a national scale.
Loss of biodiversity results when policies and development activities fail to properly value natural resources and the environment. Inequity in ownership and access to natural resources also contribute to unsustainable use. Biodiversity can be adversely affected by the following causes:
Many international treaties were in effect before
the 1992 Earth Summit aimed at protecting biodiversity. These instruments include: the International
Plant Protection Convention, the Convention on Wetlands of International
Importance Especially as Wildlife Habitat, the Convention on International
Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora, and the International
Tropical Timber Agreement. Agenda 21
and the Convention on Biological Diversity both provide a comprehensive
perspective for future action to address biodiversity conservation; the
sustainable use of ecosystems, species, and genetic material; and the equitable
sharing of benefits arising from genetic resources.[91] Countries are encouraged to complete
national assessments of biodiversity, develop national strategies and action
plans, integrate biodiversity considerations into national development
strategies, use traditional methods and knowledge, and foster the sharing and
sustainable use of biotechnology.
The development of suitable indicators of biodiversity is at a relatively early stage due to the incomplete scientific knowledge and understanding of biodiversity, especially with respect to ecosystem functions and processes.[92] Promising work in this area is being pursued under the auspices of the Convention on Biological Diversity.[93] Nevertheless, it is feasible at this time to include three pertinent indicators in the core set which capture significant aspects of the ecosystem and specie attributes of biodiversity. It should also be noted that other core indicators in the land, marine, and freshwater themes of the framework are significant from a biodiversity viewpoint.
The selected biodiversity indicators measure the area of selected key ecosystems, the abundance of selected key species, and the protected area as a percent of total area. They are relatively easy to calculate, meaningful to decision makers, and allow countries flexibility in determining the most important ecosystems and species from a national perspective. Area of key ecosystems, for example, was suggested as a valuable indicator by testing countries and could include those areas subject to greatest change or those with special biodiversity value. It may also be possible in some countries to disaggregate the protected area indicator by ecosystem type to provide information on ecosystem representation.
|
Sub-themes |
Indicators |
|
GDP per Capita |
|
|
Investment Share in GDP |
|
|
Balance of Trade in
Goods and Services |
|
|
Debt to GNP Ratio |
|
|
Total ODA Given or
Received as a Percentage of GNP |
Trade and investment are important factors in
economic growth and sustainable development.
Improved access to markets, transfer of financial resources and
technology, and debt relief are critical to assisting developing countries meet
the objectives of sustainable development.
Poverty, natural resource exploitation, and consumption and production
are all intimately connected to economic growth or the lack of it. It represents a considerable challenge to
ensure that economic growth leads to social equity and does not contribute to
environmental degradation.
To support economic performance within the context
of sustainable development, Agenda 21 recommends trade liberalization; making
trade and environment mutually supportive; providing new and additional
financial resources to developing countries; and encouraging macroeconomic
policies favourable to environment and development.[94] Trade liberalization usually has positive
effects on sustainable development. It
can stimulate economic diversification, improve the efficiency of resource
allocation, reduce environmentally unsound trade restrictions, and encourage
the transfer of cleaner, more efficient technology. Freer trade can also result in increased resource use when the
environmental costs of production are not fully internalized and reflected in
market prices.
In principle, the financing of policies and programmes to attain sustainable development comes from a country’s own public and private resources. Nevertheless, external resource flows are essential to assist developing countries. Official Development Assistance (ODA) remains the primary source of external funding, but a basic shift is occurring with flows of foreign direct investment (FDI) steadily expanding and flows from financial markets increasing dramatically. Whatever the source, it is essential that all funding contribute to sustainable development through the integration of economic growth, social development, and environmental protection.
Total net resource flows
from Development Assistance Committee (DAC) countries and
multilateral organizations to aid-receiving developing countries increased
between 1991 and 1996, but have since fallen in both absolute and relative
terms.[95] Collective
ODA disbursements from member countries of DAC declined from 0.33% of GNP in
1987/88 to 0.24% of GNP in 1998;[96]
both figures well below the United Nations target of 0.7%. For developing countries, the per capita ODA
has fallen from US$11.8 to US$8.3 between 1992 and 1998. A few countries have been able to take
advantage of rising FDI and have experienced substantial economic growth. However, many other countries, particularly
the poorest ones, have shown slow or negative growth and continue to be
marginalized.[97]
The level of external debt continues to impede the
progress of developing countries towards sustainable development. Comparing 1985 and 1998, debt levels in
relation to GNP remained at about 42% for developing countries as a whole,
while increasing from 67% to nearly 100% for the least developed countries.[98] For most of these countries, effective
solutions to the debt problem through debt rescheduling, reduction, or
cancellation; debt swaps; or grants and concessional flows, are essential to
help restore credit worthiness and encourage investment.
The indicators selected for the core set under the
economic structure theme are well known and commonly used measures at
international and national levels. They
reflect the important issues of economic performance, trade, and financial
status discussed above. Trade and
economic dependency represented key indicator theme areas for testing
countries.
GDP per capita is a standard measure of basic economic growth, while investment share in GDP shows the level of financial capital available to stimulate economic development. The balance of trade in goods and services illustrates the openness and/or vulnerability of an economy. High levels of debt inhibit a country’s ability to address socioeconomic and environmental priorities related to sustainable development. The provision of ODA is a measure of commitment of the international community, while its receipt shows one measure of reliance on external funding.
|
Sub-themes |
Indicators |
|
Intensity of Material
Use |
|
|
|
Annual Energy
Consumption per Capita |
|
Share of Consumption of
Renewable Energy Resources |
|
|
Intensity of Energy Use |
|
|
|
Generation of
Industrial and Municipal Solid Waste |
|
Generation of Hazardous
Waste |
|
|
Generation of
Radioactive Waste |
|
|
Waste Recycling and
Reuse |
|
|
Distance Traveled per
Capita by Mode of Transport |
Unsustainable patterns of consumption and
production, particularly in developed countries, are the major cause of the
continued depletion of natural resources and deterioration of the global
environment.[99] It is widely acknowledged that the Earth
cannot support the consumption levels of industrialized countries on a global
scale. In addition, such high levels of
consumption affect the current and future consumption and production options of
developing countries.
A change to more sustainable lifestyles calls for
the concerted, combined efforts of governments, producers, and consumers. It
requires less emphasis on material consumption, more emphasis on resource and
energy-efficient technologies, a stronger commitment to meeting the needs of
the poor, and a focus on economic systems that account for social and
environmental costs. Such a fundamental
change is very difficult to achieve because of strongly ingrained beliefs and
behaviours.
Agenda 21 calls on developed countries to take the
lead in promoting and implementing more sustainable consumption and production
patterns. It recommends five actions to assist in reaching this objective:
moving towards environmentally sound pricing. [100]
Since the Earth Summit, only limited progress has been made in the adjustment to more sustainable consumption and production patterns. Overall, insufficient progress has been achieved in the more efficient use of materials, reducing energy demand and waste, and using more sustainable transportation systems. In industrialized countries, there has been progress in reducing energy and material consumption per unit of production. However, the improvement in efficiency has been more than offset by increases in the volume of production and consumption.[101] Meanwhile, developing countries require sharp increases in energy services to improve the standard of living of a growing population. World commercial energy use increased 74% between 1980 and 1997.[102] Over the near term, transportation is expected to be the major driving force behind a growing world demand for energy.
Current patterns of transportation and their energy requirements are not sustainable and will significantly compound future environmental and human health problems.[103] While there has been progress in fuel and emission efficiency of vehicles, the number of vehicles has dramatically increased and consumers are driving longer distances.[104] Some predictions estimate a five-fold increase in global waste generation by 2025. In the developed world, per capita waste generation increased three times between 1977 and 1997 and is approximately five to six times higher than in the developing world.[105]
The United Nations General Assembly and testing
countries have advocated that consumption and production patterns be
represented in the core set of indicators.
This reflects the policy priority of this issue area. The core indicators provide a good coverage
of the significant sub-themes of consumption and production patterns; namely
material consumption, energy use, waste generation and management, and
transportation. The core indicators,
except for those for waste, are included in the recommended set of consumption
and production indicators published by the United Nations in 1998.[106] It will be possible to relate the solid
waste and recycling indicators to national waste reduction targets in countries
where such national objectives have been established. It should be noted that other indicators in the environmental
dimension of the core set are complementary to the consumption and production
theme. These include, for example, emissions
of greenhouse gases, use of fertilizers, wood harvesting
intensity, and annual withdrawal of ground and surface water.
Some of the core indicators, such as annual energy
consumption per capita, are well tested and already commonly used at the
national level. The indicator for
intensity of energy use is covered by five methodology sheets that include: (1)
Energy Intensity – Commercial/Service sector, (2) Energy
Intensity-Transportation, (3) Energy Intensity – Residential Sector, (4) Energy
Intensity – Manufacturing and (5) Energy Use per unit of GDP. Other indicators,
such as intensity of material use and distance traveled per capita by
mode of transport are not so well developed or used, probably
reflecting methodological and data difficulties. Nevertheless, it is important to include these indicators because
of their policy relevance and in order to achieve a comprehensive core
set. Where they are not feasible in the
short term, countries may wish to use alternative measures, such as total
material requirement and total number of road vehicles.
|
Sub-themes |
Indicators |
|
National Sustainable
Development Strategy |
|
|
Implementation of
Ratified Global Agreements |
Appropriate legal and policy instruments are required as an institutional framework to encourage and implement sustainable development. The integration of social, economic, and environmental factors is a particular important feature of such instruments. Implementation of sound sustainable development strategies and international treaties by countries should contribute to improved socioeconomic and environmental conditions, and help reduce potential sources of conflict between countries.
Agenda 21 calls for the adoption of national
strategies of sustainable development.
The goal of such strategies should be to ensure socially responsible
economic development while protecting the environment and the natural resource
base for future generations.[107] The strategies should build on existing
initiatives, such as environmental action plans, reflect current priorities,
and take into account emerging issues.
They should be based on the widest possible participation and
involvement of all segments of society.
Agenda 21 also advocates improving the effectiveness of national and
international legal instruments and mechanisms with respect to achieving
sustainable development. In this
context, the action plan supports the participation of developing countries in
formulating international law; the coordination and consistency among international
legal instruments; and the identification of new and emerging issues in the
field of sustainable development relevant to international law.
Since the Earth Summit, countries have made
considerable progress in establishing an appropriate institutional framework
for the implementation of sustainable development.[108] This includes the development of national
strategies aimed at integrating social, economic, and environmental priorities;
and action to sign, ratify, and initiate the implementation of global
agreements. Much of the strategy development
has been accomplished through the involvement of major stakeholders. There is
considerable diversity in the types of strategies that have been established
reflecting considerable differences in national priorities and circumstances. In addition to national strategies, many countries have also contributed to regional
strategies, such as the Mediterranean Action Plan. Nevertheless, for developing countries there remains the need to
improve the technical and financial capacity to implement the provisions of
national strategies and international agreements.
Core indicators under the institutional framework theme point to a country’s willingness and commitment to shift from a segmented sector approach to a holistic, integrated sustainable development process. The two indicators selected, national sustainable development strategy and implementation of ratified global agreements, address the key themes of integrated decision-making and international conventions suggested by testing countries. Both indicators are relatively easy to develop and reflect comprehensive institutional actions in support of sustainable development. It is suggested that countries assess the degree of implementation of these indicators to improve their relevance. As a goal, it is anticipated that countries will have developed effective national sustainable development strategies reflecting the interests of all stakeholders by 2002.
4.3.15. Institutional
Capacity
|
Sub-themes |
Indicators |
Information Access
|
Number of Radios or Internet Accounts per 1000 Inhabitants |
|
Main Telephone Lines and Cell Phones per 1000 Inhabitants |
|
|
Expenditure on Research and Development as a % of GDP |
|
|
Natural Disaster Preparedness and Response |
Human and Economic Loss Due to Natural Disasters |
The ability of a country to progress towards
sustainable development is largely determined by the capacity of its people and
institutions.[109] Capacity can be measured by a country’s
human, scientific, technological, organizational, institutional, and resource
capabilities. Institutional capacity enhances participatory planning,
implementation, and monitoring related to sustainable development. An increase in capacity improves community
skills and abilities to address crucial questions, evaluate policy options and
implementation approaches, and appreciate constraints and limitations.
Communication systems, information access and
availability, the support for science and technology, and the prevention and
mitigation of natural disasters are all elements of a country’s institutional
capacity. Although a wealth of data and
information may be available, finding the appropriate scale and currency of
information is not always easy. This
situation is exacerbated in the absence of modern communications
infrastructure. In this context, the
Commission on Sustainable Development reported little progress in making
national telecommunications systems responsive to the growing demand for
electronic information.[110] The innovative delivery of health and
educational services, the alleviation of the isolation of remote areas, and the
reduction of the need for transportation represent some of the tangible
sustainable development benefits that can be derived from up-to-date electronic
and telecommunications systems.
Science and technology represent avenues for
improving sustainable development decision-making through better understanding
of ecological and social processes, enhanced efficiency of resource
utilization, and systematic assessments of current conditions and future
prospects. To maximize this potential, Agenda 21 advocates interdisciplinary
research and better communication between scientists, decision makers, and the
general public. Despite its significant role, the funding of scientific
activity, including investment in research and development, has declined in
most countries since 1992.[111]
Further to the International Decade for Natural Disaster Reduction (1990-1999), the UN General Assembly established the International Strategy for Disaster Reduction (ISDR). The objectives of this programme are to enable communities to become resilient to the effects of natural, technological and environmental hazards, and to proceed from protection against hazards to the management of risk, by integrating disaster prevention strategies with sustainable development.
Institutional capacity is a significant means for
facilitating movement towards sustainable development, but is difficult to
assess appropriately with a limited number of core indicators. The indicators
selected for this theme measure information access, communications
infrastructure, science and technology, and natural disaster preparedness and
response. These represented important
issues for the testing countries. The four indicators are primarily national in
scope and suitable for measuring trends.
They are structured to be useful to both developing and developed
countries.
METHODOLOGY SHEETS
CHAPTER
5: METHODOLOGY SHEETS
PERCENT OF POPULATION LIVING BELOW POVERTY LINE
|
||
|
Social |
Equity |
Poverty |
1. Indicator
(a) Name: Percent of Population Living Below Poverty Line.
(b) Brief Definition: The proportion of the population with a
standard of living below the poverty line.
(c) Unit of Measurement: %.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Social/Equity/Poverty.
2. Policy Relevance
(a) Purpose: The most important purpose of a poverty
measure is to enable poverty comparisons.
These are required for an overall assessment of a country's progress in
poverty alleviation and/or the evaluation of specific policies or
projects. An important case of a
poverty comparison is the poverty profile
which shows how the aggregate poverty measure can be decomposed into
poverty measures for various sub‑groups of the population, such as by
gender region of residence, employment sector, education level, or ethnic
group. A good poverty profile can help
reveal a number of aspects of poverty‑reduction policies, such as the
regional or sectoral priorities for public spending. Poverty comparisons are also made over time, in assessing overall
performance from the point of view of the poor.
(b) Relevance to
Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): Measures of poverty are a very significant
consideration of sustainable development.
The eradication of poverty remains a major challenge for policy decision
makers. Furthermore, an integrative
viewpoint which simultaneously takes account of development issues, resource
use and environmental quality, and human welfare must be taken if sustainable
progress is to be achieved.
The % Population Living Below Poverty Line
captures the prevalence of poverty by measuring the proportion of population
for whom consumption (or any other suitable measure of living standard) is
below the poverty line. An increase in
this indicator implies a worsening of the poverty situation with a greater
proportion of the population falling below the poverty line.
(c) International
Conventions and Agreements: Not
available.
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: To reduce income poverty by half by 2015.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: In
general, this indicator is linked to many other sustainable development
measures, for example, net migration rate, adult literacy rate, Gross Domestic
Product per capita, and population living below the poverty line in dryland
areas. In particular, the % Population Living Below Poverty Line is
closely associated to the Poverty Gap Index and the Squared Poverty Gap Index
which capture successively more detailed aspects of the poverty situation. The
% Population Living Below Poverty Line measures how widespread poverty
is, the Poverty Gap Index measures how poor the poor are, and the Squared
Poverty Gap Index measures the severity of poverty by giving more weight to the
poorest of the poor.
3. Methodological Description
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: A poverty measure is a summary statistic on
the economic welfare of the poor in a society.
There is no one universally accepted single measure of poverty. A number of different approaches exist (see,
for example, the methodology sheets for the Poverty Gap Index and the Squared
Poverty Gap Index). This methodology
sheet guides the reader along certain key issues, such as the different
approaches to measuring individual welfare, without prescribing decisions. Consequently, it is directed at
comparability over time within a given country, as it helps national
practitioners specify poverty indicators that match their specific situation
and preferred approach. However, this
is at the expense of international comparability.
To compute poverty measures, the following
questions related to identifying and defining the poor must be addressed first:
i) How
do we measure an individual's economic welfare?
ii) At
what level of measured welfare is a person considered poor?
(b) Measurement Methods: The
% Population Living Below Poverty Line (H) is the proportion of the
population whose economic welfare (y) is less than the poverty line (z). If q people are deemed to be poor in a
population of size n then H=q/n. For computing the % Population Living Below Poverty Line, estimates of individual economic
welfare and the poverty line are required.
i) Measuring Individual Welfare: There are a number of different approaches
to measuring welfare. The approaches
differ in terms of the importance attached to the individual's own judgment of
well‑being versus a concept of welfare decided upon by somebody
else. The former would focus on
measuring an individual's consumption of a bundle of goods and services. An example of the latter would be defining
welfare by the level of nutritional intake, even though people do not live on
food alone, or make food choices solely on the basis of nutrition. Approaches
in practice also differ according to how difficult it is to obtain certain
types of data in specific settings.
Typically one finds that poverty comparisons in
developing countries put a high weight on nutritional attainments, consistent
with the behaviour of poor people in a specific society. A comprehensive measure of consumption (for
example, total expenditure on all goods and services consumed, including non‑market
goods, such as consumption from a farmer's own product) has been more popular
than using current income in the development literature. This is due in part to
the fact that incomes are harder to measure accurately. Current consumption is also likely to give a
better indication than current income of a household's typical, long‑term,
economic welfare; income may fluctuate greatly over time, particularly in rural
economies (see Ravallion reference in section 6a below).
The following methods can be used for measuring
individual standards of living:
--Consumption per equivalent male adult: Since
households differ in size and composition, a simple comparison of aggregate
household consumption can be misleading about the welfare of individual members
of the household. Therefore, for any
given household, an equivalence scale is used to approximate the number of
single adults, based on observed consumption behaviour. There are a number of
value judgments embedded in this practice; for example, differences in needs
are reflected in differences in consumption.
Adult females and children are assigned a male equivalence of less than
one since they typically consume less; however, that may not mean that they
have lower "needs" but rather have less power within the
household. The existence of size
economies in consumption may also mean that two people can live more cheaply
together than apart (for a further discussion of these issues, see Ravallion
reference in section 6 below).
--Undernutrition: This is a distinct
concept, although closely associated with poverty. Undernutrition can be viewed as a specific type of poverty,
namely food energy poverty. There are a
number of arguments for and against using this as a measure of well‑being. A practical advantage is that this measure
does not have to be adjusted for inflation and would not be constrained by any
inadequacy of price data. Measures of
child nutritional status can help capture aspects of welfare, such as
distribution within the household which are not adequately reflected in other
indicators. However, nutrition is not
the only aspect that matters to the well‑being of people, including the
poor. Thus, poverty comparisons based
solely on nutrition alone may be limited and deceptive.
ii) Defining the Poverty Line: In practice, there are a number of
alternative approaches to defining poverty lines:
--Absolute poverty lines: An absolute
poverty line is one which is fixed in terms of the living standard indicator
being used (consumption, nutrition). It
is fixed over the entire domain of comparison, that is, a poverty line which
assures the same level of economic welfare would be used to measure and compare
poverty across provinces or different situations. The poverty line may still vary, but only so as to measure the
differences in the cost of a given level of welfare. Absolute poverty lines are more common in developing country
literature.
The most common approach to defining absolute
poverty lines is to estimate the cost in each region or at each date of a
certain bundle of goods necessary to attain basic consumption needs (this is
called the basic needs approach). The most important component of basic needs
is a recommended food energy intake, supplemented by essential non‑food
goods. To measure food energy
requirements, one needs to make an assumption about activity levels which in
turn determine energy requirements to maintain the body's metabolic rate at
rest. Once the food energy intake has
been determined, and its cost has been calculated, an allowance for non‑food
spending can be added by finding the total expenditure level at which a person
typically attains the food component of the poverty line. An alternative (lower) allowance for non‑food
goods is to use the average non‑food spending of people who can just
afford the food component of the poverty line: it can be argued that this is a
reasonable lower bound for the non‑food component of the poverty line
(see Ravallion reference in section 6a below).
--Relative poverty lines: These have
dominated developed country literature where many studies have used a poverty
line which is set at, for example, 50% of the national mean income. When the poverty line is fixed as a
proportion of the national mean, if all incomes increase by the same
proportion, there would be no change in relative inequalities and the poverty
line would simply increase by the same proportion; that is, the poverty measure
will not change. This can make such
poverty lines deceptive for some purposes, such as assessing whether poor
people are better or worse off.
A cross‑country comparison of 36 countries,
both developed and developing, revealed that real poverty lines will tend to
increase with economic growth, but they will do so slowly for the poorest
countries. Therefore, the concept of
absolute poverty appears to be more relevant to low income countries, while
relative poverty is of more relevance to high-income countries.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: In practice, most applications in developing
countries have used consumption per person.
This probably overstates the extent to which poverty is associated with
larger family sizes. But other aspects
of the poverty profile (such as assessments of the regional or sectoral poverty
profiles) tend to be more robust as a measurement choice.
It is important to note that a certain amount of
arbitrariness and value judgement are unavoidable in defining individual
welfare and any poverty line.
Therefore, the overall assessment of the poverty situation should pay
particularly attention to how the choices made affect poverty comparisons,
since these are generally what matter most to policy implications. An increasingly common practice is to
recalculate the poverty measures using various poverty lines, and to test
whether the qualitative poverty comparisons are robust to the choice.
It should be noted that there are several
comparability problems across countries in the use of data from household
surveys (see section 4 below). In
addition, definitions of poverty are lacking in some countries or vary from
country to country. These problems are
diminishing over time as survey methodologies are improving and becoming more
standardized, but they remain.
(d) Status of the Methodology: Not Available.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: The Poverty Gap Index and the Squared
Poverty Gap Index represent alternative definitions for a poverty indicator
(see section 2e above).
4.
Assessment OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: The most important source of data on living
standards is household surveys.
(b) National and International Data
Availability and Sources: The
results of household surveys can be obtained from government statistical
agencies, often via published reports.
About two thirds of the developing countries have done sample household
surveys which are representative nationally, and some (but certainly not all)
of these provide high‑quality data on living standards.
Data can also be obtained from international
agencies such as The World Bank (mostly data for low and middle income
countries emerging from the Living Standards Measurement Study and Social
Dimensions of Adjustment Project for Sub Saharan Africa). Data for developed countries can be obtained
from the Statistical Office of the European Union (Eurostat), the Luxembourg
Income Study, or the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development
(OECD).
(c) Data References: Not Available.
5. Agencies
Involved in the Development of the Indicator
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the World Bank (WB). The contact point is the
Chief, Indicators and Environmental Valuation Unit, Environment Department, WB;
fax no. (202) 477 0968.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: None.
6. References
(a) Readings:
Ravallion, M. Poverty
Comparisons. Fundamentals in Pure and Applied Economics, Volume 56, Harwood
Academic Press, Switzerland. 1994.
Shaohua, C. and Ravallion, M. Global Poverty
Measure 1987-98 and Projections for the Future. World Bank, Development
Research Group, Washington, D. C. Forthcoming.
(b) Internet site: www.worldbank.org/data
|
Social |
Equity |
Poverty |
1. Indicator
(a) Name: Gini Index of Income Inequality.
(b) Brief Definition: A summary measure of the extent to which the
actual distribution of income, consumption expenditure, or a related variable,
differs from a hypothetical distribution in which each person receives an
identical share.
(c) Unit of Measurement: A dimensionless index scaled to vary from a
minimum of zero to a maximum of one; zero representing no inequality and one
representing the maximum possible degree of inequality.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Social/Equity/Poverty.
2. Policy Relevance
(a) Purpose: The Gini Index provides a measure of income
or resource inequality within a population.
It is the most popular measure of income inequality.
(b) Relevance to
Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): This indicator is
particularly relevant to the equity component of sustainable development.
Income or resource distribution has direct consequences on the poverty rate of
a country or region. Broadly speaking, average material welfare can be defined
by the per capita Gross Domestic Product (GDP). However, statistical averages can mask the diversity that exists
within any country. Therefore, from a
sustainable development perspective, it is informative to examine income and
wealth distribution throughout a population.
A country can, for example, have a high per capita GDP figure, but its
income distribution so skewed that the majority of people are poor. This
indicator is useful both to measure changes in income inequality over time and
for international comparisons.
(c) International
Conventions and Agreements: None.
(d) International Targets/ Recommended Standards: None.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This
indicator is linked to several other sustainable development measures,
including the Poverty and Gender Equality Indicators as well as Economic
Indicators to include GDP per capita among others, and sustainable development
strategies.
3. Methodological
Description
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: The concept and definition of this indicator
are well understood and readily available.
The Gini Index measures the area between the Lorenz Curve and a
hypothetical line of absolute equality, expressed as a percentage of the
maximum area under the line of perfect equality (see Figure 1 in section 3b
below). The Gini Index is defined as
one half of the average value of the absolute differences between all possible
pairs of "incomes".
(b) Measurement Methods: The Lorenz Curve plots the cumulative
percentages of total income received (on the vertical axis) against the
cumulative percentage of recipients, starting with the poorest individual or
household (see Figure 1).
Figure 1: The Lorenz Curve and Gini Index of Income
Perfect equity Actual distribution

There are a number of choices about data, which
can influence the precise value of the Gini Index obtained. For example, a Gini Index for consumption
expenditure will typically be lower in value than one for income, even within
the same population. This is because
households smooth their consumption over time in response to income changes. At any one date, there will be some
households with unusually low incomes and others with unusually high ones; with
some opportunities for saving and/or borrowing. Thus, household consumption will be less unequal.
It is important how "income" is
measured, for example whether it is total household income or per capita
household income, or income per equivalent adult. In addition, it matters
whether or not the incomes are weighted by household size, since households
with lower income per person tend to be larger. Thus, the income share of the poorest 20% of households will be
higher than the income share of the poorest 20% of persons.
The World Bank, for example, prefers to weight by
household size and calculate the shares held by persons rather than households
for most purposes. As a general rule,
the Bank also considers consumption expenditure to be the more reliable
indicator of welfare than income, which can be excessively variable over time,
and is also more difficult to measure accurately, particularly in developing
countries. Looking at the sample of 112
countries for which Gini indices of income are reported in the World Bank's 2000 World Development Indicators, this
coefficient ranges from a low of 19.5% to a high value of 62.9%.
There are a number of ways of estimating the Gini
Index of income, and the choice depends in part on the type of data
available. Distributional data are
often available in grouped form, such as the income share of the lowest decile
of households, where households are ranked by income per person. To estimate the Lorenz Curve, and thus the
Gini Index, from such data, the World Bank often uses a software package called
POVCAL. Having specified the type of
data, the program calculates both the General Quadratic specification for the
Lorenz Curve and the Beta specification. It then calculates the Gini Index and
various other statistics, including poverty measures for each Lorenz
Curve. The program also advises which
is the better specification for the Lorenz Curve for the specific data used.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: The Gini Index is not a very discriminating
indicator. Two very different
distributions‑‑one having more inequality amongst the poor, the
other having more amongst the rich‑‑can have exactly the same Gini
Index.
Measurement errors in data sets are thought to be
greater for incomes compared to consumption expenditure, which will add to
measured inequality (see section 3b above).
Differences between countries in the measured Gini index may thus
reflect in part differences in the welfare measures used.
While the Gini Index of income (in common with
most other measures of inequality) captures information on the pattern of
relative levels of wellbeing in the population, it is independent of any
considerations of absolute living standards.
So, there is nothing to guarantee that a lower Gini Index of income
entails higher social welfare in any agreed sense, since the mean income may
have also fallen. The Gini Index is at
best a partial indicator, and other measures will be needed to complete the
picture of how levels of economic welfare are evolving in a society.
It should be noted that there are several
comparability problems across countries in the use of data from household
surveys (see section 4 below). These
problems are diminishing over time as survey methodologies are improving and
becoming more standardized, but they remain.
(d) Status of Methodology: Not Available.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: There are many other measures of inequality,
with various strengths and weaknesses.
These are discussed in Sen (1973) (see section 6a below).
4. Assessment
OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: See 3(b) above.
(b) National and International Data
Availability and Sources: The most
important source of data on living standards is household surveys. The results of these surveys can be obtained
from government statistical agencies, often via published reports. About two thirds of the developing countries
have done sample household surveys which are representative nationally, and
some (but certainly not all) of these provide high‑quality data on living
standards.
Data can also be obtained from international
agencies such as The World Bank (mostly data for low and middle-income
countries emerging from the Living Standards Measurement Study and Social
Dimensions of Adjustment Project for Sub Saharan Africa). Data for developed countries can be obtained
from the Statistical Office of the European Union (Eurostat), the Luxembourg
Income Study, or the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development
(OECD).
(c) Data References: Not Available.
5. Agencies
Involved in the Development of the Indicator
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the World Bank (WB). The contact point is the World Development Indicators Team, Development Data Group, the World Bank; fax no. (1 202) 522-1785.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: None.
6. References
(a) Readings:
Chen, S., G. Datt, M. Ravallion. POVCAL: A Program for Calculating Poverty
Measures from Grouped Data. Poverty and Human Resources Division, Policy
Research Department, Washington DC: World Bank. 1992.
Ravallion, M., and S. Chen. What Can New Survey Data Tell Us About Recent Changes in Living
Standards in Developing and Transitional Economies?. Working Paper 1. Research
Project on Social and Environmental Consequences of Growth‑Oriented
Policies, Washington DC: World Bank.
Sen, A. On Economic Inequality. Oxford: Oxford
University Press. 1973.
The World Bank.
2000 World Development Indicators.
2000.
(b) Internet site: www.worldbank.org/data
|
UNEMPLOYMENT RATE |
||
|
Social |
Equity |
Poverty |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Unemployment Rate.
(b) Brief Definition: Unemployment rate is the ratio of unemployed people to the labour force.
(c) Unit of Measurement: %.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Social/Equity/Poverty.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The unemployment rate is a measure of the unutilized labour supply of a country. If employment is viewed as the desired portion of the economically active population (labour force), unemployment can been seen as, for the most part, the undesirable portion (although some short-term unemployment can be both desirable and necessary). Unemployment rates by specific groups- such as by age, sex, occupation or industry- are also useful statistics in identifying groups of workers and sectors most vulnerable to joblessness.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): Unemployment is useful and relevant to measuring sustainable development, especially if uniformly measured over time, and considered with other socioeconomic indicators. It is one of the main reasons for poverty in rich and medium income countries and among persons with high education in low income countries (no work, no income but compensation from insurance schemes or other welfare state systems whenever they exist). It should be noted, however, that it is common to find people working full‑time but remaining poor due to the particular social conditions and type of industrial relations prevalent in their country, industry, or occupation.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: The measurements of unemployment and the labour force are defined in the International Labour Office (ILO): Resolution concerning statistics of the economically active population, employment, unemployment and underemployment, 13th International Conference of Labour Statisticians, Geneva, 1982.
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: There are no international targets regarding the rate of unemployment.
(e) Linkages
to Other Indicators: The indicator
is one among many that measure utilization or underutilization of the labour
market. Other measurements focus on
parts of the unemployment experience: youth unemployment, long-term
unemployment, unemployment by educational attainment, time-related
underemployment and the inactivity rate.
3. METHODOLOGICAL DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: The definitions for labour force, employed population, and unemployed population are well established by international agreements (see section 6 below).
i) Labour Force: The current economically active population or labour force has two components: the employed and the unemployed population. The international standard definition of labour force established by the Thirteen International Conference of Labour Statisticians (International Labour Office (ILO), 1982) is based on the following elements:
-- The survey population: All usual residents (de jure population) or all persons present in the country at the time of the survey (de facto population). Some particular groups, such as the armed forces or other populations living in institutions, nomadic people, etc., may be excluded.
-- An age limit: In countries where compulsory schooling and legislation on the minimum age for admission to employment have broad coverage and are widely respected, the age specified in these regulations may be used as a basis for determining an appropriate minimum age limit for measuring the economically active population.
In other countries, the minimum age limit should be determined empirically on the basis of (i) the extent and intensity of participation in economic activities by young people, and (ii) the feasibility and cost of measuring such participation with acceptable accuracy. Some countries also determine a maximum age for inclusion in the labour force.
-- The involvement in economic activities during the survey reference period: The concept of economic activity adopted by the Thirteenth International Conference of Labour Statisticians (1982) is defined in terms of production of goods and services as set forth by the United Nations System of National Accounts, (revised in 1993).
-- A short reference period: For example, one week or a day.
ii) Employed population: According to the 1982 international definition of employment (ILO, 1983) the employed comprise all persons above the age specified for measuring the labour force, who were in the following categories:
-- Paid employment: (i) at work: persons who, during the reference period, performed some work (at least one hour) for wage or salary, in cash or in kind; (ii) with a job but not at work: persons who, having already worked in their present job, were temporarily not at work during the reference period but had a formal attachment to their job;
-- Self‑employment: (i) at work: persons who, during the reference period, performed some work (at least one hour) for profit or family gain, in cash or in kind; (ii) with an enterprise but not at work: persons with an enterprise, which may be a business enterprise, a farm or a service undertaking, who were temporarily not at work during the reference period for some specific reason.
iii) Unemployed population: According to the 1982 international definition of employment (ILO, 1983) the unemployed comprise all persons above the age specified for measuring the labour force, who during the survey reference period were at the same time: (i) not in paid employment or self‑employment, not even for an hour; (ii) available for work; and (iii) seeking work.
(b) Measurement Methods: Household or labour force surveys are generally the most comprehensive and comparable sources for unemployment statistics. Other sources include population censuses, “employment office records” and “official estimates”. Data based on registration at employment offices tend to understate unemployment, in comparison with household or labour force surveys, because not all persons who are looking for work will register on account of eligibility requirements which may exclude those who have never worked or have not worked in a recent period. (In some countries, registration data can overstate unemployment, largely because of double-counting and failure to track persons registering, not all of whom, in any case, may be job-seekers). Official estimates are often based on a combination of sources. Population censuses generally do not probe very deeply into labour force status, resulting in magnitudes of unemployment that differ substantially (either higher or lower) from those obtained from household surveys where more questions are asked.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: As important as the unemployment rate is, it should not be interpreted as a measure of economic hardship. Doing so can produce some unfortunate results, giving unemployment a greater degree of significance than it deserves. The unemployment rate, if based on the internationally recommended standards, simply tells us the proportion of the labour force that does not have a job but is available and actively looking for work. It says nothing about the economic resources of the unemployed worker or the worker’s family. The scope of unemployment should therefore be limited to its use as a measurement of the utilization of labour, and should not be extended to other spheres of the economy of a country. Broader measures, including income-related indicators, are needed to evaluate economic hardship.
Paradoxically, low unemployment rates may well disguise substantial poverty in a country, whereas high unemployment rates can occur in countries with significant economic development and low incidences of poverty. In countries without a safety net of unemployment insurance and welfare benefits, many individuals simply cannot afford to be unemployed. Instead they eke out a living in the informal sector. In countries with well-developed social protection schemes, workers can better afford to take the time to find desirable jobs.
(d) Status of the Methodology: Well developed and employed although discrepancies do occur.
In an effort to resolve the international comparability issue for its member-countries and building on work carried out by the United States Bureau of Labour Statistics in the 1960’s, the Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) initiated research on and has published “standardized unemployment rates” adjusted to the International Labour Office (ILO) concepts. The ILO extended the process even further, beginning in 1990. The ILO-comparable unemployment rates show historical data for 25 of the ILO member States based on the ILO-comparable series (produced in ILO: 1999 Key Indicators of the Labour Market, Geneva, 1999). This table represents unemployment rates from national labour force surveys that have been reconciled with and adjusted to make the estimates conceptually consistent, with the strictest application of the ILO statistical standards. This implies that participating countries must be able to provide detailed information on the composite elements of their labour forces. At the same time, the unemployment rates obtained are in conformity with the OECD’s programme of standardized rates, which itself is based on the ILO standards. This avoids a proliferation of “international” estimates, which might not be the same. Further, all the data are expressed in terms of annual averages (or a period that is currently found to be the most representative over the year), thereby avoiding the variances that would occur if different reference periods were observed. These estimates, based on official national data, should provide the best basis currently available for making reasonable international comparisons and assumptions, although they may still contain very minor discrepancies.
(e) Alternative
Definitions/Indicators:
Underemployment rate; discouraged workers rate.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Labour force (total number of persons) and total number of unemployed persons, derived from the same survey.
(b) National and International Data Availability and Sources: Unemployment rate data are available for a total of 113 countries, all of which are broken down by gender, in the 1999 KILM with the majority of data resulting from household or labour force surveys with the remainder from employment office records, official estimates or population censuses.
(c) Data References: The data repositories used are International Labour Office (ILO) Yearbook of Labour Statistics, OECD Labour Force Statistics, and ILO Digest of Caribbean Labour. For seven countries, data were taken from national sources.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED WITH THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the International Labour Office (ILO) of the United Nations, located in Geneva. The contact point is the Focal Point for Environment and Sustainable Development, ILO; fax no. (41‑22) 798 8685.
(b)
Other
Contributing Organizations: None.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
Yearbook of Labour Statistics, ILO, Geneva;
Bulletin of Labour Statistics (quarterly) and its Supplement (January/February, April/May, July/August and October/November), ILO, Geneva;
Statistical yearbooks and other publications issued by the national statistical offices.
Surveys of Economically Active Population, Employment, Unemployment and Underemployment ‑An ILO Manual on Concepts and Methods, ILO, Geneva, 1992.
Sources and Methods: Labour Statistics, Volumes 3 and 5, ILO, Geneva, 1991 and 1990, currently updated.
System of National Accounts 1993, Commission of the European Communities, International Monetary Fund, Organisation for Economic Co‑operation and Development, United Nations, World Bank, Brussels/Luxembourg, New York, Paris, Washington, D.C., 1993;
Current international recommendations on labour statistics, ILO, Geneva, 1988. See particularly the Resolution Concerning Statistics of the Economically Active Population, Employment, Unemployment and Underemployment, adopted by the Thirteenth International Conference of Labour Statisticians (October 1982).
(b)
Internet sites:
For 1999 Key Indicators of the Labour Market, Geneva, 1999:
http://www.ilo.org/public/english/employment/strat/polemp/kilm/
For the text of the resolution concerning statistics of the economically active population, employment, unemployment and underemployment see:
http://www.ilo.org/public/english/bureau/stat/res/ecacpop.htm
For the ILO database on labour statistics, see http://laborsta.ilo.org
|
Social |
Equity |
Gender Equality |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Ratio of average female wage to male wage.
(b) Brief Definition: Obtained as the quotient of average wage rates paid to female and male employees at regular intervals for time worked or work done for particular occupations.
(c) Unit of Measurement: %.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Social/Equity/Gender Equality.
2. POLICY
RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: To assess the remuneration offered women vis-a-vis their male counterpart to ultimately determine the level of women's participation in the economy.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): The lower the ratio of wages offered to women, the less the attraction for women to join the labor force, which in turn deprives the economy of a vital component of development. This disadvantage could also be attributed to inequalities in educational opportunities for women and the need for policy makers to correct this inequity. It is generally acknowledged that if women are more educated, they are more likely to contribute to the broader productivity of society while enhancing child and maternal health and welfare.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: None.
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: Eliminate discriminatory practices in employment (Beijing).
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: The indicator has close linkages with the unemployment rate indicator because both deal with employment as a principal generator of production. It is also closely linked to indicators pertaining to education and poverty.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: There are two international sources of definitions and concepts:
(i) The concept of earnings, as applied in wages statistics, relate to remuneration in cash and in kind paid to employees, usually at regular intervals, for time worked; or work done together with remuneration for time not worked, such as for annual vacation, other paid leave or holidays. Wage rates, as part of earnings, include basic wages, cost-of-living allowances and other guaranteed and regularly paid allowances, but exclude overtime payments, bonuses and gratuities, family allowances and other social security payments made by employers. Ex gratia payments in kind, supplementary to normal wage rates are also excluded (UN International Labor Office).
(ii) Wages and salaries, as part of compensation to employees, are payable in cash or in kind and include the values of any social contributions, such as income taxes, payable by the employee even if they are actually withheld by the employer for administrative convenience or other reasons and paid directly to social insurance schemes, tax authorities, etc. on behalf of the employee. Wages and salaries in cash include payments at regular intervals, supplementary allowances payable regularly, payments to employees away from work for short periods such as holidays, and ad hoc bonuses linked to performance, commissions, gratuities and tips (UN System of National Accounts SNA).
(b) Measurement Methods: The indicator is measured by taking the average wage rates per day, week or month received by female employees as a ratio of the corresponding average wage rates for males. It could be classified further according to major divisions of economic activity, for example, agriculture, mining and quarrying, etc., to facilitate measurement of sectoral impact on the development process. Similarly, breakdowns according to age classes would provide additional information related to sustainable development trends.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: A serious limitation is the reliability and comprehensiveness of wage rate data paid to female labor. Although data is available for many countries, the quality varies significantly among countries. Wage rates determine total remuneration and measure women's contribution to total production. However, since most of the basic remuneration for women's economic and social activities remain unreported or unrecorded--and even if reported, are grossly undervalued--only imputations are possible in many countries. The indicator will be greatly influenced by the selection of wage sectors, and type and level of job. The cost of collecting the data from questionnaires and surveys can be significant. Another limitation is that female wage rates do not tell the whole story. Wages, particularly for females, may reflect under-employment. Women, especially in developing countries, may participate in informal activities where they are not classified as wage earners. The household work is outside of the production boundary in the SNA therefore these activities are not covered by this indicator.
(d) Status of the Methodology: The resolution covering the institution of an integrated system of wages statistics, including defined earnings and wage rates, was adopted by the Twelfth International Conference of Labor Statisticians in Geneva in 1973.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: An alternative indicator to the male-female wage would be the percentage contribution of women to GDP which measures activities in the production boundary that incorporate the contribution of women in the economic process as proposed in the 1993 SNA. Another alternative indicator would be the employment distribution per gender (source: labor statistics) that measures the share of women in employment. An additional alternative indicator could be the number of elected women in positions in government as % of total elected, which measures gender equality through female participation in the government (Source: national election statistics).
4. ASSESSMENT
OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: The average wage rates paid to female and male employees provide the basic information to compile this indicator.
(b) National and International Data Availability and Sources: The data are mainly reported by departments or ministries of labor in most countries. It is obtained either through questionnaires or surveys from the different economic sectors of the economy. Average earnings are usually derived from payroll data supplied by a sample of establishments together with data on hours of work and on employment. Occasionally, wage indices are reported in the absence of absolute wage data. In some other cases, information is compiled on the basis of social insurance statistics.
(c) Data References: Data are published by the ILO in the Yearbook of Labor Statistics.
5. AGENCIES
INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the International Labor Office (ILO). The contact point is the Focal Point for Environment and Sustainable Development; fax no. (41 22) 798 8685.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: None.
6. REFERENCES
(a)
Readings: The
full text of the resolution listed in section 3e above can be found in Current International Recommendations on
Labor Statistics (Geneva 1988).
Further information can be obtained from other ILO publications: An Integrated System of Wages Statistics: A Manual on Methods (Geneva 1979).
Statistical Sources and Methods; Vol. 2 Employment, Wages and Hours of Work (Establishment Surveys) (Geneva 1987); Vol. 4 Employment, Unemployment, Wages and Hours of Work (Administrative Records and Related Sources) (Geneva 1989).
(b) Internet site: International Labor Office: http://www.ilo.org
|
Social |
Health |
Nutritional Status |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Nutritional Status of Children.
(b) Brief
Definition: Children under age five
whose weight-for-age and height-for-age is between either 80% and 120% of the
reference value of the country, or within two standard deviations of this
value.
(c) Unit
of Measurement: %.
(d) Placement
in the CSD Indicator Set: Social/Health/Nutritional
Status.
2. POLICY
RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The purpose of this indicator is to measure
long term nutritional imbalance and malnutrition, as well as current
under-nutrition.
(b) Relevance
to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): Health and
development are intimately interconnected.
Meeting primary health care needs and the nutritional requirement of
children are fundamental to the achievement of sustainable development.
Anthropometric measurements to assess growth and development, particularly in
young children, are the most widely used indicators of nutritional status in a
community. The percentage of low
height-for-age reflects the cumulative effects of under-nutrition and
infections since birth, and even before birth.
This measure, therefore, should be interpreted as an indication of poor
environmental conditions and/or early malnutrition. The percentage of low weight-for-age reflects both the cumulative
effects of episodes of malnutrition or chronic under-nutrition since birth and
current under-nutrition. Thus, it is a
composite indicator which is more difficult to interpret.
(c) International
Conventions and Agreements: The WHO
Global Strategy for Health for All by the Year 2000 and its Ninth General
Programme of Work, together with the United Nations World Summit for Children
represent international agreements relevant to this indicator.
(d) International
Targets/Recommended Standards: At
least 90% of children within a population should have a weight-for-age that
corresponds to the reference values given in section 1b above by the year
2000. This target has been established
by the World Health Organization's (WHO) Global
Strategy for Health for All by the Year 2000.
(e) Linkages
to Other Indicators: This indicator
is closely linked with adequate birth weight. It is also associated with such
socioeconomic and environmental indicators as squared poverty gap index, access
to safe drinking water, infant mortality rate, life expectancy at birth,
national health expenditure devoted to local health care, Gross Domestic
Product (GDP) per capita, environmental protection expenditures as a percent of
GDP, and waste water treatment coverage.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying
Definitions and Concepts: A
national or international reference population is used to calculate the
indicators for weight-for-age and height-for-age. A WHO Working Group has recommended that the best available data
for this has been established by the United States National Center for Health
Statistics (see references in section 6 below). This data may be used for children up to five years of age, since
the influence of ethnic or genetic factors on young children is considered
insignificant.
Low weight and
low height are defined as less than the value corresponding to two standard
deviations below the median of the respective frequency distributions for
healthy children (see WHO, 1981 in section 6 below).
(b) Measurement
Methods: The proportion of children
under five with acceptable weight-for-age (or height-for-age) can be calculated
by using the following formula:
Numerator: number of children under five with
weight-for-age (or height-for-age) acceptable x 100.
Denominator: total number of children under five weighed.
For height,
supine length is measured in children under two, and stature height in older
children.
(c) Limitations
of the Indicator: Available data
may be outdated, site-specific, and lack a time series perspective. In some countries, the age of children is
difficult to determine. It is also
difficult to measure the height of children under two with accuracy and
consistency.
(d) Status
of the Methodology: Not Available.
(e) Alternative
Definitions/Indicators: Not
Available.
4. ASSESSMENT
OF DATA
(a) Data
Needed to Compile the Indicator: The
data needed to compile this indicator are the number of children under five
weighed; and the number of children under five with weight-for-age or
height-for-age within the national reference values.
(b) National
and International Data Availability and Sources: The data are routinely collected by ministries of health at the
national and subnational levels for most countries. The primary national
sources of data are the ministries of health.
(c) Data
References: Not Available.
5. AGENCIES
INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead
Agency: The lead agency is the
World Health Organization (WHO). At
WHO, the contact point is the Director, Department of Nutrition for Health and
Development; fax no. (41 22) 791 3111.
(b) Other
Contributing Organizations: None.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
WHO Working on
Infant Growth. An evaluation of infant growth: the use and interpretation of
anthropometry in infants. Bulletin of the
World Health Organization, 1995, 73(2): 165-174.
An Evaluation of Infant Growth. WHO Working Group on Infant Growth
(WHO/NUT/94.8). Geneva, World Health Organization, 1994.
Physical Status: The Use and Interpretation of
Anthropometry. Report of a WHO Expert Committee. Geneva, World Health
Organization, 1995 (WHO Technical Report Series, No. 854).
The Growth Chart. A Tool for Use in Infant and Child
Health Care. Geneva, World Health Organization, 1986.
WHO Global Database on Child Growth and Malnutrition
(WHO/NUT/97.4). Geneva, World Health Organization, 1997.
A Guide to Nutritional Assessment. Geneva, World
Health Organization, 1988.
(b) Internet site: World Health Organization. http://www.who.org
|
MORTALITY RATE UNDER 5 YEARS
OLD |
||
|
Social |
Health |
Mortality |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Mortality Rate Under 5 Years Old.
(b) Brief Definition: Under-5 mortality refers to the probability
of dying before age 5, per 1,000 newborns.
(c) Unit of Measurement: Per thousand live births.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Social/Health/Mortality.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: This indicator measures the risk of dying in infancy and early
childhood.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): The
reduction of childhood mortality is one of the most strongly and universally
supported development goals. In
high-mortality settings, a large fraction of all deaths occur at ages under 5
years. Despite considerable progress in
reducing child mortality, there remains a large gap between more- and
less-developed countries in risks of dying before the age of 5 years: for instance, during 1995-2000, under-5
mortality stood at 11 per thousand in the more developed regions but at 156 per
thousand in the least developed countries (DESA, World Population Prospects: The
1998 Revision). The gap between
more- and less- developed countries is larger in proportional terms for death
rates in early childhood than during the adult ages. Under-5 mortality levels are influenced by poverty; education,
particularly of mothers; the availability, accessibility and quality of health
services; health risks in the environment, such as access to safe water and
sanitation; and nutrition, among other factors.
(c) International Conventions and
Agreements: The 1990 World Summit
for Children Programme of Action adopted a target of reducing the 1990 under-5
mortality rates by one third, or to 70 per 1,000 live births, whichever is
less, by the year 2000. The Programme of
Action of the International Conference on Population and Development further
encouraged countries with intermediate mortality levels to achieve an under-5
mortality rate below 60 deaths per 1,000 births by the year 2005, and all
countries to achieve an under-5 mortality rate below 45 per 1,000 live births
by 2015. It is currently one of the
indicators included in the Augmented Physical Quality of Life Index, which is
among the quantitative criteria for the identification of least developed
countries within the United Nations.
Many other international agreements, including Agenda 21, also refer to
the general goal of reducing childhood mortality.
(d) International Targets/Recommended
Standards: In addition to the
quantitative goals mentioned in section 2(c) above, the World Health
Organization’s Ninth General Programme of Work includes the goal of reducing
the under-5 mortality rate by one third or to 70 per 1,000 live births,
whichever is less, between the years 1990 and 2000.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators:
This indicator is closely related
to life expectancy at birth. It is more
generally connected to many other social and economic indicators, including
those listed in section 3b above.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: Standard statistical definitions of the
terms “live birth” and “death” are put forth in the United Nations Principles and Recommendations for a Vital
Statistics System (para. 46):
LIVE BIRTH is the complete expulsion or extraction from its mother of a product of conception, irrespective of the duration of pregnancy, which after such separation breathes or shows any other evidence of life such as beating of the heart, pulsation of the umbilical cord, of definite movement of voluntary muscles, whether or not the umbilical cord has been cut or the placenta is attached; each product of such a birth is considered live-born regardless of gestational age.
DEATH is the permanent disappearance of all evidence of life at any time after live birth has taken place (post-natal cessation of vital functions without capability of resuscitation).
(b) Measurement Methods: The under-5 mortality rate is derived
from estimates of births and deaths gathered in vital statistical systems,
censuses and surveys. Where data on
deaths and births are complete, or adjustments for age misstatement and
incompleteness can be made, the under-5 mortality rate can be calculated
directly. The details can be found in
demographic or actuarial references that describe construction of life tables,
for example, Pressat (1972) or Shryock and Siegel (1980). When such data are unavailable from
registration systems or maternity history data in sample surveys, the under-5
mortality rate can be calculated through indirect or modelling methods based on
special questions asked in censuses or demographic surveys. For information on these estimates see the
Manual X and MORTPAK-LITE references listed in section 6 below.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: There are often problems in collecting the
information required for calculating the under-5 mortality rate in less
developed countries where routine data collection in the health services may
omit many infant and child deaths. Some
countries do not follow the standard definition, given above, of “live
birth”. However, adjustments can
sometimes be made for incomplete registration and age misstatement, and in many
developing countries maternity-history data gathered in nationally
representative sample surveys provide a sound basis for estimating levels and
trends of under-5 mortality. Sample
surveys have been more successful at obtaining estimates of under-5 mortality
than of adult mortality, and because of this, information about mortality of
young children is currently substantially more complete and more timely than is
information about the mortality of adults.
If the necessary data are available,
the rate can be calculated separately for boys and girls, and for geographic
and social subgroups (based on parents’ characteristics). It is also useful to disaggregate the
under-5 period into separate rates for under age one (infant mortality rate)
and for ages 1-4 years.
(d) Status of the Methodology: Well developed and widely employed.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: The infant mortality rate is another
indicator of early child mortality for which quantitative goals have been set
forth at recent international conferences.
The infant mortality rate is the number of deaths under 1 year of age
during a period of time per 1000 live-births during the same period.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: The under-5 mortality rate is derived from
data on births and deaths occurring under the age of 5 years, as described in
section 3(b) above.
(b) National and International Data
Availability and Sources: Data are
now available for most countries thanks to special surveys of representative
samples of the population whenever vital registration systems are not
available. Surveys that rely on
maternity histories, in which women are asked to give the date of birth and age
of death (if applicable) of each live-born child, are used in many household
surveys, but care must be taken to avoid age misreporting and to ensure that
there is a complete report of deaths.
Retrospective questions about the survival of all children born included
in censuses and surveys, and analyses using indirect estimation procedures, are
also considered to be reliable sources.
(c) Data References: Original data sources include vital
registration, sample registration systems, surveillance systems, censuses, and
demographic surveys. Information needed
for this indicator is collected by the United Nations on a regular basis. For all countries, survey and registration
data are evaluated and, if necessary, adjusted for incompleteness by the
Population Division, Department of Economic and Social Affairs (DESA) as part
of its preparations of the official United Nations population estimates and
projections. Past, current and
projected estimates of infant mortality are prepared for all countries by the
Population Division; DESA and appear in the United Nations publication, World Population Prospects: The 1998 Revision. Demographic monitoring done by government
statistical offices often allows desegregation of information to show
differences within countries. Surveys
are generally designed to provide estimates for major regions within countries
as well as at the national level.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the United Nations Department of Economic and
Social Affairs. The contact point is
the Director, Population Division, fax no. (1 212) 963 2147.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: The United Nations Statistics Division/
DESA; and the United Nations Children’s Fund (UNICEF); and the World Health
Organization (WHO).
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
Pressat, R. Demographic
Analysis: Methods, Results, Applications.
London, Edward Arnold; Chicago, Aldine Atherton. 1972.
Shryock, H.S, and J.S.Siegel. The
Methods and Materials of Demography.
U.S. Government Printing Office,
Washington, D.C. 1980.
WHO. Development of Indicators for Monitoring Progress Towards Health
for All by the Year 2000. Geneva, 1981, p. 69.
WHO. Global Health for All Data
Base. Geneva, 1994.
WHO. Global Strategy for Health for All by the Year 2000. Geneva,
1981.
DESA. Manual X: Indirect Techniques
for Demographic Estimation. Population Division. United Nations Sales No. E. 83.XIII.2, New York, 1983.
DESA. MORTPAK-LITE - The United Nations Software Package for Mortality
Measurement. Population Division. United Nations, New York, 1988.
DESA. World Population Prospects: The 1994 Revision. Population Division.
United
Nations Sales No. E.95.XIII.16, New York, 1995.
Hill K. Approaches to the
measurement of childhood mortality: A
comparative review. Population Index 57(3):368-382, Fall,
1991.
United Nations. Report of the International Conference on Population and Development, Programme
of Action of the International Conference on Population and Development, Cairo,
Egypt, September 5-13, 1994. United
Nations Document A/CONF. 171/13.
United Nations. Principles
and Recommendations for a Vital Statistics System. United Nations publication, Sales No. E.73.XVII.9.
UNICEF. The State of the World’s
Children. 2000.
WHO and UNICEF. Measurement of overall and cause-specific mortality in infants and
children. Report of a Joint
WHO/UNICEF Consultation, 15-17 December 1992. Unpublished document WHO/ESM/UNICEF/CONS/92.5.
DESA. Demographic Yearbook 1997. Statistics Division. United Nations Sales No. E/F.99.XIII.1, 1999.
(b) Internet sites:
Statistics are available at:
http://www.undp.org/popin/wdtrends/wdtrends.htm
http://www.un.org/Depts/unsd/social/health.htm
|
LIFE EXPECTANCY AT BIRTH |
||
|
Social |
Health |
Mortality |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Life Expectancy at Birth.
(b) Brief Definition: The average number of years
that a newborn could expect to live, if he or she were to pass through life
subject to the age-specific death rates of a given period.
(c) Unit of Measurement: Years of life.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Social/Health/Mortality.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: Measures how many years on average a new-born baby is expected to
live, given current age-specific mortality risks. Life expectancy at birth is an indicator of mortality conditions
and, by proxy, of health conditions.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): Mortality, with fertility and migration, determines the size of
human populations, their composition by age, sex, and ethnicity, and their
potential for future growth. Life
expectancy, a basic indicator, is closely connected with health conditions,
which are in turn an integral part of development. The International Conference on Population and Development (ICPD)
Programme of Action notes that the unprecedented increase in human longevity
reflects gains in public health and in access to primary health-care services
(paragraphs 8.1 and 8.2), which Agenda 21 recognizes as an integral part of
sustainable development and primary environmental care (paragraph 6.1). The ICPD Programme of Action highlights the
need to reduce disparities in mortality and morbidity among countries and
between socio-economic and ethnic groups.
It identifies the health effects of environmental degradation and
exposure to hazardous substances in the work-place as issues of increasing
concern. Life expectancy is included as
a basic indicator of health and social development in, among others, the
Minimum National Social Data Set endorsed by the United Nations Statistical
Commission at its 29th session in 1997, the UNDG-CCA indicator set
and the OECD/DAC core indicators.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: The Declaration of Alma Ata (1978) set a
target of life expectancy greater than 60 years by the year 2000; the World
Summit for Social Development (WSSD) also included this goal. The ICPD Programme of Action specified that:
life expectancy should be greater than 65 years by 2005 and 70 years by 2015
for countries that currently have the highest levels of mortality; and 70 years
and 75 years, respectively, for the other countries (ICPD Programme of Action,
paragraph 8.5).
(d) International Targets/Recommended
Standards: See above.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator reflects many social,
economic, and environmental influences.
It is closely related to other demographic variables, and it is related
to human health and the environment as well as economic indicators.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: Calculation of life expectancy at birth is
based on age-specific death rates for a particular calendar period. The death
rates are commonly tabulated for ages 0 to1 years, 1 to 5 years, and for 5-year
age groups for ages 5 and above.
(b) Measurement Methods: Several steps are needed to derive life
expectancy from age-specific death rates; the details can be found in
demographic or actuarial references that describe construction of life tables,
for example, Pressat (1972) or Shryock and Siegel (1980). For a description of the methodology that is
linked to computer routines to aid in the calculation, see MORTPAK-LITE
(section 6, below).
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: Where data on deaths by age are of good
quality, or adjustments for age misstatement and incompleteness can be made,
the life expectancy at birth can be calculated directly from registered deaths
and population counts, which are usually based on census enumerations,
evaluated and, if necessary, adjusted.
When data on deaths by age are unavailable from registration systems or
sample surveys, the life expectancy at birth can be calculated through
"indirect" methods based on special questions asked in censuses or
demographic surveys. For information on
these indirect estimates, see Manual X and MORTPAK-LITE (section 6, below).
(d)
Status
of the Methodology: Not available.
(e) Alternative Definitions/ Indicators: Another indicator of general mortality in
common use is the Crude Death Rate (CDR), which is the number of deaths in a
period (commonly a one-year period) divided by the mid-period population; it is
usually expressed in units of deaths per 1,000 population. The CDR requires less detailed data for its
calculation than does life expectancy at birth, but it has the drawback of
being influenced to a substantial degree by population age structure: two populations with the same CDR could have
markedly different mortality risks, age by age.
Life expectancy may be calculated
separately for males and females, or for both sexes combined. If the underlying data permit, life
expectancy may also be calculated for subnational regions, or for other
population subgroups. Life expectancy
can also be presented for particular ages after birth. For instance, life expectancy at age 60
represents the number of additional years an individual who has just reached
age 60 can expect to live, given current age-specific mortality rates for older
ages.
4. ASSESSMENT
OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Some data sources yield estimates of
age-specific mortality for only some age groups, so that it may be necessary to
employ separate adjustments to data from different sources in order to arrive
at a complete and consistent set of rates for a given period of time. Most countries tabulate data from death
registration systems at the sub-national level. The under-5 mortality rate and
the crude death rate are more readily available for sub-national units than is
life expectancy at birth.
(b) National and International Data
Availability and Sources: Data are
collected by the United Nations on a regular basis and are available for most
countries from vital registration systems or surveys. For all countries, census
and registration data are evaluated and, if necessary, adjusted for
incompleteness by the Population Division, United Nations Department of
Economic and Social Affairs (DESA) as part of its preparations of the official
United Nations population estimates and projections.
(c) Data References: Past, current and projected estimates of
life expectancy at birth are prepared for all countries by the Population
Division, DESA and appear in the United Nations publication, World Population Prospects: The 1998
Revision (see section 6, below).
5. AGENCIES
INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead
Agency: The lead agency is the United Nations
Department of Economic and Social Affairs (UN/DESA). The contact point is the Director, Population Division, fax no.
(1 212) 963 2147.
(b) Other
Contributing Organizations: The United Nations Statistics Division/DESA;
and the United Nations Children’s Fund (UNICEF); and the World Health
Organization (WHO).
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
DESA. World Population Prospects: The 1998 Revision. Vol. I Comprehensive Tables Population Division. United Nations
Sales No. E.99.XIII.9, New York, 1999.
DESA. World Population Prospects: The 1998 Revision. Vol. III Analytical Report. Population
Division. United Nations, ESA/P/WP.156, New York, 1999.
DESA. Manual X: Indirect Techniques for Demographic Estimation. Population
Division United Nations Sales No. E.83.XIII.2, New York, 1983.
DESA. MORTPAK-LITE: The United Nations Software Package for Mortality
Measurement. Population
Division. United Nations, New York, 1988.
DESA. Demographic Yearbook. Statistical Division. United Nations Sales
No.E/F.95.XIII.1,1995. 1993.
Pressat, R. Demographic
Analysis: Methods, Results, Applications.
London, Edward Arnold; Chicago, Aldine Atherton. 1972.
United Nations. Report of the International
Conference on Population and Development. Programme of Action of the
International Conference on Population and Development. United Nations Document A/CONF. 171/13. Cairo, Egypt, September 5-13, 1994.
Shryock, H.S, and J.S.Siegel. The
Methods and Materials of Demography.
U.S. Government Printing Office,
Washington, D.C. 1980.
(b) Internet sites:
Statistics are available at:
http://www.undp.org/popin/wdtrends/wdtrends.htm
http://www.un.org/Depts/unsd/social/health.htm
|
PERCENT OF POPULATION WITH ADEQUATE
SEWAGE DISPOSAL FACILITIES |
||
|
Social |
Health |
Sanitation |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Percent of Population with Adequate Sewage
Disposal Facilities.
(b) Brief
Definition: Proportion of
population with access to a sanitary facility for human excreta disposal in the
dwelling or immediate vicinity.
(c) Unit
of Measurement: %.
(d) Placement
in the CSD Indicator Set:
Social/Health/Sanitation.
2. POLICY
RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: To monitor progress in the accessibility of
the population to sanitation facilities.
(b) Relevance
to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): This represents a basic indicator useful for
assessing sustainable development, especially human health. Accessibility to adequate excreta disposal
facilities is fundamental to decrease the faecal risk and the frequency of
associated diseases. Its association
with other socioeconomic characteristics (education, income) and its
contribution to general hygiene and quality of life also make it a good
universal indicator of human development.
When broken down by geographic (such as rural/urban zones) or social or
economic criteria, it also provides tangible evidence of inequities.
(c) International
Conventions and Agreements: Agenda
21 UNCED (1992) indicates the need for universal coverage and the Second World
Water Forum and Ministerial Conference, The Hague, March 2000 established the
target of universal coverage by the year 2025.
(d) International
Targets/Recommended Standards: International
targets for this indicator have been established under the auspices of the
World Health Organization (WHO). The
Vision 21 of the Water Supply and Sanitation Collaborative Council provides
targets of 100% coverage by the year 2025.
(e) Linkages
to Other Indicators: The indicator
is closely associated with other socioeconomic indicators (see section 2(b)
above), particularly the proportion of population with access to improved water
sources. The indicator represents two
of the eight elements of primary health care.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying
Definitions and Concepts: Definitions
for sanitary facility and population covered are required.
i) Sanitary
facility: "A sanitary
facility is a unit for disposal of human excreta which isolates faeces from
contact with people, animals, crops and water sources. Suitable facilities range from simple but
protected pit latrines to flush toilets with sewerage. All facilities, to be effective, must be
correctly constructed and properly maintained".
ii) Population covered: This includes the urban and rural population
served by connections to public sewers; (pit privies, pour-flush latrines,
septic tank, etc.)
(b) Measurement
Methods: This indicator may be
calculated as follows: The numerator is
the number of people with improved excreta-disposal facilities available
multiplied by 100. The denominator is
the total population.
(c) Limitations
of the Indicator: The availability
of facilities does not always translate into their utilization.
(d) Status
of the Methodology: Not Available.
(e) Alternative
Definitions/Indicators: This
indicator could also be expressed as the percent of people without access to
improved excreta disposal facilities.
The population that must be used in the numerator is the number of
people without access to improved excreta disposal facilities. If the data available are in terms of
proportion of households for which sanitation is available, it should be
possible to convert this into a percentage of population, using average figures
for household size. Also see section
3(c) above.
4. ASSESSMENT
OF DATA
(a) Data
Needed to Compile the Indicator: The
number of people with access to improved
excreta disposal facilities, and the total population.
(b) National
and International Data Availability and Sources: Routinely collected at the national and sub‑national
levels in most countries using censuses and surveys. In order to arrive at more
robust estimates of sanitation coverage, two main data source types are
required. First, administrative or
infrastructure data which report on new and existing facilities. Second, population-based data derived from
some form of national household survey.
(c) Data
References: Not Available.
5. AGENCIES
INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead
Agency: The lead agency is the
World Health Organization (WHO). The
contact point is the Coordinator, Water, Sanitation and Health, WHO; fax no.
(41 22) 791 4159.
(b) Other
Contributing Organizations: None.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
WHO, Development of Indicators for Monitoring
Progress Towards Health for All by the Year 2000. Geneva, WHO, 1981, p. 29.
WHO, Global Strategy for Health for All by the
Year 2000. Geneva, WHO, 1981.
WHO, Ninth General Programme of Work Covering the
Period 1996-2001. Geneva, WHO,
1994.
World Health
Organization, Division of Operational Support in Environmental Health, October
1995.
World Health
Organization. National and Global
Monitoring of Water Supply and Sanitation.
CWS Series of Cooperative Action for the Decade, No. 2, 1982.
World Health
Organization. Water Supply and Sanitation Sector Monitoring Report (WSSSMR),
1990.
(b) Internet site: World Health Organization. http://www.who.org
|
POPULATION WITH ACCESS TO SAFE DRINKING WATER |
||
|
Social |
Health |
Drinking Water |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Population with Access to Safe Drinking
Water.
(b) Brief
Definition: Proportion of
population with access to an improved water source in a dwelling or located
within a convenient distance from the user's dwelling.
(c) Unit
of Measurement: %.
(d) Placement
in the CSD Indicator Set:
Social/Health/Drinking Water.
2. POLICY
RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: To monitor progress in the accessibility of
the population to improved water sources.
(b) Relevance
to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): Accessibility to improved water sources is
of fundamental significance to lowering the faecal risk and frequency of
associated diseases. Its association
with other socioeconomic characteristics, including education and income, which
also makes it a good universal indicator of human development. When broken down by geographic (such as
rural/urban zones), or social or economic criteria, it provides useful
information on equity issues.
(c) International
Conventions and Agreements: Agenda
21 of UNCED (1992) indicates the need for universal coverage and the Second
World Water Forum and Ministerial Conference, The Hague, March 2000 established
the target of universal coverage by the year 2025.
(d) International
Targets/Recommended Standards: International
targets for this indicator have been established under the auspices of the
World Health Organization (WHO). The
Vision 21 of the Water Supply and Sanitation Collaborative Council provides
targets of 100% coverage by the year 2025.
(e) Linkages
to Other Indicators: This indicator
is closely associated with other socioeconomic indicators on the proportion of
people covered by adequate sanitation.
These indicators are among the eight elements of primary health
care. It also has close links to other
water indicators such as withdrawals, reserves, consumption, or quality. (See section 2(b) above.)
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying
Definitions and Concepts: This
indicator requires definitions for several elements.
i) Population
covered: This includes urban
and rural population served by house connections, or without house connections
but with reasonable access to other sources.
ii) Reasonable
access to water: In urban
areas, a distance of not more than 200 metres from a house to a public stand
post or any other adequate point source may be considered reasonable access. In rural areas, reasonable access implies
that people do not have to spend a disproportionate part of the day fetching
water for the family's needs.
iii) Minimum amount of water: The amount of water needed to satisfy
metabolic, hygienic, and domestic requirements. This is usually defined as
twenty litres of safe water per person per day.
iv) Safe water: The water does not contain biological or
chemical agents at concentration levels directly detrimental to health. It is
likely that treated surface waters, and water such as that from protected
boreholes, springs, and sanitary wells are safe. Untreated surface waters, such
as streams and lakes, should be considered safe only if the water quality is
regularly monitored and considered acceptable by public health officials.
(b) Measurement
Methods: This indicator may be
calculated as follows: The numerator is
the number of persons with access to an adequate amount of safe drinking water
in a dwelling or located within a convenient distance from the user's dwelling
multiplied by 100. The denominator is
the total population.
(c) Limitations
of the Indicator: The existence of
a water outlet within reasonable distance is often used as a proxy for
availability of safe water. The
existence of a water outlet, however, is no guarantee in itself that water will
always be available or safe, or that people always use such sources.
(d) Status
of the Methodology: Not Available.
(e) Alternative
Definitions/Indicators: This
indicator may be also expressed as the percent of population without access to
improved water sources. Thus the population indicated in the numerator would be
those who do not have access to improved water sources. If these data are available in terms of the
proportion of households, it should be possible to convert this into a
percentage of the population, using average figures for household size.
4. ASSESSMENT
OF DATA
(a) Data
Needed to Compile the Indicator:
The number of people with access to improved water sources, and the
total population. Data on the source of
water, for example, house tap or yard pipe, would provide additional meaning to
this indicator.
(b) National
and International Data Availability and Sources: Routinely collected at the national and sub‑national levels
in most countries using censuses and surveys. Two data sources are common:
administrative data that report on new and existing facilities, and population
data derived from some form of household survey or census.
(c) Data
References: Not Available.
5. AGENCIES
INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead
Agency: The lead agency is the
World Health Organization (WHO). The
contact point is the Coordinator, Water, Sanitation and Health, WHO; fax no.
(41 22) 791 4159.
(b) Other
Contributing Organizations: None.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
WHO, Global Strategy for Health for All by the
Year 2000. Geneva, WHO, 1981.
WHO, Ninth General Programme of Work Covering the
Period 1996-2001. Geneva, WHO,
1994.
WHO, Development of Indicators for Monitoring Progress Towards Health
for All by the Year 2000. Geneva,
WHO, 1981, p. 40.
World Health
Organization. National and Global Monitoring of Water Supply and Sanitation. CWS Series of Cooperative Action for the
Decade, No. 2, 1982.
World Health
Organization. Water Supply and Sanitation Sector Monitoring Report (WSSSMR), 1990.
Program of Action of the Ministerial Drinking Water
Conference, 1994.
(b) Internet site: World Health Organization. http://www.who.org
|
PERCENT OF POPULATION WITH ACCESS TO PRIMARY HEALTH CARE
FACILITIES |
||
Social |
Health |
Healthcare Delivery |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Percentage of Population with
Access to Primary Health Care Facilities.
(b) Brief Definition: Proportion of population with access to primary health care facilities.
(c) Unit of Measurement: %.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Social/Health/Healthcare Delivery.
2. Policy
Relevance
(a) Purpose: To monitor
progress in the access of the population to primary health care.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): Accessibility
of health services, going beyond just physical access, and including economic,
social and cultural accessibility and acceptability, is of fundamental
significance to reflect on health system progress, equity and sustainable
development. It should, however, be
supplemented by indicators of utilization of services, or actual coverage, and
quality of care. In addition,
accessibility is an instrumental goal, a means to an end, to achieving the
final intrinsic goals of the system.
The more accessible a system is, the more people should utilize it to
improve their health.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements:
World Health Assembly Resolution WHA34.36, Global Strategy for Health
for All by the Year 2000.
(d) International Targets/Recommended
Standards: International targets have been outlined in
the Global Strategy for Health for All and more recently in the Ninth General
Programme of Work. In addition, many countries
have established national targets.
(e) Linkage to Other Indicators: This
indicator is associated with other socioeconomic indicators on the proportion
of people covered by other essential elements of primary health care. It should also, as indicated above, be
linked with indicators of utilization of services and quality of care.
3. Methodological
Description
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts:
(i) Primary health care: is essential health care made accessible at a cost the country and community can afford, with methods that are practical, scientifically sound and socially acceptable.
(ii)
Population
covered: All the population living in the service area of the health facility.
(iii) Access: Definition of accessibility may vary between countries, for different parts of the country and for different types of services.
(b) Measurement Methods: The
numerator - the number of persons living within a convenient distance to
primary care facilities; the denominator - the total population.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: The
existence of a facility within reasonable distance is often used as a proxy for
availability of health care. If the
existing primary care facility, however, is not properly functioning, provides
care of inadequate quality, is economically not affordable, and socially or
culturally not acceptable, physical access has very little value as this
facility is bypassed and not utilized.
Therefore, other factors, as mentioned in 3(e) have to be taken into
account.
(d) Status of the Methodology: Not
Available.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: In
the light of 3(c) the indicator must be supplemented by indicators of
availability of services, quality of services, acceptability of services,
affordability of services, or utilization of services.
4. Assessment of Data
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: The
number of people with access to primary health care facilities, total
population in service areas of health facilities.
(b) National
and International Data Availability and Sources: No routinely available
data. Information has to be acquired
through surveys. Data Sources include Ministries of Health and National
Statistical Offices.
(c) Data References: Not Available.
5. Agencies Involved in the Development of the Indicator
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the World
Health Organization (WHO). The contact
point is the Director, Department of Organization of Health Services Delivery,
fax: 41 22 791 4747.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations:
None.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
HIS
Development Strategy and Catalogue of Health Indicators, Geneva 2000 (EIP/OSD/00.12)
WHO, The
World Health Report 2000; Health Systems: Improving Performance, Geneva,
2000.
El-Bindari-Hammad, Smith, DL, Primary Health Care Reviews, Guidelines and
Methods, WHO, Geneva, 1992.
WHO, Development
of Indicators for Monitoring Progress towards Health for All by the Year 2000,
Geneva, 1981.
WHO, Evaluating
the Implementation of the Strategy for Health for All by the Year 2000, Common
Framework: Third Evaluation, Geneva, 1996.
WHO, Health
Centres: the 80/20 Imbalance; Burden of Work Vs Resources, Geneva, 1999.
(b)
Internet site:
World Health Organization. http://www.who.org
|
Social |
Health |
Healthcare
Delivery |
1. Indicator
(a) Name: Immunization Against Infectious Childhood
Diseases.
(b) Brief
Definition: The percent of the
eligible population that have been immunized according to national immunization
policies. The definition includes three components: (i) the proportion of
children immunized against diphtheria, tetanus, pertussis, measles,
poliomyelitis, tuberculosis and hepatitis B before their first birthday; (ii)
the proportion of children immunized against yellow fever in affected countries
of Africa; and (iii) the proportion of women of child-bearing age immunized
against tetanus.
(c) Unit
of Measurement: %.
(d) Placement
in the CSD Indicator Set:
Social/Health/Healthcare Delivery.
2. Policy Relevance
(a) Purpose: This indicator monitors the implementation
of immunization programs.
(b) Relevance
to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): Health and
sustainable development are intimately interconnected. Both insufficient and inappropriate
development can lead to severe health problems in both developing and developed
countries. Addressing primary health
needs is integral to the achievement of sustainable development. Particularly relevant is the provision of
preventative programmes aimed at controlling communicable diseases and
protecting vulnerable groups. Good
management of immunization programmes, essential to the reduction of morbidity
and mortality from major childhood infectious diseases, is a basic measure of
government commitment to preventative health services.
(c) International
Conventions and Agreements: See
sections 2(d) and 6.
(d) International
Targets/Recommended Standards: In
the Global Strategy for Health and
the Ninth General Programme at Work, all
children and 90% of children respectively, should be immunized against
diphtheria, tetanus, pertussis, measles, poliomyelitis, tuberculosis and
hepatitis B (see section 6 below). The
1992 World Health Assembly agreed
that all children should be immunized against hepatitis B as part of expanded
national programmes of immunization. In
addition, all children in affected countries of Africa should be immunized
against yellow fever. At the World Summit for Children it was
resolved that all pregnant women should be immunized against tetanus.
(e) Linkages
to Other Indicators: This indicator
is linked to other health indicators, particularly those associated with the
young, such as infant mortality and life expectancy. It is influenced by such indicators as health expenditure and the
proportion of population in urban areas.
3. Methodological Description
(a) Underlying
Definitions and Concepts: A child
is considered adequately immunized against a disease when he or she has
received the following number of doses:
tuberculosis (1 dose); diphtheria, tetanus and pertussis (DTP) (2 or 3
doses according to the immunization scheme adopted in the country);
poliomyelitis (3 doses of live or killed vaccine); measles (1 dose); hepatitis
B (3 doses); and yellow fever (1 dose).
A pregnant woman is considered adequately immunized against tetanus if
she has received at least 2 doses of tetanus toxoid during pregnancy or was
already previously immunized.
(b) Measurement
Methods:
i) Infant
population: The numerator is
the number of infants fully immunized with the specified vaccines x 100, while
the denominator is the number of infants surviving to age one. For
immunizations against tuberculosis the denominator is the number of live
births. If the national schedule provides for immunization in a different age
group, such as measles in the second year of age, the value should be the
percentage of children immunized in the target age group. For the proper management of immunization
programmes, it is however essential to be able to break down the data in such a
way as to show the percentage covered in the first year of life (or second year
for measles immunization).
ii) Women
of child-bearing age: The
numerator is the number of women immunized with two or more doses of tetanus
toxoid during pregnancy x 100, while the denominator is the number of live
births.
(c) Limitations
of the Indicator: It is useful to
have a composite indicator of adequate coverage by immunization. However, it is easier to collect data on the
global coverage of a population against one disease than on the immunization of
each child against all target diseases at the same time. This is why in most countries only the
former data are easily available and collected.
The percent of
pregnant women immunized with two or more doses of tetanus toxoid during
pregnancy is rather easy to monitor through routine data collection in the
health services. However, it
underestimates the percent of pregnant women actually immunized against
tetanus. It does not tale into account
women who are already adequately immunized when becoming pregnant and therefore
do not require new doses of tetanus toxoid during pregnancy. Women in this category are not numerous in
countries where neonatal tetanus is still an issue and where, accordingly, this
indicator is mainly used. But in some
countries in transition, with long-standing child immunization programmes, the
percent of pregnant women receiving tetanus toxoid is misleading as a
significant number of them may be already immunized at the moment of pregnancy.
The indicator
does not reflect other health preventative measures, such as education, diet,
and pollution prevention. The
international targets are not very meaningful for many countries.
(d) Status
of the Methodology: Not Available.
(e) Alternative
Definitions/Indicators: Not
available.
4. Assessment
of Data
(a) Data
Needed to Compile the Indicator: The number of infants fully immunized
against: DTP; poliomyelitis; measles;
the number of infants surviving to age one year; against tuberculosis; the number of births; the number of infants
living in African countries exposed to yellow fever; the number of pregnant
women immunized against tetanus; and the number of live births.
(b) National
and International Data Availability and Sources: Data is readily available from national immunization programmes
of most countries, at least at the national level. Reporting of vaccinations
performed annually or nation-wide surveys are the most common data sources.
(c) Data
References: Not Available.
5. Agencies Involved in the Development of the
Indicator
(a) Lead
Agency: The lead agency is the
World Health Organization (WHO). The
contact point is the Director, Office of Global and Integrated Environmental
Health, WHO; fax no. (41 22) 791 4123.
(b) Other
Contributing Organizations: The
United Nations Children’s Fund is a cooperating agency.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
WHO. Global Strategy for Health for All by the
Year 2000. Geneva, WHO, 1981.
WHO. Ninth
General Programme of Work Covering the Period 1996-2001. Geneva, WHO, 1994.
WHO. World Health Assembly Resolution. WHO45.19, 1992.
WHO. WHO Vaccine Preventable Diseases Monitoring
System; 1999 Global Summary.
WHO/V&B/99.17,1999.
WHO. WHO-Recommended Standards for Surveillance
of Selected Vaccine-Preventable Diseases. WHO/EPI/GEN/99.012,1999.
UNICEF. World Summit for Children. Paris, UNICEF, 1990.
(b) Internet site: World Health Organization. http://www.who.org
|
Social |
Health |
Healthcare
Delivery |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Contraceptive Prevalence Rate.
(b) Brief
Definition: This indicator is
generally defined as the percent of women or reproductive age using any method
of contraception. It is usually
calculated for married women of reproductive age, but sometimes for other base
population, such as all women of reproductive age, or for men of a specified
age group.
(c) Unit
of Measurement: %.
(d) Placement
in the CSD Indicator Set: Social/Health/Healthcare
Delivery.
2. Policy Relevance
(a) Purpose: The measure indicates the extent of people's
conscious efforts to control their fertility.
It does not capture all actions taken to control fertility, since
induced abortion is common in many countries.
(b) Relevance
to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): Increased
contraceptive prevalence, is, in general, the single most important proximate
determinant of inter-country differences in fertility, and of ongoing fertility
declines in developing countries.
Contraceptive prevalence can also be regarded as an indirect indicator
of progress in providing access to reproductive health services including
family planning, one of the eight elements of primary health care. Agenda 21 discusses reproductive health
programmes, which include family planning, as among the programmes that promote
changes in demographic trends and factors towards sustainability.
Health
benefits include the ability to prevent pregnancies that are too early, too
closely spaced, too late, or too many.
Current contraceptive practice depends not only on people's fertility
desires, but also on availability and quality of family planning services;
social traditions that affect the acceptability of contraceptive use; and other
factors, such as marriage patterns and traditional birth-spacing practices,
that independently influence the supply of children.
(c)
International
Conventions and Agreements: Family
planning is discussed in the broader context of reproductive, sexual health,
and reproductive rights by Chapter VII of the Programme of Action,
International Conference on Population and Development (ICPD); and Strategic
Objective C of the Platform for Action adopted at the Fourth World Conference
on Women.
(d) International
Targets/Recommended Standards:
International agreements do not establish specific national or global
targets for contraceptive prevalence.
Recent international conferences have strongly affirmed the right of
couples and individuals to choose the number, spacing and timing of their
children, and to have access to the information and means to do so. The ICPD Programme of Action states that
"Governmental goals for family planning should be defined in terms of
unmet needs for information and services.
Demographic goals, while legitimately the subject of government
development strategies, should not be imposed on family-planning providers in
the form of targets or quotas for the recruitment of clients" (paragraph
7.12).
(e) Linkages
to Other Indicators: The level of
contraceptive use has a strong, direct effect on the total fertility rate (TFR)
and, through the TFR, on the rate of population growth. Use of contraception to prevent pregnancies
that are too early, too closely spaced, too late, or too many has benefits for
maternal and child health. This
indicator is also closely linked to access to primary health care services
particularly those pertaining to reproductive health care. Furthermore, it has broader and predictive
implications for many other sustainable development indicators and issues, such
as rate of change of school-age population, woman's participation in the labour
force, and natural resource use.
3. Methodological Description
(a) Underlying
Definitions and Concepts: The
standard indicator is the percentage currently using any method of
contraception among married women aged 15-49 or 15-44. In this context, the married group usually
includes those in consensual or common-law unions in societies where such
unions are common. Contraceptive prevalence is also frequently reported for all
women of reproductive age, and statistics are sometimes presented for men
instead of, or in addition to, women.
Users of
contraception are defined as women who are practising, or whose male partners
are practising, any form of contraception.
These include female and male sterilization, injectable and oral
contraceptives, intrauterine devices, diaphragms, spermicide, condoms, rhythm,
withdrawal and abstinence, among others.
For this
indicator, too early is defined as
under age 15. Such adolescents are 5 to
7 times more likely to die in pregnancy and childbirth than women in the lowest
risk group of 20-24 years. Too closely spaced means women who
become pregnant less than two years after a previous birth. Greater adverse consequences to women and
their children are experienced under such circumstances. Women who have had five or more pregnancies
(too many) or who are over 35 (too late), also face a substantially
higher risk than the 20-24 year old group.
When
presenting information about contraceptive use, it is useful to show the data
according to specific type of contraception; by social characteristics such as
rural/urban or region of residence, education, marital status; by 5-year age
group, including specific attention to adolescents aged under 18 years; and by
family size.
(b) Measurement
Methods: Measurements of
contraceptive prevalence come almost entirely from representative sample
surveys of women or men of reproductive age.
Current use of contraception is usually assessed through a series of
questions about knowledge and use of particular methods.
(c) Limitations
of the Indicator: For surveys,
under-reporting can occur when specific methods are not mentioned by the
interviewer. This can be the case with
the use of traditional methods such as rhythm and withdrawal, and use of
contraceptive surgical sterilization. The
list of specific methods is not completely uniform in practice, but in most cases
is sufficiently consistent to permit meaningful comparison. "Current" use is often specified
in surveys to mean "within the last month", but sometimes the time
reference is left vague, and occasionally longer reference periods are
specified. With statistics from family
planning programmes, the accuracy of the assumptions is often difficult to
assess. The derived estimates obviously
omit contraceptive users who do not use the programme's services, and thus tend
to underestimate the overall level of use.
Service
statistics maintained by family planning programmes are also sometimes used to
derive estimates of contraceptive prevalence.
In such cases it is necessary to apply assumptions in order to derive
estimates of numbers of current users from the records of numbers of family
planning clients. Base population
statistics (numbers of women or of married women) are in this case usually
derived from census counts, adjusted to the reference date by the Population
Division of the Department of Economic and Social Affairs (DESA), as part of
its preparations of the official United Nations population estimates and
projections.
(d) Status
of the Methodology: The methodology
is widely used in both developed and developing countries.
(e) Alternative
Definitions/Indicators: None.
4. Assessment of Data
(a) Data
Needed to Compile the Indicator:
Number of women of childbearing age using family planning methods. Number of women of childbearing age. Both data sets are frequently limited to
married women.
(b) National
and International Data Availability and Sources: The most recent United Nations review of contraceptive prevalence
includes statistics for 119 countries and areas with information dating from
1975 or later. These countries include
90 per cent of world population. This
review includes contraceptive prevalence measures for all women of reproductive
age in 64 countries and areas and for samples of men in 27 countries and areas.
Contraceptive
prevalence is one of the few topics for which data coverage is more complete
and more current for developing than for developed countries. Most surveys provide estimates for major
regions within countries as well as at the national level. Less frequently the sample design permits
examining prevalence at the state, provincial, or lower administrative
levels. In addition to those with
national or near-national coverage, surveys covering this topic are sometimes
available for particular geographic areas.
Data are much less widely available for population groups other than
married women, although such information has increased in recent years.
(c) Data
References: Executing agencies for
surveys covering this topic vary.
National statistical offices and ministries of health are the most
common source, but other governmental offices, non-governmental voluntary or
commercial organizations are frequently involved. Many surveys are conducted in collaboration with international
survey programmes. The Population
Division, DESA regularly compiles information about contraceptive prevalence
and publishes it in the annual World
Population Monitoring report.
5. Agencies Involved in the Development of the
Indicator
(a) Lead
Agency: The lead agency is the
World Health Organization (WHO). The
contact point is the Director, Office of Global and Integrated Environmental
Health, fax no. (41 22) 791 4123.
(b) Other
Contributing Organizations: The
United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs (DESA), with the
contact point as the Director, Population Division, fax no. (1 212) 963 2147.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
Levels and Trends of Contraceptive Use as Assessed in
1988 (United Nations, Sales No. E.89.XIII.4).
Levels and Trends of Contraceptive Use as Assessed in
1994 (United Nations, ST/ESA/SER.A/146, forthcoming).
Programme of
Action of the International Conference on Population and Development, Report of the International Conference on
Population and Development, Cairo, Egypt, September 5-13, 1994. (United Nations Document - A/CONF. 171/13).
World Population Monitoring, 1993 (Sales No. E.95.XIII.8, New York).
World Population Monitoring, 1996
(ESA/P/WP.131).
(b) Internet site: World Health Organization. http://www.who.org
![]()
|
CHILDREN REACHING GRADE 5 OF PRIMARY EDUCATION |
||
|
Social |
Education |
Education Level |
1. INDICATOR
(a)
Name:
Children reaching grade 5 of primary education.
(b) Brief Definition: The estimated proportion of the population
entering primary school who reach grade 5.
(c) Unit of Measurement: expressed as a percentage (%).
(d)
Placement in the CSD Indicator
Set: Social/Education/Education
Level.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: This indicator provides an estimate of the proportion of children
entering primary school who reach grade 5 of primary education and thereby
acquire basic literacy.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme):
Education is a process by which human beings and societies reach their
fullest potential. Education is
critical for promoting sustainable development and improving the capacity of
people to address environment and development issues. It is also critical for achieving environmental and ethical
awareness, values, and skills consistent with sustainable development and
effective public participation in decision-making.
Policy-makers concerned with
children’s retention in schools and their eventual acquisition of basic
literacy and numeracy skills would find this indicator particularly useful as
it indicates the functioning, or internal efficiency of the education system
and its ability to turn out literate people.
Appropriate policies and measures
could then be adopted to address problems of grade repetition and drop-out as
well as bottlenecks with regard to retention in school. Indirectly, this indicator reflects the
quality and performance of schools.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: None.
(d)
International Targets/Recommended
Standards: With values that can
vary form 0 to 100%, the general target would be 100%. This implies complete retention of children
in school to grade 5 (or zero drop-out).
(e)
Linkages to Other Indicators: Literacy is closely linked to indicators reflecting basic needs
such as education, capacity-building, information and communications, and the
role of major groups. Besides assessing
the functioning of the education system, this indicator is often used together
with enrolment ratios to depict respectively the complementary aspects of
participation and retention in education.
It can be cross-referenced with adult literacy which reflects the
cumulative output of the education system over the years.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: Efforts
to extend literacy depend on the ability of the education system to ensure full
participation of school-age children and their successful progression to reach
at least grade 5, which is the stage when they are believed to have firmly
acquired literacy and numeracy. By
estimating the percentage survival to grade 5, this indicator measures the
proportion of the population entering primary school who eventually reach grade
5.
(b) Measurement Methods: This indicator can be derived using the
reconstructed cohort student flow method, which is analogous to that used in
demography to determine survival rates from one age to the next. This method first derives the grade
promotion, repetition and drop-out rates based on available data on enrolment
and repeaters by grade for two consecutive years using Markov chain
calculations. It then applies these
rates to a cohort of 1,000 students in grade 1 to reconstruct their passage
through the education system assuming that these student flow rates by grade
remain unchanged throughout the life-time of the cohort. From the reconstructed cohort student flow,
the percentage survival to grade 5 can be derived.
If pi, ri and di represent
respectively promotion rate, repetition rate and drop-out rate at grade i of
primary education, they can be derived but the following condition on the flow rates
have to be satisfied:
pi
+ ri + di = 1
0
< pi, ri, di < 1
When these conditions are not
satisfied, the method used to derive survival is no longer valid since it is
not possible to isolate the original cohort and any inferences made will be of
a dubious nature.
A fundamental assumption is that the
probability of the cohort entering primary school, irrespective of the age of
the pupils not reaching grade 5 is the same as that of the entrance age
population for this level of education.
That is, the drop-out rate is the same for all pupils regardless of the
age at which they enter school.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: The measurement method described in 4b
above is rather a cumbersome one to administer. In addition, in some countries such as Germany and Austria, the
concept of grade 5 does not exist in primary education. Moreover, data on enrolment and repetition
by grade may not be available for consecutive years for some countries and
certain regions or schools within a country.
The reconstructed cohort student flow method assumes that promotion
rates, repetition rates and drop-out rates do not change from year to
year. When applying this method to
sub-national and school levels, the derived drop-out rates by grade may
sometimes present a negative value due to transfers between schools. A suggested solution to this problem is to
collect data on transferred students by grade, and to deduct them from the
corresponding enrolment figures before applying the reconstructed cohort
method.
(d) Status of the methodology: This indicator has the status of a
recommendation since the basic data elements to derive it are included in the
Revised Recommendation Concerning the International Standardization of
Education Statistics adopted by the UNESCO General Conference at its twentieth
session, Paris, 1978.
(e) Alternative Definitions: In
the absence of data on repeaters, the methodology outlined in section 4 (b)
above may be adjusted by assuming that the repetition rate is 0. However, this assumption, in addition to
those described in 4 (b), presupposes that the repetition rates are quite low
and that their magnitude does not vary much between grades.
An
alternative indicator for education effectiveness would be school drop-out
rates, grade by grade.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Basic data required to derive this indicator
include: enrolment and repeaters by grade for at least two consecutive years.
(b) National and International Data
Availability and Sources: Data on enrolment and repeaters by grade in
primary school are generally available in most countries and also at
sub-national and school levels. For
sound measurement, this indicator must be supported by consistent data for
gender and area (such as rural/urban zones).
(c) Data References:
UNESCO, World Education Indicators.
UNESCO/USAID, Global Education
Database.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the United Nations Educational, Scientific
and Cultural Organization (UNESCO). The
contact point is the Director, UNESCO Institute of Statistics, UNESCO, fax: (33
1) 45 68 55 20.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: None.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
World Education Report (UNESCO), 1995,
1998.
Education for All: Year 2000
Assessment (UNESCO)
International Standard
Classification of Education Manuals
Statistical Information System in
Education
(b) Internet
site: http://www.unesco.org/statistics
|
ADULT SECONDARY EDUCATION
ACHIEVEMENT LEVEL |
||
|
Social |
Education |
Education level |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name:
Adult Secondary Education Achievement Level.
(b) Brief Definition: The proportion of the population of working
age (25-64 years) which has completed at least (upper) secondary education.
(c) Unit of Measurement: %.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Social/Education/Education
Level.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: This indicator provides a measure of the quality of the human
capital stock within the adult population of approximately working age. Those who have completed secondary education
can be expected either to have an adequate set of skills relevant to the labour
market or to have demonstrated the ability to acquire such skills. The indicator can be made more dynamic by
presenting the results in 10-year age bands (25-34, 35-44, 45-54, 55–64) in
order to give an indication of changes over time in actual secondary education
completion rates.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development: Education is a process
by which human beings reach their fullest potential. It is critical for promoting and communicating sustainable
development and improving the capacity of people to address environment and development
issues. It facilitates the achievement
of environmental and ethical awareness, values, and skills consistent with
sustainable development and effective public participation in decision-making.
(c)
International Conventions and
Agreements: None.
(d)
International Targets/Recommended
Standards: International agreements do not establish
specific national or global targets for this indicator.
(e)
Linkages to Other Indicators: Education is closely linked to indicators
reflecting basic needs such as literacy, capacity-building, information and
communications and the role of major groups.
This indicator also is a broad measure of the quality of the human
capital stock within countries (and hence, an indication of the potential for
future sustained development).
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: The International
Standard Classification of Education (1997) defines levels of education
(pre-primary, primary, secondary etc) in an internationally comparable manner.
(b) Measurement Methods: To calculate the adult secondary education
achievement level, divide the number of adults aged 25-64 years who have
completed secondary or tertiary education by the corresponding total population
aged 25-64 years and multiply by 100.
(c)
Limitations of the Indicator:
Educational achievement levels are
mostly based on self-declaration or declaration of the head of household, which
may give rise to concerns about data reliability and consequently
comparability, especially for females in many developing countries. Some countries determine completion of
secondary education by making inference using data on the number of years of
schooling received rather than qualifications obtained. In some cases, the available data only
indicate whether an individual has studied at secondary level as opposed to
having completed secondary education.
(d)
Status of the methodology:
This indicator has the status of an
international recommendation since the basic data elements to derive it are
included in the Revised Recommendation
concerning the International Standardization of Education Statistics adopted
by the UNESCO General Conference at its twentieth session, Paris, 1978. In the latest revised Principles and
Recommendations for Population and Housing Censuses in 1999, the concerned UN
agencies co-operated with international experts in upgrading the methodology
used in collecting statistics on literacy and educational characteristics.
(e)
Alternative Definitions:
Where relatively small numbers of
the population have completed secondary education, alternative indicators are
either the Adult Primary Education Achievement Level (although this may be
closely correlated with the Adult Literacy Rate) or the Adult Lower Secondary
Education Achievement Level.
4.
ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a)
Data Needed to Compile the
Indicator: Data on
the number of people of the relevant age
(recommended to be 25-64) who have completed at least secondary
education and the corresponding population of the same age.
(b)
National and International Data
Availability and Sources: Data are usually collected during national population censuses, or
during household surveys such as Labour Force Surveys. Official statistics
exist for many countries in the world but are often out-of-date due to censuses
taking place every ten years and late census data release. For sound measurement, the ratio must be
supported by consistent data by gender and age-group.
(c)
Data References:
http://www.unesco.org/statistics
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the United Nations Educational, Scientific
and Cultural Organization (UNESCO). The
contact point is the Director, UNESCO Institute for Statistics, UNESCO; e-mail:
uis@unesco.org and fax (33-1) 45 68 55 20.
(b) Other Organizations: The International Labour Organization (ILO)
also collects statistics on educational attainment from national Labour Force
Surveys and the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD)
publishes such data.
6. REFERENCES
(a)
Readings:
UNESCO,
World Education Report, 1995, 1998.
UNESCO, Statistics of Education in
Developing Countries: an Introduction to their Collection and Analysis, 1983.
(b)
Internet site: http://www.unesco.org/statistics
|
ADULT LITERACY RATE |
||
|
Social |
Education |
Literacy |
1. INDICATOR
(a)
Name: Adult
literacy rate.
(b)
Brief Definition:
The proportion of the adult population aged 15 years and over that is
literate.
(c)
Unit of Measurement:
%.
(d)
Placement in the CSD Indicator
Set: Social/Education/Literacy.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: This indicator provides a measure of the stock of literate persons
within the adult population who are capable of using written words in daily
life and to continue to learn. It
reflects the accumulated accomplishment of education in spreading literacy. Any shortfall in literacy would provide
indications of efforts required in the future to extend literacy to the
remaining adult illiterate population.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme):
Literacy is critical for promoting and communicating sustainable
development and improving the capacity of people to address environment and
development issues. It facilitates the
achievement of environmental and ethical awareness, values, and skills
consistent with sustainable development and effective public participation in
decision-making.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: The World Declaration and The Dakar
Framework for Action on Education for All.
(d) International Targets/Recommended
Standards: The general target is
full literacy, i.e., 100% adult literacy rate.
This is the goal of most national efforts and international campaigns to
eradicate illiteracy.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: Literacy is closely linked to indicators
reflecting basic needs such as education, capacity building, information and
communication, and the role of major groups.
The literacy rate indicates the status, or stock of literates at a given
point in time. It is often linked to
school enrolment ratios and population reaching grade 5 of primary education,
both of which influence the accumulation of the stock of literates.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts:
The Revised Recommendation concerning the
International Standardization of Educational Statistics suggests the
following definitions for statistical purposes:
(i)
A
person is literate who can with understanding both read and write a
short simple statement related to his/her everyday life.
(ii)
A
person is functionally literate who can engage in all those activities
in which literacy is required for effective functioning of his/her group and
community and also for enabling him/her to continue to use reading, writing and
calculation for his/her own and the community’s development.
Persons who do not fulfill (i) or
(ii) are termed illiterates or functional illiterates respectively. Adult literacy, in international practice,
applies only to the population aged 15 years and over, classified by sex, by
five-year age-groups, and by urban/rural zones.
(b) Measurement Methods: To calculate the
adult literacy rate, divide the number of literates aged 15 years and over by
the corresponding total population aged 15 years and over and multiplied by
100.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: As
literacy is a relative concept, no single measure can separate the literate
from the illiterate. A cut-off point is
not totally appropriate because there are many different forms and degrees of
literacy. A person might be literate in
numeric terms, but have difficulty with text comprehension. Literacy can be defined in terms of work,
school, home, and social spheres. Each
area of life requires different types of literacy skills.
Literacy status is mostly based on
self-declaration or declaration of the head of household, which gives rise to
concerns about data reliability and consequently comparability, especially for
females in many developing countries.
Some countries estimate literacy rates by making inference using data on
educational attainment, such as by equating persons with no formal schooling as
illiterates in the absence of theoretical and empirical basis. Increasingly, literacy should be determined
by actual test measurement of reading, writing and numeracy abilities of each
person within a social context. It may,
however, be time-consuming, costly and operationally complex to organize such
measurements during national population censuses.
(d) Status of the methodology: This
indicator has the status of an international recommendation since the basic
data elements to derive it are included in the Revised Recommendation concerning the International Standardization of
Education Statistics adopted by the UNESCO General Conference at its
twentieth session, Paris, 1978. In the
latest revised Principles and Recommendations for Population and Housing
Censuses in 1999, the concerned UN agencies co-operated with international
experts in upgrading the methodology used in collecting statistics on literacy
and educational characteristics.
Further development of easy-to-use, robust and low-cost literacy test
methodologies and their use in spreading the practice of literacy test
measurement shall help to improve the quality of international statistics on
literacy in the future.
(e) Alternative Definitions: To meet the limitations discussed in 4c
above, the definition and measurement of functional literacy represents an
alternative indicator. This is usually
measured for four or five components of literacy such as "prose",
"document", and "quantitative" domains. The aim is to measure the degree of
functionality, rather than the dichotomy literate vs. illiterate.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Data on the number of literates or
illiterates and the corresponding population aged 15 years and over.
(b) National and International Data
Availability and Sources: Data are
usually collected during national population censuses, or during household
surveys or literacy surveys. Official
statistics exist for most countries in the world but are often out-of-date due
to census taking every ten years and late census data release. The United Nations Educational, Scientific
and Cultural Organization (UNESCO) carries out periodic estimations and
projections to fill data gaps. In
principle, literacy data are available at both the national and sub-national
levels. For sound measurement, the
ratio must be supported by consistent data by gender, age-group and area (such
as rural/urban zones). The primary data
sources are national population censuses and household surveys. International data sources include the
Statistics Division of the United Nations Department of Economic and Social
Affairs (DESA); and the UNESCO Institute for Statistics.
(c) Data References: The UNESCO Statistics WEB site http://unescostat.unesco.org/; UNESCO
Statistical Yearbook 1999; UNDP Human Development Reports; World Bank World
Development Reports.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the United Nations Educational, Scientific
and Cultural Organization (UNESCO). The
contact point is the Director, UNESCO Institute for Statistics, UNESCO; e-mail:
uis@unesco.org
and fax (33-1) 45 68 55 20.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: The Statistics Division of the United
Nations DESA also collects and publishes statistics on literacy from national
population censuses, besides providing the data to UNESCO for processing and
dissemination.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
UNESCO Statistical Yearbook (annual editions); Compendium of
Statistics on Illiteracy: 1995 Edition,
UNESCO, Paris. 1995.
(b) Internet site: http://unescostat.unesco.org/
|
FLOOR AREA PER PERSON |
||
|
Social |
Housing |
Living Conditions |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Floor Area per Person.
(b) Brief Definition: Defined as the median usable living space per
person.
(c) Unit of Measurement: m².
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Social/Housing/Living Conditions.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: This is a key indicator of housing quality, which measures the
adequacy of living space in dwellings.
A low value for the indicator is a sign of overcrowding.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): This is a key indicator measuring the
adequacy of the basic human need for shelter.
Human settlement conditions in many parts of the world are deteriorating
mainly as a result of a low level of investment, although such investment has been
shown to generate considerable public and private sector investment. Housing policies, particularly in urban
areas, greatly affect the living conditions of people. In low income settlements, reduced space per
person can be associated with certain categories of health risks.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: This indicator is one of ten "key"
housing indicators approved by the Commission on Human Settlements (Resolution
14/13), to be collected in all countries and in a number of cities in each
country, to measure progress towards meeting the objectives of the Global
Shelter Strategy. Countries are to use
the indicators to provide the basis for their country reports to the Second
United Nations Conference on Human Settlements. Also, the Habitat Agenda, endorsed at the Second United Nations
Conference on Human Settlements (Habitat II), explicitly mentions ‘provision
of sufficient living space and avoidance of overcrowding’, as part of the
commitments of UN member states, to be measured by this indicator. This indicator has also been selected for
the Common Country Assessment (CCA) indicators’ framework prepared by the UNDG for evaluation, advocacy and policy dialogue at
the country level.
(d) International Targets/Recommended
Standards: No targets have been
developed for this indicator.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator is closely linked to several
other socio-economic indicators with which it should be considered, including
population density, rate of growth of urban population, area and population of
informal settlements, and infrastructure expenditure per capita.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: The floor area should include all living
space, along with bathrooms, internal corridors and closets. Covered semi‑private spaces such as
corridors, inner courtyards or verandas should be included in the calculation
if used by the household for cooking, eating, sleeping, or other domestic
activities. Floor area refers to a
housing unit, defined as a separate and independent place of abode intended for
habitation by one household at the time of the census or other inquiry.
(b) Measurement Methods: The median floor area of a unit should be
divided by the average household size. If data from household surveys or from a
recent census are available, these can be used. In the absence of better data,
the floor area of the median priced dwelling may be used as an approximation,
although this may not be an accurate estimate. If the median cannot be
estimated, then the average should be provided.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: Results
for this indicator may vary considerably if collected at the city, national,
urban/rural levels, given the variations in land availability and types of
human settlements and activities.
Informal settlements in particular are likely to have much less space
per person, as are disadvantaged groups.
Various levels of data collection are necessary to provide a full
picture of this specific housing outcome.
Housing size and housing quality are usually but not necessarily linked,
and floor area per person may not give a complete picture of living
conditions. Cultural values affect
sensitivity to crowding. For these
reasons, interpretation of this indicator is difficult, and should be completed
in conjunction with related indicators.
(d) Status of the Methodology: Not Available.
(e) Alternative Definitions: Alternative measures of crowding have been
the subject of data collection and reporting in international statistical
compendia. The two most common are
persons per room and households per dwelling unit, each of which was included
among data collected during the first phase of the Housing Indicators Programme
(UNCHS, World Bank, 1992). Surveys have
shown that floor area per person is more precise and policy‑sensitive
than the other two indicators. Habitat,
the United Nations Centre for Human Settlements (UNCHS) has developed and
tested a series of crowding indicators in low‑income settlements. They include, among others, percentage of
housing units with more than one household, in‑house living area per
person, percentage of housing units with more than three persons per room,
number of households per building and per housing unit, number of persons per
building.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Median floor area of housing units; average
number of persons per household.
(b)
National and International Data
Availability and Sources: The data are generally
available at the country level. This
indicator was collected in 52 countries (one city per country) by the Shelter
Sector Performance Indicators Programme in 1992 (UNCHS, World Bank). It has been collected worldwide by the UNCHS
Indicators Programme in preparation for the Habitat II Conference (1996). Results are available from the following
Habitat website: www.urbanobservatory.org/indicators.
(c) Data References: Primary data sources include censuses or
household surveys. The indicator is
reported in the Housing Indicators
Programme report listed in section 6 below.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED
WITH THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the United Nations Centre for Human
Settlements (Habitat). The contact
point is the Head, Urban Secretariat, UNCHS (Habitat); fax no. (254 2) 623080.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: The World Bank.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
World Bank. Housing: Enabling Markets to Work. The World Bank, Washington
D.C., 1993 (A World Bank Policy Paper).
UNCHS (Habitat), World Bank. The Housing Indicators Programme. Report
of the Executive Director (Volume I). UNCHS, Nairobi, 1993.
UNCHS (Habitat). Monitoring the Shelter Sector. Housing
Indicators Review. UNCHS, Nairobi, 1995.
UNCHS (Habitat). Human Settlement, Interventions Addressing
Crowding and Health Issues, UNCHS, Nairobi, 1995.
(b) Internet site:
UNCHS (Habitat) home page: http://www.urbanobservatory.org/indicators/database
|
NUMBER OF RECORDED CRIMES PER 100,000 POPULATION |
||
|
Social |
Security |
Crime |
1. INDICATOR
(a)
Name: Number
of Recorded Crimes per 100,000 Population.
(b)
Brief Definition:
Total crimes recorded in criminal (police) statistics, regardless of
type.
(c)
Unit of Measurement:
Police recorded cases/100,000 population, per country and year.
(d)
Placement in the CSD Indicator
Set: Social/Security/Crime.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The Economic and Social Council, in its resolution 1984/48 of 25
May 1984, requested the Secretary-General to maintain and develop a United
Nations crime-related database by continuing to conduct surveys of crime trends
and operations of criminal justice systems.
The major goal of the United Nations Surveys on Crime Trends and the
Operations of Criminal Justice Systems is to collect data on the incidence of
recorded crime and the operations of criminal justice systems with a view to
improving the analysis and dissemination of that information globally.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): It
is widely recognized that crime is not merely a problem of illegal behaviour
and law enforcement but also a phenomenon closely associated with economic and
social development. The phenomenon of
crime, through its impact on society, can hamper the overall development of
nations. It can undermine people’s
spiritual and material well-being, compromise human dignity and create a
climate of fear and violence that endangers personal security and erodes the
quality of life. If development is to
be sustainable, it should be able to provide living conditions that would
enable people to lead peaceful and secure lives.
On the other hand, imbalanced or
inadequately planned development can worsen social conditions that contribute
to a rise in criminality especially where the fruits of development are not
equitably distributed among the people.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: The United Nations Congress on the
Prevention of Crime and Treatment of Offenders formulated a non-binding plan of
action (e.g., Milan Plan of Action of 1985) and recommendations (The Caracas
Declaration of 1980) on the subject.
(d) International
Targets/Recommended Standards: None.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator is linked to other indicators
of poverty and income disparities (e.g., percent of population living below
poverty line, unemployment rate, gini index of income inequality), population
change (e.g., population growth rate, population of urban formal and informal
settlements) as well as those on economic performance (e.g., GDP per
capita). Rapid population growth is
included among those indicators that are generally considered crime-generating.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: Total
recorded crimes regardless of type per year within a country as interpreted
as such by the countries responding officials.
These crimes refer to the number of penal code offences or their
equivalent (i.e., various special law offences) but excluding minor road
traffic and other petty offences, brought to the attention of the police or
other law enforcement agencies and recorded by one of these agencies. It follows that this indicator refers only
to police-reported crimes.
(b) Measurement Methods: Questionnaire sent to a single official
statistical body officially representing the country. The indicator is computed as the number of total crimes reported
to the police in a given year multiplied by 100,000 and divided by the total population
of the country in the same year.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: Definitions of what is or is not a crime may
vary for different countries. So may
readiness to report to the police, readiness to record by the police, methods
of counting, accuracy and reliability of the recorded figures reported.
(d) Status of the methodology: While the indicator is used by many
developed and developing countries, improvements are needed in the collection
of the data/information needed to construct the indicator.
(e) Alternative Definitions:
Results from ICVS (Percentage of pop, victimized by crime, regardless of
police recording).
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Midyear population figures per country;
(Police) statistics on total recorded crimes.
(b) National and International Data
Availability and Sources: Data are normally available from local and
regional police agencies and are collated by a national agency, often a
statistical division within the Ministry or Department of Justice.
(c) Data References: National Statistical Institutes; UN Survey
of Crime Trends and Operations of Criminal Justice Systems; UN Statistical Year
Book, World Bank.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the United Nations Office for Drug Control
and Crime Prevention.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations:
United Nations Interregional Crime and Justice Research Institute, Turin
(Rome), Italy (UNICRI); European Institute for Crime Prevention and Control,
Helsinki, Finland (HEUNI).
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
International Crime Victim Survey
(ICVS): International Conference on Surveying Crime – A Global Perspective,
Conference Report, UNICRI, 1998.
Criminal Victimization in the
Developing World, UNICRI, 1995.
United Nations Rules, Norms and
Standards at website: http://www.uncjin.org/Standards/
standards.html.
(b) Internet
sites:
|
POPULATION GROWTH RATE |
||
|
Social |
Population |
Population change |
1.
INDICATOR
(a) Name: Population Growth Rate.
(b) Brief Definition: The average annual rate of change of population size during a specified period.
(c) Unit of Measurement: Usually expressed as a percentage.
2.
POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The population growth rate measures how fast the size of the population is changing.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): Agenda 21 identifies population growth as one of the crucial elements affecting long-term sustainability (see especially paragraphs 5.3 and 5.16). Population growth, at both national and subnational levels, represents a fundamental indicator for national decision-makers. Its significance must be analyzed in relation to other factors affecting sustainability. However, rapid population growth can place strain on a country's capacity for handling a wide range of issues of economic, social, and environmental significance, particularly when rapid population growth occurs in conjunction with poverty and lack of access to resources, or unsustainable patterns of production and consumption, or in ecologically vulnerable zones (see paragraphs 3.14, 3.25 and 3.26 of the ICPD Programme of Action).
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: None.
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: International agreements do not establish national or global targets. A number of national governments have adopted numerical targets for the rate of population growth. However, in 1998, 14 percent of governments considered their rates of population growth to be too low, 44 percent were satisfied with the rate, and 41 percent considered it to be too high.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: There are close linkages between this indicator and other demographic and social indicators, as well as all indicators expressed in per capita terms (for example, GDP per capita). Population growth usually has implications for indicators related to education, infrastructure, and employment. It is also related to human settlements and the use of natural resources, including sink capacities. Population growth can increase environmental degradation, although this is not always the case.
3.
METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
The rate of population growth, r, between two times, t1 and t2, is calculated as an exponential rate of growth, conventionally expressed in units of per cent per year:
r = 100 ln (P2 /P1)/(t2 -t1)
Where P1 and P2 are the number of persons at times 1 and 2, respectively, and the time interval (t2 -t1) is expressed in years.
For a country, the estimate is generally based on either (i) an intercensal population growth rate calculated from two censuses, each adjusted for incompleteness; or (ii) from the components of population growth (adjusted for incompleteness, when necessary) during a period; the components are numbers of births, deaths and migrants. Intercensal growth rates can also be calculated for subnational areas.
4.
ASSESSMENT OF
DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: As
indicated above, the population growth rate can be calculated either from
census data or from registration data (births, deaths and migrants). The United Nations recommends that countries
take censuses every 10 years, and these data can be used to calculate an
intercensal population growth rate.
(b) National and International Data
Availability and Sources: In recent decades, most countries have
carried out censuses and is widely available.
For example, 204 countries or areas carried out a census during the 1990
census decade (1985 to 1994). Data on
births, deaths and migrants may come from national registration systems or from
special questions in demographic surveys and censuses. National and sub-national census data, as
well as data on births, deaths and migrants, are available for the large
majority of countries from national sources and publications; as well as from
questionnaires sent to national statistical offices from the Statistics
Division, UN Department of Economic and Social Affairs (DESA). For all countries, census and registration
data are evaluated and, if necessary, adjusted for incompleteness by the
Population Division, DESA, as part of its preparations of the official United
Nations population estimates and projections.
(c) Data References: Past, current and projected
population growth rates are prepared for all countries by the Population
Division, DESA, and appear in the United Nations publication, World
Population Prospects: The 1998 Revision
(see item 6, below).
5.
AGENCIES
INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a)
Lead Agency:
The lead agency is the United Nations Department of Economic and Social
Affairs (DESA). The contact point is
the Director, Population Division, DESA; fax no. (1 212) 963 2147.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations:
None.
6.
REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
Population Division, DESA, World Population Prospects: The 1998 Revision. Vol. I. Comprehensive Tables (United Nations publication Sales No. E.99.XIII.9, New York, 1999).
Population Division, DESA, World Population Prospects: The 1998 Revision. Vol. III. Analytical Report (United Nations. ESA/P/WP.156, New York, 1999).
Population Division, DESA, Manual X: Indirect Techniques for Demographic Estimation (United Nations Sales No. E.83.XIII.2, New York, 1983).
Population Division, DESA, World Urbanization Prospects: The 1998 Revision (United Nations publication, forthcoming).
Population Division, DESA, MORTPAK-LITE - The United Nations Software Package for Mortality Measurement (United Nations, New York, 1988).
Statistics Division/DESA, 1997 Demographic Yearbook, (United Nations Sales No. E/F.99.XIII.1, 1999).
For
information about government policies regarding this indicator, see:
Population Division, DESA, National Population Policies (United Nations Sales No. E.99.XIII.3., New York, 1998).
Population Division, DESA, Results of the Eighth United Nations Population Inquiry Among Governments (forthcoming).
(b) Internet site: http://www.un.org/esa/population
|
POPULATION OF URBAN FORMAL AND
INFORMAL SETTLEMENTS |
||
|
Social |
Population |
Population Change |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name:
Population of Urban Formal and Informal Settlements.
(b) Brief Definition: Number of inhabitants living in urban formal
and informal settlements.
(c) Unit of Measurement: Number of inhabitants.
(d) Placement
in the CSD Indicator Set:
Social/Population/Population Change.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose:
The indicator measures the size of formal and informal urban settlements
by their population. By focusing on the
legality of human settlements, this indicator measures the marginality of human
living conditions.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): Settlements characterized by illegality of
tenure and unauthorized shelter are generally marginal and precarious, and do
not cater to basic human needs such as affordable housing. They affect sustainable human settlements
development, human health, and socioeconomic development.
Illegal dwellers generally live in
an unsafe and precarious environment, lack basic services, suffer from the
absence of tenure security, and have no legal claim in case of eviction. Also, numerous illegal settlements are
established on lands, which are predisposed to natural disasters. Informal settlements have usually a much
higher population density than formal settlements and these living conditions
constitute a threat to human health.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: Not applicable.
(d) International Targets/Recommended
Standards: No international targets
have been established for this indicator.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator is closely linked with
several other socioeconomic and environmental indicators, such as rate of
growth of urban population, human and economic losses due to natural disasters,
access to adequate sanitation, primary health care, infant mortality,
infrastructure expenditure, and land use.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: Informal settlements refer to: i) residential areas where a group of
housing units has been constructed on land to which the occupant have no legal
claim, or which they occupy illegally; ii) unplanned settlements and areas
where housing is not in compliance with current planning and building
regulations (unauthorized housing).
Formal settlements refer to land zoned residential in city master plans
or occupied by formal housing.
(b) Measurement Methods: The number of inhabitants in formal and
informal settlements is generally measured in censuses. Informal settlements do not cover dwelling
units which have been regularized, that is those units for which land titles,
leases or occupancy permits have been granted.
They should only include those units which presently occupy land
illegally and/or housing units which are not in compliance with current
regulation.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: The ephemeral nature and lack of an
acceptable operational definition for this indicator, limit its usefulness,
especially for trend analysis. The
legal framework for settlements on which this indicator is based varies from
country to country. Informal housing is not registered in official statistics,
any measure of informal settlements remains limited. Information may be
obtained from specific research studies, but it difficult to obtain and may be
of variable quality. Homelessness,
which is one of the extreme symptoms of human settlements inadequacy, is not
accounted for by this indicator and in fact the existence of illegal
settlements may reduce the incidence of homelessness.
(d) Status of the Methodology: Not available.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: Many concepts intended to measure
marginality of human settlements have been formulated: unplanned, squatter,
marginal settlements, unconventional, non permanent structures, housing in
compliance, inadequate housing, slums, etc.
"Unconventional dwellings" is one of the most common measures,
defined by the number of housing units occupied by households, but considered
inappropriate to human habitation.
‘Improvised housing units’ is another category used by the Census,
defined as independent, makeshift shelters constructed of waste materials and
without a predetermined plan for the purpose of habitation by one household.
Included in this category are squatters’ huts, favelas, hongos, jhuggis,
etc. The type of building (permanent,
semi‑permanent, non permanent) which describe the building structures in
which households live is another common measure, but the criteria widely vary
from country to country.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Population of informal settlements.
(b) National and International Data
Availability and Sources: These
data are more likely to be available at the city level and are generally
collected in large cities affected by informal settlements. Data sets at the national level will only
occur sporadically.
(c) Data References: Data from research studies and census data.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the United Nation Centre for Human Settlements
(Habitat). The contact point is the
Head, Urban Secretariat, UNCHS (Habitat); fax no. (254 2) 623080.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: None.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
World Bank. Housing: Enabling Markets to Work. A World Bank Policy Paper. The
World Bank, Washington D.C., 1993.
UNCHS (Habitat) and The World Bank. The Housing Indicators Programme. Report
of the Executive Director (Volume I). UNCHS, Nairobi, 1993.
UNCHS (Habitat). Monitoring the Shelter Sector. Housing
Indicators Review. UNCHS, Nairobi, 1995.
(b) Internet site:
UNCHS (Habitat) home page: http://www.urbanobservatory.org/indicators/database
|
EMISSIONS OF GREENHOUSE GASES |
||
|
Environmental |
Atmosphere |
Climate Change |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name:
Emissions of Greenhouse Gases (GHG).
(b) Brief Definition: Anthropogenic
emissions, less removal by sinks, of the greenhouse gases carbon dioxide (CO2),
methane (CH4), nitrous oxide (N2O), hydrofluorocarbons
(HFCs), perfluorocarbons (PFCs), sulphur hexafluoride (SF6),
chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) and hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs), together with
the indirect greenhouse gases nitrogen oxides (NOx), carbon monoxide (CO) and
non-methane volatile organic compounds (NMVOCs).
(c) Unit of Measurement: Annual GHG
emissions in gigagrams (Gg). Emissions of CH4, N2O, HFCs,
PFCs and SF6 can be converted to CO2 equivalents using
100 year global warming potentials (GWPs) provided in the IPCC Second
Assessment Report, 1995.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Environmental/Atmosphere/Climate Change.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: This indicator measures the
emissions of the six main GHGs which have a direct impact on climate change,
less the removal of the main GHG CO2 through sequestration as a
result of land-use change and forestry activities.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/ Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): For about a thousand years before the industrial
revolution, the amount of greenhouse gases in the atmosphere remained
relatively constant. Since then, the concentration of various greenhouse gases
has increased. The amount of carbon dioxide, for example, has increased by more
than 30% since pre-industrial times and is currently increasing at an
unprecedented rate of about 0.4% per year, mainly due to the combustion of
fossil fuels and deforestation. The concentrations of methane and nitrous oxide
are increasing as well due to agricultural, industrial and other activities.
The concentrations of the nitrogen oxides NO and NO2 and carbon
monoxide (CO) are also increasing. Although these gases themselves are not
greenhouse gases, they affect atmospheric chemistry, leading to an increase in
tropospheric ozone, which is a greenhouse gas. Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs),
hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs), hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs), perfluorocarbons
(PFCs) and sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) and some other halogen GHGs do
not occur naturally in the atmosphere but have been introduced by human
activities. They are strong greenhouse gases and have long atmospheric
lifetimes. CFCs and HCFCs also deplete the stratospheric ozone layer (see ozone
depleting substances).
Since the late nineteenth century, the mean global
temperature has increased by 0.4-0.8°C and the sea level has risen by 10 to
15cm. A doubling of the CO2 concentration in the atmosphere is
believed to cause an increase in the global mean temperature of 1.5 to 4.5°C.
To appreciate the magnitude of this temperature increase, it should be compared
with the global mean temperature difference of perhaps 5 to 6°C from the middle
of the last ice age to the present interglacial period.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: The United
Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change entered into force in March 1994
and as of July 2000 has received 184 instruments of ratification or accession.
The Convention includes a commitment by developed country Parties, including
economies in transition (Annex I Parties), to aim to return emissions of CO2
and other GHGs not controlled by the Montreal Protocol to their 1990 levels by
2000. The Kyoto Protocol was adopted in December 1997 and has received 84
signatures. It will enter into force
after it has been ratified by at least 55 Parties to the Convention, including
developed countries accounting for at least 55 per cent of the total 1990 CO2
emissions from this group. Meanwhile
countries are to continue to carry out their commitments under the Convention.
Ozone-depleting greenhouse gases (such as CFCs and HCFCs)
are controlled by the Vienna Convention and the Montreal Protocol (see ozone
depleting substances).
(d) International Targets/Recommended
Standards: The Kyoto Protocol sets targets for each of the developed
country Parties and economy in transition Parties with a view to reducing their
overall emissions of the six main GHGs by at least 5 per cent below 1990 levels
in the commitment period 2008 to 2012.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator is linked to many other
socio-economic and environmental indicators, including GDP growth rate, energy
consumption, environmental protection expenditures, and expenditures on air pollution
abatement.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: Greenhouse
gases contribute in varying degrees to global warming depending on their heat
absorptive capacity and their lifetime in the atmosphere. The global warming
potential (GWP) describes the cumulative effect of a gas over a time horizon
(usually 100 years) compared to that of CO2. For example, the global
warming potential of CH4 (methane) is 21, meaning that the global
warming impact of one kg of CH4 is 21 times higher than that of one
kg of CO2. The global
warming potentials of ozone-depleting greenhouse gases (such as CFCs and HCFCs)
are highly uncertain, since they depend on the depletion of ozone, itself a
greenhouse gas. No global warming potentials are provided for indirect
greenhouse gases.
(b) Measurement Methods: In some
cases, GHG emissions can be measured directly at the source. More commonly, emissions are estimated from
data on emission sources, for example oil sales data or cattle numbers, using
an emission factor for each source.
(c) Limitations of the
Indicator: This indicator shows the net amount of GHGs entering the
atmosphere for each reporting country each year. It does not show how much the climate will be affected by the
increased accumulation of GHGs or the consequent effect of climate change on
countries. Data is available and
reported mainly for developed countries and economies in transition.
(d) Status of the Methodology: Developed
country Parties to the Convention have been reporting GHG data beginning with
1990 data since 1994. The IPCC has
published two sets of guidelines on methodologies for the estimation of GHG
inventories and further elaborated this with guidance on good practice in 2000.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: GHG
emissions can alternatively be measured on a gross instead of net basis in
which case no account is taken of removal by sinks. There are a number of other gases that indirectly produce GHGs
and these could also be included in the scope of the definition. The GWP potential can be calculated over
different time horizons, such as 20 years or 500 years.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Greenhouse gas emissions data.
(b) National and International Data Availability
and Sources: National communications from Parties to the Convention,
including both developed and developing countries, are available. Developing
countries report on a limited basis. At the international level, the UNFCCC
Secretariat database has information based on annual data inventory submissions
from developed and economy in transition countries.
(c) Data References: Not Available.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead
agency is the Secretariat of the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate
Change (UNFCCC). The contact point is
the Executive Secretary, Secretariat, UNFCCC, fax no. (41 22) 970 9034.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: Intergovernmental
Panel on Climate Change (IPCC).
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
First review of information
communicated by each Party included in Annex I to the Convention. UN document A/AC.237/81 and corr. 1.
UNFCCC in‑depth review reports
on individual countries.
(b) Internet sites:
www.unfccc.int (UNFCCC)
www.ipcc.ch (IPCC)
www.ipcc.nggip.iges.or.jp (IPCC technical support)
|
CONSUMPTION OF OZONE DEPLETING SUBSTANCES
|
||
|
Environmental |
Atmosphere |
Ozone Layer Depletion |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Consumption of Ozone Depleting Substances (ODS).
(b) Brief Definition: This indicator will show the amounts of Ozone Depleting Substances being eliminated as a result of the Montreal Protocol.
(c) Unit of Measurement: Tonnes of ODS weighted by their Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP).
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Environmental/Atmosphere/Ozone layer depletion.
2. POLICY
RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: This indicator signifies the commitment to phase out the ODS of the countries which have ratified the Montreal Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer and its Amendments of London (1990), Copenhagen (1992), Montreal (1997) and Beijing (1999).
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): The phaseout of ODS, and their substitution by less harmful substances or new processes, will lead to the recovery of the ozone layer. Stratospheric ozone absorbs most of the biologically damaging ultraviolet radiation (UV-B). Without the filtering action of the ozone layer more UV-B radiation can penetrate the atmosphere to have adverse effects on human health, animals, plants, micro-organisms, marine life, materials, biogeochemical cycles, and air quality.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: The Vienna Convention for the Protection of the Ozone Layer and its Montreal Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer and the London, Copenhagen, Montreal and Beijing Amendments to the Protocol.
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: The international target under the agreements listed in 2 (c) is the complete phase out of ODS.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator has links to other environmental and institutional indicators, such as number of chemicals banned or restricted and ratification of international agreements. It has significant implications to human health and natural resources.
3.
METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: Ozone Depleting Substance (ODS) means any organic substance containing chlorine or bromine, which destroys the stratospheric ozone layer. Controlled substance means a substance in Annex A, Annex B, Annex C or Annex E of the Montreal Protocol, whether existing alone or in a mixture. It includes the isomers of any such substance, except as specified in the relevant Annex, but excludes any controlled substance or mixture which is in a manufactured product other than a container used for the transportation or storage of that substance. Production means the amount of listed, controlled substances produced, minus the amount destroyed by technologies to be approved by the Parties to the Montreal Protocol and minus the amount entirely used as feedstock in the manufacture of other chemicals. The amount recycled and reused is not to be considered as "production". Consumption is the sum of production plus imports minus exports of controlled substances. We are addressing apparent consumption. Weighted tonnes of ODS means the amount of ODS multiplied by their ozone depleting potential. Ozone depleting potential (ODP) is a relative index of the ability of a substance to cause ozone depletion. The reference level of 1 is assigned as an index to CFC-11 and CFC-12. If a product has an ODP of 0.5, a given weight of the product in the atmosphere would, in time, deplete half the ozone that the same weight of CFC-11 or CFC-12 would deplete. ODPs are calculated from mathematical models which take into account factors such as the stability of the product, the rate of diffusion, the quantity of depleting atoms per molecule, and the effect of ultraviolet light and other radiation on the molecules.
(b) Measurement Methods: Weighted Tonnes of ODS for production are the sum of national annual production (in tonnes) of each controlled substance (as reported to the Ozone Secretariat in accordance with Article 7 of the Montreal Protocol) multiplied by the ozone depleting potential of that substance (as listed in Annexes A, B, C and E of the Handbook for the International Treaties for the Protection of the Ozone Layer, 2000). It can be found at: http://www.unep.org/ozone or http://www.unep.ch/ozone. Weighted Tonnes of Ozone Depleting Substances for consumption are obtained through a similar calculation using national annual consumption values (in tonnes).
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: Availability and accuracy of data and timely reporting will determine the country's ability to use the indicator. The indicator by itself does not reveal much about current trends in the deterioration of the ozone layer because of delays in ecosystem response.
(d) Status of the Methodology: For more information, please consult the Reports of the Secretariat on information provided by the Parties in accordance with Article 7 of the Montreal Protocol or the Home Page at: http://www.unep.org/ozone or http://www.unep.ch/ozone.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: An alternative indicator could focus on the phase out of ODS.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Data on production, imports and exports of controlled substances by the Parties to the Montreal Protocol.
(b) National and International Data Availability and Sources: The data are available for most countries, on a national level, on a regular annual basis, as part of their reporting obligations to the Montreal Protocol. At the international level from the Ozone Secretariat in Nairobi and from the Multilateral Fund Secretariat in Montreal. The data sources are the Ozone Secretariat and the national government ministry responsible for reporting to the Montreal Protocol.
(c) Data References: UNEP, Report of the Secretariat on Information Provided by the Parties in Accordance with Article 7 and 9 of the Montreal Protocol, United Nations Environment Programme, pp. 105, 1999. UNEP, Production and Consumption of Ozone Depleting Substances, 1986-1998, United Nations Environment Programme, pp. 41, 1999. Web site: http://www.unep.org/ozone or http://www.unep.ch/ozone.
5. AGENCIES
INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP)/Ozone Secretariat. The contact point is the Executive Secretary of the Ozone Secretariat, fax no. (254-2) 62-3601/62-3913.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: Other organizations interested in the further development of this indicator would include: The Multilateral Fund Secretariat, the Global Environment Facility (GEF) Secretariat, United Nations Development Programme (UNDP), UNEP Division of Technology, Industry & Economics (UNEP DTIE), United Nations Industrial and Development Organization (UNIDO), the World Bank, the Technology and Economic Assessment Panel to the Montreal Protocol, the Parties to the Montreal Protocol, the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD), and members associated with the Alternative Fluorocarbon Environmental Acceptability Study (AFEAS).
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
Ozone Secretariat, UNEP, Handbook for the International Treaties for the Protection of the Ozone Layer, pp.367, 2000. (ISBN: 92- 807-1867-3).
UNEP, Synthesis of the Reports of the Scientific, Environmental Effects and Technology and Economic Assessment Panels of the Montreal Protocol. A Decade of Assessments for Decision Makers Regarding the Protection of the Ozone Layer: 1989-1998, United Nations Environment Programme, pp. 161, 1999. (ISBN: 92-807- 1733-2).
UNEP, Reports of the Technology and Economic Assessment Panel of the Montreal Protocol.
Reporting of Data by the Parties to the Montreal Protocol on Substances that Deplete the Ozone Layer.
(b) Internet sites:
http://www.uneptie.org/ozonaction.html
http://www.undp.org/seed/eap/montreal/index.htm
http://www-esd.worldbank.org/mp
|
AMBIENT CONCENTRATION OF AIR POLLUTANTS IN
URBAN AREAS |
||
|
Environmental |
Atmosphere |
Air Quality |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name:
Ambient concentration of air pollutants in urban areas.
(b) Brief Definition: Ambient air pollution concentrations of
ozone, carbon monoxide, particulate matter
(PM10, PM2,5, SPM, black smoke), sulphur dioxide,
nitrogen dioxide, nitrogen monoxide, volatile organic compounds including
benzene (VOCs) and lead.
(c) Unit of Measurement: μg/m3, ppm or ppb, as
appropriate; or percentage of days when standards/guideline values are
exceeded.
(d)
Placement
in the CSD Indicator Set: Environmental/Atmosphere/Air
Quality.
2.
POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The indicator provides a measure of the state of the environment
in terms of air quality and is an indirect measure of population exposure to
air pollution of health concern in urban areas.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): An
increasing percentage of the world's population lives in urban areas. High population density and the
concentration of industry exert great pressures on local environments. Air pollution, from households, industry
power stations and transportation (motor vehicles), is often a major problem. As a result, the greatest potential for
human exposure to ambient air pollution and subsequent health problems occurs
in urban areas. Improving air quality
is a significant aspect of promoting sustainable human settlements.
The indicator may be used to monitor
trends in air pollution as a basis for prioritising policy actions; to map
levels of air pollution in order to identify hotspots or areas in need of
special attention; to help assess the number of people exposed to excess levels
of air pollution; to monitor levels of compliance with air quality standards;
to assess the effects of air quality policies; and to help investigate
associations between air pollution and health effects.
(c)
International Conventions and
Agreements: None.
(d)
International
Targets/Recommended Standards: World Health Organization (WHO) air
quality guidelines exist for all the pollutants of this indicator, except
nitrogen monoxide. Many countries have
established their own air quality standards for many of these pollutants.
(e)
Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator is closely linked to others which relate to causes,
effects, and societal responses. These
include, for example, the indicators on population growth rate, rate of growth
of urban population, percent of population in urban areas, annual energy
consumption per capita, emissions of sulphur oxides and nitrogen oxides, life
expectancy at birth, total national health care as a percent of Gross National
Product, share of consumption of renewable energy resources, environmental
protection expenditures as a percent of Gross Domestic Product, expenditure on
air pollution abatement, childhood morbidity due to acute respiratory illness,
childhood mortality due to acute respiratory illness, capability for air
quality management, and availability of lead-free gasoline.
3.
METHODOLOGICAL DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: The indicator may be designed and
constructed in a number of ways. Where
monitored data are available, it is usefully expressed in terms of mean annual
or percentile concentrations of air pollutants with known health effects –
e.g., ozone, carbon monoxide, particulate matter (PM10, PM2,5,
SPM), black smoke, sulphur dioxide, nitrogen dioxide, volatile organic
compounds including benzene (VOCs) and lead – in the outdoor air in urban
areas. Alternatively, the indicator
might be expressed in terms of the number of days on which air quality
guidelines or standards are exceeded (though in this, comparisons need to be
made with care because of possible changes or differences in guideline values).
Where monitoring data are
unavailable, estimates of pollution levels may be made using air pollution
models. Dispersion models, however,
depend on the availability of emission data; where these are not available,
surveys may be conducted using rapid source inventory techniques. Because of the potential errors in the
models or in the input data, results from dispersion models should ideally be
validated against monitored data.
(b) Measurement Methods: Suitable air monitors must fulfil several
requirements, such as detection limits, interferences, time resolution, easy
operation and of course, cost. There
are several good references in the literature or available at agencies on air
monitoring and analysis from where information can be obtained. It is important, however, to refer to the
published scientific literature for the most appropriate and recent air
monitoring methods.
A number of models are available for
estimation of ambient concentration of air pollutants. Most of them are founded on the Gaussian air
dispersion model.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: Measurement limitations relate to detection
limits, interferences, time resolution, easy operation, and cost. Evaluation of the accuracy of model results
is critical before relying on model output for decision-making.
(d) Status
of the Methodology: The methodology
is widely used in many developed and developing countries.
(e) Alternative Definitions: None.
4.
ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the
Indicator: Data must be time and
spatially representative concentrations such as, for example, mean annual
concentrations (mean concentrations of the pollutant of concern, averaged over
all hours of the year) or percentile concentration (concentration of the
pollutant of concern exceeded in 100-X% of hours, where X is the percentile as
defined by the relevant standards). In
addition, information must be available on site location and type (e.g.,
industrial or residential area).
(b) National and International
Data Availability and Sources: Data on ambient air pollution concentrations
is often routinely collected by national or local monitoring networks. Data is often also collected for research
purposes by universities and research institutes. In addition, industry collects many data.
(c)
Data References:
Data on ambient air pollution can be obtained from national and local
monitoring networks. Sometimes, data is
available from universities, research institutes and industry. In addition, a growing volume of data can be
obtained from international sources such as the WHO Healthy Cities Air
Management Information System (AMIS) of the European Environmental Agency.
5.
AGENCIES INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT
OF THE INDICATOR
(a)
Lead
Agency: The lead agency is the World Health
Organization (WHO). The contact point
is the Director, Department for the Protection of the Human Environment; fax
no. (41 22) 791 4159.
(b)
Other
Contributing Organizations: The United Nations Environment
Programme.
6.
REFERENCES
(a)
Readings:
WHO (2000 in print) Air Quality
Guidelines for Europe (revision of Air Quality Guidelines for Europe
1987). WHO Regional Office for Europe,
Bilthoven Division.
WHO (2000 in print) Human
Exposure Assessment, Environmental Health Criteria Document 214, Programme
of Chemical Safety.
WHO (2000) Decision-Making in Environmental Health: From Evidence to
Action, edited by C. Corvalan, D. Briggs and G. Zielhuis, E & FN Spon,
London, New York.
WHO (1999) Monitoring Ambient Air
Quality for Health Impact Assessment, WHO Regional Publications, European
Series, No. 85.
WHO (1999) Environmental Health
Indicators: Framework and Methodologies. Prepared by D. Briggs, Occupational and
Environmental Health.
WHO (1999) Global Air Quality
Guidelines: Occupational and Environmental Health (available on the web only).
WHO (1987) Air Quality Guidelines
for Europe, WHO Regional Office for Europe, Bilthoven Division.
Schwela & Zali (eds. 1999) Urban
Traffic Pollution. Edited by D.
Schwela and O. Zali, E & FN Spon, London, New York.
UNEP/WHO (1992) Urban Air
Pollution in Megacities of the World, Blackwell Publishers, Oxford, UK.
UNEP/WHO (1994) Global
Environmental Monitoring System (GEMS/Air), Methodology Review Handbook
Series. Volumes 2, 3, and 4.
(b)
Internet
sites:
|
ARABLE AND PERMANENT CROP LAND AREA |
||
|
Environmental |
Land |
Agriculture |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Arable and Permanent Crop Land Area.
(b) Brief Definition: Arable and permanent crop land is the total of “arable land” and “land under permanent crops”. Arable land is the land under temporary crops, temporary meadows for mowing or pasture, land under market and kitchen gardens and land temporarily fallow (for less than five years); and land under permanent crops is the land cultivated with crops that occupy the land for long periods and need not be replanted after each harvest.
(c) Unit of Measurement: 1000 ha.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Environmental/Land/Agriculture.
2. POLICY
RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: This indicator shows the amount of land available for agricultural production and, inter alia, the cropland area available for food production. The data when related to other variables such as population, total land area, gross cropped area, fertilizer use, pesticides use, etc., can also be used to study agricultural practices of the country. In order to be useful, it must be available as a time series.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): Population growth in developing countries is driving a rapid increase in the demand for food and fibre. At the same time, rising population density in rural areas diminishes the farm size. Small farmers are forced to extend cultivation to new areas, which are fragile and not suitable for cultivation. Crop intensification, which has contributed significantly to agricultural growth in recent years, can ease the pressure on cultivating new lands but farm practices adopted for raising yields can also, in some situations, result in damaging the environment (such as when expanding into new areas). Changes in the indicator value over time or between various components may show increased or decreased pressure on agricultural land. This indicator is of value to land planning decision making.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: Not available.
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: Not applicable.
(e) Linkage to Other Indicators: The indicator is primarily linked to other measures related to land resources covered in the Chapter 10: “Integrated Approach to the Planning and Management of Land Resources” and Chapter 14: “Promoting Sustainable Agriculture and Rural Development” of the Agenda 21. This includes indicators such as land use changes, share of irrigated area in the arable and permanent crop land area, per capita arable and permanent crop land area, etc.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: The concept of arable land and land under permanent crop is clearly defined. Arable land is the land under temporary crops (double-cropped areas are counted only once), temporary meadows for mowing or pasture, land under market and kitchen gardens and land temporarily fallow (less than five years). The abandoned land resulting from shifting cultivation is not included in this category. Data for arable land are not meant to indicate the amount of land that is potentially cultivable. Similarly land under permanent crops is the land cultivated with crops that occupy the land for long periods and need not be replanted after each harvest, such as cocoa, coffee and rubber; this category includes land under flowering shrubs, fruit trees, nut trees and vines, but excludes land under trees grown for wood or timber.
(b) Measurement
Methods:
The indicator is connected to the use of land for agricultural activity
and is historically based on point estimates derived from data collected in
periodic agricultural censuses and surveys.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: This indicator does not reveal anything about increased productivity of agricultural land, or of the spatial variation in land quality.
(d) Status
of the Methodology: Concepts and
methods of measurements for the indicator are well defined and documented. However, some of the countries follow
somewhat different concepts. For example, some countries take arable land
as the land that is potentially cultivable, whereas the actual definition
excludes permanent fallow land and land under permanent meadows and
pastures. Similarly, “permanent” status
for pastures, etc., is taken as ten years by some countries instead of the
period of five years recommended by the Food and Agriculture Organization
of the United Nations (FAO).
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: Agricultural land that includes permanent pastures and meadows is a more appropriate indicator which could universally be related to data on use of fertilizers, pesticides and statistics on irrigated area (as some countries have permanently cultivated pastures).
4. ASSESSMENT
OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Data on arable land and land under permanent crops. Data on permanent pastures and fallow land also would be useful for undertaking quality check.
(b) National and International Data Availability and Sources: National data for the indicator has been estimated generally through agricultural census/surveys. However, in the case of many countries such statistical exercises are undertaken only at selected points of time. At the international level data are being produced by FAO. This data set is produced as a continuous time series where missing data for intercensal/survey periods have been derived by using data from various official and non-official sources. Thus the data for many countries are of unknown reliability.
(c) Data References: The primary data source at the international level is the Production Yearbook released annually by the FAO and FAOSTAT database included in the World Agriculture Information Centre (WAICENT).
5. AGENCIES
INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations (FAO). The contact point is the Assistant Director-General, Sustainable Development Department, FAO; fax no. (39 06) 5705 3152.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: None.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
FAO. 1995. Programme for the World Census of Agriculture 2000. In: FAO Statistical Development Series (FAO), no. 5 / FAO, Rome (Italy). Statistics Div., 85 pp.
(b) Internet
site:
FAO Statistical Databases. http://apps.fao.org/
|
USE OF FERTILIZERS |
||
|
Environmental |
Land |
Agriculture |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name:
Use of Fertilizers.
(b) Brief Definition: Extent of fertilizer use in agriculture per
unit of agricultural land area.
(c) Unit of Measurement: kg/ha.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Environmental/Land/Agriculture.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The purpose of this indicator is to measure the intensity of
fertilizer use in agriculture (crop husbandry).
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): The
challenge for agriculture is to increase food production in a sustainable
way. This indicator shows the potential
environmental pressure from agricultural activities. Extensive fertilizer use is linked to eutrophication of water
bodies, soil acidification, and potential of contamination of water supply with
nitrates. The actual environmental
effects will depend on pollution abatement practices, soil and plant types, and
meteorological conditions.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: Not available.
(d) International Targets/Recommended
Standards: Targets should be based
on national situations.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator is closely linked to
others in the agricultural, water, and atmospheric groups, such as pesticide
use, biochemical demand in water bodies, algae index, and emissions of
greenhouse gases.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: The concepts are available. Data on the quantities of fertilizers used
are converted into the three basic nutrient components and aggregated. The three components are nitrogen (N),
phosphorous (P205), and potassium (K20). Factors for chemical breakdown are
standardized. Agricultural land is the sum of arable and permanent crop land
and land under permanent pastures and meadows.
However, due to the limitations discussed in section 4(d) below, this
indicator should be regarded as interim for sustainable development purposes.
(b) Measurement Methods: Data on fertilizers are compiled from
industry sources and non-traditional sources.
Data for developing countries generally refer to domestic disappearance
based on imported products. The derived
figures in terms of nutrients are then divided by the agricultural land area.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: Environmental impacts caused by leaching and
volatilization of fertilizer nutrients depend not only on the quantity applied,
but also on the condition of the agro-ecosystem, cropping patterns, and on farm
management practices. In addition, this
indicator does not include organic fertilizer from manure and crop residues, or
the application of fertilizers to grasslands.
The indicator assumes even distribution of fertilizer on the land.
(d) Status of the Methodology: Not available.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: A more relevant and sophisticated indicator
would focus on nutrient balance to
reflect both inputs and outputs associated with all agricultural
practices. This would address the
critical issue of surplus or deficiency of nutrients in the soil. This would need to be based on
agro-ecological zones.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Data on fertilizer use for N, P205,
and K20; and agricultural area.
(b) National and International Data
Availability and Sources: Data for
all countries exist at the national level only. The data are updated on a regular basis. At the international level, the Food and
Agriculture Organization of the United Nations (FAO) is the primary source.
(c) Data References: see 6(a).
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the
Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations (FAO). The contact point is the Assistant
Director-General, Sustainable Development Department, FAO; fax no. (39 06) 5705
3152.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: The International Fertilizer Association is
associated with the development of this indicator.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
FAO. 1998. Food and agricultural sector profiles. Country tables 1997.
Statistics Div.; FAO, Rome (Italy). Agriculture and Economic Development
Analysis Division, 427 pp.
FAO. 1996. Fertilizer use by crop, 3. International Fertilizer Industry
Association, Paris (France); International Fertilizer Development Center,
Muscle Shoals, AL (USA); FAO, Rome (Italy). Statistics Division, 49 pp.
(b) Internet sites:
FAO Statistical Databases. http://apps.fao.org/
International Fertilizer
Association. http://www.fertilizer.org/
|
USE OF AGRICULTURAL PESTICIDES |
||
|
Environmental |
Land |
Agriculture |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name:
Use of Agricultural Pesticides.
(b) Brief Definition: Use of pesticides per unit of
agricultural land area.
(c) Unit of Measurement: Pesticide use in metric tons of
active ingredients per 10 km2 of agricultural land.
(d) Placement
in the CSD Indicator Set: Environmental/Land/Agriculture.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: This indicator measures the use of
pesticides in agriculture.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): The challenge for agriculture is to
increase food production in a sustainable way.
One important aspect of this challenge is the use of agricultural
pesticides which add persistent organic chemicals to ecosystems. Pesticides can be persistent, mobile, and
toxic in soil, water, and air; and can have impact on humans and wildlife
through the food chain. They tend to
accumulate in the soil and in biota, and residues may reach surface and groundwater
through leaching. Humans can be exposed to pesticides through food. Exaggerated use may result from government
subsidies and/or failure of pesticide users to internalize health-related
costs. The indicator is related to
other agricultural intensification practices.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: Some agricultural pesticides are
banned by international trade agreements.
(d) International Targets/Recommended
Standards: Not available.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator is closely linked
to others in the agricultural area, such as fertilizer use. Use of pesticides can have wide implications
for the environment, and is linked to the indicators listed under toxic
chemicals and biodiversity.
3. METHODOLOGICAL DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: The concepts are available,
however, because of the limitations discussed below in section 4(d), it should
only be regarded as an interim indicator.
More work is required to develop a more suitable pesticide indicator
pertinent to sustainable development.
(b) Measurement Methods: Data on pesticide use are usually
derived from sales or “domestic disappearance” and expressed as active
ingredients. Agricultural area data are
widely available. Interpretation will benefit from information on types of
active ingredients in use, seasonal doses, rate of application, and variability
on use for different crops and regions.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: This indicator provides an
aggregation, which ignores toxicity, mobility, and level of persistence; and
spatial and application variances. It
does not consider the use of pesticides outside of agriculture, which can be
significant in developed countries.
Data omissions and errors often occur during the transfer of the primary
data to statistical authorities.
(d) Status of the Methodology: Not available.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: To meet some of the limitations
expressed above in section 4(d), an indicator could be developed which would
recognize the classification of pesticide into classes, ranging from less
harmful to highly toxic. Such a
pesticide index would show if pesticide use is becoming more sustainable or
not. The interpretation value of this
indicator would benefit from its application to crop types or agro-ecological
zones. However, data availability does
not support this in many areas.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Pesticide sales data; agricultural
land area.
(b) National and International Data
Availability and Sources: The
land area data are readily available for most countries. However, pesticide supply-use data in metric
tons are only available from international sources for selected countries and
limited to the major types of pesticide.
Some pesticide data are available for about 50-60 countries. The data are not regularly collected and
reported, and not usually available on a sub-national basis. Some data are available on total national
pesticide use from the Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations
(FAO) and the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development
(OECD). Eurostat maintains a database
of their members’ data. Landell Mills Market Research Ltd. (Bath, UK) also has
data.
(c) Data References: see 6(b).
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the
Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations (FAO). The contact point is the Assistant
Director-General, Sustainable Development Department, FAO; fax no. (39 06) 5705
3152.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: OECD, the European Union, and
Landell Mills Market Research Ltd. have been involved in the development of
this indicator.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings: Not available.
(b) Internet sites:
Organisation for Economic Co-operation and
Development (OECD). http://www.oecd.org/
|
FOREST AREA AS A PERCENT OF LAND AREA |
||
|
Environmental |
Land |
Forests |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name:
Forest Area as a Percent of Land Area.
(b) Brief Definition: The amount of natural and plantation forest
area tracked over time.
(c) Unit of Measurement: %.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Environmental/Land/Forests.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose:
The purpose of the indicator is to show the area covered by the
forest formations of a region/country over time.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): Forests serve multiple ecological,
socio-economic, and cultural roles in many countries. They are among the most diverse and widespread ecosystems of the
world. Forests provide many significant
resources and functions including wood products and non-wood products: recreational
opportunities, habitat for wildlife, water and soil conservation, and a filter
for pollutants. They support employment
and traditional uses, and biodiversity.
There is general concern over human impact on forest health, and the
natural processes of forest growth and regeneration. Combating deforestation to maintain the production of wood and
non-wood products and to preserve soils, water, air and biological diversity is
explicitly considered in Agenda 21.
A continuing and fast decreasing
forest area in a country might be an alarm signal of unsustainable practices in
the forestry and agricultural sector.
The availability of accurate data on a country's forest area, which is a
basic characteristic of its forest resources, is an essential requirement for
forest policy and planning within the context of sustainable development.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: Many international agreements cover
forests. Countries are supported to
maintain or increase their forested areas.
Specific forest agreements would include the Non-Legally Binding Authoritative Statement of Principles for a Global
Consensus on the Management, Conservation and Sustainable Development of All
Types of Forests (the Forest Principles of the United Nations Conference on
Environment and Development (UNCED)); and the International Tropical Timber Agreement. Many other international agreements deal with forests within the
context of natural resources and environment conservation, for example, the
Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species (CITES), the Convention
on the Conservation of Wetlands of International Importance (Ramsar
Convention), the Convention on Biological Diversity, the Convention on Climate
Change and the Convention to Combat Desertification. In addition, several
regional conventions cover forests.
(d) International Targets/Recommended
Standards: There are no
international targets or standard sets for size of forest or rate of
deforestation. It is, however,
understood that the higher the deforestation rate is, the more critical the
forestry situation is in a country/region.
Several countries have set targets for the extent of their forest area,
either in absolute values or as a percentage of total land area of the
country. Nevertheless, the
International Tropical Timber Organization (ITTO) Year 2000 Objective states
that by the year 2000 all tropical timber products traded internationally by
Member States shall originate from sustainably managed forests.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: The indicator is closely linked with
several other environmental indicators, such as land use and land condition
change, wood and non-wood products harvesting intensity, protected forest area,
arable land, threatened species, sustainable use of natural resources in
mountain areas, etc. In some countries,
it will also be generally linked to some of the socio-economic indicators, such
as population growth and share of natural resource industries in manufacturing.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: Definitions are available from the Food and
Agriculture Organization of the United Nations (FAO) Forest Resources
Assessments. The forest area is defined as "lands with a tree crown cover equal
or more than ten percent of the area”; plantation as the artificial
establishment of forests by planting or seeding; and natural forests as natural and/or semi-natural established
forests. In addition, the definition of
forest exists in most countries. The comparisons of forest area over time
using reference years allows the calculation of change in absolute values, and
as a percentage of the deforestation rate.
Different land uses practices and
ranges of ecological condition result in different forest types, such as
tropical or temperate. These
differences should be recognized, especially in country comparisons.
(b) Measurement Methods: The measurement methods for forest area can
be contained in national forest inventories, and obtained by sampling ground
surveys, cadastral surveys, remote sensing, or a combination of these.
The forest area is calculated as the
sum of plantations and natural forest areas with tree crown cover equal or more
than ten percent. This calculation is
made at given reference years as follows:
The deforestation rate (DR) is the
compound annual rate in percent from year P to year N:

(c) Limitations of the Indicator: The area figure does not give any indication
of the quality of the forest, its ecosystem context, nor forest values or
practices. The indicator does not
provide information on the degradation of the forest resources in a
country. The total forest area in a
country might remain unchanged, but the quality of the forest can become
degraded. Due to the definition used,
the indicator covers a very diversified range of forests ranging from open tree
savanna to very dense tropical forests.
(d) Status of the Methodology: Not available.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: Plantation area compared to natural forest
would provide a measure of the intensity of forest practices for timber
production and possible ecosystem implications.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: The total forest area of a country,
including plantations, at different yearly intervals.
(b) National and International Data
Availability and Sources: Data on
the extent of forest areas (natural and plantations) are available for most
countries, both at national and sub‑national scales. The data are often estimates, which are not
always comparable because of changes in definitions and assessment
methodologies. International data are available from FAO Forest Resources
Assessments (FRA). National data is
available from ministries responsible for forestry and statistics
(c) Data References: Not available.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the
Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations (FAO). The contact point is the Assistant
Director-General, Sustainable Development Department, FAO; fax no. (39 06) 5705
3152.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: The United Nations Environment Programme
(UNEP); United Nations regional commissions; and national agencies responsible
for forestry, remote sensing and geographic survey; and universities and
research institutes could all play a useful role in the development of this
indicator.
6. REFERENCES
(a)
Readings:
FAO. 1999. State of the World's Forests (FAO). / FAO, Rome (Italy). Forestry
Dept., 154 pp.
FAO. 1995. Forest resources assessment 1990: global synthesis. FAO Forestry
Paper (FAO), no. 124 / FAO, Rome (Italy). Forestry Dept., 100 pp.
FAO. 1993. Forest resources assessment 1990: Tropical countries. FAO Forestry
Paper (FAO), no. 112 / FAO, Rome (Italy). Forestry Dept., 110 pp.
FAO. Forest Resources Assessments 1980, 1990 and 2000.
Harcharik, D.A. 1995. Forest Resources Assessment 1990:
non-tropical developing countries. / FAO, Rome (Italy). Forestry Dept., 12
pp.
(b) Internet sites:
International data provided by other institutions,
for example World Resources Institute, are mostly based on the FAO Forest
Resources Assessment information and data. http://www.wri.org/
The FAO Forestry Department
Information Note on Criteria and
Indicators for Sustainable Forest Management.
http://www.fao.org/forestry/FODA/infonote/infont-e.stm
The United Nations Environment
Programme (UNEP). http://www.unep.org/
|
WOOD HARVESTING INTENSITY |
||
|
Environmental |
Land |
Forests |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Wood Harvesting Intensity.
(b) Brief Definition: The indicator compares the total forest fellings as a percentage of the net annual increment.
(c) Unit of Measurement: %.
(d) Placement
in the CSD Indicator Set:
Environmental/Land/Forests.
2. POLICY
RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The indicator aims at assessing whether forests are being used within the limits of their actual productivity. If the ratio is smaller or equal to one, it means that the country is harvesting less, or equal, to the annual forest increment. This represents the sustained yield principle. If the ratio is more than one, a country is over-harvesting its wood, or other specific forest resource.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development: Forests serve multiple ecological, socio-economic, and cultural roles in many countries. They are among the most diverse and widespread ecosystems of the world. Forests provide many significant resources and functions including wood products and non-wood products: recreational opportunities, habitat for wildlife, water and soil conservation, and a filter for pollutants. They support employment and traditional uses, and biodiversity. There is general concern over human impact on forest health, and the natural processes of forest growth and regeneration. Combating deforestation to maintain the production of wood and non-wood products but also to preserve soils, water, air and biological diversity is explicitly considered in Agenda 21.
This indicator is relevant for assessing the sustainability of forest management when interpreted over a long time period. The harvest rate set by a country is a function of the size of its forests, the proportion of the forest area dedicated to timber production, the productivity of the forest and its age class structure, and the management objectives and sustained yield policies of the country. The indicator relates sustained yield to actual harvest in terms of a relative balance between forest growth and harvest.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: Many international agreements cover forests. Countries are supported to maintain or increase their forested areas, and discouraged to strongly reduce their forest lands. Specific forest agreements would include the Non-Legally Binding Authoritative Statement of Principles for a Global Consensus on the Management, Conservation and Sustainable Development of All Types of Forests (the Forest Principles of the United Nations Conference on Environment and Development [UNCED]); and the International Tropical Timber Agreement. Many other international agreements deal with forests within the context of natural resources and environment conservation, for example, the Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species (CITES), the Convention on the Conservation of Wetlands of International Importance (Ramsar Convention), the Convention on Biological Diversity, the Convention on Climate Change, the Convention to Combat Desertification. In addition, regional/ecoregional agreements on sustainable forest management have been established.
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: In general, the target would be set by the sustained yield principle. Several countries have calculated their total annual allowable cut, or total annual increment, and their total annual removals. Most developed countries are harvesting between 70 and 80 percent of the total annual increment of their forests. Targets still need to be established for tropical forests.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator is linked to other natural resource indicators within the environment category, such as protected forest area, and land use and condition change. It is also linked to such socio-economic indicators as share of natural resource industries in manufacturing.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: Concepts and definitions are generally available for developed countries, and for all countries in the case of plantations. Additional work is required to determine the natural increment concept for tropical forests. The following definitions are available from the Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations (FAO). Annual Roundwood Production includes all wood obtained from removals from forest and from trees outside the forest. FAO statistics include recorded volumes as well as estimated unrecorded volumes. Forest Growing Stock means the above-ground volume of all living standing trees down to a stated minimum diameter. Total Annual Increment represents the total annual increment of wood due to the growth of the trees during a year.
(b) Measurement Methods: The enumerator is the total annual roundwood production. The denominator is the total annual productive forest increment. An adequate time series is required to show meaningful trends. For tropical natural forests, where no data is available on the forest annual increment, or where the harvested wood comes only from a few species, an adjustment is proposed which relates annual production to the total standing volume of the forest and the average rotation cycle applied in a country for a given reference year. This, for example, would be 120 years for teak forests in Burma.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: The indicator is related to timber production. It does not relate to the production of non-wood products, nor to the provision of forest and forest ecosystems of environmental and social service which, together with wood production, should be measured and monitored to access sustainability. It has implication for other forest resources, but an indicator considering all values of forest ecosystems would be more appropriate from a sustainable development perspective. For the present indicator, reliable data are only available from a minority of countries, mostly developed, and for plantations. However, research data on the annual increment of tropical natural forests are improving, and it is expected that sufficient data and estimates should become available during the coming years.
Harvesting intensity gives us an indication of the degree of tree cover reduction at a given time, but does not refer to what will happen to the forest after it has been “intensely harvested”. Clearfelled forest, for example, maybe harvested at an intensity of 100 percent, but may also be reforested afterwards. Thus, additional indicators for deforestation are needed, which contain time components (time during which the area will stay without tree cover), and land uses other than forest.
This indicator should be interpreted over the longer term. In given cases, the annual roundwood production might exceed the forest increment for market reasons, age structure of forests, or other reasons for a few years without being an indication for unsustainable management. However, such an unsustainable situation should under no circumstances persist over several decades.
(d) Status of the Methodology: Not available.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: This indicator compares the amount of yearly, or other time period, harvested wood, or any other forest product, with the annual increment from the forest. If the annual increment is not known, allowable cut can be used as a surrogate.
4. ASSESSMENT
OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Data are needed on growing stock, annual roundwood production, annual increment, and the rotation cycle.
(b) National and International Data Availability and Sources: Data are available for most countries at both national and sub-national levels. However, in many cases, especially for natural forests where rough estimates are only available, data are available for only one time period, with no time series data. The primary international source of data is FAO. At the country level, the data would be available from national ministries responsible for forestry.
(c) Data References: Not available.
5. AGENCIES
INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations (FAO). The contact point is the Assistant Director-General, Sustainable Development Department, FAO: fax No. (39 06) 5705 3152.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: The International Tropical Timber Organization (ITTO) could assist with the development of this indicator.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
FAO. 1999. State of the World's Forests (FAO). / FAO, Rome (Italy). Forestry Dept., 154 pp.
FAO
Forestry publications including Forestry
Papers.
United Nations Economic Commission for Europe, Timber Studies, Timber Bureau, Geneva.
(b) Internet
sites:
FAO Statistical Databases. http://apps.fao.org
The International Tropical Timber Organization (ITTO). http://www.itto.or.jp/
|
LAND AFFECTED BY
DESERTIFICATION |
||
|
Environmental |
Land |
Desertification |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name:
Land Affected by Desertification.
(b) Brief Definition: This is a measure of the amount of land
affected by desertification and its proportion of national territory.
(c) Unit of Measurement: Area (Km2) and % of land area
affected.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Environmental/Land/Desertification.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The indicator describes the extent and severity of
desertification at the national level.
It should be: (i) a measure of the state of the problem at any one time;
(ii) an indication of the trend in the severity of the problem over time and
success of response mechanisms; and (iii) a means of comparing the severity of
the problem from one country to another.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): The
indicator should be a mechanism for determining the importance of this issue at
the national level. Trend data over
time can indicate success of response mechanisms. For dryland areas, desertification is a central problem in
sustainable development. While many
dryland ecosystems have generally low levels of absolute productivity,
maintenance of that productivity is critical to the present and future
livelihood of many hundreds of millions of people. Combating desertification is the core of sustainable development
for large areas of the world. Severe
degradation is a major impedent to sustainable development; moderate or slight
degradation is also a significant barrier.
(c) International Conventions
and Agreements: The two most
significant agreements are: Agenda 21 of the 1992 UN Conference on Environment
and Development; and the UN Convention to Combat Desertification, 1994. In addition, the Desertification Convention
texts (INCD-10/ New York) spell out a sound methodology for developing
indicators. No definitive set of indicators
has been agreed upon within the context of the desertification Convention.
(d) International
Targets/Recommended Standards: No
specific targets have been defined, however, the goal should be to reduce the
area and percentage of land affected by desertification, and/or reduce the
severity of desertification.
(e) Linkages to Other
Indicators: This state and trends
indicator needs to be considered in conjunction with related driving force and
response indicators, integrating physical and socio-economic processes, for
meaningful interpretation and policy relevance at the national level. It is closely linked with indicators
concerning land use, such as deforestation, use of marginal land, protected
area as a percent of total land area, and population living below the poverty
line.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: For the purposes of this indicator,
desertification is defined as land degradation in arid, semi-arid, and dry
sub-humid areas resulting from various factors, including climatic variations
and human activities (UN Convention to Combat Desertification, 1994). Land
degradation means reduction or loss, in arid, semi-arid and dry sub-humid
areas of the biological or economic productivity and complexity of rainfed
cropland, irrigated cropland, or range, pasture, forest and woodlands resulting
from land uses or from a process or combination of processes, including
processes arising from human activities and habitation patterns, such as: (i)
soil erosion caused by wind and/or water; (ii) deterioration of the physical,
chemical and biological or economic properties of soil; and, (iii) long-term
loss of natural vegetation. Land
degradation, therefore, includes processes which lead to surface salt
accumulation and waterlogging associated with salt-affected areas.
Arid, semi-arid, and dry sub-humid areas means areas, other than polar and sub-polar
regions, in which the ratio of annual precipitation to potential
evapotranspiration falls within the range from 0.05 to 0.65 (UN Convention to Combat Desertification, 1994).
(b) Measurement Methods: Measurement for this indicator initially
requires an assessment of the extent of land degradation throughout the arid,
semi-arid, and dry sub-humid zones of the nation. This is best done by a
combination of previous assessments represented in map form, carried out by the
United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP) with the United Nations Office to
Combat Desertification and Drought (UNSO), and the Food and Agricultural
Organization (FAO); and updates from a combination of remote sensing and local
knowledge.
The creation of an index that
combines degrees of severity will require the following measures:
(i) Area subjected to severe land degradation
xKm2 (severe here includes both the severe and very severe
categories of UNEP.
(ii) Area
subjected to moderate land degradation yKm2.
(iii) Area subjected to slight land degradation = zKm2.
(iv) National area (excluding surface water
bodies) nKm2.
(v) National area of drylands (vulnerable to
desertification, assuming that all drylands are potentially vulnerable to
desertification. Hyper-arid lands are excluded), consisting of arid, semi-arid,
and dry subhumid land = dKm2.
From the above measurements, the
following sets of numbers can be derived:
Indicator computations:
a. National
area affected by desertification
=
x + y + zKm2
b. Percent
of national area affected by desertification
=
x + y + z X 100
n
c. Percentages of national area affected by severe, moderate and slight desertification respectively can be calculated in the same way.
d. Percent
of national drylands affected by desertification
=
x + y + z X 100
d
e. National
area not affected by desertification
=
n - (x + y +z)Km2
f. National
dryland area not affected by desertification
=
d - (x + y + z)Km2
Trends can
be determined by comparing results computed for a sequence of years (for
example, every five years).
A useful extension of the indicator
would be for countries to report dryland areas (d) as a percentage of all agriculturally
productive areas (e=n-hyper arid land) to give an indication of the overall
vulnerability of the country to desertification.
While it is based on a combination
of analytical and subjective assessment, if these are done systematically on an
annual basis, a sound database can be developed. Given the importance of determining the extent and severity of
desertification to the index, it may be that a periodic special survey using
remote sensing and ground assessment may be important, though this may only be
technically feasible for some countries.
An important issue in the basis
measurement of degradation is the factors that are measured to assess the
degree of local degradation. As Bie
(1990) clearly points out, the two factors of productivity and resilience
are the most important elements in assessing the existence and the extent of
dryland degradation. Accurate
measurement of land affected by desertification is a problem about which there
is not yet complete consensus and further work needs to be done to agree on a
comparable methodology for the various countries affected by desertification
(UNEP, Atlas of Desertification; UNEP/ISRIC/ISS/FAO, Global Assessment of the
Status of Human-induced Soil Degradation (GLASOD)).
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: There are a number of issues to be resolved
before this indicator can be entirely satisfactory. The ecosystems addressed in this definition undergo cyclic
episodes of more or less rainfall, as well as long-term degradation in many
cases. Separating short-term
fluctuations from longer-term trends is important, though scientists often find
this difficult to determine, except for longer time periods. Also, the United Nations Environment
Programme (UNEP) has generally defined desertification (degradation) in
categories (severe, moderate, slight), and a national indicator needs to
include an assessment of this kind. It
has been a practice to include problems of waterlogging and salinization as
part of desertification, if they occur within the ecosystems as defined
above. In this case, the area affected
by these problems should also be included in the desertified area.
Because of these issues, the
indicator may well benefit from further refinement and definition. The concepts of land degradation in arid,
semi-arid, and dry sub-humid areas are well defined and described in a number
of UNSO, UNEP, and other UN publications, as well as in the academic
literature. The translation of these
concepts into agreed national level indicators has not been so well
articulated. (Mabbutt, J.A. 1986; Maimuet 1991).
(d) Status of the Methodology: The methodology for the compilation of
the above statistics has not yet been agreed upon by any inter-governmental
fora, however negotiations are underway.
It has therefore the status of a recommendation for guidelines.
(e)
Alternative Definitions/Indicators:
Not available.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Complete the Indicator: The data needed to compile the indicator are the extent and severity of dryland degradation in the country concerned, the dryland area, and national area (excluding surface water bodies). The degree of accuracy and reliability of both spatial and statistical data varies considerably and are often poorly documented and/or out of date. For some countries, the data do not yet exist. Benchmark data on desertification is critical to measuring progress.
(b) National
and International Data Availability and Sources: Dryland and
national areas can be obtained from national statistical institutions and
publications, and can also be found in standard World Resources Institute
(WRI), UN and World Bank publications.
Some data on extent and degree of land degradation are available at the
country level in national institutions or from non-government organizations, in
donor countries, and in publications of the United Nations Development
Programme (UNDP)/UNSO, UNEP, FAO and other international institutions.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the Office to Combat Desertification and
Drought (UNSO) of UNDP. The contact
point is the Director, UNSO; fax no. (1 212) 906-6345.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: Other contributing organizations
include: UNEP, FAO, Consultative Group on International Agricultural Research
(CGIAR), International Fund for Agricultural Development (FAD), ISRIC, the
International Union for the Conservation of Nature (ACNE), and selected
national governments.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
Bie, Stein W. 1990. Dryland Degradation Measurement Techniques,
World Bank, Environment Work Paper No. 26, 42 p.
Dregre, H., Kassas M. and Rozanov,
B. 1991 A new assessment of the world
status of desertification. Desertification Control Bulletin
20. p. 6-18.
Dumanski, J. And Pieri, C. 1994.
Comparison of available frameworks for development of land quality
indicators. Agr. Tech. Div., World
Bank. p. 14.
Mabbutt, J.A. 1986.
Desertification Indicators. Climatic Change 9. P. 113-122.
Mainguet, M. 1991 Desertification: Natural Background and
Human Mismanagement. Springer-Verlag, Berlin. 306 p.
Organisation for Economic
Co-operation and Development. 1998.
“Towards Sustainable Development:Environmental Indicators”. OECD.
Paris.
O Connor, J. et al. 1995. Monitoring Environmental
Progress(Draft). World Bank. 72 p.
UNDP/UNSO and NRI. 1995. Development of Desertification Indicators
for Field Level Implementation. 53 p.
UNEP. 1992. World Atlas of Desertification. Edward Arnold. London.
UNEP. 1994. United Nations
Convention to Combat Desertification in those countries experiencing drought
and/or desertification, particularly in Africa. Text with Annexes. 71 p.
UNEP/ISRIC. 1988. Guidelines for
General Assessment of the Status of Human-induced Soil Degradation (GLASOD).
UNEP/ISRIC. 1990. World Map of the
Status of Human-induced Soil Degradation:
An Explanatory Note (GLASOD).
UNEP/ISRIC. 1991.
World Map of the Status of
Human-induced Soil Degradation. (GLASOD).
UNEP/ISRIC/ISSS/FAO. 1995. Global
and National Soils and Terrain Digital Databases (SOTER), Procedures Manual
(revised edition). ISBN 90-6672-059-X.
UNEP/Netherlands National Institute
of Public Health and Environment (RIVM). 1994. An Overview of Environmental
Indicators: State of the art and perspective. UNEP/EATR.94-01:RIVM/402001001.
Environmental Assessment Sub-Programme, UNEP, Nairobi. ISBN 92-807-1427-9.
WB/FAO/UNDP/UNEP. In print.
Land Quality Indicators. World
Bank Discussion Papers.
(b)
Internet sites:
United Nations Convention to Combat
Desertification. http://www.unccd.ch
United Nations Development
Programme’s Office to Combat Desertification and Drought (UNSO). http://www.undp.org/seed/unso.html
|
AREA OF URBAN FORMAL AND INFORMAL
SETTLEMENTS |
||
|
Environmental |
Land |
Urbanization |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Area of Urban Formal and Informal Settlements.
(b) Brief Definition: Urban residential area in square kilometres
occupied by formal and informal settlements.
(c) Unit of Measurement: km2.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Environmental/Land/Urbanization.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose:
The indicator measures the sizes of both formal and informal
settlements. By focusing on the legality
of human settlements, this indicator measures the marginality of human living
conditions.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): Settlements characterized by illegality of
tenure and unauthorized shelter are generally marginal and precarious, and do
not cater to basic human needs such as affordable housing. They affect sustainable human settlements
development, human health, and socioeconomic development.
Illegal dwellers generally live in
an unsafe and precarious environment, lack basic services, suffer from the
absence of tenure security, and have no legal claim in case of eviction. Also, numerous illegal settlements are
established on lands which are predisposed to natural disasters. Informal
settlements have usually a much higher population density than formal
settlements and these living conditions constitute a threat to human health.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: Not applicable, see section 2(d).
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: No international targets have been
established for this indicator.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator is closely linked with
several other socioeconomic and environmental indicators, such as rate of
growth of urban population, human and economic losses due to natural disasters,
access to adequate sanitation, primary health care, infant mortality,
infrastructure expenditure, and land use.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: Informal settlements refer to: i)
residential areas where a group of housing units has been constructed on land
to which the occupant have no legal claim, or which they occupy illegally; ii)
unplanned settlements and areas where housing is not in compliance with current
planning and building regulations (unauthorized housing). Formal settlements
refer to land zoned residential in city master plans or occupied by formal
housing.
(b) Measurement Methods: Area of formal and informal settlements can
be evaluated through aerial photography or land use maps. Informal settlements should not cover
dwelling units which have been regularized, that is those units for which land
titles, leases or occupancy permits have been granted. They should only include those units which
presently occupy land illegally and/or housing units which are not in
compliance with current regulation.
Where feasible, the interpretation and meaning of this indicator would
be supported by the comparison of formal and informal settlement areas to total
urban area.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: The ephemeral nature and lack of an
acceptable operational definition for this indicator, limit its usefulness,
especially for trend analysis. The
legal framework for settlements on which this indicator is based varies from
country to country. Informal housing is not registered in official statistics,
any measure of informal settlements remains limited. Information may be
obtained from specific research studies, but it difficult to obtain and may be
of variable quality. Homelessness,
which is one of the extreme symptoms of human settlements inadequacy, is not
accounted for by this indicator and in fact the existence of illegal
settlements may reduce the incidence of homelessness. This indicator does not cover informal settlements in rural
areas.
(d) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: Many concepts intended to measure marginality
of human settlements have been formulated: unplanned, squatter, marginal
settlements, unconventional, non permanent structures, housing in compliance,
inadequate housing, slums, etc.
"Unconventional dwellings" is one of the most common measures,
defined by the number of housing units occupied by households, but considered
inappropriate to human habitation. ‘Improvised housing units’ is another
category used by the Census, defined as independent, makeshift shelters
constructed of waste materials and without a predetermined plan for the purpose
of habitation by one household. Included in this category are squatters’ huts,
favelas, hongos, jhuggis, etc. The type
of building (permanent, semi‑permanent, non permanent), which describes
the building structures in which households live, is another common measure but
the criteria widely vary from country to country.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Area of formal and informal settlements.
(b)
National and International Data
Availability and Sources: These data are more likely to be
available at the city level and are generally collected in large cities
affected by informal settlements. Data
sets at the national level will only occur sporadically.
(c) Data References: Data from research studies, census data, and
aerial photographs.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the United Nation Centre for Human Settlements
(Habitat). The contact point is the
Head, Urban Secretariat, UNCHS (Habitat); fax no. (254 2) 623080.
6.
REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
World Bank. Housing: Enabling Markets to Work. A World Bank Policy Paper. The
World Bank, Washington D.C., 1993.
UNCHS (Habitat) and The World Bank. The Housing Indicators Programme. Report
of the Executive Director (Volume I). UNCHS, Nairobi, 1993.
UNCHS (Habitat). Monitoring the Shelter Sector. Housing
Indicators Review. UNCHS, Nairobi, 1995.
(b) Internet site:
UNCHS (Habitat) home page: http://www.urbanobservatory.org/indicators/database
|
ALGAE CONCENTRATION IN COASTAL
WATERS
|
||
|
Environmental |
Ocean, Seas and Coasts |
Coastal Zone |
1. INDICATOR
(a)
Name: Algae
Concentration in Coastal Waters.
(b)
Brief Definition:
This indicator will use the concentration of algae growing in coastal
waters to represent the health of the coastal zone ecosystem, and the
effectiveness of measures aimed at reducing nutrient inputs from run-off and
discharge.
(c)
Unit of Measurement: mg of chlorophyll per meter cubed,
or a production rate in grammes of carbon per meter squared per year.
(d)
Placement in the CSD Indicator Set:
Environmental/Ocean,
Seas and Coasts/Coastal Zone.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a)
Purpose: This
indicator has the potential to illustrate the effectiveness of measures
designed to reduce nutrient inputs in accordance with the goals of the Regional
Seas Conventions and Action Plans.
(b)
Relevance to
Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme):
Coastal ecosystems provide important economic benefits, such as
fisheries, tourism and recreation. They
are also important for biodiversity, which is recognised by the Convention on
Biological Diversity (CBD) as having its own intrinsic value as well as
importance for human life and sustainable development. High algal concentrations in coastal waters
reflect high nutrient inputs, which can represent serious threats to coastal
ecosystem health. A large concentration
of algae restricts the available light, reduces dissolved oxygen levels and may
increase sedimentation, which smothers other organisms. Increasing concentrations of algae can also
indicate threats to human and animal health by toxic algal blooms.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: This indicator is especially relevant to the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS, 1982), the non-binding Global Programme of Action for the Protection of the Marine Environment from Land-based Activities, and the Washington Declaration (1995), implemented by the United Nations Environment Programme.
In addition, each of the Regional Seas has its own convention or action plan; details of these can be found at: http://www.gpa.unep.org/.
The conservation of biological diversity and the sustainable use of its
components are among the primary objectives of the Convention on Biological
Diversity. This indicator is of
particular relevance to several articles of the CBD, e.g., Article 6 - General
measures for conservation and sustainable use; Article 7 - Identification and
monitoring.
Related regional agreements include: the Arusha Resolution on ICZM; Convention
for the Protection of the Marine Environment of the North East Atlantic;
Protocol on Protection of the Black Sea Marine Environment Against Pollution
from Land Based Sources; Convention for the Protection of the Natural Resources
and Environment of the South Pacific Region; Convention for the Protection,
Management and Development of the Marine and Coastal Environment of the Eastern
African Region; Convention for the Protection and Development of the Marine
Environment of the Wider Caribbean Region; Convention for the Protection of the
Marine Environment and Coastal Area of the South-East Pacific.
(d)
International Targets/Recommended
Standards: The proposed target is to reduce nutrient
inputs into areas where they are causing or likely to cause pollution and to
reduce the number of marine areas where eutrophication is evident. By the year 1995 , in industrialised
countries, and by the year 2005, in developing countries, at least 50 per cent
of all sewage, waste water and solid wastes need to be treated and disposed of
in conformity with national and international environmental and health quality
guidelines.
(e)
Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator can be linked to many of the CSD
core environmental indicators, especially those relating to fisheries,
biodiversity, fresh water quality and fertiliser use. Economic indicators that are linked include those on waste
management. It also has significant
implications for human and animal health and may be directly related to human
population growth.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a)
Underlying Definitions and Concepts:
Algae, both phytoplankton (or microalgae) and macroalgae, along with
cyanobacteria are the primary producers of the sea as they convert sunlight and
dissolved nutrients into energy-rich compounds. Inputs of nutrients from point sources such as sewage outputs and
non-point or diffuse sources like the fertiliser run-off from agricultural
practices cause increases in growth of algae.
Proliferations of microalgae in marine or brackish waters can cause
massive fish kills, contaminate seafood with toxins, and alter ecosystems. A survey of affected regions and of economic
losses and human poisonings throughout the world demonstrates very well that
there has been a dramatic increase in the impacts of these harmful algal blooms
over the last few decades.
The impact of harmful microalgae is particularly evident when marine food
resources, e.g., aquacultures, are affected.
Shellfish and in some cases finfish are often not visibly affected by
the algae, but accumulate the toxins in their organs. The toxins may subsequently be transmitted to humans and, through
consumption of contaminated seafood, seriously threaten health.
(b)
Measurement Methods: Guidelines have been produced by the Joint Group of Experts on the
Scientific Aspects of Marine Environmental Protection (GESAMP), set up by the
United Nations (UN) in 1969, in an effort to standardise the methods used for
algae measurements. Publications are: Guidelines for Marine Environmental
Assessments, 1994, Report No. 54 and Biological indicators and their use in the
measurement of the condition of the marine environment, 1995, Report No. 55,
both found at: http://gesamp.imo.org/publicat.htm.
Measurements of chlorophyll concentration using spectrophotometric and
flourometric techniques are often used as an indirect method of assessing algal
biomass. Ratios of the different
chlorophylls give an indication of major divisions of algae present. Ratios of chlorophylls to their degradation
products (phaeophytins) give an indication of the health of the phytoplankton
community. These measures of algal
biomass can be used indirectly to determine the levels of nutrients entering
the coastal zone, taking into account the many variables such as size and
carrying capacity of the marine environment.
The spatial distribution of sampling points and the methods for
combining data from them require careful consideration and further development
of appropriate methods.
(c)
Limitations of the Indicator: The major constraints to the use of this
indicator will be the availability of appropriate data and the consistency of
sampling and measurement methods over time as well as adequate data synthesis
methods. The measurement of algae concentrations in the coastal zone does not
take into account levels of nutrients that enter the marine environment
naturally. The effects of algae
build-up will also depend upon the assimilative capacity of the water
body. This indicator does not allow for
the assessment of proportional contribution of nutrients to the coastal
environment from point and non-point sources.
It is also difficult to determine what role atmospheric nutrients play
in the accumulation of algae.
(d)
Status of the Methodology: Guidelines have been drawn up in an attempt to
standardise the various methodologies used by United Nations Regional Seas
Programmes to measure algae concentrations.
For more information, consult the Joint Group of Experts on the
Scientific Aspects of Marine Environmental Protection (GESAMP) and the reports
54 and 55 listed in 3(b).
(e)
Alternative Definitions/Indicators: Direct measurement of nutrient inputs to coastal zones from both
point and non-point sources could provide an alternative indicator, but would
be costly and subject to a number of problems.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a)
Data Needed to Compile the
Indicator: Standardised quantitative data on chlorophyll
concentrations or the population and biomass of algae from an appropriately
distributed network of sampling stations.
(b)
National and International Data
Availability and Sources: Limited data are available at the national level under the Regional Seas Programme
of the UN. Until recently these data
were not collected in standardised format, but with the introduction of
guidelines, it is hoped that the results of future studies can be compared
globally. The Environmental Assessment
subprogramme of the UN is tasked with collecting data through a series of
global databases and the information being used for effective decision-making.
(c)
Data References: Data at the regional level contact Regional
Seas Programme of United Nations, web site: http://www.unep.ch/seas/rshome.html. Data at the international level contact the
United Nations Environmental Assessment subprogramme to access their database,
web site for the UN: http://www.unep.org.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a)
Lead Agency: The lead agency is the United Nations
Environment Programme (UNEP)/GPA Coordination Office. The contact point is the GPA Coordination Office, tel. no. (+31 70) 311.4467 , fax no. (+31 70)
345.6648 and email gpa@unep.nl.
(b) Other Contributing Organisations: Other organisations interested in the further development of this indicator would include: United Nations Development Programme (UNDP), Food and Agricultural Organisation of the United Nations (FAO), Global Environment Facility (GEF), International Maritime Organisation (IMO), United Nations Industrial Development Organisation (UNIDO), World Bank, World Health Organisation (WHO) and the World Meteorological Organisation (WMO), Joint Group of Experts on the Scientific Aspects of Marine Environmental Protection (GESAMP), the Global Ocean Observing System (GOOS), the Global Investigation of Pollution in the Marine Environment (GIPME).
6. REFERENCES
(a)
Readings:
IMO, 1994. Guidelines for Marine Environmental Assessments, Report No. 54.
UNEP, 1995. Biological indicators and their use in the
measurement of the condition of the marine environment, Report No. 55.
(b)
Internet sites:
http://www.un.org/Depts/los/index.htm
http://www.un.org/esa/sustdev/agenda21.htm
http://www.unep.ch/seas/main/hglomon.html
http://www.ioc.unesco.org/iocweb/activities/ocean_sciences/marpol.htm
http://www.fao.org/sd/epdirect/epre0018.htm
http://ioc.unesco.org/hab/intro.htm
http://www.gpa.unep.org/documents/technical/rseas_reports/
http://www.dominet.com.tr/blacksea/
http://www.ospar.org/
PERCENT OF TOTAL POPULATION LIVING IN COASTAL AREAS
|
||
Environmental
|
Ocean, Seas and Coasts |
Coastal Zone |
1. INDICATOR
(a)
Name:
Percent of Total Population Living in Coastal Areas.
(b)
Brief Definition: Percent of total population living within 100
kilometers of the coastline. A country
might also consider measuring the % of population living within 100 kilometers
of the coastline including major rivers that empty into the ocean.
(c)
Unit of Measurement: %.
(d)
Placement in the CSD Indicator Set:
Environmental/Ocean,
Seas and Coasts/Coastal Zone. Because
of the economic dimension of this indicator, its placement in the CSD Indicator
framework might also be related to: Economic/Economic Structure/Trade.
2.
POLICY RELEVANCE
(a)
Purpose: This indicator represents the impact population and population
growth in the coastal zone has on economic development as well as on the
degradation of coastal ecosystems. It also represents relative access of populations
to the ocean which is important for trade and economic development.
(b)
Relevance to
Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme):
Coastal ecosystems provide important economic benefits, such as
fisheries, tourism and recreation. They
are also important for biodiversity, which is recognised by the Convention on
Biological Diversity (CBD) as having its own intrinsic value as well as
importance for human life and sustainable development. A high concentration of population within
the 100 kilometer coastal zone can dramatically affect the coastal ecosystem
through habitat alteration or loss and increased pollutant loads. Either of these processes -- the degradation
of the coastal ecosystem through conversion or modification of habitat or through
increased pollution -- can lead to loss of biodiversity, influx of invasive
species, coral reef bleaching, new diseases among organisms, hypoxia, harmful
algal blooms, siltation, reduced water quality, and a threat to human health
through toxins in fish and shellfish and pathogens such as cholera and
hepatitis A residing in polluted water.
High population densities affect the coastal region's ecosystem. At the same time, a higher proportion of
population in coastal areas with good access to internal, regional, and
international trade appears to be favourable for economic development. This may reflect increasing returns to scale
in infrastructure networks or the enhanced division of labour in settings with
high population densities. On the other
hand, high population densities far from the coast seem to hinder
development. In the absence of liberal
trade arrangements, landlocked countries are particularly disadvantaged by
their lack of access to coastal-based trade and development.
Fishing, tourism, and recreation are
some of the important economic benefits coastal ecosystems provide. However, exploitation of the coastal
ecosystem like overfishing puts future economic uses of the resource at risk.
Access to the sea is important for
international trade, success in manufactured exports, and long-run economic
growth. Countries with lower shipping
costs have experienced faster manufactured export growth and overall economic
growth during the past thirty years than countries with higher shipping costs. Significant coastal populations represent
the ability of a country to participate competitively in international trade as
well as expand from traditional sectors like agriculture or natural resource
extraction to development strategies based on the advantages of reduced
transport costs.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: The indicator is relevant to the United Nations non-binding Global Programme of Action for the Protection of the Marine Environment from Land-based Activities which is implemented by the United Nations Environment Programme.
The conservation of biological diversity and the sustainable use of its
components are among the primary objectives of the Convention on Biological
Diversity. This indicator is of
particular relevance to several articles of the CBD, eg: Article 6 - General
measures for conservation and sustainable use; Article 7 - Identification and
monitoring.
(d)
International Targets/Recommended
Standards: None.
(e)
Linkages to Other Indicators:
Many of the CSD core environmental indicators can be linked to this one,
particularly those relating to urbanization, biodiversity, agriculture,
fisheries, algae concentration, and fresh water quality. A social indicator directly linked is the
population growth rate. It also has
significant implications for economic performance and GDP per capita.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a)
Underlying Definitions and Concepts:
The coastal zone provides numerous ecological and economic benefits
(from tsunamis to invasive species brought in ballast water, it also provides
numerous hazards.). The primary
ecological services coastal ecosystems provide are biodiversity both on land
and underwater and pollutant filtering.
Coastal wetlands, mangroves, sea grasses, and peat swamps could be
considered the lungs of the oceans for their ability to filter pollutants.
Loss of this habitat not only decreases biodiversity but also the
ability of a coastal ecosystem to soak up pollutants from human activities,
such as farming, aquaculture, urban runoff, sewage effluent, and oil
spills. For example, excessive nutrient
runoff from intensive agricultural practices can increase underwater plant
growth. Decomposition of the excessive
plant matter reduces the available oxygen in the water. This oxygen depletion condition known as
hypoxia puts marine organisms and human health at risk. Some of the most populated coastal regions
of the world also contain some of the world's worst hypoxic zones.
(b)
Measurement Methods:
A Geographic Information System (GIS) should be used to measure this
indicator. Generally, GIS is software
used to perform spatial analyses. Many
different types of free and proprietary GIS packages exist.
The first step is to calculate a 100 kilometer buffer from the coastline. Due to the curvature of the earth, the 100
kilometer buffer should be created in an equidistant map projection appropriate
to each country. The map projection
used to create the 100 kilometer buffer for Iceland won't create an accurate
100 kilometer buffer for India.
Subsequently, the buffer should be converted into the same map
projection as the population data (which is the generic Geographic
non-projection). To correct for
undercounting errors where the coastline and population data aren't exactly
matched, one can also include in the 100 kilometer buffer a thin band extending
from the coastline into the "ocean".
(c)
Limitations of the Indicator:
The indicator may under-represent population pressure on coastal
ecosystems by not taking into account population within 100 kilometers of major
waterways flowing to the coast.
Similarly, the indicator may under-represent the proportion of
population available for coastal economic development by not counting
population within 100 kilometers of a sea-navigable waterway. The width of the
100 kilometer band may be too wide to capture within country variance of
population pressure on coastal ecosystems (Cuba, United Kingdom, Japan, small
island nations, etc). The spatial
resolution of the population data may not be detailed enough to capture within
country variance.
(d)
Status of the Methodology:
No guidelines yet exist on how to measure the proportion of a country's
population living within 100 kilometers of a coast.
(e)
Alternative Definitions/Indicators:
To better gauge the impact of population on coastal ecosystems, measuring
population within 100 kilometers of major waterways flowing to the coast might
be more appropriate. To better gauge
access to international and regional trade, measuring population within 100
kilometers of a coast and all waterways navigable to the sea by ocean-going
vessels might be more appropriate.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a)
Data Needed to Compile the
Indicator: The two pieces of digital geographic data
needed to measure this indicator are a coastline and a model of the
distribution of population. The freely
available digital database of global population distribution in 1990 and 1995
was developed jointly by the Socio-economic Data and Applications Center
(SEDAC) and by the Center for International Earth Science Information Network
at Columbia University (CIESIN). The
coastline of the population data closely matches the widely available coastline
from the Digital Chart of the World.
(b)
National and International Data
Availability and Sources: The primary source for the
digital model of population distribution at the global, continental and country
level is the Socio-economic Data and Applications Center (SEDAC).
(c)
Data References:
The web site for SEDAC is: http://sedac.ciesin.org/. The Digital Chart of the World coastline can
either be acquired on an individual country basis from the Pennsylvania State
University Map Library web site, http://www.maproom.psu.edu/dcw/,
or by purchasing the entire CD-ROM from ESRI (http://www.esri.com).
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a)
Lead Agency:
The lead agency is the Center for International Development at Harvard
University, Boston, Mass., USA. The
focal point is Mr. Andrew Mellinger.
(b) Other Contributing Organisations: the United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP)/GPA Coordination Office. The contact point is the GPA Coordination Office, tel. no. (+31 70) 311.4467 , fax no. (+31 70) 345.6648 and e-mail gpa@unep.nl.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
UNDP, UNEP, World Bank, World
Resources Institute, 2000. World
Resources 2000-2001: People and Ecosystems: The Fraying Web of Life. World
Resources Institute, Washington, DC. http://www.wri.org/wr2000/
Gallup, John L., Jeffrey D. Sachs,
and Andrew D. Mellinger. 1998. Geography and Economic Development. In Annual World Bank Conference on Development
Economics 1998, eds. Boris Pleskovic and Joseph E. Stiglitz . The World
Bank, Washington, DC.
(b) Internet sites:
http://www.cid.harvard.edu/cidglobal/economic.htm
http://www.un.org/esa/sustdev/agenda21.htm
http://www.ioc.unesco.org/iocweb/activities/ocean_sciences/marpol.htm
http://www.fao.org/sd/epdirect/epre0018.htm
http://ioc.unesco.org/hab/intro.htm
http://www.gpa.unep.org/documents/technical/rseas_reports/
http://www.ospar.org/
|
ANNUAL CATCH BY MAJOR SPECIES |
||
|
Environmental |
Ocean, Seas and Coasts |
Fisheries |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Annual Catch by Major Species.
(b) Brief Definition: Annual catch of major species in relation to spawning biomass if available or in relation to the year of maximum catches in the time series.
(c) Unit of Measurement: Metric tons.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Environmental/Ocean, Seas and Coasts/ Fisheries.
2. POLICY
RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: This indicator, in particular, if the data on spawning biomass are available, can provide a snapshot of the present status of a stock/species in a given country/area in respect to past trends.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): A reduced spawning biomass or a very high ratio of the catch peak value respect to present catches, can be considered as a warning that the fisheries could soon become unsustainable. However, it is necessary to take into account the high variability of populations of some commercial marine species as a consequence of changes of environmental conditions.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: The Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations (FAO) Code of Conduct for Responsible Fisheries (1995).
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: Targets could be national or regional institutions responsible for fisheries management, although where a management of fishery stocks is already in place others and more complex indicators are usually considered.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: As at the moment this is the only indicator related to productivity of the oceans it has no one direct relationships to other indicators presently listed.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: The annual catches reported to FAO by countries are nominal catches that refer to the quantities on a landed weight basis. The Spawning Stock Biomass (SSB) is the total weight of all sexually mature individuals in the population (both males and females). The year of maximum catches based on five-year running means, is the year in which the biggest quantities of catches have been reported along the available time series (presently 1950-98) for a species in a given country/area.
(b) Measurement Methods: If measurements of SSB are available, their time series values should be compared to those of catches of the same species. If SSB values are not available, the catches in the peak year, based on five-year running means, can be compared with the quantity of catches of the last year available. The elapsed time and the trend in the period since the catch peak should also be examined. The five-year running means is the average of catches of five continuous years. The calculated value is assigned to the middle-year in the five-year period.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: The evaluation of marine resources presents further difficulties in respect to the already complicated estimates of terrestrial wild populations. Oceans are obviously less accessible by human beings than land and most of marine animals are highly movable. Furthermore, the populations of many important fishery species are strongly influenced by environmental and climatic changes (e.g., strong fluctuations of Peruvian anchovy, the most caught species worldwide, in response to the El Niño phenomenon). Fishery scientists have developed many parameters for the assessment of marine populations target of fisheries. Notwithstanding the progress made in more than one century of scientific work, recent failures have demonstrated that the present understanding of the complex interactions in marine ecosystems is still incomplete. In this framework, the indicator proposed, based only on the annual catch data and, if available, on SSB, can be considered as providing only a very general information on the sustainable exploitation of a stock/species.
(d) Status of the Methodology: Not available.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: FAO (1999) provides details on more specific indicators for a Sustainable Development Reference System (SDRS) for the marine capture fisheries sector.
4. ASSESSMENT
OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Annual catch by major species and Spawning Stock Biomass (SSB) values if available.
(b) National and International Data Availability and Sources: National annual catches are collected by the FAO Fishery Information, Data and Statistics Unit (FIDI) by countries for major species in given marine fishing areas. The Spawning Stock Biomass (SSB) values are produced by scientific surveys for the most important fishery stocks, but are available mainly for species of temperate seas. FAO/FIDI makes available to the public the global annual catch statistics in a compiled annual yearbook format in both hard copy and digital format (either in CD-ROM or downloadable from the FAO Fishery Department web site). The SSB data are available through fishery commissions and national institution bulletins and publications or from current scientific literature.
(c) Data References: see 4(b).
5. AGENCIES
INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations (FAO). The contact point is the Assistant Director-General, Sustainable Development Department, FAO; fax no. (39 06) 5705 3152.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: Not available.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
FA0. 1999. Indicators for sustainable development of marine capture fisheries. FAO Technical Guidelines for Responsible Fisheries, no. 8, 68 pp.
FAO. 1995. Code of conduct for responsible fisheries. FAO, Rome, 41 pp.
Grainger, R.J.R. & S.M. Garcia, 1996. Chronicles of marine fishery landings (1950-94): Trend analysis and fisheries potential. FAO Fish. Tech. Pap., no. 359, 51 pp.
Vandermeulen, H., 1998. The development of marine indicators for coastal zone management. Ocean & Coastal Management, no. 39, 63-71 pp.
(b) Internet
sites:
FAO Fisheries Department. http://www.fao.org/fi/default.asp
|
ANNUAL WITHDRAWALS OF GROUND AND SURFACE WATER AS A PERCENT OF TOTAL
RENEWABLE WATER |
||
|
Environmental |
Freshwater |
Water Quantity |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Annual Withdrawals of Ground and Surface Water as a Percent of Total Renewable Water.
(b) Brief
Definition: The total annual volume
of ground and surface water abstracted for water uses as a percentage of the
total annually renewable volume of freshwater.
(c) Unit of Measurement: %.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Environmental/Freshwater/Water Quantity.
2. POLICY
RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The purpose of this indicator is to show the degree to which total renewable water resources are being exploited to meet the country's water demands. It is an important measure of a country's vulnerability to water shortages.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): The indicator can show to what extent freshwater resources are already used, and the need for adjusted supply and demand management policy. When the indicator is calculated by sector, it can reflect the extent of water resource scarcity with increasing competition and conflict between different water uses and users. Scarce water could have negative effects on sustainability constraining economic and regional development, and leading to loss of biodiversity. Sustainability assessment of changes in the indicator is linked to total renewable water resources. The indicator's variation between countries as well as in time is a function of climate, population, and economic development, as well as the economic and institutional capacity to manage water resources and demand.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: For international water law, see reference in section 6(a) below. International water sharing agreements also exist between many countries.
(d) International Targets/Recommended
Standards: No international
target exists other than those set by international treaties between countries.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: The indicator's interpretation would benefit from linkage with established water vulnerability indicators, such as freshwater resources per capita, measures of the country's economy, such as Gross Domestic Product (GDP) (by industry), and poverty incidence as an indicator of equity of access. The indicator also needs to be matched with population, social and economic indicators, irrigation as a percentage of arable land, and drought frequency. Interpretation will benefit from linking this indicator with groundwater reserves and unused buffer water resources.
3. METHODOLOGICAL DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying
Definitions and Concepts: The total renewable water resources
are defined as the sum of internal renewable water resources and incoming flow
originating outside the country, taking into consideration the quantity of
flows reserved to upstream and downstream countries through formal or informal
agreements or treaties and reduction of flow due to upstream withdrawal. This gives the maximum theoretical amount of
water actually available for the country.
The in this definition mentioned internal renewable water resources
is defined as the average annual flow of rivers and recharge of groundwater generated
from endogenous precipitation. For
total renewable water resources, no differentiation has been made between
surface water and groundwater. This
approach brings a number of limitations which are described below.
(b) Measurement Methods: The indicator measures total water abstractions divided by total renewable water resources.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: This indicator has several important limitations, most of them related to the computation of total renewable water resources:
· Accurate and complete data are scarce.
· Local sub-national variation of water resources and water use abstractions could be considerable, and this indicator does not reflect the local or individual watershed situation.
· Seasonal variation in water resources is not reflected. There is no consideration of distribution among uses and policy options for mitigating scarcity, for example, re-allocation from agricultural to other uses
· Total renewable water resources do not consider water quality and its suitability for use.
(d) Status of the Methodology: Not available.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: The indicator could consider withdrawals and water resources at the basis of a watershed. It could also take into account the efficiency of use and economic and environmental water costs and values. The data for such calculations, however, are not readily available. For some countries, calculation of the indicator at sub-national levels would be more appropriate. The indicator could be disaggregated to show total renewable water resources, withdrawals for different users, and efficiencies for these different users.
4.
ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Annual water withdrawals divided by total renewable water resources. Current water uses need to be known.
(b) National and International Data Availability and Sources: Data is available for most countries, at the national level. Data consistency is a problem in AQUASTAT (see 4(c) below) as the data are estimated by country level at various periods, they are sometimes interpolated and national data on withdrawals are sometimes biased and could be intentionally over- or underestimated.
(c) Data References: Recent data are available at the country level and recorded at the international level by the Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO) of the United Nations in AQUASTAT (1994/1995).
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED
IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations (FAO). The contact point is the Assistant Director-General, Sustainable Development Department, FAO; fax no. (39 06) 5225-3152.
(b) Other Organizations: Not available.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
Barberis,
J.A. 1986. International groundwater resources law. In: FAO Legislative Study
(FAO), no. 40 / Rome (Italy), FAO, 1986, 74 pp.
Caponera, D.A. 1992. Principles of water law and administration: national and international. Rotterdam (Netherlands), Balkema, 260 pp.
FAO. 1998. Sources of international water law. In: FAO Legislative Study (FAO), no. 65 / FAO, Rome (Italy). Legal Office, 346 pp.
Shiklomanov, I.A. 1990. Global water resources. In: Nature and Resources (UNESCO), v. 26(3) p. 34-43.
UN. 1977. Water development and management; proceedings of the United Nations Water Conference, Mar del Plata, Argentina, 1977 - pt. 1-4 In: Water Development, Supply and Management, v. 1(pt.1-4); United Nations Water Conf., Mar del Plata (Argentina), 14-25 Mar 1977 / United Nations, New York, N.Y. (USA), 1978, 1 v. in 4.
WMO. 1990. International Conference on Water and the Environment: Development Issues for the 21st Century, Dublin (Ireland), 26-31 Jan 1992 / WMO, Geneva (Switzerland), 55 pp.
Mar del Plata 1977, Dublin ICDE 1992. International Water Law. Helsinki Rules on Use of Waters of International Rivers 1966 and Seoul Rules, International Groundwaters 1986.
Shiklomanov. Global Water Resources. 1990.
(b) Internet site:
FAO AQUASTAT. http://www.fao.org/ag/AGL/AGLW/aquastat/aquastat.htm
|
BIOCHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND IN WATER BODIES |
||
|
Environmental |
Fresh Water |
Water Quality |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) in water bodies.
(b) Brief Definition: BOD measures the amount of oxygen required or consumed for the microbiological decomposition (oxidation) of organic material in water.
(c) Unit of Measurement: mg/l of oxygen consumed in 5 days at a constant temperature of 20°C.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Environmental/Fresh water/Water quality.
2. POLICY
RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The purpose of this indicator is to assess the quality of water available to consumers in localities or communities for basic and commercial needs. It is also one of a group of indicators of ecosystem health.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): Sustainable development is heavily dependant on suitable water availability for a variety of uses ranging from domestic to industrial supplies. Strict water quality standards have been established to protect users from health and other adverse consequences of poor water quality. The presence of high BOD may indicate faecal contamination or increases in particulate and dissolved organic carbon from non-human and animal sources that can restrict water use and development, necessitate expensive treatment and impair ecosystem health. Human ill health due to water quality problems can reduce work capability and affect children's growth and education. Increased concentrations of dissolved organic carbon can create problems in the production of safe drinking water if chlorination is used, as disinfection by products, such as trihalomethanes and other compounds toxic to humans, may be produced. Increased oxygen consumption poses a potential threat to a variety of aquatic organisms, including fish. It is, therefore, important to monitor organic pollution to identify areas posing a threat to health, to identify sources of contamination, to ensure adequate treatment, and provide information for decision making to enhance water sustainability.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: The Resolution II and Plan of the United Nations Water Conference recommended governments reaffirm the commitment made at Habitat to "adopt programmes with realistic standards for quality and quantity to provide water for rural and urban areas". The goal of universal safe water coverage was reiterated at the World Summit for Children in 1990.
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: Not available.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: Several indicators are directly linked to the concentration of organic material in freshwater. These measures include annual withdrawals of ground and surface water, domestic consumption of water per capita, concentration of faecal coliforms in freshwater, percent of population with adequate excreta disposal facilities, access to safe water, infant mortality rate, nutritional status of children, environmental protection expenditures as a percent of Gross Domestic Product, and expenditure on waste collection and treatment, and ecosystem health.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: Biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) is an empirical test to provide a measure of the level of degradable organic material in a body of water. The test involves the incubation of a diluted sample for a period of five days at a constant temperature of 20°C. The sample is diluted to bring it within the operational parameters of the test procedure. The test represents a standard laboratory procedure usually referred to as the BOD5 test.
The procedure is used to estimate the relative oxygen requirements of wastewaters, effluents, and other polluted waters. Microorganisms (mainly bacteria although other microorganisms, algae, plants and animals can also make significant contributions in some aquatic systems) use the oxygen in the water for oxidation of polluting organic matter and organic carbon produced by algae, plants and animals.
(b) Measurement Methods: The method used consists of filling to overflowing an airtight bottle of specified size with the water sample to be tested. It is then incubated at a constant temperature for five days. Dissolved oxygen is measured initially and after incubation. The BOD5 is then computed from the difference between the initial and final readings of dissolved oxygen.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: The main limitation of the indicator is that it provides empirical and not absolute results. It gives a good comparison among samples, but does not give an exact measure of the concentration of any particular contaminant. Further, the BOD can increase due to an increase in nutrient (e.g., nitrogen and phosphorus) loads to a water body (eutrophication) without a concomitant increase in external organic carbon loading. The increase in nutrients stimulates the growth of algae and aquatic plants (primary production), which causes an increase in biological (usually mainly bacterial) oxygen consumption. It is important to follow laboratory procedures precisely to obtain consistent results. The five-day time frame to obtain results represents the main operational drawback of the indicator.
(d) Status of the Methodology: Operational.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) is an alternative measure of the oxygen equivalent of the organic matter content of a sample that is susceptible to oxidation by a strong chemical exigent. COD can be empirically related to BOD5. After this correlation is determined for a specific source, it is a useful measure obtained from an instantaneous chemical test.
4. ASSESSMENT
OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: BOD5 results from laboratories.
(b) National and International Data Availability and Sources: Data are normally available on a routine basis from municipal wastewater treatment and discharge facilities, the laboratories of water or public health authorities, water research institutes, and universities. At the national level, the data sources include national water authorities, water supply utilities, ministries of health or environment, and research institutions.
(c) Data References: None.
5. AGENCIES
INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP). The contact point at UNEP is the Director, Division of Environmental Information, Assessment and Early Warning, fax no. (254-2) 62- 4274.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: Other agencies assisting in the development of this indicator include the World Health Organization (WHO), the UNEP Global Environment Monitoring System (GEMS/Water) Collaborating Centre, the United Nations Children's Fund (UNICEF); United Nations Centre for Human Settlements (Habitat); and the United Nations Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO).
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
American Public Health Association, American Water Works Association, and Water Pollution Control Federation. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 20th Edition. 1999.
International Standards Organization. Water Quality--Determination of Biochemical Oxygen Demand after Five Days (BOD5). ISO 5815. 1989.
International Standards Organization. Water Quality--Determination of the Chemical Oxygen Demand. ISO 6060. 1989.
(b)
Internet site:
UNEP/GEMS Collaborating Centre for Freshwater
Quality Monitoring and Assessment at the National Water Research Institute of
Environment Canada: http://www.cciw.ca/gems/intro.html
|
CONCENTRATION OF FAECAL COLIFORM IN FRESHWATER |
||
|
Environmental |
Fresh Water |
Water Quality |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Concentration of Faecal Coliforms in Freshwater.
(b) Brief Definition: The proportion of freshwater resources destined for potable supply containing concentrations of faecal coliforms which exceed the levels recommended in the World Health Organization (WHO) Guidelines for Drinking-water Quality.
(c) Unit of Measurement: %.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Environmental/Fresh Water/Water Quality.
2. POLICY
RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The indicator assesses the quality of water available to communities for basic needs. It identifies communities where contamination of water with human and animal excreta at source or in the supply is posing a threat to health.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsuitable Development (theme/sub-theme): The concentration of faecal coliforms in freshwater bodies is an indirect indicator of contamination with human and animal excreta. Water contaminated with human and animal excreta poses a serious health risk and is therefore unsuitable for potable supply unless it has been suitably treated. Faecal indicator bacteria remain the preferred way of assessing the hygienic quality of water. Escherichia coli (E. coli), the thermotolerant and other coliform bacteria, the faecal streptococci and spores of sulphite-reducing clostridia, are common indicators of this type used. This measure indicates situations where treatment is required or has to be improved to guarantee safety of supply. As population density increases and/or more people are provided from a supply, the more critical the supply of safe, potable water becomes.
Diarrhoeal diseases, largely the consequence of
faecal contamination of drinking-water supply, are variously estimated to be
responsible for 80% of morbidity/mortality, or more, in developing
countries. A prerequisite for
development is a healthy community. Ill
health not only reduces the work capability of community members but frequent
diarrhoeal episodes disrupt children’s development and education, which, in the
longer term, can have serious consequences for sustainable development.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: The United Nations Water Conference recommended that governments reaffirm the commitment made at ‘Habitat’ to adopt programmes with realistic standards for water-quality to provide sanitation for urban and rural areas. The goal of universal coverage was reiterated at the World Summit for Children, in 1990.
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: The standards are available in the WHO Guidelines for Drinking-water Quality. These have been adopted by most countries.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: The indicator is closely linked with several others in the environmental and socio-economic (health) categories, including annual water withdrawals, domestic consumption of water per capita, biochemical oxygen demand in water bodies, wastewater treatment coverage, and percent of population with adequate excreta disposal facilities.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying
Definitions and Concepts: Ideal
faecal indicator characteristics are difficult to find in any one
organism. However, many useful
characteristics are found in E. coli
and, to a lesser extent, in the thermotolerant coliform bacteria. For this reason, E. coli tends to be the preferred/recommended faecal contamination
indicator. Faecal streptococci satisfy
some of the criteria and tend to be used as supplementary indicators of faecal
pollution indicating both human and animal
faeces.
(b) Measurement Methods: For the purposes of this indicator, the term “faecal coliforms” encompasses Escherichia coli and thermotolerant coliforms.
Microbiological examination provides the most
sensitive, although not the most rapid, indication of pollution by faecal
matter. Because the growth medium and
the conditions of incubation, as well as the nature and age of the water
sample, can influence microbiological analysis, accuracy of results may be
variable. This means that the
standardization of methods and laboratory procedures are extremely
important. Established standard methods
are available through the International Organization of Standardization (ISO),
American Public Health Association (APHA), the UK Department of Health (DHSS),
and the Guidelines for Drinking-water Quality (WHO).
Determination of sample size is the first important step in the examination. The source of the sample will determine, in the first instance, the concentration of organisms. Under normal conditions, the volume of sample for a lake or reservoir sample would be 100 ml, while in the case of raw municipal sewage, only 0.001 ml would be required. Larger samples would result in too large a number of organisms to make counting possible. Time-of-travel may often be of relevance, and changes in the bacterial characteristics of samples can be reduced to a minimum by ensuring the samples are not exposed to light and are kept between 4 and 10°C for the shortest feasible time – preferably analysed within six hours. Such precautions are particularly important in tropical climates where ambient temperatures are high and sunlight (ultra-violet radiation) is brightest.
(c) Limitations
of the Indicator: Concentration of E. coli or thermotolerant or faecal coliforms
in a water sample provides only one part of the picture with regard to
water-quality. To assess the overall
status of water at source and supplied for potable and other uses, it is
necessary to combine the information of this indicator with complementary data
on physical and chemical quality. E. coli is predominantly an indicator but, under certain circumstances, can
itself be a pathogen.
(d) Status
of the Methodology: Not Available.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: The indicator could be shown as the proportion of the population using water source for domestic water supply that do not meet the standards. The microbiological quality of water in relation to faecal contamination can be currently defined in terms of E. coli, thermotolerant coliform bacteria, total coliform organisms, faecal streptococci, sulphite-reducing clostridia, bifidobacteria and coliphages.
4. ASSESSMENT
OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Records of water authorities laboratories, hydro-geological institutes, universities, municipal public health laboratories, research institutes, and special studies, which show the level of E. coli, or thermotolerant coliform bacteria.
(b) National and International Data Availability and Sources: Data are normally available from municipal water supply authorities on a routine basis. Ministries of Health in many countries often check on the bacterial quality of new sources when they are being considered for supply purposes. The data are available from national water authorities and water supply utilities, Ministries of Health, and research institutes.
(c) Data
References: Not Available.
5. AGENCIES
INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the World Health Organization (WHO). The contact point is the Coordinator, Water, Sanitation and Health, Department of Protection of Human Health, WHO; fax no. (41 22) 791 4159.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: Other organizations contributing to the development of this indicator include: the Water and Environmental Sanitation Section, United Nations Children’s Fund (UNICEF); United Nations Centre for Human Settlements (HABITAT); and the Land and Water Division, Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations (FAO).
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
WHO. Guidelines for Drinking-Water Quality. Second Edition, Volume 1 Recommendations,
WHO, Geneva, 1993, and Volume 3: Surveillance and Control of Comments Supplies,
WHO, Geneva, 1996.
American Public Health Association, American Water Works Association, and Water Pollution Control Federation. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. 17th Edition, 1989.
International Organization for Standardization. Water
Quality: Detection and Enumeration of the Spores of Sulphite-reducing Anaerobes
(clostridia). Part 1: Method by
Enrichment in a Liquid Medium. ISO
646171.
International Organization for Standardization. Water Quality: Enumeration of Viable Microorganisms—Colony Count by Inoculation in or on a Nutrient Agar Culture Medium. ISO 6222.
International Organization for Standardization. Water Quality: Detection and Enumeration of
Coliform Organisms, Thermotolerant Coliform Organisms and Presumptive
Escherichia coli, ISO 9308-2; Part 1 Membrane Filtration Method, Part 2
Multiple Tube. ISO 9308-1.
International Organization for Standardization. Water Quality: Detection and Enumeration of Faecal Streptococci; Part 1 Method by Enrichment in a Liquid Medium, Part 2 Method by Membrane Filtration. ISO 7899/2.
(b) Internet site: World Health Organization. http://www.who.org
AREA OF SELECTED KEY ECOSYSTEMS |
||
|
Environmental |
Biodiversity
|
Ecosystems |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Area of Selected Key Ecosystems.
(b)
Brief Description: This indicator will use trends in the
extant area of identified key ecosystems to assess the relative effectiveness
of measures for conserving biodiversity at ecosystem level and as a tool to
estimate the need for specific conservation measures to maintain the biological
diversity in a country or region.
(c) Unit of Measurement: Area (km2 or ha) of selected ecosystem types.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Environmental/ Biodiversity/Ecosystems.
2. POLICY
RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The indicator has the potential to illustrate the effectiveness of national measures designed to conserve biological diversity and ensure its use is sustainable, including the measures implemented in fulfilment of obligations accepted under the Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD).
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): The CBD recognises that biodiversity has its own intrinsic value and that biodiversity maintenance is essential for human life and sustainable development. Many biological resources, at gene, species and ecosystem level, are currently at risk of modification, damage or loss.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: The conservation of biological diversity and the sustainable use of its components are among the primary objectives of the Convention on Biological Diversity. This indicator is of particular relevance to several articles of the CBD, e.g., Article 6 - General measures for conservation and sustainable use; Article 7 - Identification and monitoring; Article 8 - In-situ Conservation; and Article 10 - Sustainable use of components of biological diversity. The Convention has, in several COP decisions explicitly recognised the need for an ecosystem approach, and further formalised this position in Decision V/6 made at the fifth COP held in Nairobi in May 2000.
This
indicator is relevant to many other global agreements for which the maintenance
of biological diversity is important, including: Convention on the Conservation
of Migratory Species of Wild Animals (Bonn); Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species (CITES); United Nations Convention on the Law of
the Sea (UNCLOSS); Convention on Wetlands of International Importance
especially as Waterfowl Habitat (Ramsar); Convention for the Protection of the
World Cultural and Natural Heritage (World Heritage Convention).
Related regional conventions and agreements include: Convention on the Conservation of European Wildlife and Natural Habitats (Berne); Program for the Conservation of Arctic Flora and Fauna (CAFF); Convention on the Conservation of Antarctic Marine Living Resources (CCAMLR); Convention on the Conservation of European Wildlife and Natural Habitats (Bern Convention).
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: Although there are no quantified international targets, there is a widely accepted need to avoid further loss of biological diversity. This could variously involve measures designed to maintain current levels of biodiversity, or to reverse current declining trends (e.g., in natural forest cover). Article 8 (In-situ Conservation) of the CBD, states that contracting parties shall, as far as possible and as appropriate, promote the protection of ecosystems, natural habitats and the maintenance of viable populations of species in natural surroundings.
The general objectives of the CBD provide targets for Parties to the
Convention; these objectives could be used as a guide for non-Party states.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator has links to other environmental indicators relating to agriculture, forests, desertification, urbanisation, the coastal zone, fisheries water quality and species. Its trends are also linked to those in population and in economic indicators.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: Few of the concepts and definitions are as yet clearly and consistently applied. Some important points are noted below.
‘Ecosystem’ refers to the plants, animals, micro-organisms and physical
environment of any given place, and the complex relationships linking them into
a functional system. Individual
ecosystem types may be defined either according to composition in terms of life
forms and species, or with respect to ecological processes such as nutrient
cycling or carbon sequestration. The
former is generally more straightforward for the purposes of area
assessment. There is no standard
classification of ecosystems.
‘Key ecosystems’ are at present not
clearly defined. It is possible to
suggest general criteria for selecting key ecosystems, but it will be the
responsibility of countries to undertake this selection. This should be done in a consultative way
that ensures that regional and global interests are evaluated in addition to
national priorities. The choice will
also be constrained by the level of detail in the data available. Among the criteria for selecting the key
ecosystems are:
· Ecosystems containing rare or locally endemic or threatened species (see abundance of key species indicator), and especially those with concentrations of these species;
· Ecosystems of particularly high species richness;
· Ecosystems that represent rare or unusual habitat types;
· Ecosystems severely reduced in area relative to their potential original extent;
· Ecosystems under a high degree of threat.
Additional criteria might include the ease
with which the ecosystem can be mapped (e.g., from remotely sensed data) and it
actual or potential economic importance.
‘Area’ refers to the spatial extent of the ecosystem. This requires the definition of limits or boundaries to the ecosystem, which is difficult where similar or related ecosystems are adjacent. This is especially true if the condition or status of the ecosystem is also of concern. For example, forest area may remain relatively constant despite removal of a substantial proportion of the trees and attendant change in ecological processes.
(b) Measurement Methods: Ecosystem area will normally be derived from mapped data on land cover. This is most efficiently done using data in electronic form and Geographic Information System (GIS) software. Increasingly, land cover maps are derived from remotely sensed data, these will be combined with biological and other ancillary information to produce ecosystem maps. In some cases, retrospective information may be obtained from historical data sets to provide context and longer-term trends. The greatest difficulty is in arriving at an agreed ecosystem classification that is compatible with the available data. It is also fundamental to ensure consistency of the classification and the method of measurement, including considerations of spatial scale and resolution, over time.
How and whether data on different ecosystems should be combined into a
single indicator has yet to be determined.
It is possible that trends in ecosystem area may be combined in ways
that are analogous to the approaches used for species population trends.
(c)
Limitations of the
Indicator: Application of this indicator is constrained by
several factors, but these can mostly be overcome if resources and personnel
are available. The main factor
preventing the immediate and widespread application of this indicator is the
scarcity of suitable time-series of land cover data. The reliability of evaluating the extent and uniqueness of
ecosystem depends on the detail, quality and compatibility of ecosystem
classification applied across continuous terrestrial and marine areas.
Ecosystem diversity distribution has not been mapped at an appropriate scale
for many areas of high biological diversity.
A structured monitoring framework using standardised classification
procedures would provide one solution to this problem, but might well not meet
the full range of needs for this type of data.
The indicator fails to account for variation in ecosystem status other than
extent. Perturbations that do not
affect total area will not be recognised through monitoring this indicator, nor
will it be possible to anticipate likely future trends in ecosystem status
through this indicator alone. Measures
of ecosystem condition and protection status are needed to answer this
deficiency.
(d)
Status of the
Methodology: No single universally
accepted methodology currently exists.
Assessments of land cover and of forest area have been carried out in a
number of contexts, including the Forest Resources Assessment 2000 conducted by
FAO, but the evaluation of specific forest types is more problematic. There has been little area assessment of
other ecosystem types, although global and other land cover data sets do
provide some relevant data. It is
possible that trends in the areas of many ecosystems can be standardised and
combined into a single index using an approach similar to that developed by WCMC and WWF (Loh et al. (1998, 1999, 2000) for
use with species population data (see abundance of key species). In this method, an index value for each
period is derived by normalising the geometric mean change over the period in
the sample of species populations.
Using ecosystem area in place of population size, a line graph of these
index values would provide an indicator of change in the area of key
ecosystems. The numbers and types of
ecosystems included would be decided according to the types of criteria
outlined above.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: Area may not be the best indicator of ecosystem status for biodiversity preservation. Many alternatives are area-related and include measures of fragmentation and of naturalness or exposure to the impacts of human activities (WCMC-UNEP 2000), and analysis of the protection status of ecosystems (Lysenko & Henry 2000; Lysenko et. al 1995), particularly in areas of high conservation priority.
4. ASSESSMENT
OF DATA
(a)
Data Needed to Compile
the Indicator: The principal data
needed for this indicator are land cover data to which an agreed ecosystem
classification has been applied.
Agreement on the classification will depend upon consensus on key
ecosystem types and on the type and quality of raw remotely sensed or other
primary data. Supplementary data on
distribution of key species, priority areas for biodiversity conservation,
distribution of human population and infrastructure as well as protected areas
could also be useful.
(b)
National and
International Data Availability and Sources:
Land cover data are available at the global scale from the EROS Data
Centre and also at regional (e.g., CORINE) and national scales for many
countries. The challenge is in agreeing
an appropriate classification that can be applied to the existing data. A further limitation is the frequency with
which most such data sets are updated – the most current global data set relies
on satellite data from 1992-93. Mapped
data on global priority areas for biodiversity conservation, such as Centres of
Plant Diversity, Endemic Bird Areas (EBAs), Important Bird Areas (IBAs), and
Ramsar sites are held at WCMC-UNEP.
Data on protected areas worldwide are held by WCMC-UNEP and updated
frequently. Useful regional and
national data sets are held by WWF-US, UNEP-GRID centres, national conservation
and academic institutions.
(c)
Data References: Selected references only are mentioned
as a general guide to the kinds of data that are available for this type of
work. UNEP-WCMC holds data on priority areas for
biodiversity conservation and on coverage of some types of ecosystems (see http://www.unep-wcmc.org). Land cover data
are available from Eros Data Centre (see http://edcdaac.usgs.gov/glcc/glcc.html)
and from the CORINE programme (see http://www.satellus.se).
5. AGENCIES
INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a)
Lead Agency: The lead agency is World Conservation
Monitoring Centre/UNEP (WCMC/UNEP).
(b)
Other Contributing
Organizations: The number of other
organisations and individuals with the potential to contribute data or advice,
or otherwise interested in further development of this indicator is very
large. At global level, they would
include inter alia: the Secretariat
of the Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD), the World Wide Fund for Nature
(WWF), IUCN – The World Conservation Union.
Other concerned organisations include the Organisation for Economic
Cooperation and Development (OECD), the National Institute of Public Health and
the Environment (RIVM) in The Netherlands, and a very large number of
governmental and non-governmental organisations, mainly in developed countries.
6. REFERENCES
(a)
Readings:
Groombridge, B. and Jenkins, M.
D. 1994. Assessing Biodiversity Status
and Sustainability. WCMC Biodiversity Series No. 5. World Conservation
Press, Cambridge, UK.
Loh, J., Randers, J.,
MacGillivray, A., Kapos, V., Jenkins, M., Groombridge, B., Cox, N. and Warren,
B. 1999. Living Planet Report 1999.
WWF-World Wide Fund for Nature, Gland, Switzerland.
Loh, J., Randers, J., MacGillivray, A., Kapos, V., Jenkins, M., Groombridge, B. and Cox, N. 1998. Living Planet Report 1998. WWF-World Wide Fund for Nature, Gland, Switzerland.
Loh, J. (Ed). 2000. Living Planet Report 2000. WWF-World
Wide Fund for Nature, Gland, Switzerland.
Lysenko I., Henry D. 2000. GAP Analysis in Support of CPAN: The Russian Arctic. CAFF Habitat
Conservation Report No 9; CAFF International Secretariat, 2000.
Lysenko I.,Barinova S., Belikoff S., Bronnikova
V., Dezhkin. 1995. GAP-Analysis.
-Biodiversity Conservation Program for the Russian Federation. Global
Environment Facility.
Mittermeier, R.A., N. Myers, J.B. Thomsen, G.A.B. da Fonseca, and S. Olivieri. 1998. Biodiversity hotspots and major tropical wilderness areas: Approaches to setting conservation priorities. Conservation Biology 12(3):516-520.
Stattersfield, A.J., Crosby, M.J., Long, A.J. and D.L.Wege. 1998. Endemic Bird Areas of the World: Priorities for their conservation. BirdLife Conservation Series No. 7. BirdLife International, Cambridge, UK. 846pp.
UNEP-World Conservation Monitoring Centre. 2000. European Forests and Protected Areas Gap Analysis: Technical Report. Cambridge, UK. 27pp.
UNEP-World Conservation Monitoring Centre. 2000. Assessing forest integrity and naturalness in relation to biodiversity. Cambridge, UK. 75 pp.
(b)
Internet sites:
http://www.unesco.org/whc/welcome.htm
http://www.ecnc.nl/doc/europe/legislat/bernconv.html
http://edcdaac.usgs.gov/glcc/glcc.html
Environmental Treaties and Resource Indicators (ENTRI)
http://www.conservation.org/Hotspots/default.htm
http://www.gsf.de/UNEP/corine.html
|
PROTECTED AREA AS A PERCENT
OF TOTAL AREA |
||
|
Environmental |
Biodiversity |
Ecosystems |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Protected Area as a Percent of Total Area.
(b) Brief Definition: This indicator
measures the area of protected land ecosystems, inland water ecosystems, and
marine ecosystems expressed as a percentage of the total area of land
ecosystems, inland water ecosystems and marine ecosystems respectively.
(c) Unit of Measurement: %.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Environmental/Biodiversity/Ecosystems.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The indicator represents the extent to which areas important for conserving biodiversity, cultural heritage, scientific research (including baseline monitoring), recreation, natural resource maintenance, and other values, are protected from incompatible uses. It shows how much of each major ecosystem is dedicated to maintaining its diversity and integrity.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): Sustainable development depends on a sound environment, which in turn depends on ecosystem diversity. Protected areas are essential for maintaining ecosystem diversity, in conjunction with management of human impacts on the environment.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: This indicator shows implementation of Article 8(a) of the Convention on Biological Diversity.
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: Recommendation 16 of the Fourth World Congress on National Parks and Protected Areas (Caracas, 1992) establishes a target of 10% protected area of each biome (major ecosystem type) by the year 2000 (McNeely 1993).
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator is linked to other indicators which have implications for land and resource use. These would include; Forest Area as a % of Land Area, Wood Harvesting Intensity, Area of Selected Key Ecosystems, Ratification of Global Agreements, etc.
This indicator is most meaningful when accompanied by indicators of the status of ecosystem diversity, particularly of ecosystem modification and conversion. Thus, the indicator of ecosystem protection would show how much of each major ecosystem is protected; and the indicator of ecosystem modification and conversion would show how much of each major ecosystem has been lost or excessively fragmented. This indicator is also linked to indicators of species diversity and environmental quality.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: The World Conservation Union defines six management categories of protected area in two groups. Totally protected areas are maintained in a natural state and are closed to extractive uses. They comprise Category I, Strict Nature Reserve/Wilderness Area; Category II, National Park; and Category III, National Monument. Partially protected areas are managed for specific uses (e.g., recreation) or to provide optimum conditions for certain species or communities. They comprise Category IV, Habitat/Species Management Area; Category V, Protected Landscape/Seascape; and Category VI, Managed Resource Protected Area (IUCN 1994).
Totally protected areas are necessary to protect as wide a range as possible of intact communities and the species that depend on them. For such communities to persist and evolve “naturally”, buffered as far as possible against human activities, the areas need to be large.
Partially protected areas are useful when certain human activities are actually required to protect particular species or communities. They are also necessary to protect landscapes and seascapes as valued expressions of human relationships with nature. The size of the area is usually less important. Therefore, it is desirable to distinguish:
(i) the total percentage of the ecosystem area that is covered by totally protected areas;
(ii) the percentages of the ecosystem area covered by totally protected areas in different size classes (e.g., < 1 000 ha, ³ 1 000 ha, ³ 10 000 ha, ³ 100 000 ha, ³ 1 000 000 ha [larger size classes are possible only in large countries]);
(iii) the total percentage of the ecosystem area that is covered by partially protected areas.
For the purpose of this indicator, ecosystems are usually defined as ecoregional units. The minimum size of the units varies depending on the classification system and the size of the country (or other territory) being assessed.
(b) Measurement Methods: The usefulness of this indicator depends on clearly distinguishing totally protected areas and partially protected areas, since they have different, although complimentary, functions. Each requires a separate expression of the indicator as follows: Calculate the combined area of totally protected areas of 1000 ha. or more. Calculate the combined area of partially protected area regardless of size. Calculate the percentage of the total area occupied by each group.
The indicator can be mapped in two layers and linked to a database. One layer maps the ecosystems, the other the protected areas. The mapping software will usually calculate the sizes of the ecosystems and protected areas. Smaller protected areas may be mapped as points, in which case their size should be recorded in the database separately. The category of protected area should also be entered in the database, to distinguish totally protected and partially protected areas.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: The indicator represents de jure not de facto protection. It does not indicate the quality of management or whether the areas are in fact protected from incompatible uses. It also gives a rather coarse picture of ecosystem protection. Additional detail would be needed to show the extent of disturbance of the ecosystem within each protected area, and coverage of rare or key ecological communities and habitats.
(d) Status of the Methodology: The methodology is increasingly used for land ecosystems, less so for marine ecosystems, and least for inland water ecosystems. Inland waters are usually lumped with the land in a terrestrial classification.
The methodology for this indicator has not been standardized.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: If a suitable ecosystem classification is not available, alternative indicators are terrestrial protected area (land and inland water) as a percentage of the total terrestrial area, and marine protected area as a percentage of the total marine area.
4. ASSESSMENT
OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: A map of the ecosystems (ecoregions or equivalent) of the country or territory, preferably using a classification that is internationally compatible and valid for other countries and territories in the region. A map of the protected areas of the country or territory. A geo-referenced list of the protected areas, giving their sizes (area in hectares) and locations, and classifying them by protection category comparable to The World Conservation Union’s six management categories of protected area, see 3(a).
(b) National and International Data Availability and Sources: Major ecosystem classifications have been mapped for most regions and many countries. However, national classifications may not be compatible with other countries in their region, and few regional classifications are sufficiently detailed or accepted for nation use. Global classifications are generally too coarse. Most countries keep statistics on protected areas, but their protected area systems may not be accurately mapped.
In cooperation with the World Conservation Monitoring Centre (WCMC), IUCN’s World Commission on Protected Areas compiles the United Nations List of Protected Areas, which provides the name, IUCN category, location, size, and year of establishment of all protected areas of 1,000 hectares or more (plus smaller areas occupying entire islands) for all countries. WCMC maintains a copy of the UN list, compiles data on smaller protected areas, and has mapped most large areas and many smaller ones.
(c) Data references: United Nations List of Protected Areas (1997). Other data, including a prototype nationally designated protected areas database and a protected areas virtual library from WCMC.
5. AGENCIES
INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the World Conservation Union (IUCN) and PADATA. The contact point is a member, International Assessment Team, fax no. (250) 474-6976.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: World Conservation Monitoring Centre (WCMC).
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
Guidelines for Protected Area Management Categories, McNeely, Jeffrey (ed.). 1993.
Parks for Life: report of the IVth World Congress on National Parks and Protected Areas. IUCN - The World Conservation Union, Gland, Switzerland. Dinerstein, Eric, David M. Olson, et al. 1995.
A conservation assessment of the terrestrial ecoregions of Latin America and the Caribbean. The World Bank, Washington, DC. Ricketts, Taylor, Eric Dinerstein, et al. 1999.
A conservation assessment of the terrestrial ecoregions of North America. Volume I—the United States and Canada. Island Press, Washington, DC.
(b) Internet sites:
www.wcmc.org.uk/parks/index.htm
www.iucn.org/themes/wcpa/index.html
United Nations List of Protected Areas
1997.
www.wcmc.org.uk/protected_areas/data/un_97_list.html
www.wcmc.org.uk/parks/index.htm
ABUNDANCE
OF SELECTED KEY SPECIES
|
||
Environmental
|
Biodiversity |
Species |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Abundance of Selected Key Species.
(b)
Brief Definition: This indicator uses estimates of
population trends in selected species to represent changes in biodiversity, and
the relative effectiveness of measures to maintain biodiversity.
(c) Unit of Measurement: Number of mature individuals or other relevant indicator of abundance within a given area or population.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Environmental/ Biodiversity/Species.
2. POLICY
RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The indicator has the potential to illustrate the effectiveness of national measures designed to conserve biological diversity and ensure its use is sustainable, including the measures implemented in fulfilment of obligations accepted under the Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD).
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): The CBD recognises that biodiversity has its own intrinsic value and that biodiversity maintenance is essential for human life and sustainable development. Many biological resources, at gene, species and ecosystem level, are currently at risk of modification, damage or loss.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: The conservation of biological diversity and the sustainable use of its components are among the primary objectives of the Convention on Biological Diversity. This indicator is of particular relevance to several articles of the CBD, e.g., Article 6 - General measures for conservation and sustainable use; Article 7 - Identification and monitoring; and Article 10 - Sustainable use of components of biological diversity.
This indicator is relevant to many other global agreements for which the
maintenance of biological diversity is important, including: Convention on the
Conservation of Migratory Species of Wild Animals (Bonn); Convention on International Trade in Endangered
Species (CITES); United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea
(UNCLOSS); Convention on Wetlands of International Importance especially as
Waterfowl Habitat (Ramsar); International Convention for the Regulation of
Whaling.
Related regional conventions and agreements include:
Convention on the conservation of European wildlife and natural habitats (Berne);
Program for the Conservation of Arctic Flora and Fauna (CAFF); Convention on
the Conservation of Antarctic Marine Living Resources (CCAMLR); Agreement on
the Conservation of African-Eurasian Migratory Waterbirds (AEWA).
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: Although there are no quantified international targets, there is a widely accepted need to avoid further loss of biological diversity. This could variously involve measures designed to maintain current levels of biodiversity, or to reverse current declining trends (e.g., in threatened species) or to reverse current increasing trends (e.g., in problematic alien species). The general objectives of the CBD provide targets for Parties to the Convention; these objectives could be used as a guide for non-Party states.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator can be linked to the majority of the CSD Environmental Core Indicators, eg. annual fisheries catch by major species. There may also be indirect links to social indicators, such as changes in human population.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: Few of the concepts and definitions are as yet clearly and consistently applied. Some important points are noted below.
‘Abundance’ - This may be defined as
the number of mature individuals within the population or area under study.
Where it is difficult or inappropriate to survey individuals, comparable
surrogate units of measurement, such as number of nests (marine turtles) or
spawning stock biomass (fishes), may be acceptable.
‘Key species’ - It is possible to suggest general criteria for selecting key species, but it will be the responsibility of nations to undertake this selection. This should be done in a consultative way that ensures that regional and global interests are evaluated in addition to national priorities. No single organism or related group of organisms can be expected to reflect comprehensively the patterns of distribution and abundance of all other taxa, and effective biodiversity indicators are likely in most cases to be based on an indicator group composed of several appropriate species. The following categories of species might be considered as ‘key species’ when developing a biodiversity monitoring programme:
· Keystone species: A taxon whose impact on the ecosystem or community studied is disproportionately large relative to its abundance (Caro and O’Doherty, 1998). The loss of these species will significantly impact upon the population sizes of other species in the ecosystem, potentially leading to further species loss (‘cascade effect’).
· Rare or locally endemic species: Any area contributes to global biodiversity by the overall number of different species within it (and the different higher taxa that are represented), and by the proportion of those that do not occur anywhere else (species endemic to the area). Conservation of endemic species, particularly those sharing a discrete geographic area, can be a cost-effective way to maintain global biodiversity levels.
· Threatened species: By definition, a threatened species represents actual or potential decline in biodiversity, and recovery of threatened species following management intervention is strongly indicative of successful conservation measures.
Any candidate ‘key species’ selected from the above categories, or whatever other categories may be deemed appropriate, can be further selected on the basis of other more general biological and logistic criteria. The following are among the characteristics that effective indicator species are likely to possess (e.g., Noss, 1990; Pearson, 1994):
· taxonomically well known, so that populations can be reliably identified, usually in the field,
· biologically well understood,
· easy to survey (e.g., abundant, non-cryptic) ,
· widely distributed at higher taxonomic levels (e.g., order, family, tribe, genus) across a large geographic and habitat range,
· diverse and include many specialist taxa at lower taxonomic levels (e.g., species or species populations) which would be sensitive to habitat change,
· representative to some extent of distribution and abundance patterns in other related and unrelated taxa,
· actually or potentially of economic importance.
(b) Measurement Methods: Information on species abundance should be collected through the consistent, long-term, application of an appropriate survey technique that is widely accepted by the scientific community. Examples of publications with details of field study methodologies for certain groups are given below. Retrospective population information may be obtained through review of published literature, including previous field study reports, seeking material that is appropriate for comparison with the ongoing methodologies adopted.
While it is in most cases impossible to count every individual within a population
or area, a knowledge of habitat requirements and species population density in
sample areas, coupled with data on climate, altitude, soil type or vegetation
cover may be used to estimate population size in the area of interest. A geographic information system (GIS) is
commonly used to analyse the spatial data.
It is important that population size predictions are verified by
fieldwork.
This indicator will be better capable of international integration if, after
recording, abundance values are processed in a way that minimises or avoids the
effects of different scales of change in species that are biologically very
different. For example, raw abundance
values derived from a large terrestrial predator and from Antarctic krill would
need to be measured on scales possibly several orders of magnitude apart,
making any comparison between them meaningless. This also bears on national selection of key species, whenever
the goal is to derive a single integrated national indicator value for
biodiversity change over time.
By definition, monitoring of indicator species will be a continuing process, but for studies within a set timeframe, species should have a life history that complements this period, i.e., there may be little benefit from attempting to monitor very long-lived species over a five-year period only. For studies within a set area it is preferable to avoid selecting taxa that are directly influenced by external events, for example species that annually migrate outside of the study area. For many purposes, it will be preferable to avoid species that show high amplitude annual or irregular variation in population number.
(c)
Limitations of
the Indicator: Application of this indicator is constrained by
several factors, but these can mostly be overcome if resources and personnel
are available. The main factor
preventing the immediate and widespread application of this indicator is the
scarcity of suitable time-series of population data. In practice, change in biodiversity at species and habitat level
has to date very often been identified retrospectively, on an ad hoc basis, by
means of largely anecdotal evidence, and using terms and units of measurement
that are highly case-specific. A
structured monitoring framework is preferred, with a secure project lifetime of
many years. For comparative purposes,
perhaps seeking to build a comprehensive continental or global picture from
national data, it is important that similar parameters are measured in similar
terms. Care should be taken in
interpreting the results of studies based on indicator groups, since the
empirical relationship between biodiversity in different groups of organisms
has been little investigated.
(d) Status of the Methodology: No single practicable and universally accepted methodology currently exists. However, WCMC and WWF (Loh et al. (1998, 1999, 2000) have designed and implemented a system to generate indicators of biodiversity change over time, principally at global or continental level. Output from this system was first used in the WWF Living Planet Report 1998 and is more fully used in the year 2000 edition. This method is designed to make use of the very imperfect data that are available. The index value for each period is derived by normalising the geometric mean change over the period in the sample of populations. A line graph of these index values provides an indicator of biodiversity change. In principle, range area could be used where population counts are not available. This system is limited ultimately by the number of populations for which quantitative size (or area) estimates are available. A similar method has been used in the UK Government’s indicators programme (see http://www.environment.detr.gov.uk/sustainable/) to show population change in bird groups. Other related approaches have been used, and several other proposed biodiversity indicators remain at the design stage.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: The percentage of a country’s flora or fauna that is categorised as threatened with extinction provides a static view of the status of national biodiversity, and change over time in this proportion, or the changing membership of particular status categories, e.g., ‘Extinct in the Wild’ or ‘Critically Endangered’ could illustrate the effectiveness of measures for maintaining particular elements of biological diversity. This approach requires a stable species-level taxonomy, and a standard system for assessing conservation status. The IUCN Red List categories and criteria offer such a system. The value of this indicator is limited by the observation that in many instances change can be attributed to changes in taxonomy or in the availability of information, rather than to actual change in the conservation status of species. Permanent reduction in habitat area or quality will tend to lead to loss of some species originally present. Change in habitat area and quality (assessment of the latter is problematic) thus have the potential to indicate change in overall biodiversity.
4. ASSESSMENT
OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: The preferred input would be sets of quantitative data on the population size of selected species within a given area, assessed at suitable time intervals using a standardised method.
(b) National and International Data Availability and Sources: In the absence of any comprehensive global programme for species monitoring, and of universal standards for national monitoring, suitable data are in relatively short supply. Several developed countries hold data that would be suitable as a basis for this indicator. These data have variously been collected by amateur field biologists or as part of official monitoring programmes. It is in some cases probable that much more information exists with individuals, groups and organisations than is generally known, and the problem is thus one of gaining access to suitable data. However, although the number of field surveys and biodiversity assessments has increased greatly in recent years, very little true monitoring has taken place in developing countries or biodiversity-rich countries in the tropics. These are the nations most likely to face difficulties in developing monitoring programmes, but also to be much in need of them. By far the greatest volume of readily available time-series data relate to stock estimates and catch levels (the latter not usually suitable for abundance estimation) in the marine fish populations targeted by industrialised fisheries of developed countries. The various management bodies are often sources of these data. The bird species that are surveyed regularly by networks of mainly amateur ornithologists in developed countries are by far the best known large terrestrial group.
(c) Data References: Selected references only are mentioned as a general guide to the kinds of work that exist in this field. Population data and analytic tools for birds and other groups can be accessed at the website of the United States Geological Survey Patuxent Wildlife Research Centre (http://www.pwrc.usgs.gov), and see, for example, Sauer et al., 2000. Bird populations are the focus of one headline indicator in the UK Government’s strategy for sustainable development: DETR Government Statistical Service, 1999, Indicators for a Strategy of Sustainable Development for the UK: a baseline assessment (and see http://www.environment.detr.gov.uk/sustainable/). Extensive documentation on fish populations in the North Atlantic region is available at the website of the International Council for the Exploration of the Sea (ICES) (http://www.ices.dk). Results of the Living Planet Index methodology are presented in Loh et al., (1998, 1999, 2000), and the method itself will be submitted for publication at the end of 2000.
5. AGENCIES
INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is World Conservation Monitoring Centre/UNEP (WCMC/UNEP).
(b) Other Contributing Organisations:. The number of other organisations and individuals with the potential to contribute data or advice, or otherwise interested in further development of this indicator is very large. At global level, they would include inter alia: the Secretariat of the Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD), the World Wide Fund for Nature (WWF), IUCN – The World Conservation Union. Other concerned organisations include the Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD), the National Institute of Public Health and the Environment (RIVM) in The Netherlands.
6. REFERENCES
(a)
Readings:
Caro, T.M. and O’Doherty, G. 1998. On the use of surrogate species in conservation biology. Conservation Biology, 13(4): 805-814.
DETR Government Statistical Service. 1999. Quality of Life Counts 'Indicators for a Strategy of Sustainable Development for the UK: a baseline assessment'.
Groombridge, B. and Jenkins, M. D. 1994. Assessing Biodiversity Status and
Sustainability. WCMC Biodiversity Series No 5. World Conservation Press,
Cambridge, UK.
Loh, J., Randers, J., MacGillivray, A., Kapos,
V., Jenkins, M., Groombridge, B., Cox, N. and Warren, B. 1999. Living Planet Report 1999. WWF-World
Wide Fund for Nature, Gland, Switzerland.
Loh, J., Randers, J., MacGillivray, A., Kapos, V., Jenkins, M., Groombridge, B. and Cox, N. 1998. Living Planet Report 1998. WWF-World Wide Fund for Nature, Gland, Switzerland.
Loh, J. (Ed). 2000. Living Planet Report 2000. WWF-World Wide Fund for Nature, Gland,
Switzerland.
Noss, R.F. 1990. Indicators for monitoring biodiversity: a hierarchical approach. Conservation Biology, 4: 355-364.
Pearson, D.L. 1994. Selecting indicator taxa for the quantitative assessment of biodiversity. Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London: Biological Sciences, 345: 75-79.
Sauer, J.
R., J. E. Hines, I. Thomas, J. Fallon, and G. Gough. 2000. The North
American Breeding Bird Survey, Results and Analysis 1966 - 1999. Version 98.1, USGS Patuxent Wildlife Research Center,
Laurel, MD.
Field study guidelines:
Bibby, C. J., N. D. Burgess, & D. A. Hill (1993) Bird census techniques. Academic Press, London.
Bibby, C. J., M. J. Jones, & S. J. Marsden (1998) Expedition field techniques: bird surveys. Expedition Advisory Centre, Royal Geographic Society/ BirdLife International, London.
Heyer, R. W., M. A. Donnelly, R. W. McDiarmid, L. C. Hayek, & M. S. Foster (eds.) Measuring and monitoring biological diversity: standard methods for amphibians. Smithsonian Institution, Washington.
Wilson, D.E., F.R. Cole, J.D. Nichols, R.Rudran, and M.S. Foster. (eds.). 1996. Measuring and Monitoring Biological Diversity, Standard Methods for Mammals. Smithsonian Institution Press, Washington, D.C.
(b)
Internet sites:
http://www.environment.detr.gov.uk/sustainable/
http://www.iucn.org/themes/ssc/guidelines.htm
http://panda.org/livingplanet/lprreport.cfm
http://www.unep-wcmc.org/species/reports/
http://www.wri.org/wri/biodiv/cascade.html
|
Economic |
Economic Structure |
Economic Performance |
1.
INDICATOR
(a)
Name: Gross domestic product (GDP) per capita.
(b)
Brief Definition: Levels
of GDP per capita are obtained by dividing annual or period GDP at current
market prices by population. A
variation of the indicator could be the growth of real GDP per capita which is
derived by computing the annual or period growth rate of GDP in constant basic
producers' or purchasers' prices divided by corresponding population.
(c)
Unit of Measurement: $US.
(d)
Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Economic/Economic Structure/Economic Performance.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a)
Purpose: The indicator is a basic
economic growth indicator and measures the level and extent of total economic
output. It reflects changes in total
production of goods and services.
(b)
Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): Growth in the production of goods and
services is a basic determinant of how the economy fares. By allocating total production to each unit
of population, the extent to which the rate of individual output contributes to
the development process can be measured.
It indicates the pace of per capita income growth and also the rate that
resources are used up. As a single
composite indicator of economic growth, it is a most powerful summary indicator
of the economic state of development in its many aspects. It does not directly measure sustainable
development but it is a very important measure for the economic and
developmental aspects of sustainable development, including people's
consumption patterns and the use of renewable resources.
(c)
International Conventions and Agreements: None.
(d)
International Targets/Recommended Standards: National
targets are generally oriented towards priorities, availability of resources
and, in large measure, to historical economic performance. International targets are most often
established by financial institutions and international organizations only for
the purposes of intercountry comparison of economic performance in determining
the direction of aid distribution or resource allocation projects. Country
groupings to form economic entities, for example, the European Union,
Organization of Petroleum Exporting Countries (OPEC), also set international
targets among constituent members to serve as guidelines in national policy
priority setting. Moreover, the United
Nations uses average world per capita income as a threshold in setting the
level of relief allowance for countries with large population in its
formulation of the scale of assessments of member states.
(e)
Linkages to Other Indicators: As a
highly aggregated composite measure, this indicator has close links with many,
more disaggregated indicators. Examples
would include population growth, net migration, other GDP indicators, land use
change, arable land per capita, and forest area.
3. METHODOLOGICAL DESCRIPTION
(a)
Underlying Definitions and Concepts: GDP as
described in the 1993 SNA can be defined in three ways: Firstly, it is the sum total value- added of
all production units including all taxes and subsidies on products which are
not included in the valuation of output.
It is also equal to the sum of final uses of goods and services (except
intermediate consumption) measured in purchasers' prices, less the value of
imports of goods and services. Finally,
it can be measured as the sum of primary incomes distributed by resident
producer units.
(b)
Measurement Methods: The current price estimates of GDP are adjusted
to GDP at constant prices with the use of price deflators. Population estimates
enable the conversion of total GDP to per capita levels, while exchange rates
and other conversion factors are used to arrive at values based on a common
unit of currency. Real GDP is derived
by extrapolating total value- added in the base year with production indicators
in physical terms or by deflating current price values by a price deflator.
(c)
Limitations of the Indicator: As a necessary condition to being a key economic
performance indicator of sustainable development, one of the often‑cited
limitations of GDP is that it does not account for the social and environmental
costs of production; it therefore is not a good measure of the level of over‑all
well being. For example, GDP per capita
reveals nothing concerning energy and material interactions with the
environment. GDP is also not considered
a good measure of sustainable consumption because it does not allow for the
capital used up in the production process.
(d)
Status of Methodology: The 1993 System of National Accounts (SNA)
provides international standards for national accounts. There may exist some differences in national
accounting and demographic reporting procedures and practices between
countries. One other possible drawback
could lie in the comparability of price information used in deflating current
price data and technical differences in the choice of base year for the
original data. Additionally, a
considered basic limitation lies in the conversion of GDP into a common
denomination as a result of current misalignments in exchange rates for some
countries vis‑a‑vis the comparator currency (US dollar)
particularly for those countries in transition whose market exchange rates
produce unrealistic levels of GDP, making any meaningful inter-country
interpretation difficult.
(e)
Alternative Definitions/Indicators: Economic indicators that measure the achievement
of higher levels of goods and services more efficiently are better indicators
of sustainable development. Consumption
trends are better reflected by such indicators as Personal Consumption
expenditures as used in the USA. This
indicator can be derived from the SNA.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a)
Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: The
conversion rates used by the UN Statistics Division (UNSD) are normally the
market or blended rates of exchange obtained from the International Monetary
Fund (IMF). In some cases, use is made
of UN operational rates that are established primarily for the settlement of
administrative transactions between host countries and the UN. In very unique circumstances the use of
purchasing power parities (PPP) or price‑adjusted rates of exchange
(PARE) is necessary. The World Bank
also uses a special exchange rate where the official exchange rate produces
distortion in the dollar levels of GDP.
(b)
National and International Data Availability and
Sources: The indicator has no serious limitations in terms
of data availability. The principal
data elements for a majority of countries are mostly and regularly available
from national and international sources on a historical basis. Internationally accepted conceptual
guidelines, are also available to assist with the compilation of the
indicator. Annual GDP data in current
and constant prices are generally reported by national statistical offices or
central banks in the United Nations (UN) National Accounts questionnaire and
supplemented by estimates prepared by the UN as well as other international
organizations such as the World Bank and the IMF. The Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) compiles quarterly GDP estimates for
its Members. Population data are mainly
obtained either through censuses or surveys.
These are supplemented by growth estimates prepared by the UN Population
Division.
(c)
Data References: Comprehensive national accounts statistics are
published by the UN in the series National
Accounts Statistics: Main Aggregates and Detailed Tables. A historical series of GDP is available
from the national accounts database of the UN Statistics Division. Population data and projections are
available in the World Population Prospects published by the Population
Division of the UN Department of Economic and Social Affairs. Exchange rates are published by the IMF in International Financial Statistics.
5.
AGENCIES INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE
INDICATOR
(a)
Lead Agency:
The lead agency is the
United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs (DESA). The contact point is the Director,
Statistics Division, DESA; fax no. (1 212) 963 9851.
(b)
Other Contributing Organizations: None.
6. REFERENCES
(a)
Readings: The 1993 SNA provides international standards on national accounts and
is the product of collaborative efforts between EUROSTAT, IMF, OECD, UN and the
World Bank.
(b) Internet site: United Nations Statistics Division: http://www.un.org/Depts/unsd
INVESTMENT SHARE IN GROSS DOMESTIC PRODUCT |
||
|
Economic |
Economic Structure |
Economic Performance |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Investment Share in Gross Domestic Product (GDP).
(b) Brief Definition: This indicator measures the share of investment in relation to total production. It is obtained by dividing gross production capital formation by gross domestic product, both at purchasers' prices.
(c) Unit of Measurement: %.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Economic/Economic Structure/Economic Performance.
2. POLICY
RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The rate of investment measures the stimulus to economic development, reflecting the infusion of requisite capital to finance the development process.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): This indicator deals with the processes and patterns of economic activities. It is an important element of the sustainable development process in developing countries, aimed at increasing their partnership in the global economy. It reflects an important financial component aimed at accelerating the pace of development.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: None.
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: None. National targets for investment share to GDP are usually included in government policy as a basis for budget funding programmes and for priority-setting exercises.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator is closely linked with other measures of economic development, in particular GDP per capita and share of manufacturing in GDP.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a)
Underlying Definitions
and Concepts: Gross capital
formation (gross investment) is defined in the System of National Accounts
(SNA) as the total value of gross fixed capital formation plus changes in
inventories and acquisitions less disposal of valuables. Fixed capital formation is the total value
of a producer's acquisitions of fixed assets, less disposal, together with
certain additions to the value of non-produced assets. Gross capital formation includes outlays on
additions of new durable goods to stocks of fixed asset by industries,
producers of government services, the private sector, non-profit services, and
households, but excludes outlays of government services on durable goods for
military use. It is further classified
into new and existing tangible (dwellings, buildings and structures,
machineries and equipment, etc.) and intangible (mineral exploration, computer
software, entertainment, artistic and literary originals, etc.) assets.
(b)
Measurement
Methods: Gross capital formation at
purchasers’ prices (see under 3(a)) divided by gross domestic product at
purchasers’ prices.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: Investments in SNA terms, as in this indicator, constitute only investments on produced assets. Any expenditure on non-produced assets, for example, land or payments for education and health that enhance the quality of human capital are not included.
(d)
Status of the
Methodology: The concepts of gross
capital formation and GDP are standardized in the SNA and, therefore,
comparable between countries.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: An alternative indicator would be one which would identify selected investment expenditures by sector, such as environmental protection, health and education, housing, nutrition, etc., that are individually considered relevant to sustainable development. A second alternative would report the indicator using gross fixed capital formation.
4. DATA
ASSESSMENT
(a)
Data Needed to Compile
the Indicator:
(i) gross capital formation at purchasers’ prices;
(ii) gross domestic product at purchasers’ prices.
(b)
National and
International Data Availability and Sources:
Data is of reasonable quality and commonly available from national
sources on a historical basis. Data on
gross capital formation and GDP are
generally reported by national statistical offices or central banks to the UN
National Accounts questionnaire. These
are supplemented by estimates prepared by the United Nations Statistical
Division (UNSD) as well as other international
organizations, such as the World Bank and the International Monetary Fund
(IMF).
(c) Data References: National accounts statistics are published in the series National Accounts Statistics: Main Aggregates and Detailed Tables.
5. AGENCIES
INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the United Nations Department of Economics and Social Affairs (DESA). The contact point in terms of SNA references as well as data compilation on an international level is the Director, Statistics Division, DESA; fax no. (1 212) 963 9851.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: None.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings: Further details on the conceptual definition of GDP are contained in the System of National Accounts, 1993.
(b)
Internet site: United Nations Statistics Division: http://www.un.org/Depts/unsd
|
Economic |
Economic Structure |
Trade |
(a) Name: Balance of trade in goods and services.
(b) Brief Definition: The difference between the value of exported goods and services and the value of imported goods and services.
(c) Unit of Measurement: $US.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Economic/Economic Structure/Trade.
(a) Purpose: The indicator shows the relation of an economy with other economies in the world. The components of the indicator (exports and/or imports) are reflecting the change in economic behavior of the domestic trade enterprises, the change in exchange rate, the effect of the change in exchange rate, and international competitiveness. The change can imply economic policy changes. The components of the indicator show how an economy is participating in international co-operation. Its components show the openness of an economy if it is compared to the value of GDP and can also reflect an economy’s dependence and vulnerability.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): Trade liberalization, in general, may have positive effects on sustainable development. It can stimulate economic diversification, improve the efficiency of resource allocation and encourage the transfer of innovative technologies. On the other hand, it can also result in increased and unsustainable resource use when the environmental costs of production are not fully internalized and reflected in market prices.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: None.
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: None.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator is the balancing item of the External account of goods and services in the sequence of the national accounts in the 1993 SNA. It is a component of GDP. It is linked to other indicators of economic structure, financial status, production and consumption patterns.
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: The balance of trade in goods and services is defined in the 1993 SNA, and partly in the International Trade Statistics.
(b) Measurement Methods: Exports of goods and services are standard items in the balance of payments and national accounts. Exports of goods and services consist of sales, barter, or gifts or grants, of goods and services from resident to non-residents, while imports consist of purchases, barter, or receipts of gifts or grants, of goods and services by resident from non-residents. Exports and imports of goods in the SNA are recorded at border value. Total imports and exports of goods are valued free-on-board (at the exporter’s customs frontier). The balance of trade in goods and services is the difference of the above-mentioned exports and imports of goods and services.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: The indicator has no serious limitations in terms of methodology and data availability. In terms of interpretation, as it is the balancing item of exports and imports, it does not tell too much without looking at its components and their relation to other indicators.
(d) Status of Methodology: The treatment of exports and imports of goods and services in the 1993 SNA is generally identical with that in the balance of payments accounts as described in the Balance of Payments Manual (IMF, 1993).
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: The material composition (goods/services, highly manufactured products/raw materials) of exports and imports also has direct relationship with sustainability.
4. ASSESSMENT
OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: (i) Exports of goods and services; (ii) Imports of goods and services.
(b) National and International Data Availability and Sources: The principal data elements for a majority of countries are mostly and regularly available from national and international sources on a historical basis. Internationally accepted guidelines, are also available to assist with the compilation of the indicator. Annual exports and imports of goods and services are generally reported by national statistical offices or central banks in the United Nations (UN) questionnaires and/or central bank/statistical agency reports/data transmissions, national publications.
(c) Data References: Comprehensive national accounts statistics are published by the UN in the series of National Accounts Statistics: Main aggregates and Detailed Tables, and in IMF’s International Financial Statistics Yearbook.
5.
AGENCIES
INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agencies are the United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Statistics Division, and the International Monetary Fund, Statistics Department.
(b) Other contributing organizations: OECD Statistical Directorate, World Bank
6.
REFERENCES
(a) Readings: 1993 System of National Accounts; Balance of Payments Manual, 1993 IMF; World Development Indicators 2000, CD Rom of the World Bank.
(b) Internet sites:
United
Nations Statistics Division: http://www.un.org/Depts/unsd
World Bank: http://www.worldbank.org
|
DEBT TO GROSS NATIONAL PRODUCT RATIO |
||
|
Economic |
Economic Structure |
Financial Status |
1. Indicator
(a) Name: Debt to Gross National Product Ratio (GNP).
(b) Brief Definition: The ratio of total external debt to gross national product.
(c) Unit of Measurement: %.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Economic/Economic Structure/Financial Status.
2. Policy Relevance
(a) Purpose: Debt/GNP is a measure of the degree of indebtedness, and the indicator helps to assess the external debt situation (and debt carrying capacity) of a country.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): The ratio measures the outstanding obligations in relation to the broadest measure of the income-generating power of an economy. The higher the ratio, the greater is the output that has to be forgone from sustainable development to service the debt. A debt overhang exists when the debt stock exceeds that which could reasonably be serviced by the debtor country in the medium or long-term. There are no simple rules on what constitutes a reasonable burden, however, and it will vary from country to country.
(c) International
Conventions and Agreements: None.
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: None.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator, as a measure of unsustainability, is closely linked to other financial and international cooperation indicators. It also has general bearing on several of the social and environmental indicators that show progress towards sustainable development.
3. Methodological Description
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: Total external debt stock is defined as the sum of long-term external debt, the use of International Monetary Fund (IMF) credit, and short-term external debt. Long-term external debt is defined as debt that has an original or extended maturity of more than one year, that is owed to non-residents, and repayable in foreign currency, goods, or services. Long-term debt has three components:
i) Public debt, which is an external obligation of a public debtor, including the national government, a political subdivision (or an agency of either), and autonomous public bodies;
ii) Publicly guaranteed debt, which is an external obligation of a private debtor that is guaranteed for repayment by a public entity; and
iii) Private non-guaranteed debt, which is an external obligation of a private debtor that is not guaranteed for repayment by a public entity.
Use of International Monetary Fund (IMF) credit denotes repurchase obligations to the IMF with respect to all uses of IMF resources, excluding those resulting from drawings in the reserve tranche. Use of IMF credits comprises purchases under the credit tranches, including enlarged access resources and all special facilities (the buffer stock, compensatory financing, extended fund, and oil facilities), trust fund loans, and operations under the Stand-by Arrangement, Extended Stand-by Arrangement, the Poverty Reduction and Growth Facility (formerly known as the Enhanced Structural Adjustment Facility).
Short-term external debt is defined as debt that has an original maturity of one year or less. No distinction is made between public and private non-guaranteed short-term debt. The Global Development Finance includes interest in arrears (defined as interest payment due but not paid) on long-term debt, on a cumulative basis, under short-term debt.
(b) Measurement Methods: Total external debt is measured by the sum of long-term external debt, the use of IMF credit and short-term external debt. For definition of these terms see 3(a) above.
Gross national product (GNP) is the sum of value
added by all resident producers plus any taxes (less subsidies) not included in
the valuation of output, plus net receipts of primary income (compensation of
employees and property income) from abroad.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: No one indicator can provide an exhaustive analysis of the debt situation of a country. While this indicator is a measure of the extent of the debt overhang of a country, it needs to be interpreted carefully. The nominal stock of outstanding debt fails to take into account the differing concessional terms of the external debt. This can give misleading indications regarding the future debt-servicing burden.
(d) Status of Methodology: Not Available.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: One measure that takes into account both the profile of debt servicing payments and the concessional aspect of the debt is the present value of external debt. When the debt stock of a country is mostly on non-concessional terms then the difference between the present and nominal value are small. Another reason why this ratio can be problematic is because of erratic changes arising from real exchange rate movements.
4. Assessment OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Data required includes the sum of total external debt stock to include long-term external debt, the use of International Monetary Fund (IMF) credit and short-term external debt. In addition, gross national product data (GNP) is needed.
(b) National and International Data Availability and Sources: The principal sources of the information for the long-term external debt indicator are reports from member countries to the World Bank through the Debtor Reporting System (DRS). These countries have received either IBRD loans or IDA credits. Reporting countries submit detailed loan-by-loan reports through the DRS on the annual status, transactions, and terms of the long-term external debt of public agencies, and that of private ones guaranteed by a public agency in the debtor country. Information on debt owed to multilateral institutions is drawn from the files of these institutions. A total of 137 individual countries report to the World Bank’s DRS.
Data on the use of IMF credit is obtained from the IMF’s Treasury Department.
The short-term debt data are as reported by the debtor country or estimates derived from creditor sources. The principal creditor sources are the semiannual series of commercial banks’ claims on developing countries, published by the Bank for International Settlements (BIS), and data on officially guaranteed suppliers’ credits compiled by the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD). For some countries, estimates are prepared by pooling creditor and debtor information.
Data on non-debt creating flows are derived from several sources. Data on FDI come from the IMF balance of payments, supplemented by detailed data on direct investment from source and recipient countries. Data on portfolio equity flows are obtained from market sources and national statistical offices or securities exchanges, and that on grants from the OECD Development Assistance Committee.
Data on GNP are from national statistical offices, complemented by World Bank staff estimates.
(c) Data References: The World Bank Global Development Finance and World Development Indicators (Annual Publications).
5. Agencies Involved in the Development of the Indicator
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the World Bank (WB). The contact point is the World Development Indicators Team, Development Data Group, the World Bank; fax no. (1 202) 522-1785.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: None.
6. References
(a) Readings:
The World Bank. Global Development Finance. 2000.
The World Bank. 2000 World Development Indicators. 2000
(b) Internet site: www.worldbank.org/data
|
TOTAL OFFICIAL DEVELOPMENT ASSISTANCE GIVEN OR
RECEIVED AS A PERCENTAGE OF GROSS NATIONAL PRODUCT |
||
|
Economic |
Economic Structure |
Financial Status |
1. Indicator
(a) Name: Total Official Development Assistance (ODA) given or received as a percentage of Gross National Product (GNP).
(b) Brief Definition: This indicator is defined as the total ODA given or received as a share of GNP of the source or recipient country, respectively. When ODA flows by donor countries are measured, ODA comprises bilateral disbursements of concessional funds to developing countries and multilateral institutions. When ODA receipts by developing countries are measured, ODA comprises disbursement of concessional finance from both bilateral and multilateral sources.
(c) Unit of Measurement: %.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Economic/Economic Structure/Financial Status.
2. Policy Relevance
(a) Purpose: The indicator is a measure of the size of flows that are both concessional, and aimed mainly at promoting development and welfare of developing countries. It conveys information about the borrower’s receipt of aid from official lenders or official lender’s concessional flows to developing countries.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): Financial resources are obviously needed for the attainment of sustainable development. Agenda 21 calls for the monitoring of the provision of financial resources, particularly in developing countries, so that the international community can take further action on the basis of accurate and reliable data.
(c) International
Conventions and Agreements: None.
(d) International
Targets/Recommended Standards: For developed countries, the United Nations
has established that ODA should represent 0.7% of GNP.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator is particularly linked with the other financial and international cooperation indicators.
3. Methodological Description
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: Not Available.
(b) Measurement Methods: There are several ways of measuring Official Development Assistance (ODA) flows. The World Bank takes a developing-country/debtor perspective and the Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) takes a donor/creditor-country perspective. ODA consists of grants or loans to developing countries that are undertaken by the official sector with the purpose of promoting economic development and welfare. Grants are defined as disbursements, in money or in kind, for which there is no repayment required. ODA loans are provided at concessional financial terms, that is with a grant element of 25 percent or more. The degree of concessionality is determined by the terms of a loan -interest rate, maturity, and grace period. The OECD includes grants for technical cooperation, but the World Bank excludes them because these grants mostly represent the provision of services rather than a flow of funds.
Gross national product (GNP) is the sum of value
added by all resident producers plus any taxes (less subsidies) not included in
the valuation of output, plus net receipts of primary income (compensation of
employees and property income) from abroad.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: Not Available.
(d) Status
of Methodology: Not Available.
(e) Alternative
Definitions/Indicators: Not
Available.
4. Assessment OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Total Official Development Assistance (ODA) given or received and GNP data.
(b) National and International Data Availability and Sources: The principal source of the information are the OECD and the World Bank’s Debtor Reporting System. The OECD data are obtained from donor and creditor sources through the information collected by the Development Assistance Committee. It includes information from the Creditor Reporting System and the joint OECD/Bank for International Settlements (BIS) system for identifying officially guaranteed claims of private banks on developing countries.
(c) Data References: The World Bank Global Development Finance and World Development Indicators (Annual Publications).
5. Agencies Involved in the Development of the
Indicator
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the World Bank (WB). The contact point is the World Development Indicators Team, Development Data Group, the World Bank; fax no. (1 202) 522-1785.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: The Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) represents a contributing agency to the development of this indicator.
6. References
(a) Readings:
The World Bank. Global Development Finance. 2000.
The World Bank. 2000 World Development Indicators. 2000
(b) Internet site: www.worldbank.org/data
|
INTENSITY OF MATERIAL USE |
||
|
Economic |
Consumption and Production Patterns |
Material Consumption |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Intensity of Material Use.
(b) Brief Definition: The quantities of minerals and metals, including primary and secondary (recycled) materials, consumed per unit of real Gross Domestic Product (GDP).
(c) Unit of Measurement: kgs, tonnes or m3 per $1,000 of GDP.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicators Set: Economic/Consumption and Production Patterns/Material Consumption.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The indicator provides a basis for policies to increase the efficient use of raw materials in order to conserve natural resources and reduce environment degradation resulting from primary production, material processing, manufacturing and waste disposal.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): Primary production of raw materials, processing of the materials into products, and ultimate disposal of the waste material has major environmental impacts. Reducing the material intensity of production and consumption of goods and services is essential to environmental protection and resource conservation. Reductions in intensity of material use can be achieved by more efficient use of natural resources in production and consumption, by recycling used and waste material, and by shifts in consumption patterns to less material intensive goods and services. The indicator allows an analysis of consumption of natural resources, as well as trends in recovery and recycling.
The four-component structure of the indicator (consumption of primary material, consumption of secondary material, changes in stocks, and material embodied in imports and exports) provides a measure of the total material consumption of the economy. Per-capita consumption of the materials could also be determined, facilitating the interpretation of trends in material intensity.
The indicator can also be used as a proxy for assessing trends in industrial pollution. In the United States, for example, it is estimated that material-intensive industries account for about 70% of total air and water pollution. Throughput-to-pollution ratios can be used for this calculation, although technological change would affect the results.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: None.
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: None.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator is linked to other indicators which reflect the stage of economic development and the structure of the economy, such as share of manufacturing value-added in GDP and energy use per unit GDP.
3. Methodological Description
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: Not Applicable.
(b) Measurement Methods: Using the UNCTAD database on minerals and metals, consumption of primary and secondary materials can be estimated. These data are then adjusted for (i) changes in stocks of producers, traders and manufacturers, and (ii) the volume of material contained in imports and exports of material-intensive semi-fabricates and manufactures. The calculated volume of material consumption is then divided by real GDP in order to compute material consumption per unit of GDP. Material intensity data can be disaggregated into intensity of use of primary and secondary materials.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: It is difficult to accurately estimate the consumption of secondary materials, changes in stocks and the material contained in traded semi-fabricates and manufactures. For manufactures, conversion factors for material content are being compiled and updated to take account of changing manufacturing technologies. National and regional differences in this regard, however, are difficult to reflect.
(d) Status of the Methodology: There is limited use of indicators of material intensity in some developed countries, with varying methodologies.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: None.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Most of the required consumption and trade data are available in UNCTAD's database on minerals and metals. Information on consumption of secondary materials is incomplete but can be estimated with reasonable accuracy. Data on changes in stocks, in particular at the level of traders and manufacturers, are scant, although some reasonable estimates can be made. Conversion factors for material content in semi-fabricates are being compiled and updated in collaboration with various industry associations. Information, however, is often incomplete, not representative, or too general.
(b) National and International Data Availability and Sources: New estimates of national consumption of some 20 commodities per unit of GDP are currently being prepared, updating the results of a 1991 survey. The analysis emphasizes consumption trends of primary versus secondary materials.
(c) Data References: Not Available.
5. AGENCIES
INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (UNCTAD). The contact point is the Coordinator, Sustainable Development, UNCTAD; fax no. (41 22) 907 0047.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: Eurostat, World Resources Institute, and the Wuppertal Institute on Climate, Environment and Energy have contributed to the development of this indicator.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
Eurostat. Primary
Material Balances.
Ndiaye, D. Statistical Study on the Consumption of Metals. Centre d'Economie des Ressources Naturelles, Ecole Nationale Supérieure des Mines de Paris. Paris, 1991.
World Resources Institute. World Resources 1994-95, part IV, Chapter 21, 1995.
Behrensmeier, R. and S. Bringezu. On the Methodology of Analysing Macro-economic Material Intensity. Wuppertal Institute on Climate, Environment and Energy, Wuppertal Papers, No. 34, April 1995.
Hammond, Allen, et al. Environmental Indicators: A Systematic Approach to Measuring and Reporting on Environmental Policy Performance in the Context of Sustainable Development, (Chapter VI and Appendix I). World Resources Institute, Washington, D.C., 1995.
Hoffmann, U and D. Zivkovic. Demand Growth for Industrial Raw Materials and its Determinants: An Analysis for the Period 1965-1988. UNCTAD Discussion Papers, No. 50, Geneva, November 1992.
(b) Internet site: None.
|
ANNUAL ENERGY
CONSUMPTION PER CAPITA |
||
|
Economic |
Consumption and
Production Patterns |
Energy Use |
1.
INDICATOR
(a) Name: Annual energy consumption per capita.
(b) Brief Definition: The per capita amount of energy - liquids, solids, gases and electricity – available in a given year in a given country or geographical area.
(c) Unit of Measurement: Gigajoules.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Economic/Consumption and Production Patterns/ Energy Use.
2. POLICY
RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The indicator is a widely used measure of access to and use of energy, individual and industrial energy consumption patterns and the energy intensity of a society.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): Energy is a key factor in industrial development and in providing vital services that improve the quality of life. Traditionally energy has been regarded as the engine of economic progress. However, its production, use, and byproducts have resulted in major pressures on the environment, both from a resource use and pollution point of view. The decoupling of energy use from development represents a major challenge of sustainable development. The long-term aim is for development and prosperity to continue through gains in energy efficiency rather than increased consumption and a transition towards the environmentally friendly use of renewable resources. On the other hand, limited access to energy is a serious constraint to development in the developing world, where the per capita use of energy is less than one sixth that of the industrialized world.
(c)
International Conventions and Agreements: UNFCC and the Kyoto Protocol call for
limitations on total greenhouse gas emissions, which are dominated by COs
from the combustion of fossil fuels.
(d)
International
Targets/Recommended Standards: The Kyoto Protocol sets targets for total
greenhouse gas emissions for Annex I (developed) countries.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: The indicator is closely linked with other indicators of the economy, with environmental indicators such as climate change, air quality and land use, and also with social indicators.
3. Methodological Description
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: Gross inland consumption of energy is a key aggregate in the energy balances. Consumption of energy refers to “apparent” consumption and is derived from the formula that takes into account production, exports, imports and stock changes. Production refers to the first stage of production. International trade of energy commodities is based on the “general trade” system, that is, all goods entering and leaving the national boundary of a country are recorded as export and imports. Bunkers refer to fuels supplied to ships engaged in international transport, irrespective of the carriers’ flag. In general, data on stocks refer to changes in stocks of producers, importers and/or industrial consumers at the beginning and the end of the year.
(b) Measurement Methods: The indicator is calculated as the ratio of total energy requirement and mid-year population. Total energy requirement (gross inland consumption) is calculated from the following formula: Primary production + Imports – Exports – Bunkers +/- Stock changes = Total energy requirement.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: Apparent consumption may in some cases represent only an indication of the magnitude of actual gross inland availability. The actual value of the indicator is strongly influenced by a multitude of economic, social and geographical factors. When using it as an indicator of sustainability the indicator has to be interpreted in connection with other indicators of economic development and energy use, as smaller or larger values of the indicator do not necessarily indicate more or less sustainable development.
(d) Status of the Methodology: The indicator is in widespread use, but without a standardized methodology. International recommendations are available.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: None.
4. ASSESSMENT
OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Energy commodity data for production and consumption (energy balances) and mid-year population estimates.
(b)
National and
International Data Availability and Sources:
Energy commodity data for production and consumption, and population
data are regularly available for most countries at the national level; and for
some countries, at the sub-national level.
Both types of data are compiled by and available from national
statistical offices and country publications.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs (DESA). The contact point is the Director, Statistics Division, DESA; fax no. (1 212) 963 9851.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: Other organizations involved in the indicator development include the International Energy Agency of the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD/IEA), and Eurostat.
(c)
Data References: United Nations: Energy Statistics Yearbook. United Nations: Energy Balances and
Electricity Profiles.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
Concepts and Methods in Energy Statistics, with Special Reference to Energy Accounts and Balances. United Nations, 1982.
Energy Statistics: Definitions, Units of Measure and Conversion Factors. United Nations, 1987.
Energy Statistics: A Manual for Developing Countries. United Nations, 1991.
(b) Internet site: United Nations Statistics Division: http://www.un.org/Depts/unsd
SHARE OF CONSUMPTION OF RENEWABLE ENERGY RESOURCES |
||
|
Economic |
Consumption and
Production Patterns |
Energy Use |
1. INDICATOR
(a)
Name: Share of consumption of renewable energy
resources.
(b)
Brief Definition: The percentage of a country’s total energy
consumption supplied from renewable energy souces.
(c)
Unit of Measurement: %
(d)
Placement in the CSD Indicator Set:
Economic/Consumption and Production Patterns/ Energy Use.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a)
Purpose: This indicator measures the
proportion of energy mix between renewable and non-renewable energy resources.
(b)
Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): Chapter 4 of Agenda 21 calls for an
improvement of efficiency in the use of energy sources and for a transition
towards the environmentally friendly use of renewable resources. Energy is a key aspect of consumption and
production. Dependence on non-renewable
resources can be regarded as unsustainable in the long term. Renewable resources, on the other hand, can
supply energy continuously under sustainable management practices and their use
in general create less environmental pressure.
The ratio of non-renewable to renewable energy resources represents a
measure of a country's sustainability.
(c)
International Conventions and Agreements: None.
(d)
International Targets/Recommended Standards: None.
(e)
Linkages to Other Indicators:
Interpretation of this indicator is enhanced when combined with annual
energy production, annual energy consumption per capita, and lifetime of proven
energy reserves. It is also closely
linked to some of the environmental indicators such as greenhouse gas
emissions.
3.
Methodological Description
(a)
Underlying Definitions and Concepts: The elements comprising this indicator are
consumption of renewable resources and total energy consumption. Renewable energy sources refer to energy
collected from current ambient energy flows or from substances derived from
them. This definition includes energy
derived from geothermal, hydro, solar, tide, wind and wave power, and biofuels,
such as fuelwood, bagasse, charcoal, animal and vegetal wastes, and other
(industrial and municipal) wastes.
Consumption refers to "apparent consumption".
(b)
Measurement
Methods: This indicator is computed by calculating the ratio of consumption
of energy from renewable resources over total energy consumption. Apparent consumption is calculated by the
following formula: Primary production + Imports – Exports – Bunkers +/- stock
changes.
Limitations
of the Indicator: Due to the large variety of forms of renewables
and their uses, data collection is difficult.
Comparability of national data is limited due to the lack of
standardized methodologies.
Alternative
Definitions/Indicators: None.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a)
Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Consumption of energy from renewable resources; total
energy consumption.
(b)
National and International Data Availability and
Sources: National data
and estimates on renewable resources are available from national statistical
offices and country publications for many countries. The United Nations Statistics Division, and the International
Energy Agency of the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development
compile data and estimates based on information from national and international
sources.
(c)
Data References:
United Nations: Energy
Statistics Yearbook and Energy Balances and Electricity Profiles; International
Energy Agency: Energy Balances of OECD Countries, Energy Balances of Non-OECD
Countries; World Energy Council: Survey of Energy Resources.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN THE
DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a)
Lead Agency: The lead agency is the United
Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Statistics Division.
(b)
Other Contributing Organizations: The agencies involved in the development of this
indicator are the World Energy Council (WEC), the International Energy Agency
of the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD/IAE),
Eurostat, and the Economic Commission for Europe.
(c)
Data References: World Energy Council: Survey of Energy Resources. United Nations: Energy Statistics Yearbook.
6. REFERENCES
(a)
Readings: See 5(c)
(b)
Internet site:
United Nations Statistics
Division: http://www.un.org/Depts/unsd
|
ENERGY USE PER
UNIT OF GDP (ENERGY INTENSITY) |
||
|
Economic |
Consumption and Production Patterns |
Energy Use |
1.
INDICATOR
(a) Name: Energy Use per unit of GDP.
(b) Brief Definition: Ratio of total energy use to GDP.
(c) Unit of Measurement: Megajoules (mJ) per $.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Economic/Consumption and Production Patterns/ Energy Use.
2. POLICY
RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: Trends in overall energy use relative to GDP indicate the general relationship of energy consumption to economic development and provide a rough basis for projecting energy consumption and its environmental impacts with economic growth. For energy policy-making, however, sectoral or sub-sectoral energy intensities should be used.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): Energy is essential for economic and social development, but consumption of fossil fuels is the major cause of air pollution and climate change. Improving energy efficiency and delinking economic development from energy consumption, particularly of fossil fuels, is essential to sustainable development.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: UNFCCC and its Kyoto Protocol call for limitations on total greenhouse gas emissions, which are dominated by CO2 from fossil fuels.
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: No specific target for energy intensity. The Kyoto Protocol sets targets for total greenhouse gas emissions for annex I (developed) countries.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: The ratio of energy use to GDP is an
aggregate of sectoral energy intensity indicators and is thus linked to the
energy intensities for the manufacturing, transportation, commercial/services
and residential sectors, for which separate methodology sheets have been
prepared. This indicator is also linked
to indicators for total energy consumption, greenhouse gas emissions and air
pollution emissions.
3.
Methodological Description
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: The ratio of energy use to GDP is also called “energy intensity”. The term “energy intensity” is better used for sectoral or sub-sectoral ratios of energy use to output. The indicator could be called “aggregate energy intensity” or “economy-wide energy intensity”.
The ratio of energy use to GDP indicates the total energy being
used to support economic and social activity.
It represents an aggregate of energy consumption resulting from a wide
range of production and consumption activities. In specific economic sectors and sub-sectors, the ratio of energy
use to output or activity is the “energy intensity” (if the output is measured
in economic units) or the “specific energy requirement” (if the output is
measured in physical units such as tonnes or passenger-kilometers).
Due to the limitations described in section 3 (c) below, total energy use should be disaggregated into components, by sector (manufacturing, transportation, residential, commercial/services, industry, agriculture, construction, etc.) or sub-sector. For each sector or sub-sector, energy use can be related to a convenient measure of output to provide a sectoral or sub-sectoral energy intensity. Examples include energy use for steel-making relative to tonnes of steel produced; energy consumption by passenger vehicles relative to passenger- or vehicle-kilometers; energy consumption in buildings relative to their floor area. (See separate methodology sheets for manufacturing, transportation, commercial/services, and residential sectors).
The energy intensity of a process (energy
consumed per unit of output) is the inverse of the “energy efficiency” of the
process (output per unit energy consumed).
(b) Measurement Methods:
·
Energy Use:
Total and sectoral energy consumption is obtained from national energy
balances. Household and services/commercial consumption should be carefully
separated, and manufacturing (ISIC D, formerly 3) should be separated from
other industrial uses (ISIC C and F, formerly 2 and 5) and agriculture (ISIC A
and B, formerly 1).
Unit: Energy is measured in terajoules
(TJ, 1012J), petajoules (PJ, 1015J), or exajoules (EJ, 1018J).
·
Output:
Components of GDP should be deflated to constant dollars by chaining
each component, not simply by deflating each component by the overall GDP
deflator.
Unit: GDP is measured in US dollars,
converted from real local currency at purchasing power parity for the base year
to which local currency was deflated.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: The ratio of aggregate energy use to GDP, often called “energy intensity” or the “energy ratio”, is not an ideal indicator of energy efficiency, sustainability of energy use, or technological development, as it has been commonly used. The aggregate ratio depends as much on the structure of the economy as on the energy intensities of sectors or activities, and changes in the ratio over time are influenced almost as much by changes in the structure of the economy as by changes in sectoral energy intensities.
Measurement and interpretation of energy intensities are complicated by differences among products within a category, such as size (e.g., automobile weight or refrigerator capacity), features (power steering and automatic transmission in cars, freezer compartments in refrigerators), and utilization (hours per year a stove is used, vehicle occupancy if passenger-km is the measure of output).
Comparison among countries of the ratio of energy use to GDP is complicated by geographical factors. Large countries, for example, tend to have high levels of freight transportation as many goods are distributed nationwide. Compared with countries with moderate climates, cold countries may consume as much as 20 per cent more energy per capita due to demand for space heating, while hot countries may use 5 per cent more energy per capita, due to demand for air conditioning. Countries with large raw materials industries may use twice as much energy per unit of manufacturing output compared to countries that import processed materials, due to the high energy intensity of raw material processing. Canada, for example, has a high ratio of energy use to GDP, due in part to that fact that it is a large, cold country with a large raw materials processing sector. In Japan, the climate is milder, raw materials are limited, and high population density results in smaller residential units and less distance travelled, contributing to a lower ratio of energy use to GDP.
Interpreting the ratio of energy use to GDP in terms of environmental impact or sustainability is also complicated by differences in environmental impact among energy sources. Canada, for example, has substantial hydropower, nuclear power and natural gas, all of which have lower environmental impacts than coal or oil.
Given the large number of factors that affect energy consumption, the ratio of total energy consumption to GDP should not be used as an indicator of energy efficiency or sustainability for policy-making purposes.
(d)
Status of the Methodology:
The ratio of energy use to GDP, as well as sectoral and sub-sectoral
energy intensities, are in widespread use, but without a standardized
methodology.
(e)
Alternative
Definitions/Indicators: The
ratio of sectoral or sub-sectoral energy use to the output or activity of the
sector or sub-sector provides a more useful indicator of energy intensity. Four
separate methodology sheets have been prepared for manufacturing,
transportation, commercial/services, and residential sectors.
4. ASSESSMENT
OF DATA
(a) Data needed to compile the indicator:
(i) Sectoral energy consumption;
(ii) Real GDP in US dollars.
(b) National and international data availability and sources: The International Energy Agency maintains the most thorough set of energy balances and energy accounts, based primarily on national data or data collected from reliable regional agencies. For OECD countries, the OECD maintains the most reliable set of national accounts with a breakdown of GDP by sector and sub-sector. IEA energy data now cover virtually all developing countries.
GDP and value-added by industry are published in the United Nations National Accounts Statistics. The IMF “International Financial Statistics” provides nominal and real GDP for most countries. Data on components of GDP are often available from regional development banks or national sources.
(c) Data
References:
Latin
American Energy Organization/ OrganizacRon
Latinoamericana de EnergRa
(OLADE)
Asia Pacific Energy Research Centre (APERC)
UN: National Accounts Statistics
IMF: International Financial Statistics
5. AGENCIES
INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the International Energy Agency (IEA).
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: Virtually every national and international energy agency uses the ratio of total energy use to GDP, often inappropriately. Key agencies involved in more detailed development of sectoral and sub-sectoral indicators, including energy intensity and energy efficiency indicators, are Eurostat and the Directorate-General for Energy and Transport of the European Commission. The IEA has a parallel effort with a particular focus on non-EU countries. Work is also being done by APERC, with a focus on the Asia-Pacific Region, and OLADE for Latin America.
6.
REFERENCES
Internet site: International Energy Agency: http://www.iea.org
INTENSITY OF ENERGY USE: Commercial/Service Sector |
||
|
Economic |
Consumption and
Production Patterns |
Energy Use |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Intensity of Energy Use in the Commercial/Service Sector.
(b)
Brief Definition: Energy consumption
per unit of commercial/service sector output or per unit commercial/service
sector floor area.
(c)
Unit of Measurement: Megajoules per US$
(mJ/$) or megajoules per square meters (mJ/m2).
(d)
Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Economic/Consumption and Production
Patterns/Energy Use.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a)
Purpose: This indicator is used to
monitor trends in energy consumption in the commercial/service sector, which is
the largest sector of most economies.
(b)
Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme):
The service sector is less energy intensive than manufacturing, and the growth
of the sector relative to manufacturing contributes to the long-term reduction
in the ratio of total energy consumption to GDP. The sector, however, is a large consumer of electricity,
generation of which contributes to many local or global environmental problems.
(c) International Conventions and
Agreements: There are no
international agreements. Some
countries are promulgating energy-efficiency standards for lighting, office
equipment or other devices, while others are negotiating voluntary agreements
to reduce energy consumption per square meter of floor space.
(d)
International Targets/Recommended Standards: There are
no international targets or standards.
Many industrialized countries have previously set targets for reducing
the space-heating component of service-sector energy consumption per unit of
floor area. Now, many countries are
trying to reduce electricity consumption for cooling, lighting, and information
systems.
(e)
Linkages to Other Indicators: This
indicator is one of a set for energy intensity in different sectors
(manufacturing, transportation, commercial/services and residential), with the indicator
for energy use per unit of GDP as an aggregate energy intensity indicator. These indicators are also linked to
indicators for total energy consumption, greenhouse gas emissions, and air
pollution emissions.
3.
Methodological Description
(a)
Underlying
Definitions and Concepts: Energy
consumption per unit of value added or per unit of floor area in the
commercial/service sector is one way of measuring energy requirements and
trends in the sector. As with the
manufacturing sector, the commercial/service subsectors are diverse and
difficult to classify. They include
subsectors that require a great deal of electricity per unit of output (retail
trade), those that use large quantities of fuel for water and space heating
(health care establishments), and those that by their nature consume little
energy (warehousing, parking). Energy
efficiency in this sector is more directly related to the efficiency of general
energy services (lighting, ventilation, computing, lifting, etc.) than to the
efficiency of the particular sectoral activities. But there are almost no data on actual energy service outputs per
unit of energy input (lumens of light, cubic meters of air moved, computing
power or use, tonnes raised in lifts, etc.).
Hence, the usual measure of energy intensity, megajoules per unit of
output in economic terms (mJ/$), can be a useful indicator provided it is clear
that this summarizes many processes and types of buildings. Because of the differences in processes, it
is very important to separate electricity from fossil fuel and purchased heat.
An alternative
indicator is energy consumption relative to floor area (in sq. meters), which
is a good measure of the total amount of physical activity for the sector. In warmer countries, built area is a less accurate
proxy for the total amount of activity, since a substantial amount of business
activity occurs outdoors. In low-income
countries, substantial activity takes place in front of homes that also serve
as stores.
It is often
difficult to measure and interpret energy intensities per unit of value added
within subsectors (private services, public service, etc.) because different
activities often take place in the same building, hence, the real partition of
energy use between activities is uncertain.
In such cases, intensities expressed per unit area disaggregated by
building type may be more easily related to real energy efficiencies. However, these have the similar problem that
a variety of activities may take place in a particular type of building. A hospital, for example, will contain space
for food preparation or laundry services, as well as for health care.
(b)
Measuring Methods:
In a few countries, energy consumption in buildings is measured or imputed by surveys of actual buildings (United States, France and Japan, and Sweden for space and water heating only). Where these data exist, they can be used to represent real efficiencies. Heating energy consumption per sq. meter of floor area heated is an important example of such a measure. Electricity use per sq. meter is important to measure, but it is difficult to disaggregate into heating, cooling, water heating/cooking, lighting, etc., without recourse to detailed surveys. Some colder countries (e.g., Norway) have very high energy intensities, which are clearly dominated by electric heating, while others (e.g., Canada, Finland) have very high intensities, yet do not have much electric space heating. Similarly, warmer countries have substantial amounts of space that are fully air-conditioned. For many countries, the amount of air-conditioned space is unknown.
Despite all these uncertainties, fuel
intensities (plus district heating) and electricity intensities recorded
separately give useful indicators of space/water heating/cooking on the one
hand and electricity services on the other.
Primary energy use should be used to aggregate electricity and fuel
consumption (see methodology for manufacturing sector).
Unit: The preferable unit is a multiple of joules,
usually terajoules (1012J), petajoules (1015J), or
exajoules (1018J).
§
Output. There
are different approaches to measuring output in the commercial/service sector,
with value added as the most direct measure of economic output. However, for estimating energy efficiency,
physical area is preferred because most energy services (heating, cooling,
lighting, etc.) are related to the floor area and size of the building. Surveys
of floor area by building type have been carried out in many IEA countries.
Often, the building type is specifically related to the activity of the
enterprise, e.g., school (education), hospital (health care), or restaurant
(food services). However, in many
cases, particularly for offices and restaurants, buildings contain a mix of
activities and enterprises, each with its own energy system and with
considerably different energy use patterns.
An alternative measure of output
that may be useful for measuring the economic impact of the entire sector and
its energy use is energy consumption of the sector relative to its GDP
share. In this case, it may be desirable
to remove the contribution of transportation services as well as the
contribution of “implied value of household mortgages and rents”, as
transportation is considered as a separate sector and mortgages and rents do
not directly involve energy use.
However, using service sector energy consumption relative to its share
of GDP means that the resulting intensity should not be associated with energy
efficiency. As with manufacturing, care
must be taken in deflating sectoral GDP to the desired base year.
Unit: Constant US dollar. Market value of output in real local
currency is deflated to a base year using GDP deflators corresponding to each
branch. Local currency is then
converted to a common international currency, normally US dollars, preferably
using purchasing power parity for the base year. For floor area, sq. metres of built space is usually the unit,
but in some colder countries, sq. meters of occupied or heated space is
recorded. The difference, which can be
significant (up to 10%), reflects unheated spaces, garages and stairwells, etc.
(c) Status of the Methodology: The methodology is in use in many
developed countries.
(d) Alternative
Definitions/Indicators: It has become increasingly desirable to
measure CO2 emissions per unit of production. IPCC Coefficients can be used to convert
each fuel consumed to CO2 emissions. For electricity and heat, the broad rules suggested for primary
energy can be followed, but the same uncertainties exist. Since in many countries more than half of
all final energy consumed in this sector may be in the form of electricity,
accounting for the emissions from electricity generation is extremely
important.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a)
Data Needed to Compile the Indicator:
(i)
Energy use in the
commercial / service sector;
(ii)
Real output (value
added) of the commercial / service sector; and/or
(iii)
Built areas or
occupied space (sometimes, heated space).
(b)
National and International Data Availability: Value
added or GDP in one-digit service sector branches is available for almost every
country. More detailed data exist for
OECD countries, both from national sources and from the OECD national accounts.
Energy consumption data at the sector-wide level
are available from almost all OECD countries and most others, but there are
some important caveats. First, one must
check the residential sector data from the same source to determine whether
liquid and solid fuels have been divided between these sectors. In many of the IEA time series, this
division is not done, and one sector or the other has all of the liquid or
solid fuels. For developing countries,
this split is a problem for gas as well, which is often entirely allocated to
either residential use or services rather than being split.
Second, one must ascertain whether the commercial/service
sector contains data from other sectors.
Data from western Germany for the sector (“Kleinverbraucher”) contained
significant amounts of both agriculture and construction through the early
1990s. Other countries may include
street lighting and even non-energy utilities like water and waste
disposal. Some countries include
anything that cannot be classified elsewhere.
Reliable time-series energy data disaggregated at
the subsectoral level exist for only a few countries, namely, the United States,
France, Japan, and Sweden (heating only).
IEA sent a questionnaire to OECD countries asking
for data on floor area and energy use, but few responses on floor area were
received. The IEA will pursue this and
expects to report data for floor area in its future energy indicators.
(c)
Data References:
The
Latin American Energy Organization / OrganizacRon
Latinoamericana de EnergRa
(OLADE)
Asia Pacific Energy Research Centre (APERC)
UN: Industrial Statistics
OECD: STAN database (structural analysis database)
EU: NACE system
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT
OF THE INDICATOR
(a)
Lead Agency:
The lead agency is the International Energy Agency (IEA).
(b)
Other
Contributing Organizations: None.
6. REFERENCES
(a)
Readings:
Krackeler, Tom and Lee Schipper, 1998. “Carbon Dioxide Emissions in OECD Service Sectors. The Critical Role of
Electricity use”. Energy Policy
(February).
Schipper, L., and Steve Meyers, 1986. “Energy Use
in the Service Sector. An International Comparison”. Energy Policy (June).
Meyers, S., Ed., 1986. Electricity Use in the
Service Sector. Report of An International Workshop. Palo Alto, CA: Electric Power Research
Institute.
(b)
Internet site:
The International Energy
Agency: http://www.iea.org
INTENSITY OF ENERGY USE: MANUFACTURING |
||
|
Economic |
Consumption and Production
Patterns |
Energy Use |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Intensity of Energy Use in Manufacturing.
(b) Brief Definition: Energy consumption per unit of manufacturing
output.
(c)
Unit of Measurement: Megajoules (mJ) per
unit output of the manufacturing sector in constant US dollars.
(d)
Placement in the CSD Indicator Set:
Economic/Consumption and Production Patterns/Energy Use.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a)
Purpose: The manufacturing sector is a
major consumer of energy. This
indicator is a measure of the efficiency of energy use in the sector that can
be used for analysing trends and making international comparisons in energy
efficiency, particularly when the indicator can be disaggregated to specific
branches of manufacturing.
(b)
Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme):
Sustainable development requires increases in energy efficiency in order to
reduce fossil fuel consumption, greenhouse gas emissions and related air
pollution emissions.
(c)
International Conventions and Agreements: UNFCCC
and its Kyoto Protocol.
(d)
International Targets/Recommended Standards: Although there are no specific international
targets regarding energy use or energy efficiency, many industrialized
countries have targets for reducing energy use and carbon emissions from
manufacturing branches.
(e)
Linkages to Other Indicators: This
indicator is one of a set for energy intensity in different sectors
(manufacturing, transportation, commercial/services and residential), with the
indicator for energy use per unit of GDP as an aggregate energy intensity
indicator. These indicators are also
linked to indicators for total energy consumption, greenhouse gas emissions,
and air pollution emissions.
3.
Methodological Description
(a)
Underlying
Definitions and Concepts: Energy consumption
per unit of value added is one way of measuring energy requirements and energy
efficiency in manufacturing. While
energy consumption per unit of physical output is a better indicator of energy
efficiency in specific manufacturing processes, energy use per unit of economic
output is more useful both for relating energy efficiency to economic activity
and for aggregating and comparing energy efficiency across manufacturing
sectors or across the entire economy.
(b)
Measurement
Methods:
In some cases, it may be preferable to measure total primary energy consumption, including losses incurred in the external production and distribution of the purchased electricity and heat, since these losses would occur if the establishment or branch used the primary energy directly. Primary energy consumption is a better measure of the total energy burden on the economy of a unit of output from an industry. Generally, the energy loss from converting primary energy to electricity is estimated by the average ratio for electricity production in the economy.
Complications in interpreting energy intensity data arise from the fact that some branches of manufacturing may be concentrated in regions of a country rich in certain kinds of power or heat sources, such that those branches constitute a lower energy burden on the economy than the indicator would suggest. Interpretation is also complicated when a particular branch has significant internal energy resources, such as captive hydro, biofuels or coal. There are various conventions for calculating the primary energy corresponding to electricity produced by nuclear, hydro or geothermal sources.
It is also possible to measure total energy consumption, internal and external, for any final product by using input-output tables to measure the energy embodied in materials and intermediate products. This is much more data intensive, because the input-output tables are complex. Such tables are not produced regularly, so this approach is difficult to follow, except at long intervals.
Unit: Preferable units for measuring energy are
multiples of joules, usually terajoules (1012J), petajoules (1015J),
or exajoules (1018J).
·
Output. There
are different approaches for measuring output in manufacturing. For some
purposes, physical output would be preferable, but this is not possible using
the energy consumption statistics available in many countries, and there are
many sectors for which aggregate physical output cannot be easily defined.
There are two basic alternatives for
measuring economic output. In either
case, we use real local currency, deflated by the deflator for the sector or
branch to a base year. This step is
crucial, so that the weight of each sector or branch reflects the correct
weight in the base year. The value of
output is then converted to a common international currency, usually US
dollars, preferably using purchasing power parities (PPP). One alternative is
to calculate the total value of production or shipments. This measures literally the total output
from an industry, and is defined for most countries. The other alternative is to calculate the value-added or
contribution to GDP, representing only the increase in economic output produced
by the sector or branch in question.
The total value of output tends to
be more stable over time, but has the disadvantage that it cannot be aggregated
to total output, because of double counting: inputs to one branch may be the
outputs of another branch. Value added
can be aggregated, but may have greater fluctuations from year to year if input
costs or output prices change, which is common for many basic raw materials,
particularly crude oil. Unfortunately,
there is no simple correspondence between the two measures of output.
Unit: Constant US dollars. Market value of output in real local
currency deflated to a base year using GDP deflators for each sector or
branch. Local currency is converted to
US dollars, using purchasing power parity for the base year.
(c)
Limitations of the Indicator:
The aggregate indicator for the manufacturing sector reflects both the
energy intensity of various branches of manufacturing and the composition of
the manufacturing sector. Changes in
the aggregate indicator can therefore be due either to changes in energy
intensity or to changes in relative branch output. Similarly, differences between countries may be due either to
differences in energy efficiency or differences in the structure of the
manufacturing sector. A country with
large energy-intensive industries, such as pulping, primary metals or
fertilizers, for example, will have a high energy intensity, even if the
industry is energy efficient. For this
reason, it is desirable to disaggregate energy intensity by branch of
manufacturing.
Detailed calculations such as total
energy consumption for particular products, using input-output tables, while
desirable, are very data intensive and difficult to update regularly.
(d) Status of the Methodology: The methodology is in use in many developed
countries.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: In the context of climate change, it has become increasingly desirable to convert energy consumption to carbon emissions per unit of production. The fuels consumed can be converted to carbon emissions using IPCC coefficients. Carbon emissions will therefore change both with changes in energy efficiency and changes in fuel type.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a)
Data needed to Compile the Indicator:
(i)
Energy consumption by
manufacturing sector and branches;
(ii)
Real output of the
sector and branches.
(b) National and International Data
Availability and Sources: Value
added in manufacturing at the three and four digit ISIC level for most OECD
countries is now compiled by OECD as part of its STAN data base. The United Nations compiles value added at
the two or three digit level for developed and developing countries. The European Union produces data on value
added at the two and three-digit level in the NACE system, and suitable bridges
exist to translate NACE into ISIC.
One persistent data problem at the aggregate
level is distinguishing between “industry” (ISIC C, D, F and even E) and
manufacturing (ISIC D). Some countries
also lump agriculture, forestry and fishing (ISIC A, B) in the aggregate
“industry” classification. For these
reasons, it is strongly recommended that data be checked to ascertain exactly
what sectors are covered. Manufacturing
is the preferable aggregate, since inclusion of the other sectors mentioned can
distort time series analysis and comparisons among countries.
(c) Data References:
Energy Balances of non-Member Countries
Eurostat: Energy Balances
The
Latin American Energy Organization /OrganizacRon
Latinoamericana de EnergRa
(OLADE)
Asia Pacific Energy Research Centre (APERC)
UN: Industrial Statistics, National Accounts
OECD: STAN database (structural analysis database)
EU: NACE system
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT
OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the International Energy Agency (IEA).
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: OECD and IEA have collected detailed value
added and energy consumption data at the four-digit level in the ISIC database. Less detailed two-digit data are also
available. IEA now collects two-digit
energy consumption data for manufacturing for about half of the developing
countries as well.
6. REFERENCES
(e)
Readings:
Energy Policy, June/July 1997 issue, Elsevier
Science Limited, various articles in this issue discuss the physical and
monetary measures of output and various problems associated with indicators of
manufacturing energy use and intensity.
Phylipsen, G.J.M, Blok, K., and Worrell, E.,
1997. Handbook on International
Comparison of Energy Efficiency in the Manufacturing Industry.
Utrecht: Dept. of Science, Technology, and Society.
IEA, 1997. Indicators of Energy Use and Energy
Efficiency. Paris: OECD.
(b)
Internet site:
International Energy Agency: http://www.iea.org
|
INTENSITY OF ENERGY USE:
RESIDENTIAL SECTOR |
||
Economic |
Consumption and Production
Patterns
|
Energy Use
|
1. INDICATOR
(a)
Name: Intensity of Energy Use in the Residential
Sector.
(b) Brief Definition: Amount of energy used per person or
household in the residential sector.
(c)
Unit of Measurement: Gigajoules (GJ)
per capita or GJ per household.
(d)
Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Economic/Consumption and Production Patterns/ Energy Use.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a)
Purpose: The indicator is used to
monitor energy consumption in the residential sector.
(b)
Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): The residential sector is a major consumer
of energy with a distinctive pattern of usage. Reducing energy consumption
contributes to reducing air pollution and climate change. Many policies addressing energy efficiency
and savings have been formulated for this sector. In colder countries, for example, the space heating component has
been the focus of many energy-saving policies, while in almost all countries,
the electric-appliance and lighting component is still the focus of many
policies.
(c)
International Conventions and Agreements: None
specifically for this sector.
(d)
International Targets/Recommended Standards: None
as such. However, thermal standards for
new homes are in effect in almost all OECD and Eastern European countries, China
and some other countries in colder climates.
Efficiency standards for boilers are also important in many
countries. Efficiency standards on new
electrical appliances are important in the United States and indirectly in
Canada, and voluntary programmes have been important in Japan and Europe.
(e)
Linkages to Other Indicators: This
indicator is one of a set for energy intensity in different sectors
(manufacturing, transportation, commercial/services and residential), with the
indicator for energy use per unit of GDP as an aggregate energy intensity
indicator. These indicators are also
linked to indicators for total energy consumption, greenhouse gas emissions,
and air pollution emissions.
3.
Methodological Description
(a)
Underlying
Definitions and Concepts: Household or residential energy use encompasses energy
used in residential buildings, including urban and rural free-standing houses,
apartment dwellings, and most collective dwellings such as dormitories and
barracks. These energy uses typically
include cooking, water heating, space heating and cooling, lighting, major
appliances for refrigeration, washing and drying, TV and communications,
computers, conveniences like food machines, vacuum cleaners, etc., as well as a
myriad of small appliances. Household
or residential energy use should exclude energy for farm processes, small
businesses or small industry. The
household sector must be separated from the commercial/services sector,
although data for many IEA countries did not separate these two sectors in the
past. The energy sources should
include not only purchased energy, but also gathered energy such as fuelwood or
other biomass and miners’ coal.
(b) Measurement Methods:
·
Energy Use:
Purchased energy for
residences/households is usually recorded in the energy statistics of a country
with data provided by electric, gas, or heat utilities according to customer
definitions that correspond to “households”.
Data on purchases of LPG, other oil products, coal or similar fuels and
wood are not always recorded correctly since suppliers may not know where or
how these fuels are being used.
Alternatively, household/residential energy use can be measured through household surveys. The most direct surveys collect detailed information on both fuels consumed and energy-consuming equipment owned or used. The most accurate surveys also obtain permission from households to ask energy suppliers for quantities consumed, or they leave fuel-use diaries for households to record what they consume. They measure usage in a variety of appliances and in heating equipment using miniature data loggers. Less detailed surveys estimate the use of each fuel for each major purpose through regression analysis over a large number of households.
Unit: Energy is measured
in megajoules (mJ) or gigajoules (gJ) (net calorific value). In most cases, electricity and purchased heat are counted
at final or delivered value. In some
cases, primary energy is recorded. (See methodology for manufacturing sector).
·
Residential unit: Energy
consumption is calculated on a per capita or per household basis. In general, energy consumption depends both
on the physical size and characteristics of the dwelling and on the number of
people. As the number of people in a
household declines, energy consumption per household declines, while the energy
consumption per capita increases. As a
rule of thumb, energy use for water heating, cooking and many appliances tends
to vary with the square-root of household size.
For developing countries with large rural sectors or large numbers of homes without access to electricity, the share of homes in the urban sector and the share in each sector connected to grid electricity is an important factor in total residential energy consumption. The shares of homes using different kinds of biomass fuels are also important.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: When energy consumption by end-use is not
known, energy use per household is a valuable indicator of energy intensity,
but it does not measure energy efficiency.
Some important conclusions can be drawn, however, if the average winter
temperature, ownership of energy-consuming appliances, and dwelling size are
known. In a country with cold winters
and high penetration of central heating systems, a low total consumption of
energy for all purposes, relative to total floor area and the severity of
winter climate, probably implies efficient heating practices. Conversely, high energy use relative to
floor area in a country with mild winters may imply inefficiencies. However, since energy consumption habits
vary so much, both among countries and among end-uses, few conclusions about
“efficiency” can be drawn from the indicator on “residential energy use per household”. (See alternative definitions/indicators
below).
(d) Status of the Methodology: The indicator, with some variations in
the methodology, is used in many OECD countries. It is not widely used in developing countries.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators:
·
Measurement of Efficiency:
A true energy efficiency can be expressed as energy use per unit of
energy service. Examples of true energy
efficiency would be litres of refrigerated volume at a given temperature
divided by electricity use, lumens of light per watt of power consumed, or
computer tera-flops per second divided by power consumption. In practice, these are not measured for
large populations. Specific energy
requirements for particular services, taking into account equipment efficiency
and the time the service is used, are easier to estimate since these can be
summed for a given household and compared with actual consumption.
·
Output (services provided):
Ideally, output units would be in energy services delivered, such as
lumens of lighting, meals cooked, area and time heated, litres of hot water
provided, litres refrigerated, kilogrammes of clothes washed, etc. In practice, such data are rarely available,
even for individually metered homes. A
suitable proxy for each service may be either the area heated (or lit), the number
of people in the household receiving meals or hot water, and the average number
of appliances, by type, per household or per capita.
·
Energy requirements:
If both energy use and equipment ownership for each major service is known,
then specific energy requirements can be developed as follows:
- Space heating: energy use per sq. meter heated or per sq. meter per degree day;
- Energy
use per year for each major appliance: refrigerator, freezer, clothes washer,
dryer, dishwasher, TV, etc.
These specific energy requirements are related to, but not identical to, energy efficiencies. They differ in that they do not measure accurately the service provided, since, for example, a large refrigerator gives more service than a smaller one.
4.
ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator:
(i)
Energy use in the
residential sector (as indicated in section 3(b) above);
(ii)
Number of
households and/or population.
(b) National and International Data Availability and Sources: Until the early 1980s, the residential or household sector was not well distinguished from the commercial/service sector in a majority of OECD member country energy statistics, particularly for liquid and solid fuels. In OECD countries, this distinction is now common. In developing countries, data often distinguish residential and commercial consumption of electricity and natural gas, but users of liquid and solid fuels are often not accurately identified. Many national energy balances thus fail to distinguish between the residential and commercial/service sectors. Such problems are indicated when data show electricity and natural gas consumption for both the residential and commercial/service sectors, while liquid and solid fuel consumption is shown for only one of the two sectors.
The other major challenge is to estimate
the use of biomass fuels of all kinds in developing countries. This is important in almost all developing
countries, even in urban areas.
Because of these two problems, aggregate national or international statistics must be used with caution.
Data on equipment are usually developed by
electric and gas utilities, as well as by trade associations representing
electric and gas appliance manufacturers.
These have generally not been compiled in an internationally compatible
form. No single agency collects all the
data, except in a few IEA countries (United States, France, Netherlands) where
detailed household surveys are undertaken.
The World Bank has sponsored many one-time household surveys in
developing countries, focusing either on rural or urban areas. As noted above, national or private energy
companies often undertake marketing surveys.
Oil industry sources in most IEA countries often compile data on
oil-equipment sales and ownership.
(c) Data
References:
IEA: Energy
Balances of Member countries.
Energy
Statistics of non-Member countries.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT
OF THE INDICATOR
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: None.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
Schipper, L., Ketoff, A., and Kahane, A.
“Estimating Residential Energy Use from Bottom-Up, International Comparisons.
Ann. Rev. Energy 10. Palo Alto CA: Ann. Revs., Inc. 1985.
(b) Internet sites:
World Bank:
http://www.worldbank.org/html/fpd/energy/
INTENSITY
OF ENERGY USE: TRANSPORTATION
|
||
Economic
|
Consumption and
Production Patterns |
Energy Use |
1. INDICATOR
(a)
Name: Intensity of Energy Use in Transportation.
(b)
Brief Definition: Energy
consumption for transportation relative to the amount of freight or passengers
carried and the distance traveled.
(c)
Unit of Measurement: Magajoules per
tonne-kilometer (mJ/tonne-km) for
freight, and Megajoules per passenger-kilometer (mJ/passenger-km) for
passengers.
(d)
Placement in the CSD Indicator Set:
Economic/Consumption and Production Patterns/ Energy Use.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a)
Purpose: Transportation is a major
consumer of energy, mostly in the form of fossil fuels, and the share of
transportation in energy consumption is generally increasing. The indicator is
a measure of how efficiently energy is used for moving goods and people. The
indicator can be used to monitor trends in energy consumption for
transportation and for international comparisons. Separation of freight and
passenger travel is essential.
(b)
Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme-sub-theme): Transportation serves economic and social development through
distribution of goods and services and through personal mobility. However, energy consumption for
transportation also leads to air pollution and climate change. Reducing energy intensity (increasing energy
efficiency) in transportation can reduce the environmental impacts of
transportation while maintaining the economic and social benefits.
(c)
International Conventions and Agreements: UNFCCC
and its Kyoto Protocol. The European
Union voluntary agreement on greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions from automobiles
(to which Japanese and Korean producers have also agreed) require reductions in
GHG emissions per kilometer from new automobiles.
(d)
International Targets/Recommended Standards: Many
industrialized countries have targets for reducing energy use and carbon
emissions from transportation, for which these energy intensities are key
indicators.
(e)
Linkages to Other Indicators: This
indicator is one of a set for energy intensity in different sectors
(manufacturing, transportation, commercial/services and residential), with the
indicator for energy use per unit of GDP as an aggregate energy intensity
indicator. These indicators are also
linked to indicators for total energy consumption, greenhouse gas emissions,
and air pollution emissions. This
indicator is also linked to the indicator for distance traveled per capita by
means of transport.
3.
Methodological Description
(a)
Underlying
Definitions and Concepts: Energy
consumption per unit of transportation activity is a key measure of how
efficiently transportation systems convert energy into human mobility and goods
distribution. Because it is not meaningful to add freight and passenger travel,
these types of transportation must be disaggregated. Separating the two
activity measures is generally not difficult, but separating the energy
consumption is often complicated.
(b)
Measurement Methods:
Unit:
Preferable
energy units are multiples of joules, usually terajoules (1012J),
petajoules (1015J), or exajoules(1018J), converted from
weights or volumes of fuels at net heating values.
·
Output or Activity: There are two different measures of activity.
Vehicular activity, in vehicle-km, provides a measure of traffic that is
important for transport policy and road and infrastructure planning. Most often, these data can be divided
further into basic vehicle types. However, economic and human activity is
better measured in passenger-km and tonne-km, taking into account utilisation
or load factors. A bus carrying 20
passengers for 10 km (200 passenger-km) is less energy intensive (more energy
efficient) than the same bus carrying 5 passengers for the same distance (50
passenger-km). Similarly, a fully-loaded truck is less energy intensive than
the same truck carrying a partial load.
·
Indicators:
(i)
Vehicle Intensities:
Energy consumption per vehicle-km by vehicle and fuel type is an
important indicator, as many standards for air pollution (and more recently,
goals for CO2 emissions reduction) are expressed in terms of vehicle
characteristics, i.e., emissions per vehicle-km.
(ii)
Modal Intensities:
Energy use per passenger-km or tonne-km should be disaggregated by
vehicle type, i.e., two-wheeler, car/van, bus, air, local and long-distance
rail, subway, tram, ship or ferry for passengers; and truck, rail, ship, air
for freight.
Note: Aggregate energy intensity for
travel or freight is a meaningful summary indicator, the value of which depends
on both the mix of vehicles and the energy intensities of particular types of
vehicles. The energy intensities of
train and bus transportation per passenger-km are commonly 60 to 80 per cent
less than the energy intensities for cars or air transportation. For freight, rail and ship transportation
are commonly 65 to 90 per cent less than the energy intensive for trucking per
tonne-km. These differences between modes are of the same order of magnitude as
the differences between the lowest and highest energy intensities of
transportation within each mode. It should also be noted that fuel consumption
per vehicle-km also depends on traffic conditions as well as vehicle
characteristics.
The energy intensity for a vehicle
type depends on both capacity and capacity utilisation. A large vehicle that is fully loaded
generally has a lower energy intensity per tonne-km than a fully-loaded smaller
vehicle, but a small vehicle fully loaded will have a lower energy intensity
than a large vehicle with the same load.
Typical load factors for private cars are 1.5 people per car. Typical load factors for rail and bus vary
from well below 10 per cent (e.g., United States city busses on average) to
over 100 per cent of nominal capacity at peak times, and in many developing
countries during most of the day.
Typical load factors for trucking might be 60 to 80 per cent of weight
capacity when loaded, but trucks commonly run 20 to 45 per cent of their
kilometers empty, yielding a relatively low overall load factor. Under-utilized transport capacity means more
pollution and road damage (and other impacts) per unit of transport service
delivered, hence capacity utilisation itself is an important indicator of
sustainable transportation.
(c)
Limitations of the Indicator:
Data availability may limit the disaggregation of the indicator to the
desired level. Considerable work is
often required to disaggregate energy balances into various modes of
transportation.
Some countries’ transportation
energy statistics include fuel consumed by domestic airlines or shipping lines
in international transportation. Efforts should be made to exclude such
transportation and energy consumption from the indicators.
(d)
Status of the Methodology: The methodology is in use in many developed
countries.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: An alternative, simpler, broad measure of energy
intensity for transportation could be average fuel consumption per vehicle for
all vehicles, but the results would be strongly influenced by the mix of
vehicles, which varies enormously among countries and over time. In particular, it would be influenced by the
number of two- and three-wheelers.
4. ASSESSMENT OF THE DATA
(a)
Data Needed to Compile the Indicator:
(i)
Energy consumption
by mode of transportation, vehicle type and fuel;
(ii)
Distance traveled
by vehicles, passengers and freight, including load factors.
(b)
National and International Data Availability and
Sources:
Energy use by fuel type in each branch of road
transport, rail, ship, and air transport is published by most transport
ministries in OECD countries. National energy balances (as well as present IEA/OECD
Energy Statistics) do not disaggregate road transport by mode. Few sources of energy data separate fuel
consumption for rail or shipping into that for passengers and that for freight,
but national or private rail and shipping organizations often do this. Energy consumption for local electric
transport (commuter rail, subways, trams) is often published separately by
national authorities.
Eurostat is a lead agency for collecting data on
vehicle, passenger, and tonne-kilometers in Europe. Ministries of Transport in the United States, Canada, Japan,
Australia and other countries, often through their statistical agencies,
publish similar data. In developing
countries, fewer data are available.
(c)
Data References:
Eurostat: Transport
Annual Statistics
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT
OF THE INDICATOR
(a)
Lead Agency:
The
lead agency is the International
Energy Agency (IEA).
(b)
Other
Contributing Organizations: None.
6. REFERENCES
(a)
Readings:
Schipper, L. and Marie-Lilliu, C., 1999. Carbon
Dioxide Emissions from Transport in IEA countries: Recent lessons and long-term
Challenges. KFB Meddelande 1999:11.
Stockholm.
Schipper, L., Figueroa. M.J., Price, L., and
Espey. M., 1993. “Mind the Gap: The Viscious Circle of measuring automobile
fuel use”. Energy Policy (October).
Samaras. Z., et al. 1999. Study on Transport Related Parameters of the European Road Vehicle
Stock. Prepared for Eurostat and DG-7. Thessalonikai: Laboratory of Applied Thermodynamics, Aristotle
University.
Schipper, L., and Tax, W., 1994. “Mind the Gap”. Transport Policy.
(b) Internet site: IEA: http://www.iea.org
|
GENERATION OF INDUSTRIAL AND MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTE |
||
|
Economic |
Consumption and Production
Patterns |
Waste Generation and Management |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name:
Generation of Industrial and Municipal Solid Waste.
(b) Brief Definition: The generation of industrial and municipal
solid waste is derived from the production of waste on a weight basis at the
point of production.
(c) Unit of Measurement: Tonnes per capita per annum.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Economic/Consumption and Production
Patterns/Waste Generation and Management.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The main purpose is to represent the production of solid waste
produced by all types of human settlements activity.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): Generation of waste as an indicator is
intimately linked to the level of economic activity in a particular
country. It is also an indication of
the patterns of consumption of raw materials. Wealthier economies tend to
produce more waste. In many developed
countries, a reduction in the volume of waste generated is an indication of
changes in consumption patterns with respect to raw materials and increase in
recycling and reuse.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: No international agreements exist for
reduction in solid waste production.
(d) International Targets/Recommended
Standards: Some countries have set
national targets for the reduction of solid waste within a specified time
frame.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator is intimately linked to other
socio-economic and environmental indicators especially those related to income‑level
and economic growth. Those would
include: rate of growth of urban population, Gross Domestic Product (GDP) per
capita, waste disposal, and waste recycling.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: The precise definition of what constitutes
solid waste is variable, but principally it can be considered as that material
which has no further useful purpose and is discarded. It is, therefore,
perceived to have no commercial value to the producer. This does not, however, preclude it being of
value to some other party. Solid waste
is generally produced in three ways: through the production and consumption of
goods and services; through the processing of wastes from these services; and
through end‑of-pipe control or treatment of emissions. Waste is generally reported based on source
under the following categories: mining and construction wastes; energy
production wastes; agricultural wastes; municipal wastes; and industrial waste
or sludge.
Industrial wastes can be expressed
in terms of tonnes per annum or in some cases related to the production volume
of the product being processed or manufactured. Municipal wastes are produced by a variety of establishments in
the urban environment in addition to households, including institutions such as
schools, government buildings, commercial establishments such as hospitals and
hotels, and some scattered sources of hazardous wastes.
(b) Measurement Methods: Solid waste production at source is
difficult to measure for municipal wastes, except by using intensive studies at
the household level. It is highly
dependent on the mode of collection by the local authorities and whether or not
the waste is actually disposed of in the official system. For industrial wastes, the volume of waste
can most easily be measured as the weight which leaves the factory compound.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: Solid waste production is expensive to
measure at source; thus, consistent and comparable statistics are difficult to
obtain. The indicator does not
distinguish between toxic and hazardous wastes, and those more benign; nor does
it cover waste stored on site. It is
often confused with the amount of solid waste disposed, which is measured by
recording the weight or volume of waste disposed at the disposal or treatment
site.
Volume of waste produced may be
significantly affected by the presence of particular wastes. For example, the inclusion of construction
wastes in domestic refuse will greatly affect the waste density and hence the
indicator. The actual method of storage
of waste and its moisture content will also affect the waste density. The volume of waste produced is often
affected by seasonal variations in the production of various agricultural
foodstuffs.
(d) Status of the Methodology: Not Available.
(e)
Alternative Definitions/Indicators:
The use of solid waste disposal, which is easier to measure, may be a suitable
proxy measure for this indicator in some countries.
4.
ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a)
Data Needed to Compile the
Indicator: The weight of waste produced by municipal
and industrial sources; and population.
(b) National and International Data
Availability and Sources: Generally,
data is scattered, may be difficult to obtain, and consist of only rough
estimates. Where it is available, data
for municipal wastes can be obtained from studies of representative cross‑section
of the population. For industrial sources,
data on the volume of waste is monitored by waste collection contractors.
(c) Data References: At the international level, specialised
research surveys have been conducted by the Settlement Infrastructure and
Environment Programme of the United Nations Centre for Human Settlements (UNCHS
or Habitat). At the national level,
data sources would include ministries responsible for urban affairs and the
environment, and statistical agencies.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the United Nations Centre for Human
Settlements (Habitat). The contact
point is the Head, Urban Secretariat, UNCHS (Habitat): fax no. (254 2) 623080.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: The United Nations Environment Programme
(UNEP), the World Bank, the World Health Organization (WHO), the Organisation
for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD), and Eurostat are involved in
the development of this indicator.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings: Various publications from the Settlement
Infrastructure and Environment Programme, Habitat.
UNEP. Environmental Data Report. 1993‑94.
OECD. OECD Environmental Data
Compendium 1995. OECD, Paris, 1995.
Eurostat. Europe's Environment:
Statistical Compendium for the Dobris Assessment. 1995.
(b) Internet site:
UNCHS (Habitat) home page: http://www.urbanobservatory.org/indicators/database
|
GENERATION OF HAZARDOUS WASTES |
||
|
Economic |
Consumption and
Production Patterns |
Waste Generation and
Management |
1. INDICATOR
(a)
Name:
Generation of Hazardous Wastes.
(b)
Brief Definition: The total amount of hazardous wastes
generated per year through industrial or other waste generating activities,
according to the definition of hazardous waste as referred to in the Basel
Convention and other related conventions (see sections 3(e) and 7 below).
(c)
Unit of Measurement:
Metric tonnes or tonnes per unit of Gross Domestic Product (GDP).
(d)
Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Agenda 21:
Economic/Consumption and Production Patterns/Waste Generation and
Management.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: It provides a measure of the extent and type of industrialization
in a country and in this connection the nature of the industrial activities
including technologies and processes generating hazardous wastes.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): The generation of hazardous wastes has a
direct impact on health and the environment through exposure to this kind of
wastes. Normally, long-term exposure is
required before the manifestation of harmful effects. Reduced generation of hazardous wastes may indicate either
reduced industrial activities in a country, introduction of cleaner production
in the industrial processes, or changing patterns in consumers' habits, which
implies savings in the use of energy and raw material as well as improving
protection of landscapes or change in statistical records. The introduction of environmentally sound
management systems for hazardous wastes implies reduction of risks to health
and environment due to lesser exposure to hazardous wastes.
A review of different categories of wastes being
generated provides an indication of the nature of industrial activities being
undertaken in a country. In the case of
other hazardous wastes such as hospital wastes, it is first of all a measure of
the size of the population, and secondly, the percentage of this population
being treated in hospitals and other medical care units.
(c)
International Conventions and
Agreements: The following conventions and agreements
pertain to this indicator: Basel
Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes
and their Disposal; Bamako Convention
on the Ban on the Import into Africa and the Control of Transboundary Movement
of Hazardous Wastes within Africa; Waigani
Convention to Ban the Importation of Hazardous and Radioactive Wastes into
Forum Island Countries, and to Control the Transboundary Movement and
Management of Hazardous Wastes within the South Pacific Region; Central American Agreement; Protocol
for the Prevention of Pollution of the
Mediterranean Sea by Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes and Their
Disposal; Organisation for Economic
Co-operation and Development (OECD), Council Decisions, and EC Council Directives and Regulation on
Waste and Hazardous Wastes.
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: No
quantitative targets exist at the international level. In Agenda 21, Chapter 20, an overall target
of "preventing or minimizing the generation of hazardous wastes as part of
an overall integrated cleaner production approach" is provided. Targets exist at the national level in many
countries.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator is linked to the amount of
hazardous wastes exported or imported; as well as to the indicators on area of
land contaminated by hazardous wastes, and expenditures on hazardous waste
treatment or disposal. It is further
directly connected to indicators related to material consumption and energy
use, including intensity of material use, annual energy consumption per capita,
and intensity in energy use. In a wider
context, it is also related to the indicators on international cooperation
concerning implementation of ratified global agreements.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a)
Underlying Definitions and Concepts:
In order to facilitate the definition of whether a waste, as defined
under the Basel Convention, is hazardous or not, the Technical Working Group
established under the Basel Convention has developed lists of wastes that are
hazardous and wastes that are not subject to the Convention, as well as an
outline of a review procedure for the inclusion, or deletion, of wastes from
those lists. These lists were approved
at the Fourth Meeting of the Conference of the Parties (UNEP, 1998). It is expected that such lists will
considerably facilitate the development and application of indicators of
hazardous wastes as mentioned later.
In relation to the definition of
hazardous wastes under the Basel Convention (article 1 of the Convention), it should
be noted that under article 3 of the Convention, Parties should inform the
Secretariat of the Convention (SBC) of wastes, other than those listed in
Annexes I and II of the Convention, considered as hazardous under national
legislation. Such information is being
disseminated by the Secretariat to all Parties in order to enable them to
respect such definitions in relation to planned transboundary movements
involving such wastes.
(b)
Measurement Methods:
In relation to the Basel Convention, its Secretariat requests
information from the Parties to the Convention on a yearly basis regarding the
amount of hazardous wastes generated at the national level. This information is being introduced in the
SBC database, which includes data and information on hazardous wastes related
issues in accordance with Articles 13 and 16 of the Convention. Other agencies, such as OECD, are also
collecting information on hazardous wastes generated by OECD countries.
(c)
Limitations of the Indicator:
The problem of defining whether a waste is hazardous or not will, in
some cases, cause difficulties in relation to the use of an indicator on
hazardous wastes generation. The
quantity of the hazardous wastes generated alone may not reflect changes
towards a more "sustainable" society. Consideration of the nature of the different kinds of hazardous
wastes generated would be a better indicator of sustainable development
progress. Availability and accuracy of data represents another limitation of
this indicator. Finally, the nature of the
waste itself makes it sometimes difficult to use them as indicators because
wastes are often mixed and not produced to specifications.
(d)
Status of the Methodology:
The methodology has not at present been considered by Parties of the
Basel Convention. However, Decision
V/14 of the Fifth Meeting of the Conference of the Parties requested the
Secretariat of the Convention to explore possibilities of developing indicators
on hazardous wastes to facilitate decision-making and report thereon to the
Conference of the Parties at its sixth meeting
(e)
Alternative Definitions:
The amounts and type of specific waste streams generated per year
through industrial or other waste generating activities as defined in the Basel
Convention represents an alternative indicator which would allow for
normalization based on hazardous properties of the wastes (e.g., infectious,
flammable, toxic, corrosive, ecotoxic).
Consideration of the waste management infrastructure
at national level could constitute an indicator on the status of addressing
hazardous wastes related issues in any particular country.
In general, hazardous waste indicators, in order to
be useful for management, have to have some resonance with policy makers whether
they are within the local community, or at the national level. There is, therefore, the need to develop
hazardous waste indicators that reflect concern for the hazardous properties of
waste, the implications of their impacts on the environment, on ecosystems and
their functioning, as well as on human health.
A profile or set of indicators that can address these multiple issues
and meet the needs of a variety of users is essential. Such indicators would be broader than the
indicator on generation of hazardous wastes as referred to in this paper and
the Secretariat of the Basel Convention will take the lead in the further
development of indicators on hazardous wastes in collaboration with relevant
institutions.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator:
Data on the generation of hazardous wastes.
(b) National and international Data Availability and Sources: Data
are available for many developed countries, but, so far, few developing
countries are collecting data on hazardous waste generation. The Parties of the Basel Convention are
requested to provide data to the Conference of the Parties through the
Secretariat of the Convention on a yearly basis.
Assistance to developing countries
will be needed in identifying the main hazardous waste streams being generated
in their countries in order to prepare and maintain inventories of hazardous
wastes. In this connection difficulties may be encountered in relation to
hazardous waste generation by small scale enterprises, since they are scattered
and often operating on an informal basis and are therefore not registered. It may be less of a problem to identify
amounts of hazardous waste generated by larger industries, since they are
normally registered.
(c) Data References: The primary source of data at the
international level is the Secretariat of the Basel Convention.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the Secretariat to the Basel Convention (SBC),
United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP).
The contact point is the Executive Secretary, SBC; fax no. (41 22) 797 3454, e-mail: sbc@unep.ch.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: Other
organizations include: UNEP, ICRED, OECD, European Topic Centre for Wastes,
Denmark, US Environmental Protection Agency, Institute for Applied
Environmental Economics, the Netherlands, European Institute of Business
Administration, France, Technical University, Graz, Austria, Wuppertal
Institute, CEFIC, Netherlands National Institute of Public Health and
Environment, Canada. Additional organizations with expertise in the domaine
of hazardous waste generation are: UN-ECE (Transport); IMO (Maritime); FAO
(Pesticides); WHO; ILO; IAEA; UNIDO, SPREP.
6. REFERENCES
(a)
Readings:
Basel Convention for the Control of
Transboundary Movement of Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal.
Bamako Convention on the Ban of the
Import into Africa and the Control of Transboundary Movement and Management of
Hazardous Wastes within Africa, 1991
Waigani Convention to Ban the
importation into Forum Island Countries of Hazardous and Radioactive Wastes and
to Control the Transboundary Movement and Management of Hazardous Wastes within
the South Pacific Region.
Protocol for the Prevention of
Pollution of the Mediterranean Sea by Transboundary Movements of Hazardous
Wastes and Their Disposal.
Bakkes, J.A. et al. An Overview of Environmental Indicators: State of the Art and
Perspectives. Environment
Assessment Technical Reports. Netherlands National Institute of Public Health
and Environmental Protection in cooperation with the University of Cambridge,
United Kingdom. June 1994.
Å. Granados and P.J. Peterson “Hazardous Waste Indicators for National
Decision-makers”, Journal of Environmental Management (1999).
(b) Internet sites:
Secretariat of the Basel Convention: www.basel.int
European Topic Centre on Waste: www.etc-waste.int
|
GENERATION OF RADIOACTIVE WASTE |
||
|
Economic
|
Consumption
and Production Patterns |
Waste
Generation and Management |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Generation of Radioactive Waste.
(b)
Brief
Definition: Radioactive waste arises from various
sources, such as nuclear power generation and other nuclear fuel cycle related
activities, radioisotope production and use for applications in medicine, agriculture,
industry and research.
(c) Unit of Measurement: cubic metre (m3) per annum.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Economic/Consumption and production patterns/Waste generation and management.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The purpose is to represent the annual amounts of various radioactive waste streams that arise from the nuclear fuel cycle and from nuclear applications. Quantitative values are required so that appropriate resources (e.g., financial, human, etc.) for the proper management of these types of waste can be allocated.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): Radioactive waste, if not properly managed, can have a direct impact on health and the environment through exposure to ionizing radiation. In order to protect human health and the environment, appropriate waste management strategies and technologies must be employed. Fundamental principles of radioactive waste management involve minimization of waste arisings and systematically considering the various steps in treatment, conditioning, storage and disposal. Minimization of waste arisings has a positive impact regarding sustainability, as it reduces the pressure on the environment and the commitment of resources. Waste management strategies are to confine and contain the radionuclides within a system of engineered and natural barriers, so that any releases to the environment are small compared to natural background.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: The Joint Convention on the Safety of Spent Fuel Management and the Safety of Radioactive Waste Management is open for signature and has about 2/3 the ratifications needed to enter into force. This convention binds Parties to manage spent nuclear fuel and radioactive wastes using sustainable waste management practices.
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: The International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) has established Safety Standards (Fundamentals, Requirements and Guides) applicable to the management of radioactive wastes. It has also established Basic Safety Standards for the Protection of Humans against Ionizing Radiation, that are consistent with recommendations of the International Commission on Radiological Protection (see references).
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: A large portion of radioactive waste arises from practices within the nuclear fuel cycle, therefore a large production is usually related to a significant generation of electricity by nuclear means with an equivalent reduction of environmental impacts by other energy sources (Chapter 4 of Agenda 21). This implies a reduction in the release of atmospheric pollutants; notably the greenhouse gases, contributing to the protection of the atmosphere (Chapter 9 of Agenda 21). Since some radioactive waste arises from medical applications, such as treatment with radioisotopes or sealed radiation sources and nuclear medicine research, a link exists with the extent of these applications and with the protection and promotion of human health (Chapter 6 of Agenda 21). Additional links are with the transfer of environmentally sound technology (Chapter 34 of Agenda 21) and with the environmentally sound management of hazardous waste (Chapter 20 of Agenda 21).
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: Principles regarding the protection of future generations are formulated in the International Atomic Energy Agency’s Safety Fundamentals (Ref. 3). IAEA definitions and categories of radioactive waste are given in relevant standards (see list of references in 7(b) below).
(b) Measurement Methods: For radioactive waste in packaged/conditioned form, the volume should be the actual volume in cubic metres (m3) as recorded in the appropriate waste package registry. For radioactive waste not yet in conditioned form, the volumes used should be those based on the most probable assumed conditioning method to be used later for disposal.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: The volume of radioactive waste is only a first approximation of its hazard. Actual impact on human health and the environment requires a site specific analysis taking into account the isotopic and chemical composition of the waste.
(d) Status
of the Methodology: Safety
assessment of the radiological hazard of radioactive waste disposal is
considerably advanced and is used as the basis for regulatory decisions in many
countries.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: None.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: The volumes of the various radioactive waste types arising annually, expressed in cubic metres per annum (m3/a).
(b) National and International Data Availability and Sources: At the national level, the volume of radioactive waste arisings can be obtained from the waste accountancy records maintained by the various waste generators or, in consolidated form, from national regulatory bodies. Almost one third of the IAEA member states keep some type of national radioactive waste registry. The Joint Convention on the Safety of Spent Fuel Management and on the Safety of Radioactive Waste Management, when it comes into force, will required contracting parties to maintain a national radioactive waste inventory. Through this mechanism, both the availability and the quality of data is likely to increase over time.
(c) Data References: The primary source for data includes national or state level governmental organisations. A secondary source may be databases managed by international organisations such as the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) or OECD/NEA.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT
OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA). The contact point is the Director, IAEA; fax no. (43-1) 260-07.
(b) Other
Contributing Organizations: Governments and inter-governmental
organizations, possibly EC, OECD/NEA and UNEP, non-governmental and other
organizations, such as UNIPEDE and EPRI.
6. REFERENCES
(a)
Readings:
IAEA’s Safety Guides (Safety Series No. 111-G-1.1), 1994. Classification of Radioactive Waste.
IAEA’s Safety Standards (Safety Series No. 111-S-1), 1995. Establishing a National System for Radioactive Waste Management.
IAEA’s
Safety Fundamentals (Safety Series No. 111-F), 1995. The Principles of Radioactive Waste Management.
IAEA’s
Safety Standards (Safety Series No. 115), 1996. International Basic Safety Standards for Protection against Ionizing
Radiation and for the Safety of Radiation Sources.
ICRP Publication 46, 1996. Radiation Protection Principles for the Disposal of Solid Radioactive Waste, Pergamon Press, Oxford.
ICRP
Publication 60, 1991. 1990
Recommendations of the International Commission on Radiological Protection. Annals
of the ICRP 21 (1- 3), Pergamon Press, Oxford.
The Joint Convention on the Safety of Spent Fuel Management and on the Safety of Radioactive Waste Management, as adopted in September 1997.
(b) Internet site: Worldatom: www.iaea.org
|
WASTE RECYCLING AND REUSE
|
||
|
Economic |
Consumption and Production
Patterns |
Waste Generation and Management |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name:
Rate of Waste Recycling and Reuse.
(b) Brief Definition: This is the volume of waste which is reused
or recycled based on the volume actually generated at source on a per capita
basis.
(c) Unit of Measurement: %.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Economic/Consumption and Production
Patterns/ Waste Generation and Management.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The purpose of this indicator is to measure the proportion of
waste which is reused or recycled.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): Solid waste recycling and reuse is an
important component of a sustainable approach for solid waste management. As communities expand, the available sinks
for waste disposal will become limited and necessitate the transport of waste
for greater distances. The ecological
footprint of urban areas will therefore be greatly increased. The concept of the ecological footprint
developed by Rees and Wackernagel (1994) is defined as the area of land
required by a given group of people (household, city or country) to provide the
goods and services it consumes, and to assimilate its waste products, wherever
that land may be located. By
stimulating recycling and reuse, landfill capacity is conserved and operational
costs for solid waste management reduced.
There is also the benefit of increased income generation for the urban
poor through recycling schemes.
This indicator has a different
relevance for developed and developing countries. In developed countries, it represents a willingness on the part
of national and local governments to consider waste recycling as an
environmentally sound policy option, whereas in developing countries, it
represents the level of the informal sector waste recycling industry, which is
usually promoted for its income‑generating potential.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: No international agreements apply.
(d) International Targets/Recommended
Standards: Some developed countries have established voluntary targets for
the proportion of waste recycled.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator is intimately linked to other
solid waste management indicators. It
is also associated with some of the indicators for human settlements and
financial mechanisms, such as percent of population in urban areas, and
environmental protection expenditures.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: The proportion of waste recycled requires
accurate estimation of the proportion of waste generated, as much waste is
recycled or pre‑sorted at the household level before it reaches the
formal waste management system. For
this purpose, the measurement of the indicator is often completed by means of a
specialised survey. Generally, the
proportion of wastes recycled is reported based on the type of recyclable
components. For example, metals,
plastics, paper, glass, textiles, organic, etc. It should be noted that due to pre‑separation of inorganic
recyclables, organic waste often constitutes 50% of the total volume of the
waste from developing countries.
In addition to recycling at the
industrial and household level in many cities, waste is recycled outside the
producer's premises, either on the street, by formal waste management
employees, or at the dumpsite. The indicator
must consider all sources of recycling and the additional methods combine to
give a complex expression or the overall percentage of recycling. The amount of recycling undertaken outside
the producer's premises has to be estimated from detailed surveys of all the
dealers in recycled material and requires an inventory of all small‑scale
reprocessors who recycle wastes.
(b) Measurement Methods: The volumes of waste produced and the
percentage recycled at the industrial and household levels are measured by
simple weighing. At the municipal
level, the volume recycled is best estimated by quantifying the output by the
producers of recycled products and the volume of waste that is disposed of by
the formal sector.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: The indicator should be expressed in terms
of particular components to be useful in determining the actual recycling
rate. If all components are lumped
together on a weight or volume basis, the indicator is not particularly useful. Some recycling, for example, waste oils and solvents,
is not captured by this solid waste indicator.
(d) Status of the Methodology: Not Available.
(e)
Alternative Definitions/Indicators:
Sometimes, it is worthwhile to express the % recycled based on the usage
of a particular commodity, for example volume of aluminium recycled per volume
produced. This enables a better estimation of the level of resource
conservation, and for some industries, could be done on a national basis.
4.
ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Weight of waste produced by component;
weight of waste disposed or discarded, by component; weight of waste recycled
by the formal and informal sectors, by component.
(b) National and International Data
Availability and Sources:
Generally, there is little problem in obtaining the data from municipal
or industrial records. However, data
can be scattered and time consuming to compile for indicator purposes. Some informal sector industries are
reluctant to declare their activities and data collection from them could be
difficult. At the international level,
specialised research surveys have been conducted by the Settlement
Infrastructure and Environment Programme of the United Nations Centre for Human
Settlements (UNCHS or Habitat). Within
countries, data sources would include national and local agencies responsible
for urban affairs and the environment.
(c) Data References: Not Available.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the United Nations Centre for Human
Settlements (Habitat). The contact
point is the Head, Urban Secretariat, UNCHS (Habitat): fax no. (254 2) 623080.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: The United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP),
the World Health Organization (WHO), and industry associations would be
interested in the development of this indicator.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
Various publications from the Settlement
Infrastructure and Environment Programme, Habitat.
UNEP. Environmental Data Report. 1993‑94.
Rees W. and Wakernagel M., Ecological Footprints and Appropriated Carrying Capacity: Measuring the
Natural Capital Requirements of the Human Economy, in Investing in Natural
Capital: the Ecological Economics Approach to Sustainability, A.M Jannsson, M.
Hammer, C. Folke and R. Constanza, eds. Washington Island Press, 1994.
United Nations Department of Economic and Social
Affairs, Measuring Changes in Consumption
and Production Patters: A Set of Indicators, (ST/ESA/264), 1998.
(b) Internet site:
UNCHS (Habitat) home page: http://www.urbanobservatory.org/indicators/database
DISTANCE TRAVELLED PER CAPITA BY mODe of transport
|
||
Economic
|
Consumption and Production Patterns |
Transportation
|
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name:
Distance travelled per capita by mode of transport.
(b) Brief Definition: The number of kilometres travelled per person
in a given year by different modes of transport.
(c) Unit
of Measurement: Kilometers per
year.
(d) Placement
in the CSD Indicator Set:
Economic/Consumption and Production Patterns/ Transportation.
2. POLICY
RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: This indicator can contribute to monitoring
the environmental impact and sustainability of the systems for personal
mobility in a particular country or area.
(b) Relevance
to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): Travel is an essential part of the economic
and social life of a country.
Non-motorised travel has low environmental impact, and due to the level
of physical exertion involved, also brings health benefits. However, it is only suitable for local
journeys. Motorised travel is the only
suitable means of travelling longer distances, but has greater environmental
and social impacts, such as pollution, global warming, and accidents. Sustainability implies using the most
appropriate mode of transport for the journey in question and decoupling travel
from economic development. Policies are
needed which reduce the need for travel, support a shift towards less
environmentally damaging means, provide incentives for changes in lifestyle,
increase safety, and improve the standard of public transport (transit).
(c) International
Conventions and Agreements: Not
applicable, see section 3 (d) below.
(d) International
Targets/Recommended Standards: No
international targets have been established.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This mobility indicator is linked to GDP per capita, time spent on travelling, percent of population in urban areas, urban transit and automobile use, fossil fuel use by automobiles, infrastructure expenditure and ambient concentrations of pollutants in urban areas. Various other indicators of land use and settlement patterns are also related.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: The aim of this indicator is to quantify the
use of different modes of transport by people (passengers). The indicator should be broken down
into the following modes of transport:
walking, cycling, passenger cars, motorcycles and mopeds, buses and coaches,
train, ship, and plane. For developing
countries, other means of transport (donkey, ox-cart, rickshaw, etc.) may need
to be considered. A further breakdown
by purpose would provide useful additional information.
(b) Measurement
Methods: Total passenger-kilometers
travelled per year divided by the total population, according to the different
modes of transport.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: The reliability of passenger-kilometre statistics, with the exception of bus and train, leaves much to be desired. The indicator has an inbuilt bias against the longer distance modes of transport, especially planes. To some extent this can be offset by splitting the indicator by purpose (shopping, travel to school or work, professional travel, pleasure). Ideally, the indicator would measure the distance travelled by the population of a country both within and outside their country. In practice, national passenger-kilometer statistics normally include movements of all people within the national territory (regardless of their normal place of residence), and exclude movements outside their territory. This indicator measures only distance travelled by passengers and does not cover goods transport. In order to monitor efficiency changes in the transport sector, an indicator such as transport performance divided by vehicle performance (tonne-kilometers/vehicle-kilometers) could be considered.
(d) Status of the Methodology: An agreed methodology at the international level concerning passenger transport statistics has not yet been established and no specific projects on this direction are known at present. National definitions are being used.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: An alternative would be to use number of trips for different purposes. This would counter the bias against longer distance modes.
4. ASSESSMENT
OF DATA
(a) Data
Needed to Compile the Indicator:
(i)
Passenger-kilometer
data by means of transport (as indicated in section 3(a) above);
(ii)
Population.
(b) National
and International Data Availability and Sources: Passenger-kilometer data for at least some modes of
transport, and population data are regularly available for most countries at
the national level; and for some countries, at the sub-national level. Both types of data are compiled by and
available from national statistical offices and various professional
organizations.
(c) Data
References:
ECMT: Statistical Trends in Transport.
UNECE: Annual
Bulletin of Transport Statistics for Europe.
International Road
Federation: World Road Statistics.
5. AGENCIES
INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is Eurostat (the Statistical Office of the
European Communities). The contact
point is Ms. Inger Oehman, fax no, (35-2) 4301-37278.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: Other organizations involved in
the indicator development include International Road Transport Union (IRU) and
the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe (UNECE).
6. REFERENCES
“Transport and
Environment – Statistics for the Transport and Environment Reporting Mechanism
(TERM) for the European Union”, 2000.
“Are we moving in
the right direction? Indicators on transport and the environment integration in
the EU”, European Environment Agency, 2000.
(b) Internet site: http://europa.eu.int/comm/eurostat
|
NATIONAL SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT
STRATEGY |
||
|
Institutional |
Institutional Framework |
Strategic Implementation of Sustainable Development |
1. INDICATOR
(a)
Name:
National Sustainable Development Strategy.
(b)
Brief Definition:
A national sustainable development strategy aims to build upon and
harmonize the various sectoral economic, social and environmental policies and
plans existing in a country to ensure socially responsible economic development
while protecting the resource base for the benefit of future generations.
(c)
Unit of Measurement:
Qualitative Assessment. There
are two dimensions: Does a country have a National Sustainable Development
Strategy or not (yes/no measure) and Is the Strategy Being Implemented and the
degree of its effectiveness.
(d)
Placement in the CSD Indicator
Set: Institutional/Institutional
Framework/Strategic Implementation of SD.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The existence and implementation of a national sustainable development
strategy reflects a country’s commitment to put in place the institutional
mechanisms needed to take a systematic and holistic approach to achieving
sustainable development through integrated economic, social and environmental
policy planning.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme):
Agenda 21 and the Programme for the Further Implementation of Agenda 21
approved by the 19th Special Session of the General Assembly (Earth
Summit +5) called upon governments of all countries to adopt national
strategies for sustainable development.
These documents affirmed that sustainable development cannot be achieved
without greater integration at all policymaking levels. National sustainable development strategies
are an essential planning framework that unites priorities in the social,
economic and environmental sectors. A
well-designed, fully integrated and effectively implemented sustainable
development strategy can enhance national prospects for economic growth and employment
while protecting the environment.
National sustainable development strategies are necessary in mobilizing
and focusing society’s efforts towards achieving sustainable development.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: The United Nations Conference on Environment
and Development, 1992 (The Earth Summit) and the 19th Special
Session of the General Assembly (Earth Summit +5) called upon governments to
prepare national strategies for sustainable development.
(d)
International Targets/Recommended
Standards: The Programme for the Further
Implementation of Agenda 21 (Earth Summit +5) approved by the 19th
Special Session of the General Assembly stated that, “By the year 2002, the
formulation and elaboration of national strategies for sustainable development
that reflect the contributions and responsibilities of all interested parties
should be completed in all countries, with assistance provided, as appropriate,
through international cooperation, taking into account the special needs of the
least developed countries. The OECD has
set 2005 as the target for the implementation of national sustainable
development strategies.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: National Sustainable Development Strategies
seek to provide an overall framework and organizing principle for the
achievement of sustainable development and hence are linked to many, if not
all, of the indicators in the framework, but most particularly other
institutional indicators.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions
and Concepts: A national
sustainable development strategy may be distinguished by having the following
key characteristics:
(b) Measurement Methods: There
are two levels of measurement involved. One level covers the existence of a
national strategy for sustainable development and the other the effectiveness
with which it is being implemented and the results achieved by having such a
strategy.
Whether a country has formulated a
national strategy for sustainable development can be monitored through periodic
surveys or through the national reports submitted by countries to the
Commission on Sustainable Development through the national information
reporting system maintained by the Department of Economic and Social
Affairs. Countries themselves can
quickly verify whether they have prepared or formulated such a strategy.
The extent to which the strategy is
actually being implemented and the effectiveness of its implementation would
require preparation of a national system of monitoring and evaluation which
should be part of the strategy formulation process itself. In this sense, use of the indicators set out
in this book would provide an important means for assessing whether a national
strategy is being effectively implemented.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: There are no agreed international
definitions or standards regarding what constitutes a national sustainable
development strategy except in the general terms as set out in Agenda 21 and
the Programme for the Further Implementation of Agenda 21. The key characteristics referred to above
are based on consultations held among government representatives in three
regional meetings convened by the Department of Economic and Social
Affairs. Work has also been done by the
OECD and some national governments to better define what a national sustainable
development strategy process might entail, but none of these efforts have been
officially endorsed by respective governing bodies. At this stage, the indicator and its measurement are largely
qualitative in nature and difficult to measure objectively. Further work is required to develop criteria
for assessing the effectiveness of national strategies once they are
formulated.
(d) Status of the methodology: There is currently no internationally
agreed methodology for this indicator.
(e) Alternative
Definitions: Countries have been involved in a wide variety of planning and strategy formulation
processes over the years and many on-going demands are made on countries for
the formulation of comprehensive development frameworks, poverty reduction
strategies, national conservation strategies, national environment policy
frameworks or plans, national environmental action plans and other development
strategies. Countries have to sort
through these various possibilities and find approaches that are most suitable
for country-specific conditions.
International organizations for their part should work towards a
convergence that brings together different approaches. National sustainable development strategies have
the advantage of seeking to integrate the key economic, social and environmental
dimensions of development.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a)
Data Needed to Compile for the
Indicator: National country reports,
policy reports,
legislative
reports, and various planning documents.
(b)
National and International Data
Availability and Sources: The
UN-DESA compiles country reports that are organized into a national information
database. At the national level,
information is available through government planning and environment ministries.
(c) Data References: http://un.org/esa/agenda21/natlinfo.htm.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the United Nations Department of Economic and
Social Affairs (DESA). The focal point
is the National Information, Strategies and Institutions Branch, Division for
Sustainable Development with fax no: (212) 963-1267.
(b) Other Organizations: The United Nations Development Programme
(UNDP); International Institute for Sustainable Development (IISD);
Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD), Department for
International Development (DFID)
6. REFERENCES
(a)
Readings:
Carew-Reid, et. al., 1994. Strategies for National Sustainable
Development: A Handbook for their Planning and Implementation, The World
Conservation Union (IUCN).
United Nations, 1997. Earth Summit +
5: Programme for the Implementation of
Agenda 21.
United Nations, 1992, Agenda 21: The
United Nations Programme of Action from Rio.
United Nations, 2000. Reports of the
Regional Consultative Meetings on Sustainable Development (Asia and the
Pacific, Africa and Latin America and the Caribbean). See the DSD National Information Web Site: http://un.org/esa/agenda21/natlinfo.htm.
DFID, “Strategies for Sustainable
Development: Can Country-level Strategic Planning Frameworks Converge to
Achieve Sustainability and Eliminate Poverty?” Department for International
Development, UK, Ltd., 2000.
(b)
Internet sites:
http://www.un.org/esa/sustdev.htm
|
IMPLEMENTATION
OF RATIFIED GLOBAL AGREEMENTS
|
||
|
Institutional |
Institutional Framework |
International Co-operation |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Implementation of Ratified Global Agreements.
(b) Brief Definition: The existence of legislation for the implementation, at the national level, of international agreements related to sustainable development.
(c) Unit of Measurement: The ratio between agreements legislated for and agreements ratified from the following list of international legal instruments related to sustainable development: Basel Convention on the Control of Transboundary Movements of Hazardous Wastes and their Disposal; Convention on Biological Diversity; Framework Convention on Climate Change; International Convention to Combat Desertification in Countries Experiencing Serious Drought and/or Desertification, Particularly in Africa; The Vienna Convention for the Protection of the Ozone Layer and its Montreal Protocol on Substances That Deplete the Ozone Layer; United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Institutional/Institutional framework/ International co-operation.
2. POLICY
RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: This indicator signifies initial government action to effectively implement ratified international agreements related to sustainable development.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable Development (theme/sub-theme): Ratified international agreements must be implemented at the national level in order to achieve the objectives of sustainable development.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: See 1c above.
(d) International Targets/Recommended Standards: Provisions in national legislation for the implementation of all listed international agreements ratified by the government.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: This indicator is linked to the issue areas addressed by the international agreements listed in 1c above. The closely linked indicators include, for example: ratification of global agreements, amount of new and additional funding for sustainable development, land affected by desertification, protected forest area, emissions of greenhouse gases, ozone depleting substances, and imports and exports of hazardous wastes.
3. Methodological Description
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: Implementation is the application of global agreements at the national level through various general and specific measures, including national programs (policies, plans, voluntary agreements with industry, capacity building, etc.), legislation (including laws, decrees, regulations, ordinances, orders, or any other legally-binding measure), financial measures, and institutional arrangements.
(b) Measurement Methods: Determine the existence of national legislation for the implementation of ratified international agreements. Express the indicator as a ratio between agreements legislated for and agreements ratified.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: The content of national legislation for the implementation of international agreements can vary from general provisions to specific regulatory requirements. The more detailed the provisions, the greater the likelihood that the agreement will be fully implemented. However, the existence of legislation does not necessarily imply effective implementation or compliance. The indicator is not very suitable for showing meaningful trends.
(d) Status of the Methodology: Not available.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: Not available.
4. ASSESSMENT
OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Information on national measures.
(b) National and International Data Availability and Sources: The data are available. The primary data sources include national governments, and the Treaty Section of the United Nations Office of Legal Affairs.
(c) Data References: None.
5. AGENCIES
INVOLVED IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP). The contact point is the Director, Division of Environmental Information, Assessment & Early Warning, UNEP; fax no. (254-2) 62-4274.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: Other interested parties include the Secretariat for the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC), Secretariat for Basel Convention, UN Office of Legal Affairs, Economic and Social Council for West Asia, Network for Environment and Sustainable Development in Africa, and national governments.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
Reports of implementation/compliance committees of international agreements.
Reports of the Conferences of the Parties.
National reports to the Conferences of the Parties.
Secretary-General's Bulletin, ST/SGB/Organization (Section OLA/Rev.1), 14 November 1994.
(b) Internet sites:
Secretariat for the Basel Convention: www.basel.int
Secretariat for the Convention on Biological Diversity: www.biodiv.org
Secretariat for the Climate Change Convention: www.unfccc.de
Secretariat for the International Convention to Combat Desertification: www.unccd.de
Secretariat for the Vienna Convention for the Protection of the Ozone Layer: www.unep.ch/ozone/home.htm
Division of Ocean Affairs and the Law of the Sea, UN Office of Legal Affairs: www.un.org/Depts/los/index.htm
|
NUMBER OF INTERNET
SUBSCRIBERS PER 1000 INHABITANTS |
||
|
Institutional |
Institutional Capacity |
Information Access |
1. INDICATOR
(a)
Name: Number
of Internet Subscribers per 1000 Inhabitants.
(b) Brief Definition: Internet subscribers are those paying for or
who have established subscription accounts to enable access to the
internet. The indicator is derived by
dividing the number of internet subscribers by total population and multiplying
by 1000. Subscribers may be either
individuals or organizations.
(c)
Unit of Measurement: Number of subscribers
or subscriber accounts per thousand population.
(d)
Placement in the CSD Indicator
Set: Institutional/Institutional
Capacity/Information Access.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: The number of subscribers
or subscriber accounts is a measure of internet access. The total number of individuals having
access to the internet may be extrapolated or estimated based on the number of
subscribers or subscriber accounts.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): As
an information distribution system, the internet and its usage provide
opportunities for bringing education and information within the reach of
all. It can significantly shorten time
lags as well as opening up a new range of information resources. It also opens up significant, new economic
opportunities as well as possibilities for more environment-friendly options
for the marketplace. The internet can
allow businesses from developing nations to leapfrog into the development
mainstream and offers considerable promise in facilitating the delivery of
basic services, such as health and education, which are unevenly distributed at
present.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: The four-year strategic Valetta Action Plan
(VAP) adopted by the ITU World Telecommunication Development Conference in 1998
provides a six-point action plan that address the key elements needed to bridge
the digital divide. It includes a
special programme to take into consideration the needs of least developed
countries.
(d)
International Targets/Recommended
Standards: “The
benefits of new technologies, especially information and communication
technologies should be available to all”, United Nations Millennium
Declaration, 55/2.
(e) Linkages to Other Indicators: There are also other variables (e.g., hosts
and users) which provide a measure of how many people are using the
internet. This indicator is also related
to other telecommunication indicators (e.g. main telephone lines), as well as
income and education indicators.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a)
Underlying Definitions and
Concepts. The internet is a
linked world-wide network of computers in which users at any one computer can,
if they have permission, get information from other computers in the
network. While many users obtain access
for free, either as a member of a household, workplace, or school, a subscriber
or a subscribing organization is one that pays for access to the internet. The number of subscribers or subscriber
accounts, thus establishes a minimum threshold for the number of users in a
country.
(b) Measurement Methods: The indicator can be measured by the number
of actual subscriber accounts.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: One problem is that the indicator does not
measure overall access to the internet since there can be many users utilizing
one subscriber account. Moreover, the
statistic is not universally available although improvements in this area are
being made quite rapidly. If not all
ISPs provide national reports, country-level data may be hard to obtain. Requesting such reports, however, would be
an important national level policy consideration.
(d) Status of the methodology: In the past, the number of subscribers was
often based on multipliers (e.g., a certain number per host). As the commercialisation of the internet has
grown, so has the use of surveys by both market research companies as well as
statistical offices to count the number of
subscribers.
(e)
Alternative Definitions: The number of
subscribers establishes a minimum threshold for calculating or estimating the
number of users in a country.
4.
ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a)
Data Needed to Compile the
Indicator: Total population, number of internet
subscribers or subscriber accounts.
(b)
National and International Data
Availability and Sources: Many
Internet Service Providers (ISPs) report the number of their subscriber
accounts. Some national ISPs also
report the total number of subscribers for the country. A number of government agencies, typically
communication regulators and national statistical agencies are compiling
country-level subscriber data. At the
international level, the International Telecommunication Union collects data
across countries.
(c) Data References: World Telecommunication Indicators Database,
International Telecommunication Union; World Telecommunication Development
Report, ITU; Yearbook of Statistics, ITU.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the International Telecommunication Union
(ITU). The contact point is the Head,
Information Systems Unit, Telecommunication Development Bureau (BDT), ITU; fax
no. (41-22) 730-6449.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: None.
6. REFERENCES
(a)
Readings:
Telecommunication Indicator Handbook
(b)
Internet
site: http://www.itu.int/ti
|
MAIN TELEPHONE LINES PER
1000 INHABITANTS |
||
|
Institutional |
Institutional Capacity |
Communications Infrastructures |
1. INDICATOR
(a)
Name: Main
Telephone Lines per 1000 Inhabitants.
(b) Brief Definition: The indicator is derived by dividing the
number of main telephone lines in operation by the population and multiplying
by 1000.
(c) Unit of Measurement: Measured as the % of population with a
telephone line.
(d)
Placement in the CSD Indicator
Set: Institutional/
Institutional Capacity/ Communications Infrastructures.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: This indicator is the
broadest and most common measurement of the degree of telecommunication
development in a country.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): Telecommunications and social, economic, and
institutional development are closely linked. Modern communications is
considered to be relatively benign to the environment. There is unlikely to be sustainable development
without a well-developed communications infrastructure. Communications is critical to support
sustainable development.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: None.
(d)
International Targets/Recommended
Standards: Not available.
(e)
Linkages to Other Indicators: The linkages between
this indicator and other sustainable development indicators are many. For instance, a well-developed communication
infrastructure will reduce the need for transport with beneficial effects on the
environment. Another example is the
requirement of telecommunications for the innovative delivery of health and
educational services. Yet, another
example is the potential of telecommunications for reducing economic and social
gaps within an economy and assisting to reduce the need for urbanization. Access to telecommunications provides those
in rural and remote areas with contact to the outside world, reducing their
sense of isolation and providing them with a tool to improve economic, social
and cultural awareness. This indicator
can be supplemented by the number of cellphone subscribers to give a more
accurate picture of information access through telecommunications.
3. METHODOLOGICAL
DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: The definition of a main telephone line is a
telephone line connecting the subscriber's terminal equipment to the public
switched network and which has a dedicated port in the telephone exchange
equipment. This term is synonymous with
the term "main station" or "Direct Exchange Line" (DEL)
which are commonly used in telecommunication documents.
(b) Measurement Methods: The
indicator is derived by dividing the number of main telephone lines in
operation by the population and multiplying by 1000.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: There
is concern that main lines per 1000 inhabitants does not always accurately
reflect the degree of telecommunications development. First, there are other indicators of telecommunication
development such as data network subscribers or mobile telephone
subscribers. Second, main lines on a
country level does not indicate the breakdown of the distribution of lines into
business or residential or urban and rural although this disaggregated
information is available. The indicator
provides no measure of the quality or reliability of the telephone service.
(d) Status of the methodology: The indicator is widely used in over 200
economies around the world.
(e) Alternative Definitions: If accessibility is a main interest, then the
number of households with telephone service may be more relevant especially for
countries which have large households.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: The
data needed to compile the indicator are main lines and population.
(b) National and International Data
Availability and Sources: The International Telecommunications Union (ITU) collects this
information on an annual basis. Data
are available for 1960, 1965, 1970, and annually from 1975 onwards. Population data is widely available from UN
agencies. The ITU calculates main lines
per 100 inhabitants based on population data from the World Bank.
(c) Data References: World Telecommunications Indicators
Database.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the International Telecommunications Union (ITU). The contact point is the Head, Information Systems Unit,
ITU; fax no. (41 22) 730 6449.
(b)
Other Contributing Organizations: The World Bank, the United Nations including the
United Nations Development Programme (UNDP), the Organisation for Economic
Co-operation and Development (OECD), and Eurostat.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
Definitions, methodology and other information
regarding telecommunication indicators can be found in the ITU's Telecommunication Indicator Handbook.
Application
of the indicator including country data can be found in the ITU's World Telecommunication Development Report. The data are also provided by the ITU to
other agencies and appear in the following publications: UN Statistical Yearbook, World Bank World Development Report, UNDP
Human Development Report, and OECD
Communication Outlook and Aerostat Communications Statistics.
(b) Internet
site: http://www.itu.int
|
EXPENDITURE ON RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT AS A PERCENT
OF GROSS DOMESTIC PRODUCT |
||
|
Institutional |
Institutional capacity |
Science and technology |
1. INDICATOR
(a) Name: Expenditure on R&D as a Percent of Gross Domestic Product
(GDP).
(b) Brief Definition: Total domestic expenditure on scientific
research and experimental development (R&D) expressed as a percentage of Gross
Domestic Product (GDP).
(c) Unit of Measurement: %.
(d) Placement in the CSD Indicator Set: Institutional/Institutional capacity/Science
and technology.
2. POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose: This ratio provides an indication of the level of financial
resources devoted to R&D in terms of their share of the GDP.
(b) Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): This indicator is required to assess the
level and patterns of R&D expenditure in relation to GDP, at a given point
of time, as well as its trends.
Adequate R&D funding that is commensurate with economic growth and
national income is necessary for ensuring sustainable development. Scientists are improving their understanding
on policy-relevant issues such as climate change, growth in resource
consumption rates, demographic trends, and environmental degradation. Changes in R&D investments in these and
other areas need to be taken into account in devising long-term strategies for
development. Scientific knowledge
should be applied to assess current conditions and future prospects in relation
to sustainable development.
(c) International Conventions and
Agreements: (i) The Second
Conference of Ministers Responsible for the Application of Science and
Technology to Development in Africa (CASTAFRICA II), 6-15 July 1987; and (ii) ‘Social Development: Africa's
Priorities, Audience Africa’, United Nations Educational, Scientific and
Cultural Organization (UNESCO), 6-10 February 1995.
(d) International Targets/Recommended
Standards: Currently only available for Africa: (i) African countries should devote 1% of their GNP to R&D by
1995; (ii) each African country should
allocate at least 0.4 - 0.5% of its GDP to research by 2000 (see section 3c
above).
(e)
Linkages to Other Indicators: This
indicator can be most closely linked with indicator 40: Investment share of
GDP, in providing more precise complementary indications on the level of
financial resources devoted to R&D.
3. METHODOLOGICAL DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: The Recommendation
concerning the International Standardization of Statistics on Science and
Technology defines total domestic expenditure on R&D activities as all
expenditure made for this purpose in the course of a reference year in
institutions and installations established in the national territory, as well
as installations physically situated abroad; land or experimental facilities
rented or owned abroad, and ships, vehicles, aircraft and satellites used by
national institutions.
(b) Measurement Methods: The indicator is calculated by dividing
total domestic expenditure on R&D by GDP and expressed as a percentage,
that is,
Total
domestic expenditure on R&D x 100
GDP
Both data on R&D expenditure and GDP can be
expressed in current values and in the national currency.
(c) Limitations of the Indicator: The indicator does not show the proportion
of expenditure on R&D which contributes specifically to sustainable
development. Data on R&D expenditure are usually obtained through special
surveys. To date, most developed and a
few developing countries are able to regularly collect and provide
internationally comparable and timely data.
(d) Status of the Methodology:
Concepts and the corresponding definitions as
well as suggestions for the collection of data as set out in the Recommendation Concerning the International
Standardization of Statistics on Science and Technology still apply, whilst
work is in progress in revising the Frascati Manual which will have a direct
impact on the need to revise the Recommendation.
(e) Alternative Definitions/Indicators: Gross domestic expenditure on R&D (GERD)
as percentage of GDP can be used as an alternative indicator. It is already in use in a significant number
of countries. The difference between
total domestic R&D expenditure and GERD is that the former includes R&D
expenditure on installations physically situated abroad but used by national
institutions.
4. ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a) Data Needed to Compile the Indicator: Total domestic expenditure on R&D and
GDP expressed in national currency.
(b)
National and International Data Availability and
Sources: Data on R&D expenditure for 1990, or
later years, are available for 46 countries only. At the national level, the availability of these data depends on
the existence and frequency of R&D surveys. To derive this indicator at the international level, the GDP data
needed can be obtained from the World Bank whilst those relating to R&D
expenditure can be obtained through UNESCO's international surveys on
scientific research and experimental development. At the national level, data on R&D expenditure are collected
normally through special R&D surveys conducted by the
ministry/department/council of science and technology and/or the central
statistical office and/or specialized institutions, whereas those on GDP can be
obtained from either the ministry of finance or the central statistical office.
(c) Data References: UNESCO Statistical Yearbook.
5. AGENCIES INVOLVED IN
THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE INDICATOR
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the United Nations Educational, Scientific and
Cultural Organization (UNESCO). The contact
point is the Director, UNESCO
Institute for Statistics, UNESCO; email: uis@unesco.org and fax
(33-1) 45 68 55 20.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: The OECD (Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development) and EUROSTAT are two organizations
that have been actively developing methodologies and collecting data from their
respective member countries on R&D.
6. REFERENCES
(a) Readings:
UNESCO. Recommendation
concerning the International Standardization of Statistics on Science and
Technology. Adopted by the General
Conference of UNESCO in 1978.
UNESCO. Manual for Statistics on Scientific and
Technological Activities. 1984.
UNESCO. Guide to the Collection of Statistics on
Science and Technology. 1984.
OECD (Organisation for Economic Co-operation and
Development). Proposed Standard Practice
for Surveys and Research and Experimental Development, "Frascati
Manual". 1995.
(b) Internet site: http://unescostat.unesco.org/
|
HUMAN AND ECONOMIC LOSS
DUE TO NATURAL DISASTERS |
||
|
Institutional |
Institutional Capacity |
Disaster Preparedness and Response |
1. INDICATOR
(a)
Name: Human
and economic loss due to natural disasters.
(b)
Brief Definition: The number of persons deceased, missing, and/or
injured as a direct result of a natural disaster; and the amount of economic
and infrastructure losses incurred as a direct result of the natural disaster.
(c)
Unit of Measurement: Number of fatalities; $US.
(d)
Placement
in the CSD Indicators Set: Institutional/Institutional
Capacity/Disaster Preparedness and Response.
2.
POLICY RELEVANCE
(a) Purpose:
To provide estimates of the human and economic impact of disasters
in order to measure the trends in population vulnerability and to determine
whether a country or province is becoming more or less prone to the effects of
disasters.
(b)
Relevance to Sustainable/Unsustainable
Development (theme/sub-theme): Natural disasters can have
devastating short and long-term impacts on the society and the economy of any
country, adversely affecting progress towards sustainable development. They cause loss of life, social disruption
and affect economic activities. This is
particularly true for highly vulnerable, low-income groups. They also cause environmental damage, such
as loss of fertile agricultural land, and water contamination. They affect urban settlements and may result
in major population displacements.
The
general increase in vulnerability of societies worldwide has caused the social,
economic and environmental impact of natural disasters to become far greater
now than ever before. In fact, the
overall number of people affected by disasters has been growing by 6% each year
since 1960. This trend is expected to
continue primarily because of increased concentration of people and values in
the areas exposed to natural hazards, such as floods and earthquakes.
(c) International Conventions and Agreements: Based on the experience of the International Decade for Natural Disaster Reduction, the UN General Assembly adopted resolution A/54/219 which established a permanent mandate for the UN system in the field of disaster reduction, in the framework of the global programme named International Strategy for Disaster Reduction (ISDR).
(d)
International
Targets/Recommended Standards:
None.
(e)
Linkages to Other Indicators:
This indicator is linked with
indicators that are related to issues of vulnerability: % Population Living Below
Poverty Line, Floor Area Per Person, Population Growth Rate, Population of
Urban Formal and Informal Settlements, Area of Urban Formal and Informal
Settlements, and other institutional indicators like National Sustainable
Development Strategy.
This indicator would have greater significance if
correlated to indicators of vulnerability to specific hazards such as
earthquakes and floods, which account for the majority of loss due to natural
disasters, especially in developing countries.
3.
METHODOLOGICAL DESCRIPTION
(a) Underlying Definitions and Concepts: There
is a recognized high degree of interdependency between sustainable development
and vulnerability to natural hazards. High
vulnerability means higher exposure to natural catastrophes in the absence of
disaster reduction measures. Natural
disasters have a strong negative impact on the development process in both
industrialized and developing countries.
Therefore, the degree of vulnerability to a given natural hazard
provides a key measure of social welfare and development in a given country, as
well as an indication of the risk (probability) of natural disasters.
For the purpose of this indicator, the
following definitions have been used:
Natural disaster is the consequence of the
impact of a natural hazard on a socio-economic system with a given degree of
vulnerability, which overwhelms local capacity to respond to the emergency and
has disruptive consequences on human, social and economic parameters.
Natural hazards comprise phenomena such as earthquakes;
volcanic activity; landslides; tsunamis; tropical cyclones and other severe
storms; tornadoes and high winds; river floods and coastal flooding; wildfires
and associated haze; drought; infestations.
Vulnerability to hazards is a function of human
activities. It describes the degree to
which a socio-economic system is susceptible to the impact of natural and other
related hazards. Vulnerability also depends
on aspects such as hazard awareness, the characteristics of human settlements
and infrastructure, public policy and administration, and organized abilities
in all fields of disaster management.
At present, poverty is one major cause of vulnerability in many
parts of the world.
(b)
Measurement Methods: The measurement methods proposed are based on
the criteria used by the Centre for Research on the Epidemiology of Disaster
(CRED). The data elements included here
have been selected and modified according to the requirements of the
sustainable development indicator methodology sheets. Overall, these data should be collected and validated at the
country level by a public authority using these standard criteria and
methods. Each element is presented first
in a concise description, followed by comments and the proposed recording
procedure.
i) Onset Date: This establishes the date when the disaster situation
occurred. This date is well defined for
all sudden-impact disasters. For disaster
situations which develop gradually overtime (for example, drought) scientific
(meteorology and seismology institutes) and governmental (civil defence
authorities) sources.
ii) Declaration Date: The date when the first call for external assistance
concerning the disaster is issued. This
call for external assistance mentioned here is defined according to the
definition of a disaster situation stated above. This date is available for all disaster situations to be included
for the indicator. Only the date of the first appeal for external assistance is
recorded.
iii) Disaster Type: This describes the
disaster according to a pre-defined classification scheme. Disaster types should include all types of
natural disasters, for example, earthquakes, cyclones, floods, volcanic
eruptions, drought, and storms.
Disasters may be further described as sudden onset, such as earthquakes
and floods, and long-term, such as drought.
Two or more disasters may be related, or other disaster types may occur
as a consequence of a primary event.
For example, a cyclone may generate a flood or landslide; or an
earthquake may cause a gas line to rupture.
iv) Country: This defines the country in which the disaster occurred. Every
disaster record will be by country.
Autonomous regions, not yet recognised as countries, will not be
used. The same disaster may affect more
than one country, and here separate records are maintained.
v) Fatalities: This includes persons confirmed dead and persons missing and
presumed dead. Official figures are
used whenever available. The figure is updated as missing persons are confirmed
to be dead.
vi) Estimated Amount of Damage: This represents the value of all damages and
economic losses directly related to the occurrence of the given disaster. The economic impact of a disaster usually
consists of direct (for example, damage to infrastructure, crops, housing) and
indirect (for example, loss of revenues, unemployment, market destabilisation)
consequences on the local economy.
Although several institutions have developed methodologies to quantify
these losses in their specific domain, no standard procedure to determine a
global figure for the economic impact exists.
Three different figures are recorded from sources which have a
well-defined methodology for the assessment of economic impacts, including the
World Bank and other international lending agencies; the host government; and,
especially in the case of complex emergency situations, the total budget
requirements listed in the consolidated appeals launched by UN agencies and
other major non-government organizations.
(c)
Limitations of the Indicator:
The validity of this indicator is limited by the quality and the format
of the data used for its calculation. Comparability
over time may represent a particular problem for this indicator.
(d)
Status
of the Methodology: The methodology is in widespread use on both
developed and developing countries although it is not standardized.
(e)
Alternative Definitions: If the indicator has to reflect changing risk,
the measurement should be losses per unit of time per capita. This is not possible without further
development of the indicator methodology.
4.
ASSESSMENT OF DATA
(a)
Data
Needed to Compile the Indicator: As described in 4.b.
(b)
National
and International Data Availability and Sources: Data
above is normally available within each country or easily obtainable; other
sources are international scientific associations; insurance companies (Munich
Re, Swiss Re), national geological survey agencies; space agencies and
satellite service providers; the UN system and the ISDR framework. Internationally, some data is
maintained by the Centre for Research on the Epidemiology of Disasters (CRED)
in Brussels.
(c)
Data
References: The Centre serves as a
reference source for most applications. CRED compiles and validates data from
diverse sources.
(a) Lead Agency: The lead agency is the
Secretariat for the International Strategy for Disaster Reduction (ISDR),
United Nations, Geneva.
(b) Other Contributing Organizations: The Centre for Research on the Epidemiology of Disasters, Faculty of Medicine, University of Louvain, Belgium. The following organizations were consulted over the development and subsequent review of this indicator methodology sheet: World Food Programme, United Nations Environment Programme, Pan American Health Organization, International Federation of the Red Cross and Red Crescent Societies, and US Agency for International Development, ICSU – International Council of Scientific Unions, Munich Reinsurance Company.
6.
REFERENCES
(a)
Readings:
CRED. Profiles
in the World: Summary of Disaster Statistics by Continent. CRED Statistical
Bulletin, May 1994.
International Federation of Red Cross and Red
Crescent Societies, Centre for Research on the Epidemiology of Disasters.
World Disasters Reports for 1993, 1994, and 1995. Martinus Neijhoof
Publishers, Dordrecht, Netherlands.
1993, 1994, and 1995.
Sapir, D.G.
Natural and Man-made Disasters: the Vulnerability of Women-headed Households
and Children without Families. World Health Statistical Quarterly; 46:
227-233, 1993.
CRED. Proposed Principles and Guidelines for the Collection
and Dissemination of Disaster Related Data. Report on the IERRIS Workshop,
7-9 September 1992.
Sapir, D.G. & Sato, T. The
Human Impact of Floods: Common Issues for Preparedness and Prevention in
Selected Asia-Pacific Countries. Paper presented at the Second Asian
Pacific Conference on Disaster Medicine, Chiba, Japan. 1992.
Sapir, D.G. and Misson, C. The Development of a Database on Disasters. Disasters; 16(1):
80-86. 1992.
CRED. Statistical
Update from CRED Disaster Events Database in: CRED Disasters in the World. November 1991.
(b) Internet sites:
REFERENCES
References[112]
European Environment Agency,
Environmental Signals 2000, Environmental Assessment Report No. 6, 2000.
Federal Planning Office of
Belgium, Indicators of Sustainable Development for Decision-Making,
Report of the Workshop of Ghent, Belgium submitted to the UN Commission on
Sustainable Development, 9-11 January, 1995.
Food and Agriculture
Organization, The Coming Livestock Revolution, Background Paper No. 6,
Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Commission on Sustainable
Development, Eighth Session, 24 April-5 May, 2000.
Food and Agriculture
Organization of the United Nations, Report of the World Food Summit,
Rome, 13-17 November, 1996.
Government of the Czech
Republic, Fourth International Workshop on Indicators of Sustainable
Development, Supported by the European Commission, Prague, the Czech
Republic, 19-21 January, 1998.
Institut
français de l’environnement, Test des indicateurs de développement durable des Nations unies -
Rapport de la France, Collection Etudes et Travaux n°17, juin 1998.
International Institute for
Sustainable Development, Compendium of Sustainable Development Indicator
Initiatives and Publications, http://iisd1.iisd.ca/measure/ compendium.htm.
World Conservation Union
(IUCN), Fourth World Congress on National Parks and Protected Areas,
Caracas, Venezuela, 10-21 February, 1992.
Organisation for Economic
Co-operation and Development, Towards Sustainable Development: Environmental
Indicators, 1998.
Organisation for Economic
Co-operation and Development, Frameworks to Measure Sustainable Development:
An OECD Expert Workshop, Paris, 2-3 September, 1999.
Organisation for Economic
Co-operation and Development, Towards Sustainable Development: Indicators to
Measure Progress, OECD Conference, Rome, 15-17, December 1999.
Organisation for Economic
Co-operation and Development, Measuring Development Progress: A Working Set
of Core Indicators, http://www.oecd.org/dac/Indicators/ index.htm.
Reid, W. V., McNeely, J.A.,
Tunstall, D.B., Bryant, D.A. and Winograd, M., Biodiversity Indicators for
Policy-Makers, World Resources Institute and The World Conservation Union,
October 1993.
Rosati, Dariusz, Managing
Globalization with Equity, in United Nations First Global Forum on Human
Development, New York, 29-31 July, 1999.
South Africa Department of
Environmental Affairs and Tourism, Results from Testing of CSD Indicators of
Sustainable Development in South Africa: 1998, Sustainable Development
Management Directorate, Pretoria, South Africa, October 1998.
Spangenberg, Joachim H.,
Pfahl, Stefanie, and Deller, Kerstin, Elaboration of Institutional
Indicators for Sustainable Development, E. Schmidt Publications, Berlin,
Germany, 2001 (in press).
UNAIDS, Report on the
Global HIV/AIDS Epidemic, http://www.unaids.org/ epidemic_update/
report/index.html, June 2000.
United Kingdom Department of
the Environment, Transport and the Regions, Sustainability Counts: Consultation
Paper on a Set of ‘Headline’ Indicators of Sustainable Development, 1998.
United Nations, The
Convention on the Rights of the Child, 1989.
United Nations, World
Summit for Children, New York, 1990.
United Nations, Agenda
21: Programme of Action for Sustainable Development, United Nations
Conference on Environment and Development, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, 3-14 June
1992.
United Nations, Convention
on Biological Diversity, 1992.
United Nations, Report of
the International Conference on Population and Development, Cairo, 5-13
September, 1994.
United Nations, Report of
the World Summit for Social Development, Copenhagen, Denmark, 6-12 March,
1995.
United Nations, Fourth
World Conference on Women, Beijing, 1995.
United Nations, Second International
Conference on Human Settlements (Habitat II), Istanbul, Turkey, June 1996.
United Nations, Indicators
of Sustainable Development: Framework and Methodologies, New York, 1996.
United Nations, Earth
Summit +5: Programme for the Further Implementation of Agenda 21, June 1997.
United Nations, The State
of Crime and Criminal Justice Worldwide, Report of the Secretary-General,
Tenth United Nations Congress on the Prevention of Crime and the Treatment of
Offenders, Vienna, 10-17 April 2000.
United Nations Children’s
Fund (UNICEF), The Progress of Nations, New York, 1999.
United Nations Children’s
Fund (UNICEF), Goals for Children and Development in the 1990s,
http://www.unicef.org/ wsc/goals.htm.
United Nations Commission on
Sustainable Development, Energy and Transportation Issues, Background
Paper no. 6, Fourth Session, 18 April-3 May, 1996.
United Nations Commission on
Sustainable Development, Assessment of Progress in the Implementation of
Agenda 21 at the National Level, Report of the Secretary-General, Fifth
Session, 7-25 April, 1997.
United Nations Commission on
Sustainable Development, Progress Report on the Implementation of the Work
Programme on Education, Public Awareness and Training, Report of the
Secretary-General, Eighth Session, 24 April-5 May, 2000.
United Nations Commission on
Sustainable Development, Report of the Eighth Session, Economic and
Social Council, Official Records 2000, Supplement No. 9, 30 April 1999 and 24
April-5 May, 2000.
United Nations Department of
Economic and Social Affairs, Measuring Changes in Consumption and Production
Patterns: A Set of Indicators, Population Division, New York, 1998.
United Nations Department of Economic and Social
Affairs, Testing the CSD Indicators of Sustainable Development: Interim
Analysis: Testing Process, Indicators and Methodology Sheets, Technical Paper prepared by the Division for
Sustainable Development, 25 January 1999.
United Nations Department of
Economic and Social Affairs, Work Programme on Indicators of Sustainable
Development of the Commission on Sustainable Development, Division for
Sustainable Development, April 1999.
United Nations Department of
Economic and Social Affairs, CSD Work Programme on Indicators of Sustainable
Development Progress Report, Background Paper No. 7, Commission on
Sustainable Development, Seventh Session, New York, 19-30 April 1999.
United Nations Department of
Economic and Social Affairs, Report: Fifth Expert Group Meeting
on Indicators of Sustainable Development, Division for Sustainable
Development, New York, 7-8 April 1999.
United Nations Department of
Economic and Social Affairs, UN CSD Theme Framework and Indicators of
Sustainability, Final Draft, PriceWaterhouseCoopers for Division for
Sustainable Development, November 18, 1999.
United Nations Department of
Economic and Social Affairs, Fifth International Workshop on CSD Indicators
of Sustainable Development, Division for Sustainable Development, Hosted
by the Government of Barbados and sponsored by the Government of Germany,
Bridgetown, Barbados, 7-9 December 1999.
United Nations Department of
Economic and Social Affairs, Progress Report on the Implementation of the
CSD Work Programme on Indicators of Sustainable Development, Background
Paper No. 7, Commission on Sustainable Development, Eighth Session, New York,
24 April-5 May, 2000.
United Nations Department of
Economic and Social Affairs, Report of the Consultative Group to Identify
Themes and Core Indicators of Sustainable Development, Division for
Sustainable Development, New York, 6-9 March, 2000.
United Nations Department of
Economics and Social Affairs, Revision of the World Population Estimates and
Projections, Population Division, http://www.popin.org/.
United Nations Department of
Economics and Social Affairs, World Urbanization Prospects: The 1999
Revision: Key Findings, Population Division,
http://www.popin/wdtrends/urbanization.
United Nations Development
Group, Guidelines: Common Country Assessment (CCA), Sub-group on
Programme Policies, Draft, 26 February, 1999.
United Nations Development
Programme, Human Development Report 1999, Oxford University Press, New
York, 1999.
United Nations Development
Programme, Human Development Report 2000, http://www.undp.org /hdr2000.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Assessment of Progress Achieved in Promoting Sustainable
Human Settlement Development, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission
on Sustainable Development, Second Session, 16-27 May, 1994.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Poverty Eradication and Sustainable Development, Report
of the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Third Session,
11-28 April, 1995.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Protection of the Atmosphere, Addendum, Report of the
Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Fourth Session, 18
April-3 May, 1996.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Combating Poverty, Report of the Secretary-General,
Commission on Sustainable Development, Fourth Session, 18 April-3 May 1996.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Protection of the Ocean, all Kinds of Seas, including
Enclosed and Semi-enclosed Seas, and Coastal Areas and the Protection, Rational
Use and Development of Their Living Resources, Report of the
Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Fourth Session, 18
April-3 May, 1996.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Implementation of the Convention on Biological Diversity,
Preparations for the Special Session of the General Assembly for the Purpose of
an Overall Review and Appraisal of the Implementation of Agenda 21, Note by the
Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Fifth Session, 7-25
April, 1997.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Comprehensive Assessment of the Freshwater Resources of the
World, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable
Development, Fifth Session, 7-25 April, 1997.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Promoting Sustainable Human Settlement Development,
Addendum, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable
Development, Fifth Session, 7-25 April, 1997.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Technical Cooperation, Including Resource Mobilization, and Coordination
of Activities, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission on Crime
Prevention and Criminal Justice, Sixth Session, Vienna, 28 April-9 May 1997.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Overall Progress Achieved since the United Nations Conference
on Environment and Development, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission
on Sustainable Development, Fifth Session, 7-25 April, 1997.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Overall Progress Achieved since the United Nations
Conference on Environment and Development: Science for Sustainable Development,
Addendum, Report of the Secretary General, Commission on Sustainable
Development, Fifth Session, 7-25 April 1997.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Overall Progress Achieved since the United Nations
Conference on Environment and Development: Protecting and Promoting Human
Health, Addendum, Report of the Secretary General, Commission on
Sustainable Development, Fifth Session, 7-25 April 1997.
United Nations Economic and Social Council, Overall Progress Achieved since the United Nations
Conference on Environment and Development: Environmentally Sound Management of
Solid Wastes and Sewage-Related Issues, Addendum, Report of the Secretary General, Commission on Sustainable
Development, Fifth Session, 7-25 April 1997.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Strategic Approaches to Freshwater Management, Report of
the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Sixth Session, 20
April-1 May, 1998.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Oceans and Seas, Report of the Secretary-General,
Commission on Sustainable Development, Seventh Session, 19-30 April, 1999.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Comprehensive Review of Changing Consumption and Production
Patterns, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable
Development, Seventh Session, 19-30 April, 1999.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Progress Made in Providing Safe Water Supply and Sanitation
for All During the 1990s, Report of the Secretary General, Commission on
Sustainable Development, Eighth Session, 24 April-5 May, 2000.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Integrated Planning and Management of Land Resources, Report
of the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Eighth
Session, 24 April-5 May, 2000.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Sustainable Agriculture and Rural Development, Report of
the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Eighth Session,
24 April-5 May, 2000.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Integrated Planning and Management of Land Resources:
Combating Desertification and Drought, Addendum, Report of the Secretary-General,
Commission on Sustainable Development, Eighth Session, 24 April-5 May, 2000.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Sustainable Agriculture and Rural Development: Urbanization
and Sustainable Agricultural Development, Addendum, Report of the
Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Eighth Session, 24
April-5 May, 2000.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Integrated Planning and Management of Land Resources:
Conservation of Biological Diversity, Addendum, Report of the
Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Eighth Session, 24
April-5 May, 2000.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Economic Growth, Trade and Investment, Report of the
Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Eighth Session, 24
April-5 May, 2000.
United Nations Economic and
Social Council, Financial Resources and Mechanisms, Report of the
Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Eighth Session, 24
April-5 May, 2000.
United Nations Educational,
Scientific and Cultural Organization, Social Development: Africa’s
Priorities, Audience Africa, 6-10 February, 1995.
United Nations Educational,
Scientific and Cultural Organization, Education, Public Awareness and
Training, Addendum, Report of the Secretary General, Commission on
Sustainable Development, Sixth Session, 20 April-1 May, 1998.
United Nations Environment
Programme, GEO-2000: UNEP’s Millennium Report on the Environment,
Earthscan Publications, 1999.
United Nations Environment
Programme, United Nations Convention to Combat Desertification in those
Countries Experiencing Drought and/or Desertification, Particularly in Africa,
1994.
United Nations Environment
Programme, Development of Indicators of Biological Diversity, Subsidiary
Body on Scientific, Technical and Technological Advice, Fifth Meeting,
Montreal, 31 January-4 February, 2000, http://www.biodiv.org/doc/sbstta-5.htm.
United Nations Framework
Convention on Climate Change, Kyoto Protocol to the United Nations Framework
Convention on Climate Change, December 1997.
United Nations Interagency
Commission (UNDP, UNESCO, UNICEF, World Bank), Final Report of the World
Conference on Education for All: Meeting Basic Learning Needs, Jomtien,
Thailand, 5-9 March, 1990.
United Nations Population
Fund, Indicators for Population and Reproductive Health Programmes,
Technical and Policy Division, October 1998.
World Bank, Expanding the
Measure of Wealth: Indicators of Environmentally Sustainable Development,
Environmentally Sustainable Development Studies and Monographs Series No. 17,
Washington, D.C., June 1997.
World Bank Group, Poverty
Trends and Voices of the Poor, http://www.worldbank.org/poverty/
data/trends.
World Bank Group, World
Bank Warns Global Poverty Fight Failing, Unveils Enhanced Poverty Strategy,
News Release No. 2000/059/S, http://www.worldbank.org/html/extdr/
extme/059.htm.
Annex 1
International Goals,
Targets, and Standards Related to Themes and Sub-Themes of Indicators of
Sustainable Development
SOCIAL
|
||
Theme
|
Sub-theme
|
Goals,
Targets, and Standards
|
|
Equity
|
Poverty
|
i) Reduce proportion of people living in
extreme poverty in developing countries by at least one-half by 2015 compared
to 1990 (Copenhagen95). ii) Universal access to paid employment (Copenhagen95). |
|
Gender
Equality |
Eliminate discriminatory practices in
employment (Beijing) |
|
|
Health
|
Nutrition
Status |
Reduce
severe and moderate malnutrition among under 5 year old children by 50% from
1990 to 2000 (New York90, Copenhagen95, Beijing95, Rome96, |
|
Mortality |
Reduce mortality rate for children under 5
years old by two-thirds of 1990 levels by 2015 (Cairo94, New York90) |
|
|
Sanitation |
Universal access to sanitary waste disposal (Rio
de Janeiro92, Copenhagen95, Beijing95) |
|
|
Drinking
Water |
Universal access to safe drinking water
supply by 2025 (Rio de Janeiro92, Copenhagen95, Beijing95) |
|
|
Healthcare
Delivery |
i) Universal access to primary health care
and reproductive health services by 2015 Cairo94, Copenhagen95, Beijing95) ii) Universal immunization against measles (New
York90,) iii) Universal access to safe and reliable
contraceptive methods (Cairo94) |
|
|
Education
|
Education
Level |
Universal access, and completion of primary
education by 2015 (Jomtien90, Cairo94, Beijing95) |
|
Literacy |
Adult literacy reduced by half of the 1990
level by 2000 (Jomtien90, Copenhagen95, Beijing95) |
|
|
Housing
|
Living
Conditions |
Provision of sufficient living space and
avoidance of overcrowding (Habitat II) |
|
Security |
Crime
|
Significantly
reduce violence and crime (Cairo95) |
|
Population
|
Population
Change |
Stabilize world population (Cairo94) |
ENVIRONMENTAL
|
||
Theme
|
Sub-theme
|
Goals,
Targets, and Standards
|
|
Atmosphere
|
Climate
Change |
i) Reduce overall developed country emissions
of CO2 equivalents by 5% of 1990 levels by 2008-2012 (Kyoto97) ii) Stabilize GHG concentrations in the
atmosphere at a level that prevents dangerous anthropogenic interference with
the climate system (FCCC) |
|
Ozone Layer Depletion |
ODS consumption elimination schedule: halons
by 1994; CFC, carbon tetrachloride, HBFC, and methyl chloroform by 1996;
methyl bromide by 2010; and HCFC by 2030 (Montreal Protocol and Amendments
and Adjustments) |
|
|
Air
Quality |
National air quality standards based on WHO
air quality guidelines |
|
ENVIRONMENTAL
(continued)
|
||
Theme
|
Sub-theme
|
Goals,
Targets, and Standards
|
|
Land
|
Agriculture
|
Reduce
the number of undernourished people to half their present level no later than
2015 (Rome96) |
|
Forests
|
i) All tropical timber products traded internationally
shall originate from sustainably managed forest by 2000 (International
Tropical Timber Organization) ii) National targets set under the sustained
yield principle |
|
|
Desertification
|
|
|
|
Urbanization
|
|
|
|
Coastal
Zone |
|
|
|
Fisheries |
|
|
|
Fresh Water |
Water
Quantity |
Withdrawal limits may apply to specific
international treaties between countries |
|
Water
Quality |
National water quality standards based on WHO
guidelines for drinking water quality |
|
|
Biodiversity
|
Ecosystem |
10% protected area for each major ecosystem
type by 2000 (Caracas92) |
|
Species |
|
|
ECONOMIC
|
||
Theme
|
Sub-theme
|
Goals,
Targets, and Standards
|
|
Economic
Structure |
Economic
Performance |
|
|
Trade |
|
|
|
Financial
Status |
Total ODA from developed countries should be
at least 0.7% of GNP (United Nations) |
|
|
Consumption and Production Patterns |
Material
Consumption |
|
|
Energy
Use |
|
|
|
Waste Generation and Management |
i) National targets may apply for solid waste
reduction and recycling ii) Prevent and minimize the generation of
hazardous wastes (Agenda 21) iii) IAEA safety standards for the management of
radioactive wastes |
|
|
Transportation |
|
|
INSTITUTIONAL
|
||
Theme
|
Sub-theme
|
Goals,
Targets, and Standards
|
|
Institutional
Framework |
Strategic Implementation of SD |
National sustainable development strategies
that reflect all interests formulated by all countries by 2002 (United Nations
General Assembly97) |
|
International
Coop. |
|
|
|
Institutional
Capacity |
Information Access |
|
|
Communications
Infrastructure |
|
|
|
Science and Technology |
One researcher engaged in R&D per 1000
population [for Africa] (UNESCO95) |
|
|
Disaster Preparedness and Response |
Improve the capacity of each country to
mitigate the effects of natural disasters expeditiously and effectively (United
Nations General Assembly89) |
|
Annex 2
Core Indicators and the Driving
Force-State-Response Framework
SOCIAL
|
|||||
|
Theme |
Sub-theme |
Indicator |
DF |
S |
R |
|
Equity |
Poverty |
Percent of Population Living below the Poverty Line |
|
X |
|
|
Gini Index of Income Inequality |
|
X |
|
||
|
Unemployment Rate |
X |
|
|
||
|
Gender Equality |
Ratio of Average Female Wage to Male Wage |
|
X |
|
|
|
Health |
Nutrition Status |
Nutritional Status of Children |
|
X |
|
|
Mortality |
Mortality Rate Under 5 Years Old |
|
X |
|
|
|
Life Expectancy at Birth |
|
X |
|
||
|
Sanitation |
Percent of
Population with Adequate Sewage Disposal Facilities |
|
X |
|
|
|
Drinking Water |
Population with Access to Safe Drinking Water |
|
X |
|
|
|
Healthcare Delivery |
Percent of Population with Access to Primary Health
Care Facilities |
|
|
X |
|
|
Immunization Against Infectious Childhood Diseases |
|
|
X |
||
|
Contraceptive Prevalence Rate |
|
|
X |
||
|
Education |
Education Level |
Children Reaching Grade 5 of Primary Education |
X |
|
|
|
Adult Secondary Education Achievement Level |
X |
|
|
||
|
Literacy |
Adult Literacy Rate |
X |
|
|
|
|
Housing |
Living Conditions |
Floor Area per Person |
|
X |
|
|
Security |
Crime |
Number of Recorded Crimes per 100,000 Population |
|
X |
|
|
Population |
Population Change |
Population Growth Rate |
X |
|
|
|
Population of Urban Formal and Informal Settlements |
|
X |
|
||
ENVIRONMENTAL
|
|||||
|
Theme |
Sub-theme |
Indicator |
DF |
S |
R |
|
Atmosphere |
Climate Change |
Emissions of Greenhouse Gases |
X |
|
|
|
Ozone
Layer Depletion |
Consumption of Ozone Depleting Substances |
X |
|
|
|
|
Air Quality |
Ambient Concentration of Air Pollutants in Urban Areas |
|
X |
|
|
|
Land |
Agriculture |
Arable and Permanent Crop Land Area |
|
X |
|
|
Use of Fertilizers |
X |
|
|
||
|
Use of Agricultural Pesticides |
X |
|
|
||
|
Forests |
Forest Area as a Percent of Land Area |
|
X |
|
|
|
Wood Harvesting Intensity |
X |
|
|
||
|
Desertification |
Land Affected by Desertification |
|
X |
|
|
|
Urbanization |
Area of Urban Formal and Informal Settlements |
|
X |
|
|
|
Oceans, Seas and Coasts |
Coastal Zone |
Algae Concentration in Coastal Waters |
|
X |
|
|
Percent of Total Population Living in Coastal Areas |
X |
|
|
||
|
Fisheries |
Annual Catch by Major Species |
X |
|
|
|
|
ENVIRONMENTAL |
|||||
|
Theme |
Sub-theme |
Indicator |
DF |
S |
R |
|
Fresh
Water |
Water
Quantity |
Annual
Withdrawal of Ground and Surface Water as a Percent of Total Available Water |
X |
|
|
|
Water
Quality |
BOD
in Water Bodies |
|
X |
|
|
|
Concentration
of Faecal Coliform in Freshwater |
|
X |
|
||
|
Biodiversity |
Ecosystem |
Area
of Selected Key Ecosystems |
|
X |
|
|
Protected
Area as a Percent of Total Area |
|
|
X |
||
|
Species |
Abundance
of Selected Key Species |
|
X |
|
|
ECONOMIC
|
|||||
|
Theme |
Sub-theme |
Indicator |
DF |
S |
R |
|
Economic
Structure |
Economic
Performance |
GDP
per Capita |
X |
|
|
|
Investment
Share in GDP |
X |
|
|
||
|
Trade |
Balance
of Trade in Goods and Services |
|
X |
|
|
|
Financial
Status |
Debt
to GNP Ratio |
|
X |
|
|
|
Total
ODA Given or Received as a Percent of GNP |
X |
|
|
||
|
Consumption
and Production Patterns |
Material
Consumption |
Intensity
of Material Use |
|
X |
|
|
Energy
Use |
Annual
Energy Consumption per Capita |
X |
|
|
|
|
Share
of Consumption of Renewable Energy Resources |
|
X |
|
||
|
Intensity
of Energy use |
|
X |
|
||
|
Waste Generation and Management |
Generation
of Industrial and Municipal Solid Waste |
X |
|
|
|
|
Generation
of Hazardous Waste |
X |
|
|
||
|
Generation
of Radioactive Waste |
X |
|
|
||
|
Waste
Recycling and Reuse |
|
|
X |
||
|
Transportation |
Distance
Traveled per Capita by Mode of Transport |
|
X |
|
|
|
INSTITUTIONAL |
|||||
|
Theme |
Sub-theme |
Indicator |
DF |
S |
R |
|
Institutional
Framework |
Strategic Implementation of SD |
National
Sustainable Development Strategy |
|
|
X |
|
International
Cooperation |
Implementation
of Ratified Global Agreements |
|
|
X |
|
|
Institutional
Capacity |
Information Access |
Number
of Internet Subscribers per 1000
Population |
|
X |
|
|
Communication
Infrastructure |
Main
Telephone Lines per 1000 Population |
|
X |
|
|
|
Science and Technology |
Expenditure
on Research and Development as a % of GDP |
|
|
X |
|
|
Disaster
Preparedness and Response |
Economic
and Human Loss Due to Natural Disasters |
X |
|
|
|
Annex 3: NATIONAL TESTING - IMPLEMENTATION APPROACHES
AFRICA
Ghana - http://www.un.org/esa/sustdev/indi4gh.htm
The Government of Ghana established a National Committee
on Sustainable Development (SD), which utilised a multistakeholder and
participatory approach to testing and implementation. This Committee functioned under the
National Committee for the Implementation of Agenda 21. The membership of the Committee includes
the following organisations: the National Development Planning Commission;
the Ministry of Environment, Science and Technology; Statistical Services;
Environmental Protection Agency; Town and Country Planning Department;
Institute of Statistical, Social and Economic Research, University of Ghana;
Centre for Policy Analysis; Council for Scientific and Industrial Research;
United Nations Development Programme; Private Enterprise Foundation; Rescue
Mission Ghana; and the National Union of Environmental NGOs. The Ministry of
Environment, Science and Technology will be the focal point for the work of the
Committee. Apart from this multi-stakeholder approach, Ghana
implemented the testing programme in conjunction with two programmes of the
UNDP, the Poverty Reduction Programme and the Capacity 21 Programme. In view of the cross-sectoral nature of these
programmes, they served as the focus of the testing and implementation
programme for Ghana. Among the
important aspects of these programmes were their decentralized nature, and
the focus of action was at the district level, lowest level of political
authority in Ghana. |
Kenya - http://www.un.org/esa/sustdev/indi4ke.htm
The co-ordinating mechanism for
testing and implementation of the ISDs[113]
in Kenya involved both governmental and non-governmental collaboration. The focal point for the development of the
ISDs was the National Environment Secretariat (NES) which is a department
within the Ministry of Environment and Natural Resources. This Ministry is the arm of Government
that is charged with co-ordinating all matters pertaining to the
environment. The National Environment
Secretariat carries out a co-ordinating role through an Inter-Ministerial
Committee on Environment (IMCE).
Within the IMCE, the sub-committee on
Environmental Economics and Accounting chaired by the Ministry of Planning
and Natural Development was the responsible unit for the development of
ISD. Membership in this sub-committee
includes Government Ministries/Departments, Planning and Statistical
Department, academic and research institutions, NGOs and the private sector.
This sub-committee worked closely with various other sub-committees as the
issue of sustainable development cuts across a wide cross section of
issues. At the regional and
international level, Kenya has considered the option of twinning with another
testing country, and is currently exploring potential partnerships. |
|
South Africa - http://www.un.org/esa/sustdev/indi4za.htm In South Africa, the national co-ordinating mechanism for
testing and implementation was the Sub-Committee on Sustainable
Development. This sub committee is
located within the Committee for Environmental Co-ordination, and is directly
involved in matters concerning sustainable development. The committee consists of government and
provincial level representatives who are actively involved in implementing
sustainable development programmes at the various levels of Government. The Directorate for Sustainable
Development in the Department of Environmental Affairs and Tourism served as
the national focal point for international communication and co-ordination of
the testing process. In February 1997, the Sub Committee on Sustainable
Development agreed to form four (4) task groups for the social, economic,
environmental, and institutional to test the indicators. The task groups comprised of the
participating stakeholders. The
process, therefore, was highly integrated and multi-stakeholder with the
participation of Government Departments, NGOs, the scientific community, as
well as agencies involved with data collection, compilation and analysis have
all been approached to participate in the testing process, and to nominate
representatives on the respective task groups. The co-ordinating mechanism within the South African Government also
assisted the participating stakeholders to become more aware of the CSD
guidelines for testing and implementation by familiarising them with the use
of a questionnaire, data sheet and information sheet. Instructions on how to complete these
sheets were developed in accordance with the testing and implementation
guidelines stipulated by the CSD.
Several information sessions were also held, during which the testing
process was further explained to participants. The process in South Africa, therefore, emphasised awareness
and understanding of the task to be undertaken. These efforts had been geared towards generating the country
report, while creating a strong knowledge base. The
testing and implementation of indicators in South Africa had been twinned to
the indicator work being done in Finland. The twinning approach between both
countries provided each country a greater opportunity to analyse and exchange
information on the relevance of the CSD indicators with respect to the
results of the testing process and lessons learnt. It was agreed that each country would test the indicators
separately, but at the same time exchange information and ideas where possible.
The results of the data collected were discussed in a consultative process
involving workshops and meetings between both countries. The delegates and
experts met three times. It was
envisaged that both countries will submit a final combined report apart from
their separate country reports to the CSD.
|
|
|
Tunisia The Tunisian Government established a twinning
arrangement with the Government of France with the view to encouraging
collaboration between the two countries, and promoting an understanding of the
process of testing and implementation as it is applied in the context of
North/South or developing/developed country relations. The Tunisian Environmental Agency (ANPE)
was the Focal Point for the testing and implementation process. The National Observatory on Environment
and Development (OTED) worked in close collaboration with ANPE and assisted
in co-ordinating the testing and implementation process. |
|
|
Morocco Implementation of
a national indicators programmed in Morocco is underway in cooperation with
the Government of France, under a twinning agreement coordinated by the
French Institute for the Environment (IFEN). |
|
ASIA AND THE PACIFIC
|
China - http://www.un.org/esa/sustdev/indi4cn.htm China’s approach to testing and
implementation of the CSD indicators was one which involved strong governmental
input through inter ministerial co-ordination. Two state-endorsed mechanisms were established: the National
Testing Working Group, which involved governmental bodies such as Ministries,
State Commissions and Agencies; as well as a National Co-ordinating Mechanism
which co-ordinated the operation of the National Testing Working Group. This
particular mechanism is chaired by the National Environmental Protection
Agency (NEPA) and the State Statistics Bureau (SSB). The actual testing and implementation of
indicators was carried out by the Policy Research Centre for Environment and
Economy (PRCEE). The mechanism itself engendered a high level of consultation
and liaison between the two groups by organising various workshops and
seminars, in order to share knowledge gained of the process, and to arrive at
a report that was representative of the bodies involved. |
Philippines - http://www.un.org/esa/sustdev/indi4ph.htm Work on the formulation of sustainable
development indicators in the Philippines started in September 1996. The participation of the Philippines as a
CSD testing country provided impetus to existing efforts at developing a
national core set of indicators. The
coordinating mechanism for the testing institution was the Philippine Council
for Sustainable Development, a pioneering multi-stakeholder body mandated to
coordinate and oversee the implementation of the country’s commitments at the
Rio Summit. The Council established a
Task Force on Indicators of Sustainable Development that served as a policy
advisory body on matters pertaining to the testing and development of SD
indicators. The Task Force built an
early work done by the Technical Working Group on the Integration of
Environment and Socio-Economic Policies which included a publication “A Sourcebook of Sustainable Development
Indicators’. The CSD publication
“Indicators of Sustainable Development: Framework and Methodologies” provided
significant input with the Sourcebook. The Task Force was made up of policy
decision-makers, academicians, representatives of statistical agencies as
well as non-governmental organizations.
Such multistakholder composition enabled the Task Force to tackle the
various practical, technical, and institutional aspects of developing and
adopting a set of indicators of sustainable development. The approach of the Task Force on the
testing exercise was largely an iterative process which included multi-level
consultations, policy fora, seminars and workshops, commissioned expert work
and established consultative bodies such as the committees and sub-committees
under the PCSD. |
|
|
Maldives - http://www.un.org/esa/sustdev/indi4mal.htm The Ministry of Planning, Human Resources
and Environment was responsible for national testing of indicators. The
process was a multi-stakeholder one, in which the Government collaborated
with other ministries and institutions, as well as trade and tourist
associations and related NGOs. |
||
|
Pakistan - http://www.un.org/esa/sustdev/indi4pak.htm The Pakistani Government conducted a case
study of the Northwest Frontier Province (NWFP), in order to establish
Pakistan’s capacity for testing and measurement of the indicators. The case study involved Ministries, NGOs,
individuals, as well as other interested stakeholders. A multi-stakeholder Steering Committee was
proposed to be created under Planning and Development Division of Pakistan,
in order to implement the findings of the case study on a larger scale. |
EUROPE
|
Austria http://www.un.org/esa/sustdev/indi4at.htm#Interim The co-ordinating mechanism for testing in
Austria was the Inter-Ministerial Conference on the Environment. The Federal Environment Agency and
Statistical Office supported this Conference. The Conference also acted jointly with the Austrian Council on
Sustainable Development (ACSD), which consists of relevant stakeholder groups
including NGOs. The ACSD is the
national co-ordinating mechanism for sustainable development. |
Belgium - http://www.un.org/esa/sustdev/indi4be.htm Belgium has a complex federal structure, which
necessitated continuous collaboration and consultation between all levels of
the Belgian Government. Consequently, the Belgian Government designated an
Inter Ministerial Conference on the Environment (ICE) to serve as the testing
mechanism. This Inter Ministerial
Conference also established a working group for testing and implementation of
the indicators. The Working Group
consisted of civil servants from the Belgian
regions: The Flemish Region, the Walloon Region, and Brussels Capital
City Region as well as the Federal Environment Ministries, and a Federal
Planning Bureau (FPB). The process
was primarily intergovernmental. The FPB was the focal point for testing and
implementation. The FPB provided and
assisted the participants with the available information regarding the
process of testing and implementation.
Despite this strong governmental focus, however, inputs from the NGOs
and the scientific community had been highly welcome. |
|
|
Czech Republic http://www.ceu.cz/svis/indik/mainpage.htm The Ministry of Environment (MoE), the
Charles University Environmental Centre, and the Czech Ecological Institute
(CEI) spearheaded the testing process in the Czech Republic. The process of
testing and implementing the SDIs was seen as part of a broader process of
building up a comprehensive national information system on sustainable
development. The Charles University Environmental Centre was the designated
Focal Point and worked in close collaboration with other institutions-
namely, the Czech Statistical Office. An Expert Working Group on
Sustainability indicators was established. However, despite the establishment
of an Expert Working Group, the ISD process remained the domain of experts
from environmental organisations.
|
Finland - http://www.vyh.fi/eng/environ/sustdev/indicat/inds2000.htm The Government of Finland
established the Finnish National Commission on Sustainable Development to be
the primary co-ordinating mechanism for implementation and testing of the
indicators. The national commission
consists of representatives from various ministries, the scientific
community, as well as regional and local authorities. The media, education sector and voluntary
organisations are also members of the Commission. Local authorities and NGOs also participated in the testing and
implementation process. Seminars were
arranged for wider participation and comments. The work was organised by the Ministry of Environment in
collaboration with the Institute for Environment.
The Government of Finland considered co-operation and participation
of key elements in developing and testing the indicators. In light of this, an Inter Ministerial
Network on Developing and Testing Indicators of Sustainable Development (ISD)
was established in October 1996. The CSD indicator testing in Finland was
started in January 1997. A special
data collection sheet was designed for the testing purpose. The Inter Ministerial Network on Developing and
Testing Indicators includes various ministries as well as statistical and
environmental institutions, and works in collaboration with the Government of
South Africa. The Government assessed
and evaluated the progress of indicator testing and development through workshops. Finland was also twinned with South Africa in order to give both
countries access to more information, to share their experiences, and to
provide a comprehensive view of the entire process. A small delegation from Finland visited South Africa to
facilitate the consultative process between the two countries. Finland also establishrf further contact
with other testing countries, especially countries within Europe, such as
Germany and the Czech Republic. |
|
|
France - http://www.ifen.fr/onu/sommaire.htm France participated in a twinning
arrangement with Tunisia; and has initiated co-operation with Morocco. The Ministry of Spatial Planning and
Environment (DGAD/SAI) co-ordinated for testing and implementation of the
indicators. Two working groups carried out the process of testing: a
technical group involving 50 statistical and data experts; and a policy group
with 100 members from the National Commission on Sustainable Development. The process was highly participatory,
involving these two working groups, an inter ministerial group, the
scientific community, and relevant NGOs.
The French Institute for the Environment was designated the focal
point. Their work was co-ordinated by the Ministry of Environment. |
||
|
Germany - http://www.umweltbundesamt.de/uba-info-daten-e/daten-e/csd.htm The national co-ordinating mechanism in Germany
was spearheaded by the Federal Ministry for the Environment,
Nature Conservation and Nuclear Safety. This Ministry functioned as the
national focal point for the testing of the ISDs and was in charge of the
entire political co-ordination of the testing process. The overall organisation of the testing and
implementation of ISDs involved several institutional pillars. Firstly, there was strong co-ordination
within the Federal Government. This involved the establishment of an
Interministerial Working Group (IMA). The Group consists of representatives
from all German Federal Ministries, and was established under the Federal
Environment Ministry. This IMA was very significant, as sustainable
development comprises not only environmental but also economic and social
aspects. The IMA was responsible for the Federal Government's interim report
on the testing phase to the CSD by the end of 1997. The Federal Environmental Agency and the Federal
Statistical Office provided support concerning organisational co-ordination,
data collection and processing as well as methodological questions. A
co-ordination team with representatives from the Federal Environment
Ministry, the Federal Environmental Agency and the Federal Statistical Office
met for regular discussions on conceptual and organisational procedure. A National Indicator Committee was established with more than 20
representatives from all relevant groups. These groups include environmental
and development NGOs, business associations including environmentally
oriented business associations, trade unions, churches, charitable
organisations, scientific advisory boards, the German Bundestag "Enquete
Commission on the Protection of Humanity and the Environment", and the
Federal States and local communities. The Federal Environment Ministry, in agreement with the other
government departments, nominated the members of the National Indicator
Commission. To be able to ensure high-level, expert dialogue, the appointed
representatives were those who had prior experience in the development of indicators
or had been involved in the debate on sustainable development for some time. On the technical side of the implementation of indicators, an Expert
Team of approximately 20 scientists from assorted disciplines was
established. This group was overseen by the Federal Environmental Agency,
with experts already involved in indicator development of various fields.
This team built upon informal meetings of experts which the Federal
Environment Ministry had been holding annually since 1994 for continuous exchange
of information. Its task during the
testing phase of the CSD indicators was, on one hand, to give an opinion on
the range of priority issues and indicators and, on the other hand, to be a
forum for discussing the conceptual and methodological development of
indicators. Detailed discussions of
the CSD concept took place in sub-working groups. |
||
|
United Kingdom - http://www.environment.detr.gov.uk/sustainable/consult/index.htm The CSD indicator exercise in the United Kingdom
was incorporated into an exercise on testing and developing a set of national
sustainable development indicators.
The testing bodies included inter
alia, the United Kingdom Round Table on Sustainable Development, a
British Governmental Panel on Sustainable Development and an Indicators
Working Group. The UK Round Table on Sustainable Development is an
independent body comprising senior representatives of non-governmental
organisations, businesses and local authorities, to advise Government on
policies to achieve sustainable development. The Indicators Working Group
comprises representatives of central government departments, local
authorities, regulatory agencies, non-governmental organisations and technical
and scientific experts. Their primary function is to advise on the
development of the next set of national indicators. The process was highly participatory- involving
multi-stakeholder interest – including NGOs and local authorities. The
British Government proposed to establish a Sustainable Development Commission
in 2000 to monitor and assess the indicator process. In the United Kingdom, there were already a number
of mechanisms in place through which the Government consults or receives advice
on sustainable development and on sustainable development indicators. Rather than set up additional mechanisms
for further consultation, Britain used and continues to use existing bodies
such as the Indicator Working Group, the UK Round Table on Sustainable
Development, and the Environmental Statistics Advisory Group (ESAG) and the
Central and Local Intelligence Partnership (CLIP). |
||
Switzerland - http://www.statistique.admin.ch/stat_ch/ber02/dev_dur_e_files/indicators.htm
Switzerland is an unofficial testing country which
has effectively participated in and submitted reports on the CSD testing
programme. |
||
THE AMERICAS AND CARIBBEAN
|
Barbados - http://www.un.org/esa/sustdev/indi4bb.htm For the Government of Barbados, a Steering
Committee on Indicators for Sustainable Development was established to carry
out the testing under the National Commission on Sustainable Development
(NCSD). The Environment Division of
the Ministry of Health and Environment co-ordinated the work of the NCSD. The
NCSD was established in order to advise Government, foster collaboration and
dialogue between stakeholders as well as develop policy recommendations and a
plan for sustainable development. It is the advisory body on sustainable
development issues in Barbados. |
Brazil - http://www.un.org/esa/sustdev/indi4br.htm
In Brazil, the Ministry of Environment served as
the focal point for testing and implementation of the indicators, and also
served to link the Federal and State agencies. The Brazilian Government also created an Inter Ministerial
Commission for Sustainable Development (CIDES) in 1994, which coordinates the
implementation of Agenda 21 activities.
The Minister of Planning co-ordinates CIDES, which integrated other
State Ministries into its framework. The testing of Sustainable Development Indicators
was undertaken by networking state level agencies through the National
Environmental System (SISNAMA). The central question in organising network co-operation
for the testing and implementation of ISDs was the exchange of experiences
between the State Agencies. In
Brazil, each State has the autonomy to organise and implement its own
environmental data inventory, therefore, an inventory of the available data
and the methodologies of primary data generation became necessary before the start
up of the testing process. |
|
|
Bolivia - http://www.un.org/esa/sustdev/indi4bo.htm The participation of the Bolivian Government
in the testing has led to a project creating a National System of Information
for Development (SNID). Moreover, the
strategic thrust of the new National Plan of Social and Economic Development
include sustainable development. |
||
|
Mexico - http://www.ine.gob.mx/indicadores/ingles/portada.htm The Ministry
of the Environment, Natural Resources and Fisheries (SEMARNAP) is the public
institution in charge of environmental affairs in Mexico. The National
Institute of Ecology (INE), is a decentralised organisation of the SEMARNAP.
The INE oversees policy-making decisions for air quality, solid and hazardous
waste management, environmental impact assessment, global climate change,
ozone depletion, wildlife management and natural reserves. The INES’s
objectives are to create environmental policy guidelines, formulate standards
and issue environmental permits. As part of the
INE’s objectives, the development of environmental indicators was carried out
by the General Directorate of Environmental Management and Information in
order to evaluate Mexico’s environmental policy performance and achieve
sustainable development. |
||
|
Venezuela - http://www.un.org/esa/sustdev/indi4ve.htm In 1994,
Venezuela established an Environmental Statistics and Information Centre,
within the Directorate of Environmental Information of the Ministry of the
Environment and Natural Renewable Resources. This was the first stage in the
development of an environmental statistics programme, and the initial stages
of a co-ordinating mechanism for implementation and testing of ISDs. The
Centre has produced Venezuela's first State of the Environment Report, which was
released in 1995, and a condensed English version was published in 1996 |
||
|
United States – http://www.sdi.gov In the United
States, a Presidential Council on Sustainable Development (PSCD) has been
established in response to Agenda 21.
A Sustainable Development Indicator Group was also established in
order to further develop national indicators for sustainable
development. The US is not an
official testing country. |
|
Costa Rica - http://www.mideplan.go.cr/ The Government of
Costa Rica, through the Ministry of National Planning (MIDEPLAN), promoted
two capacity-building initiatives for sustainable development, with
implications for the implementation of indicators of sustainable
development. First, the organization
of a National System for Sustainable Development (SINADES), and second, the
creation and consolidation of a National System of Indicators of Sustainable
Development, known as SIDES (Sistema de Indicadores sobre Desarrollo
Sostenible). These initiatives led to
the consolidation of a large database, which includes economic, social and
environmental data. SINADES serves as a mechanism to articulate strategies,
policies and actions within the Costa Rican public sector, oriented to the
promotion of sustainable development, lead by MIDEPLAN. The SINADES initiative was supported by
the Inter‑American Development Bank (IDB) as a technical cooperation
project. The project included two main
activities that have contributed to create capacities for the implementation
and use of indicators of sustainable development. The first is training, oriented to promote changes in
attitudes, through workshops, courses and conferences focusing on sustainable
development topics, including ISDs.
The second is institutional strengthening, which includes activities
related to: (a) the definition of
operational procedures and legal instruments to institutionalize
SINADES; (b) the creation of a networking mechanism, to facilitate exchange of information and promote
interaction; (c) the development of
indicators of sustainable development and the definition and consolidation of
institutional arrangements for their implementation; and (d) the consolidation
of a National Geo‑Computing.
Finally, an Observatory of Sustainable Development was created at the
University of Costa Rica, which is now responsible for the testing of CSD
indicators of sustainable development |
[1] Statistical Office Of The European Communities, Measuring Progress Towards A More Sustainable Europe, April 2001.
[2] United Nations Division for Sustainable Development, Report on the Aggregation of Indicators for Sustainable Development: Background Paper No. 2, CSD9 April 2001.
[3] United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Work Programme on Indicators of Sustainable Development of the Commission on Sustainable Development, Division for Sustainable Development, April 1999.
[4] United Nations, Indicators of Sustainable Development: Framework and Methodologies, New York, 1996.
[5] Austria, Barbados, Belgium, Bolivia, Brazil, China, Costa Rica, Czech Republic, Finland, France, Germany, Ghana, Kenya, Maldives, Mexico, Morocco, Pakistan, Philippines, South Africa, Tunisia, United Kingdom, and Venezuela.
[6] See United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, CSD Work Programme on Indicators of Sustainable Development Progress Report, Background Paper No. 7, Commission on Sustainable Development, Seventh Session, New York, 19-30 April 1999; and United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Fifth International Workshop on CSD Indicators of Sustainable Development, Division for Sustainable Development, Hosted by the Government of Barbados and sponsored by the Government of Germany, Bridgetown, Barbados, 7-9 December 1999.
[7] United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Report: Fifth Expert Group Meeting on Indicators of Sustainable Development, Division for Sustainable Development, New York, 7-8 April 1999.
[8] United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, UN CSD Theme Framework and Indicators of Sustainability, Final Draft, PriceWaterhouseCoopers for Division for Sustainable Development, November 18, 1999.
[9] United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Fifth International Workshop on CSD Indicators of Sustainable Development.
[10] United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Report of the Consultative Group to Identify Themes and Core Indicators of Sustainable Development, Division for Sustainable Development, New York, 6-9 March, 2000.
[11] United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, UN CSD Theme Framework and Indicators of Sustainability.
[12] United Nations Environment Programme, GEO-2000: UNEP’s Millennium Report on the Environment, Earthscan Publications, 1999.
[13] United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Report of the Consultative Group to Identify Themes and Core Indicators of Sustainable Development.
[14] Adapted from: United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Testing the CSD Indicators of Sustainable Development: Interim Analysis: Testing Process, Indicators and Methodology Sheets, Technical Paper prepared by the Division for Sustainable Development, 25 January 1999; and United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, UN CSD Theme Framework and Indicators of Sustainability, Final Draft, PriceWaterhouseCoopers for Division for Sustainable Development, November 18, 1999
[15] The Agenda 21 context is also provided in the description of themes and sub-themes following.
[16] Adapted from: United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Testing the CSD Indicators of Sustainable Development; and United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, UN CSD Theme Framework and Indicators of Sustainability
[17] United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Report of the Consultative Group to Identify Themes and Core Indicators of Sustainable Development.
[18] United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Work Programme on Indicators of Sustainable Development.
[19] The need for better institutional indicators is addressed in Spangenberg, Joachim H., Pfahl, Stefanie, and Deller, Kerstin, Elaboration of Institutional Indicators for Sustainable Development, E. Schmidt Publications, Berlin, Germany, 2001 (in press).
[20] United Nations, Agenda 21: Programme of Action for Sustainable Development, United Nations Conference on Environment and Development, Chapters 3, 4, 24, 25, and 26, Rio de Janeiro, Brazil, 3-14 June 1992.
[21] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Combating Poverty, Report of the Secretary General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Fourth Session, 18 April-3 May 1996.
[22] United Nations, Report of the World Summit for Social Development, Copenhagen, Denmark, 6-12 March, 1995.
[23] United Nations Development Programme, Human Development Report 1999, Oxford University Press, New York, 1999.
[24] World Bank Group, Poverty Trends and Voices of the Poor, http://www.worldbank.org/poverty/ data/trends.
[25] Rosati, Dariusz, Managing Globalization with Equity, in United Nations First Global Forum on Human Development, New York, 29-31 July, 1999.
[26] World Bank Group, World Bank Warns Global Poverty Fight Failing, Unveils Enhanced Poverty Strategy, News Release No. 2000/059/S, http://www.worldbank.org/html/extdr/extme/059.htm.
[27] United Nations, Agenda 21, Chapter 6.
[28] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Overall Progress Achieved since the United Nations Conference on Environment and Development: Protecting and Promoting Human Health, Addendum Report of the Secretary General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Fifth Session, 7-25 April 1997.
[29] United Nations, Earth Summit +5: Programme for the Further Implementation of Agenda 21, June 1997.
[30] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Progress Made in Providing Safe Water Supply and Sanitation for All During the 1990s, Report of the Secretary General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Eighth Session, 24 April-5 May, 2000.
[31] Ibid.
[32] Ibid.
[33] UNAIDS, Report on the Global HIV/AIDS Epidemic, http://www.unaids.org/epidemic_update/report/ index.html, June 2000.
[34] See the World Summit for Children, the World Summit on Social Development, the Fourth World Conference on Women, the World Food Summit, the International Conference on Population and Development, and Agenda 21 of the Earth Summit.
[35] United Nations, Agenda 21, Chapter 36.
[36] The work programme was initiated at the Fourth Session of CSD in 1996, and adopted as an expanded version at its Sixth Session in 1998.
[37] United Nations Development Programme, Human Development Report 2000, http://www.undp.org /hdr2000.
[38] United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization, Education, Public Awareness and Training, Addendum, Report of the Secretary General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Sixth Session, 20 April-1 May, 1998.
[39] United Nations Children’s Fund (UNICEF), The Progress of Nations, New York, 1999.
[40] United Nations, The Convention on the Rights of the Child, 1989; United Nations, World Summit for Children, New York, 1990; United Nations Interagency Commission (UNDP, UNESCO, UNICEF, World Bank), Final Report of the World Conference on Education for All: Meeting Basic Learning Needs, Jomtien, Thailand, 5-9 March, 1990; United Nations, Report of the World Summit on Social Development; United Nations, Fourth World Conference on Women, Beijing, 1995.
[41] See http://www.unicef.org/wsc/goals.htm.
[42] For example, the International Consultative Forum on Education for All (EFA) reported in: United Nations Commission on Sustainable Development, Progress Report on the Implementation of the Work Programme on Education, Public Awareness and Training, Report of the Secretary-General, Eighth Session, 24 April-5 May, 2000.
[43] United Nations, Agenda 21, Chapter 7; and United Nations, Second International Conference on Human Settlements (Habitat II), Istanbul, Turkey, June 1996.
[44] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Assessment of Progress Achieved in Promoting Sustainable Human Settlement Development, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Second Session, 16-27 May, 1994.
[45] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Promoting Sustainable Human Settlement Development, Addendum, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Fifth Session, 7-25 April, 1997.
[46]
United Nations, Earth Summit +5.
[47] See http://www.urbanobservatory.org/indicators; and United Nations Development Group, Guidelines: Common Country Assessment (CCA), Sub-group on Programme Policies, Draft, 26 February, 1999.
[48] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Technical Cooperation, Including Resource Mobilization, and Coordination of Activities, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission on Crime Prevention and Criminal Justice, Sixth Session, Vienna, 28 April-9 May 1997.
[49] United Nations, Report of the World Summit for Social Development; and United Nations, Second International Conference on Human Settlements.
[50] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Technical Cooperation, Including Resource Mobilization, and Coordination of Activities.
[51] United Nations, The State of Crime and Criminal Justice Worldwide, Report of the Secretary-General, Tenth United Nations Congress on the Prevention of Crime and the Treatment of Offenders, Vienna, 10-17 April 2000.
[52] Ibid.
[53] United Nations Development Group, Guidelines: Common Country Assessment (CCA).
[54] United Nations, Agenda 21, Chapter 5.
[55] United Nations, Report of the International Conference on Population and Development, Cairo, 5-13 September, 1994.
[56] United Nations Development Programme, Human Development Report 2000.
[57] United Nations Department of Economics and Social Affairs, Revision of the World Population Estimates and Projections, Population Division, http://www.popin.org/.
[58] United Nations Department of Economics and Social Affairs, World Urbanization Prospects: The 1999 Revision: Key Findings, Population Division, http://www.popin/wdtrends/urbanization.
[59]
United Nations, Agenda 21, Chapter 9.
[60] United Nations, Earth Summit +5.
[61] United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change, Kyoto Protocol to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change, December 1997.
[62] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Protection of the Atmosphere, Addendum, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Fourth Session, 18 April-3 May, 1996.
[63] European Environment Agency, Environmental Signals 2000, Environmental Assessment Report No. 6, 2000.
[64] United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, UN CSD Theme Framework and Indicators of Sustainability.
[65] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Integrated Planning and Management of Land Resources, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Eighth Session, 24 April-5 May, 2000.
[66]
United Nations, Agenda 21, Chapter 10.
[67] United Nations Commission on Sustainable Development, Report of the Eighth Session, Economic and Social Council, Official Records 2000, Supplement No. 9, 30 April 1999 and 24 April-5 May, 2000.
[68] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Sustainable Agriculture and Rural Development, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Eighth Session, 24 April-5 May, 2000.
[69] Ibid.
[70] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Integrated Planning and Management of Land Resources: Combating Desertification and Drought, Addendum, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Eighth Session, 24 April-5 May, 2000.
[71] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Integrated Planning and Management of Land Resources.
[72] Ibid.
[73] Food and Agriculture Organization, The Coming Livestock Revolution, Background Paper No. 6, Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Commission on Sustainable Development, Eighth Session, 24 April-5 May, 2000.
[74] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Sustainable Agriculture and Rural Development: Urbanization and Sustainable Agricultural Development, Addendum, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Eighth Session, 24 April-5 May, 2000.
[75] See Annex 1.
[76] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Oceans and Seas, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Seventh Session, 19-30 April, 1999.
[77] The estimate is based on calculations by Andrew Mellinger, et.al., Harvard University, Boston, Mass., 1997 and by Joel E. Cohen and Christopher Small, Columbia University, New York city, USA.
[78] United Nations, Agenda 21, Chapter 17.
[79] Ibid.
[80] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Protection of the Ocean, all Kinds of Seas, including Enclosed and Semi-enclosed Seas, and Coastal Areas and the Protection, Rational Use and Development of Their Living Resources, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Fourth Session, 18 April-3 May, 1996.
[81] Including the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships; International Convention on Oil Pollution Preparedness, Response and Cooperation; and Convention on the Prevention of Marine Pollution by Dumping of Wastes and Other Matter.
[82] Ibid.
[83]
United Nations Environment Programme, GEO-2000.
[84] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Comprehensive Assessment of the Freshwater Resources of the World, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Fifth Session, 7-25 April, 1997.
[85] United Nations Environment Programme, GEO-2000.
[86] United Nations, Agenda 21, Chapter 18.
[87] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Strategic Approaches to Freshwater Management, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Sixth Session, 20 April-1 May, 1998.
[88] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Implementation of the Convention on Biological Diversity, Preparations for the Special Session of the General Assembly for the Purpose of an Overall Review and Appraisal of the Implementation of Agenda 21, Note by the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Fifth Session, 7-25 April, 1997.
[89] United Nations Environment Programme, GEO-2000.
[90] Ibid.
[91] United Nations, Agenda 21, Chapter 15; and United Nations, Convention on Biological Diversity, 1992.
[92] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Integrated Planning and Management of Land Resources: Conservation of Biological Diversity, Addendum, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Eighth Session, 24 April-5 May, 2000.
[93] See United Nations Environment Programme, Development of Indicators of Biological Diversity, Subsidiary Body on Scientific, Technical and Technological Advice, Fifth Meeting, Montreal, 31 January-4 February, 2000, http://www.biodiv.org/doc/sbstta-5.htm.
[94] United Nations, Agenda 21, Chapters 2 and 33.
[95] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Financial Resources and Mechanisms, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Eighth Session, 24 April-5 May, 2000.
[96]
United Nations Development Programme, Human Development Report 2000.
[97] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Economic Growth, Trade and Investment, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Eighth Session, 24 April-5 May, 2000.
[98] United Nations Development Programme, Human Development Report 2000.
[99] United Nations, Earth Summit +5.
[100]
United Nations, Agenda 21, Chapter 4.
[101] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Comprehensive Review of Changing Consumption and Production Patterns, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Seventh Session, 19-30 April, 1999.
[102]
United Nations Development Programme, Human Development Report 2000.
[103] United Nations, Earth Summit +5.
[104] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Comprehensive Review of Changing Consumption and Production Patterns.
[105]
United
Nations Economic and Social Council, Overall Progress Achieved since the United
Nations Conference on Environment and Development: Environmentally Sound
Management of Solid Wastes and Sewage-Related Issues, Addendum, Report of the
Secretary General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Fifth Session, 7-25
April 1997.
[106] United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs, Measuring Changes in Consumption and Production Patterns: A Set of Indicators, Population Division, New York, 1998.
[107] United Nations, Agenda 21.Chapter 8.
[108] United Nations Commission on Sustainable Development, Assessment of Progress in the Implementation of Agenda 21 at the National Level, Report of the Secretary-General, Fifth Session, 7-25 April, 1997.
[109] United Nations, Agenda 21.Chapter 34.
[110] United Nations Economic and Social Council, Overall Progress Achieved since the United Nations Conference on Environment and Development, Report of the Secretary-General, Commission on Sustainable Development, Fifth Session, 7-25 April, 1997.
[111] Ibid.
[112] All World Wide Web references were consulted during the period August 21 to September 20, 2000.
[113] ISDs- Indicators of Sustainable
Development